RDN 307 - Rev. 60 CFM56 5B

Goodrich Aerostructures
850 Lagoon Drive

Chula Vista, California 91910-2098
Mar 15/19
SUBJECT: CFM56-5B, Nacelle Structural Repair Manual,

Document Part No. RDN 307, Revision No. 60, Dated Mar 15/19
The subject manual is a complete reissue.
Questions concerning printing and distribution should be directed to

Goodrich Aerostructures, Aftermarket Technical Services at
techpubs@goodrich.com
Questions or comments concerning the publication, register and log on to

our web portal at www.customers.utcaerospacesystems.com.
This U.S. export control marking Printed in the U.S.A.
supersedes
Rohr, Inc.,any other U.S. export control
Rohr, Inc., operating as Goodrich Aerostructures
a subsidiary of Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-
marking on this document. tained in the title page section of the manual.
U. S Export Classification: EAR 9E991
U.S. Export Classification: EAR 9E991
ROHR, INC.
Document Part No. RDN 307
HIGHLIGHTS
TO: CFM56-5B NACELLE STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL DISTRIBUTION
CONCERNING: Revision No. 60, Dated Mar 15/19

MANUAL UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS
This is a complete reissue of the manual. Discard the old manual upon receipt
of this reissued manual.
Chapter/Section/Subject Page Description of Change

54-01-01 Damage Cleanup Updated Damage Cleanup
Instructions
(CV15-1909)
54-10-00 Allowable Damage Updated Allowable Damages
and Define Zones
(CV15-1909)
54-10-00 Repair No. 30 Added New Repair
(CV15-1906)
54-30-00 Allowable Damage Changed Reference 54-21-00
to 54-02-07
(CV18-04678)
54-02-04 General Repair Changed the Chapter/Section
footer to 54-02-04
(CV19-02044)
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other ofU.S.
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation
marking on this document.

contained in the title page section of the manual.
ROHR, INC.
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any other U.S. export controlRohr, Inc., operating as Goodrich Aerostructures
Rohr, Inc., a subsidiary of Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-
ROHR, INC.
NACELLE
STRUCTURAL
REPAIR MANUAL
CFM56-5B
Document Part Number
THE CONTENTS OF THIS STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL HAVE

BEEN APPROVED UNDER EUROPEAN AVIATION SAFETY AGENCY
(EASA) DESIGN ORGANIZATION APPROVAL NO. EASA.21J.031.
TRANSMITTAL OF TECHNICAL DATA (EAR)

THESE COMMODITIES, TECHNOLOGY, OR SOFTWARE ARE CONTROLLED BY THE U.S. EXPORT
ADMINISTRATION REGULATIONS (EAR). DIVERSION CONTRARY TO U.S. LAW IS PROHIBITED.
ECCN: 9E991
Goodrich Aerostructures Proprietary Information
The information contained in this document is Goodrich proprietary information and is disclosed in confidence. It is the property of Goodrich and shall not
be used, disclosed to others or reproduced without the express written consent of Goodrich, including, but without limitation, it is not to be used in the
creation, manufacture, development, or derivation of any repairs, modifications, spare parts, design, or configuration changes or to obtain FAA or any
other government or regulatory approval to do so. If consent is given for reproduction in whole or in part, this notice and the notice set forth on each page
of this document shall appear in any such reproduction in whole or in part. The information contained in this document may also be controlled by the U.S.
export control laws. Unauthorized export or re-export is prohibited.
Copyright License:
Customer is authorized to copy these materials for its own use only, provided that all copyright notices, proprietary legends, confidential markings, and
other restrictive notices appearing on the original materials are preserved on all such copies.
Caution Regarding Use of Materials:

It is customer’s sole responsibility to ascertain and ensure that all materials are current and appropriate for the use to which they are put and Goodrich
assumes no responsibility whatsoever in that regard. Customer agrees to indemnify and save harmless Goodrich against all claims and liability of
whatever nature, including those of third parties (including contractors and vendors to customer) where and by whomsoever brought, resulting from
customer’s use of materials or other information, consultation, assistance, or training furnished or any other performance in connection with this
agreement by Goodrich or from the manufacture, sale, delivery, resale of any product by customer. In no event shall Goodrich be liable for any special,
incidental, indirect or consequential or punitive damages.
CFM56-5B INITIAL ISSUE: Feb 1/94

REVISED: Mar 15/19
54-
This U.S. export control marking
Printed in the U.S.A.
supersedes any other U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B INITIAL ISSUE: Feb 1/94

REVISED: Mar 15/19
This U.S. export control marking

54-
Printed in the U.S.A.
supersedes any other U.S. export control Rohr, Inc., operating as Goodrich Aerostructures

tained in the title page section of the manual.
ROHR, INC.
RECORD OF REVISIONS
REV. DATE DATE

NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY
REV. DATE DATE 40 Jan 15/10
NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY 41 Jul 15/10
Initial Feb 1/94 42 Jan 15/11
1 May 1/94 43 Jul 15/11
2 Aug 1/94 44 Jan 15/12
3 Nov 1/94 45 Jul 15/12
4 Feb 1/95 46 Jan 15/13
5 Nov 1/95 47 Jul 15/13
6 Feb 1/96 48 Jan 15/14
7 May 1/96 49 Jul 15/14
8 Nov 1/96 50 Jan 15/15
9 Feb 1/97 51 Jul 15/15
10 May 1/97 52 Jan 15/16
11 Aug 1/97 53 Jul 15/16
12 Nov 1/97 54 Mar 15/17
13 Feb 1/98 55 Feb 09/18
14 May 1/98 56 Mar 15/18
15 Nov 1/98 57 Jun 25/18
16 Feb 1/99 58 Sep 30/18
17 May 1/99 59 Dec 15/18
18 Nov 1/99 60 Mar 15/19
19 Feb 1/00
20 May 1/00
21 Aug 1/00
22 Nov 1/00
23 Feb 1/01
24 Aug 1/01
25 Feb 1/02
26 Jul 15/02
27 Jan 15/03
28 Jul 15/03
29 Jan 15/04
30 Jan 15/05
31 Jul 15/05
32 Jan 15/06
33 Jul 15/06
34 Jan 15/07
35 Jul 15/07
36 Jan 15/08
37 Jul 15/08
38 Jan 15/09
39 Jul 15/09
Approved under EASA Design Organization Approval No. EASA.21J.031
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any other of U.S. export control

Rohr, Inc., a subsidiary Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any other ofU.S. export control


ROHR, INC.
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
TEMPORARY DATE DATE REV. DATE DATE

REV. NO. ISSUED INSERTED BY NO. REMOVED BY INCORP.
54-01 Nov 19/01 Feb 1/02
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes anya subsidiary

other U.S. export control
Rohr, Inc., of Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation
marking on this document. contained in the title page section of the manual.
ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SERVICE BULLETIN LIST
DATE BULLETIN
SERVICE BULLETIN NUMBER REVISION NUMBER INCORPORATED INTO MANUAL
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 2
Mar 15/19
Rohr, Inc., other U.S. export
of Goodrich control
Corporation,
operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation
ROHR, INC.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
CHAPTER/
CHAPTER/ SECTION PAGE DATE
SECTION PAGE DATE 11 Mar 15/19
Title Page Mar 15/19 12 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19
Record of 1 Mar 15/19 14 Mar 15/19
Revisions 2 Mar 15/19 15 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19
Record of 1 Mar 15/19 17 Mar 15/19
Temporary 2 Mar 15/19 18 Mar 15/19
Revisions 19 Mar 15/19
20 Mar 15/19
Service 1 Mar 15/19
Bulletin 2 Mar 15/19 54-00-01 1 Mar 15/19
List Drying of 2 Mar 15/19
Thermosetting 3 Mar 15/19
List of 1 Mar 15/19 Composite 4 Mar 15/19
Effective 2 Mar 15/19 Materials 5 Mar 15/19
Pages 3 Mar 15/19 6 Mar 15/19
4 Mar 15/19 7 Mar 15/19
5 Mar 15/19 8 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19 9 Mar 15/19
7 Mar 15/19 10 Mar 15/19
8 Mar 15/19 11 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19 12 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19 13 Mar 15/19
11 Mar 15/19 14 Mar 15/19
12 Mar 15/19 15 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19 16 Mar 15/19
14 Mar 15/19 17 Mar 15/19
15 Mar 15/19 18 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19 19 Mar 15/19
20 Mar 15/19
Table of 1 Mar 15/19 21 Mar 15/19
Contents 2 Mar 15/19 22 Mar 15/19
3 Mar 15/19
4 Mar 15/19 54-01-00 1 Mar 15/19
Damage 2 Mar 15/19
54-00-00 1 Mar 15/19 Investigation 3 Mar 15/19
General 2 Mar 15/19 4 Mar 15/19
3 Mar 15/19 5 Mar 15/19
4 Mar 15/19 6 Mar 15/19
5 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19 54-01-01 1 Mar 15/19
7 Mar 15/19 Damage 2 Mar 15/19
8 Mar 15/19 Cleanup 3 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19 4 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
SECTION PAGE DATE SECTION PAGE DATE
54-02-00 1 Mar 15/19 17 Mar 15/19
Repair 3 Mar 15/19 19 Mar 15/19
Procedures 4 Mar 15/19 20 Mar 15/19
5 Mar 15/19 21 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19 22 Mar 15/19
7 Mar 15/19 23 Mar 15/19
8 Mar 15/19 24 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19 25 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19 26 Mar 15/19
11 Mar 15/19 27 Mar 15/19
12 Mar 15/19 28 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19 29 Mar 15/19
14 Mar 15/19 30 Mar 15/19
15 Mar 15/19 31 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19 32 Mar 15/19
17 Mar 15/19 33 Mar 15/19
18 Mar 15/19 34 Mar 15/19
19 Mar 15/19 35 Mar 15/19
20 Mar 15/19 36 Mar 15/19
37 Mar 15/19
54-02-01 1 Mar 15/19 38 Mar 15/19
Repair 3 Mar 15/19 40 Mar 15/19
4 Mar 15/19 41 Mar 15/19
42 Mar 15/19
54-02-02 1 Mar 15/19 43 Mar 15/19
Repair 45 Mar 15/19
46 Mar 15/19
54-02-03 1 Mar 15/19 47 Mar 15/19
Repair 3 Mar 15/19 49 Mar 15/19
4 Mar 15/19 50 Mar 15/19
5 Mar 15/19 51 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19 52 Mar 15/19
7 Mar 15/19 53 Mar 15/19
8 Mar 15/19 54 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19 55 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19 56 Mar 15/19
11 Mar 15/19 57 Mar 15/19
12 Mar 15/19 58 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19 59 Mar 15/19
14 Mar 15/19 60 Mar 15/19
15 Mar 15/19 61 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19 62 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 2
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
63 Mar 15/19 Repair 3 Mar 15/19
64 Mar 15/19 4 Mar 15/19
65 Mar 15/19 5 Mar 15/19
66 Mar 15/19 6 Mar 15/19
67 Mar 15/19 7 Mar 15/19
68 Mar 15/19 8 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19
54-02-04 1 Mar 15/19 10 Mar 15/19
Repair 3 Mar 15/19 12 Mar 15/19
4 Mar 15/19
5 Mar 15/19 54-10-00 1 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19 Inlet Cowl 2 Mar 15/19
7 Mar 15/19 Structural 3 Mar 15/19
8 Mar 15/19 Identification 4 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19 5 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19 6 Mar 15/19
11 Mar 15/19 7 Mar 15/19
12 Mar 15/19 8 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19 9 Mar 15/19
14 Mar 15/19 10 Mar 15/19
15 Mar 15/19 11 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19 12 Mar 15/19
17 Mar 15/19 13 Mar 15/19
18 Mar 15/19 14 Mar 15/19
19 Mar 15/19 15 Mar 15/19
20 Mar 15/19 16 Mar 15/19
21 Mar 15/19 17 Mar 15/19
22 Mar 15/19 18 Mar 15/19
23 Mar 15/19 19 Mar 15/19
24 Mar 15/19 20 Mar 15/19
25 Mar 15/19 21 Mar 15/19
26 Mar 15/19 22 Mar 15/19
27 Mar 15/19 23 Mar 15/19
28 Mar 15/19 24 Mar 15/19
25 Mar 15/19
54-02-05 1 Mar 15/19 26 Mar 15/19
Repair 28 Mar 15/19
29 Mar 15/19
54-02-06 1 Mar 15/19 30 Mar 15/19
Repair 32 Mar 15/19
33 Mar 15/19
54-02-07 1 Mar 15/19 34 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
36 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 1 201 Mar 15/19
37 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
38 Mar 15/19
39 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 2 201 Mar 15/19
40 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
41 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
42 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
43 Mar 15/19
44 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 3 201 Mar 15/19
45 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
46 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
47 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
48 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
49 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
50 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
51 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
52 Mar 15/19
53 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 4 201 Mar 15/19
54 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
55 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
56 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
57 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
58 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
59 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
60 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19
54-10-00 101 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
Inlet Cowl 102 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
Allowable 103 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
Damage 104 Mar 15/19
105 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 5 201 Mar 15/19
106 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
107 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
108 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
109 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
110 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
111 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
112 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
54-10-00 Repair No. 6 201 Mar 15/19

Inlet Cowl 202 Mar 15/19
Repairs 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19
Repair Index 201 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 4
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
208 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 7 201 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 14 201 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 8 201 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 9 201 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 216 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 217 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 15 201 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 11 201 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 12 201 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 16 201 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 13 201 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 5
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
210 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 17 201 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 216 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 217 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 218 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 219 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 220 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 221 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 222 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 223 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 224 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 20 201 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 18 201 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 21 201 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 22 201 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 19 201 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 23 201 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 6
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
203 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 24 201 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 25 201 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 28 201 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 29 201 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
219 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
220 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 26 201 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 30 201 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 54-20-00 1 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 Fan Cowl 2 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 Structural 3 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 Identification 4 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 5 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 27 201 Mar 15/19 7 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 8 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 7
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
9 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19 54-20-00 101 Mar 15/19
11 Mar 15/19 Fan Cowl 102 Mar 15/19
12 Mar 15/19 Allowable 103 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19 Damage 104 Mar 15/19
14 Mar 15/19 105 Mar 15/19
15 Mar 15/19 106 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19 107 Mar 15/19
17 Mar 15/19 108 Mar 15/19
18 Mar 15/19 109 Mar 15/19
19 Mar 15/19 110 Mar 15/19
20 Mar 15/19 111 Mar 15/19
21 Mar 15/19 112 Mar 15/19
22 Mar 15/19
23 Mar 15/19 54-20-00
24 Mar 15/19 Fan Cowl
25 Mar 15/19 Repairs
26 Mar 15/19
27 Mar 15/19 Repair Index 201 Mar 15/19
28 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
29 Mar 15/19
30 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 1 201 Mar 15/19
31 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
32 Mar 15/19
33 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 2 201 Mar 15/19
34 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
35 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
36 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
37 Mar 15/19
38 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 3 201 Mar 15/19
39 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
40 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
41 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
42 Mar 15/19
43 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 6 201 Mar 15/19
44 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
45 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
46 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
47 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
48 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
49 Mar 15/19
50 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 7 201 Mar 15/19
51 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
52 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
53 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
54 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 8
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
206 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 11 201 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 8 201 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 216 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 217 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 218 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 219 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 220 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 221 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 222 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 223 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 224 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 225 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 226 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 9 201 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 10 201 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 9
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
215 Mar 15/19 33 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 34 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 35 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 36 Mar 15/19
219 Mar 15/19 37 Mar 15/19
220 Mar 15/19 38 Mar 15/19
39 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 13 201 Mar 15/19 40 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 41 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 42 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 43 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 44 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 45 Mar 15/19
46 Mar 15/19
54-30-00 1 Mar 15/19 47 Mar 15/19
Thrust 2 Mar 15/19 48 Mar 15/19
Reverser 3 Mar 15/19 49 Mar 15/19
Structural 4 Mar 15/19 50 Mar 15/19
Identification 5 Mar 15/19 51 Mar 15/19
6 Mar 15/19 52 Mar 15/19
7 Mar 15/19 53 Mar 15/19
8 Mar 15/19 54 Mar 15/19
9 Mar 15/19 55 Mar 15/19
10 Mar 15/19 56 Mar 15/19
11 Mar 15/19 57 Mar 15/19
12 Mar 15/19 58 Mar 15/19
13 Mar 15/19 59 Mar 15/19
14 Mar 15/19 60 Mar 15/19
15 Mar 15/19
16 Mar 15/19 54-30-00 101 Mar 15/19
17 Mar 15/19 Thrust 102 Mar 15/19
18 Mar 15/19 Reverser 103 Mar 15/19
19 Mar 15/19 Allowable 104 Mar 15/19
20 Mar 15/19 Damage 105 Mar 15/19
21 Mar 15/19 106 Mar 15/19
22 Mar 15/19 107 Mar 15/19
23 Mar 15/19 108 Mar 15/19
24 Mar 15/19 109 Mar 15/19
25 Mar 15/19 110 Mar 15/19
26 Mar 15/19 111 Mar 15/19
27 Mar 15/19 112 Mar 15/19
28 Mar 15/19 113 Mar 15/19
29 Mar 15/19 114 Mar 15/19
30 Mar 15/19 115 Mar 15/19
31 Mar 15/19 116 Mar 15/19
32 Mar 15/19 117 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 10
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
118 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
119 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
120 Mar 15/19
121 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 3 201 Mar 15/19
122 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
123 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
124 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
125 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
126 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
127 Mar 15/19
128 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 4 201 Mar 15/19
129 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
130 Mar 15/19
131 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 5 201 Mar 15/19
132 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
133 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
134 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
135 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
136 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
137 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
138 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
139 Mar 15/19
140 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 6 201 Mar 15/19
141 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
142 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
143 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
144 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19
54-30-00 207 Mar 15/19
Thrust 208 Mar 15/19
Reverser 209 Mar 15/19
Repairs 210 Mar 15/19
Repair Index 201 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 1 201 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 7 201 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 2 201 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 11
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
212 Mar 15/19 225 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 226 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 227 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 228 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 229 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 230 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 231 Mar 15/19
219 Mar 15/19 232 Mar 15/19
220 Mar 15/19 233 Mar 15/19
221 Mar 15/19 234 Blank
222 Mar 15/19
223 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 9 201 Mar 15/19
224 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
225 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
226 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
227 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
228 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
229 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
230 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
231 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
232 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 8 201 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 10 201 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
219 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
220 Mar 15/19 216 Mar 15/19
221 Mar 15/19
222 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 11 201 Mar 15/19
223 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
224 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 12
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
204 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 15 201 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 13 201 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 16 201 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 17 201 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 18 201 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 13
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
207 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 22 201 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
219 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
220 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 20 201 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 24 201 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 25 201 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
218 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 21 201 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 26 201 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 14
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
203 Mar 15/19 218 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 219 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 220 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 221 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 222 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 27 201 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 31 201 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 29 201 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 216 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 33 201 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
217 Mar 15/19 207 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 15
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHAPTER/ CHAPTER/
208 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19 Repair No. 37 201 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19 202 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19 203 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19 204 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19 205 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19 206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
Repair No. 34 201 Mar 15/19 208 Mar 15/19
202 Mar 15/19 209 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19 210 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19 211 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19 212 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19 213 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19 214 Mar 15/19
508 Mar 15/19 215 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19 216 Mar 15/19
210 Mar 15/19
211 Mar 15/19
212 Mar 15/19
213 Mar 15/19
214 Mar 15/19
215 Mar 15/19
216 Mar 15/19

202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19

202 Mar 15/19
203 Mar 15/19
204 Mar 15/19
205 Mar 15/19
206 Mar 15/19
207 Mar 15/19
208 Mar 15/19
209 Mar 15/19
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 16
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
a subsidiary U.S. export
of Goodrich control
Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation contained in the
title page section of the manual.
marking on this document. U. S Export Classification: EAR 9E991
ROHR, INC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Title Subj No. Page
Nacelle General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-00-00
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Nacelle Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Primary Engineering Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Nacelle Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Nacelle Station Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Nacelle Radials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Aerosmoothness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Damage Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Cautions, Warnings, and Dangers . . . . . . . . . . 22
Damage Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-01-00
Types of Damage (Term Definitions). . . . . . . . . 1
Corrosion Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Composite Structure Tap Test. . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Heat Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
General Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-01-01
Nick, Scratch, and Gouge Removal. . . . . . . . . . 1
Corrosion Damage Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-00
Introduction 1
Protective Treatment of Metals. . . . . . . . . . . 1
Stop Drill Cracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Title Subj No. Page
Replace Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Formed Extruded Section Repair. . . . . . . . . . . 6
Honeycomb Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Acoustic Treatment Zone Repairs . . . . . . . . . . 8
Adhesive Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Composite Ply Structure Repair. . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bag and Cure Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
General Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-01
Installation of Conductive Grid on a Core Splice. . 1
General Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-02
Water Break Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-03
Replace Nacelle Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-04
Edge Erosion: Chamfer & Seal Repair . . . . . . . . 1
Edge Erosion: Protective Paint Repair . . . . . . . 9
Edge Erosion: Protective Ceramic Coating. . . . . . 13
General Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-05
Sealant Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-06
Repair Materials and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . 1
General Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-02-07
Surface Finish Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Inlet Cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-10-00
Structural Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Title Subj No. Page
Allowable Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Repair Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fan Cowl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-20-00
Allowable Damage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Repair Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Thrust Reverser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54-30-00
Allowable Damage (To be provided) . . . . . . . . . 101
Repair Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 3
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
54- Repair General
Page 4
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
GENERAL
1. Introduction
A. The purpose of this manual is to give specific field repair

instructions of the Goodrich nacelle for the CFM56-5B engine mounted on
Airbus aircraft.
B. Specification
(1) This manual was prepared in accordance with Air Transport

Association (ATA) Specification 100, Revision 26.
(a) The second element identifies the section of the chapter.
(2) The manual is organized using six digit, three element numbers at
the bottom of the pages.
(a) The first element of the three element numbering system

indicates the ATA 100 chapter designation.
(b) The second element designates the section of the chapter.
(c) The third element indicates the specific subject within the
section.
54 - 10 - 03
Subject
Section
Chapter (Nacelle)
(3) The sections for the inlet cowl, fan cowl, and thrust reverser are
further subdivided into topics identified by page number blocks:
Page Block Topic

1 - 99 Structure Identification
101-199 Allowable Damage
201-299 Repairs
CFM56-5B
54-00-00 Repair General
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C. Repair Page Numbers - Each section has a Repair page block (201-299).
Each new topic (Repair Index, General repair information, and numbered
repairs) begin on a new page 201. To permit the location of data, the
topic is shown on the bottom right corner of every page above the page
number.
D. Service Bulletins - A service bulletin list in the front of the manual

gives the effectivity of bulletins on the manual and the incorporation
date, if applicable.
E. Revisions - Other information that becomes available at unscheduled

times will be given through temporary revisions. These temporary
revisions are normally incorporated in the manual at the next regularly
scheduled revision, usually every three months.
2. Abbreviations
The following is a list of the abbreviations used in this manual:
BL - Buttline - A vertical plane that runs alongside the nacelle

longitudinal centerline. Buttline 100 is the
vertical centerline of the nacelle. Other buttlines
are measured in inches from BL 100, the numbers
increasing to the right side of the centerline and
decreasing to the left side.
CL - Centerline - A vertical or horizontal plane that passes through
the longitudinal center of a structure.
FWD - Forward - At or toward the front of the structure.
ID - Inside Dia. - The measurement across the center of the smaller of
two circles, as of a pipe.
LE - Leading Edge - The edge of a structure that is farthest forward.
MAX - Maximum - The greatest or ultimate quantity allowable.
MIN - Minimum - The smallest or least quantity allowable.
NAC - Nacelle - The aerodynamic structure that encloses an aircraft
engine.
RAD - Radial - A line from the center of a circle marking a
specific number of degrees. On the engine, zero
radial is vertical and numbering is clockwise while
looking forward.
STA - Station - A vertical plane cutting across the longitudinal
centerline of a structure. Use to designate a
specific location along a structure
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SL - Stationline - A vertical line representing a station of a

structure. Usually named as a measurement from a
base, or zero, stationline
WL - Waterline - A horizontal line or plane parallel to the ground
used for height measurements along the length of the
nacelle. Waterline 100 is the horizontal centerline
of the nacelle. Other waterlines are measured in
inches from WL 100, numbers increasing above the
centerline and decreasing below it.
3. Nacelle Parts
Figure 1 identifies the major parts of the nacelle.
4. Primary Engineering Drawings
Not Applicable.
5. Nacelle Dimensions
Figure 2 shows the primary dimensions of the nacelle in inches with

millimeter equivalents in parentheses.
6. Nacelle Station Lines
Figure 3 shows the location of nacelle stations, buttlines and waterlines.

Stations are at the center of the clearance between nacelle sections.
7. Nacelle Radials
Figure 4 shows the nacelle radials.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
INLET COWL THRUST PRIMARY

FAN COWL REVERSER NOZZLE
INLET COWL
OUTER BARREL
NOZZLE OUTER
BARREL
PRIMARY
INLET COWL NOZZLE
INNER BARREL
B-B
C1S-337-00
Nacelle Parts
Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Primary Nacelle Dimensions

Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C1S-339-00
Nacelle Station Line, Buttline, and Waterline Locations

Figure 3
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C1S-340-00
Nacelle Radials
Figure 4
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
8. Aerosmoothness
This section gives the necessary smoothness tolerances for the air passage
surfaces of the nacelle.
A. There are tolerances for three types of aerodynamic smoothness:
· Mismatch at joints
· Waviness of skins
· Height of flush-head fasteners
B. Figure 5 shows the different aerosmoothness areas of the nacelle. This

figure will help find the different tolerances for skin waviness and
flush-head fastener height.
C. Mismatch limits. (See Figures 6 and 7)
(1) A mismatch occurs when one panel is not accurately aligned or does
not have a continuous smooth surface with the adjacent panel or
door. When there is a mismatch, there is a “step” at the joint.
(2) A mismatch step is plus (+) when it can decrease the speed of the
airflow. A step is minus (-) when it does not block the airflow.
See Figure 6.
(3) General mismatch limits in the Class 1 and 2 areas only are:
(a) Riveted, bolted, or spotwelded joints:
±0.045 in. (±1,12 mm) - except for sound panels
0.032 in. (0,80 mm) maximum parallel to the air passage
(b) Sound panel joints parallel and perpendicular to the air

passage:
±0.030 in. (±0,75 mm)
±0.060 in. (±1,52 mm) maximum permitted between fasteners and

at corners. Can not be more than 10 percent of the panel
circumference and the average of all steps must be ±0.030 in.
(±0,75 mm).
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Aerodynamic Smoothness Areas

Figure 5
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
AIR FLOW
DIRECTION + MISMATCH
JOINT
POSITIVE MISMATCH CONDITION
AIR FLOW
DIRECTION - MISMATCH
JOINT
NEGATIVE MISMATCH CONDITION C1S-341-00
Mismatch
Figure 6
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
+0.010 in. (+ 0,25 mm)

-0.016 in. (- 0,41 mm)
INLET LIP TO OUTER BARREL
+0.000 in. (+ 0,00 mm) 0.120 in. (3,0 mm) MAX
-0.026 in. (- 0,66 mm) PYLON APRON TO FAN COWL -0.080 in. (- 2,0 mm)
INLET LIP TO INNER BARREL +0.080 in. (+ 2,0 mm)
PERPENDICULAR TO
+0.040 in. (+1,0 mm) AIR PASSAGE
70% 0.080 in. (2,0 mm) MAX
-0.060 in. (-1,9 mm) PYLON APRON TO
+0.060 in. (+1,5 mm) THRUST REVERSER
-0.075 in. (-1,9 mm) 30%
-0.080 in. (-2,0 mm)
INLET COWL TO FAN COWL 20%
+0.080 in. (+2.0 mm)
-0.080 in. (-2,0 mm)
+0.070 in. (+1,8 mm) 80%
INNER AFT EDGE OF
PIVOTING DOOR TO
INNER EDGE OF
OUTER BARREL
+0.047 in. (1,20 mm)

-0.118 in. (3,0 mm)
FAN COWL TO
BLOCKER DOOR
-0.080 in. (-2.0 mm)

+0.047 in. (+1,20 mm) +0.080 in. (+2.0 mm)
± 0.024 in. ± 0.080 in. -0.098 in. (-2,50 mm) PARALLEL TO
(± 0,61 mm) (± 2,03 mm) 80% FAN COWL TO AIR PASSAGE
INLET LIP AND ± 0.120 in. THRUST REVERSER
OUTER BARREL (± 3,0 mm) 20%
SPLICE JOINTS BETWEEN DOORS
C1S-052-03
± 0.024 in. (± 0,61 mm) ± 0.080 in. (± 2,03 mm)

BETWEEN ACOUSTIC BETWEEN DOORS
PANELS OF
INNER BARREL
Nacelle Mismatch Limits

Figure 7 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Mismatch Limits

Figure 7 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
D. Waviness of skin limits. (See Figure 8).
(1) Waviness of skin is a series of one or more smooth variations in

the flat or curved surface of a part.
(a) One wavelength (Y) is the distance between adjacent high

points, on a longitudinal axis.
(b) Depth (D) is the maximum distance from the skin to a line
across the tops of adjacent high points.
(c) Slope is an angle relative to the mean profile of the surface.

For waviness limits, slope is expressed as depth (D) divided
by the distance (L) from a high point to the nearest low
point.
(2) Maximum waviness values are:
Area Depth (D) Ratio (D/Y) Slope (D/L)

Zone A, A1 0.059 in. - 0.005
Zone B 0.094 in. - 0.005
Class 1 0.040 in. 0.005 0.010
Class 2 0.064 in. 0.005 0.010
E. Height of Flush-Head Fasteners. (See Figure 5).
Table 1 shows the tolerances for flush-head rivets, bolts, and other
fasteners. A fastener head above the surface is (+) and below the
surface is (-).
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
SLOPE
Y = WAVELENGTH: DISTANCE BETWEEN ADJACENT HIGH POINTS

D = MAXIMUM DEPTH OF WAVE
L = DISTANCE FROM A HIGH POINT TO THE NEAREST LOW POINT
D/L = SLOPE
C1S-342-00
Waviness of Skin Limits

Figure 8
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
9. Damage Classification
A. Damage is any distortion or thickness change of a structural member.

Damage is classified as:
· Allowable damage
· Repairable damage
· Damage where replacement of parts is necessary
B. Allowable Damage
(1) Damage or distortion that you can let stay as it is or correct by a

simple procedure.
(2) The amount of damage that is permitted for the major assemblies and
component parts is defined in the allowable damage section of each
chapter.
Normal Permitted
Area Tolerance Tolerance on 10%
Rivet Zone A + 0.004 + 0.005
- 0.000 - 0.000
Zone A1 + 0.004 -
- 0.000
Zone B + 0.006 + 0.008
- 0.000 - 0.000
Class 1 & 2 ± 0.002 -
Bolt Zone A & B + 0.002 + 0.004
- 0.008 - 0.008
Zone A1 + 0.002 -
- 0.008
Class 1 & 2 + 0.000 -
- 0.010
All Other Zone A & B + 0.002 + 0.004
Fasteners - 0.008 - 0.008
Zone A1 + 0.002 -
- 0.008
+ 0.006 -
- 0.008
Class 1 ± 0.004
Class 2 + 0.006
- 0.008
Flush-Head Fastener Height
Table 1
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C. Repairable Damage
(1) There are two kinds of repairs that can be done on the nacelle.
They are:
(a) External Repair:
- You can apply quickly.
- Minimizes the down time of the aircraft.
- Can protrude from the repair surface.
- You can replace subsequently for appearance or for

aerodynamic considerations.
(b) Smooth Repair:
- Repair makes a continuous surface with the surface of the

component.
- You can use to replace an external repair for aerodynamic

reasons.
(2) External and smooth repairs are structurally airworthy. External

repairs in critical areas can affect aircraft performance.
(3) Some repairs are time limited. These repairs are given as practical
solutions to field repair problems.
(a) You must replace a time limited repair with a permanent repair
after a specified time.
(b) You must inspect the repair at specific times until a

permanent repair is installed.
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
D. Nonrepairable Damage
(1) Replacement of the part is recommended when the part is complicated

or the damage is too extensive so that the repair is not practical
or economical.
(2) You must replace parts that are not covered in the repair
instructions.
10. Cautions, Warnings and Dangers
NOTICE!! Carefully read and obey all CAUTION and WARNING statements in
this manual. Refer to the descriptions of these statements that
follow:
- A "CAUTION" statement is given to prevent damage to equipment.
- A "WARNING" statement is given to prevent personal injury or
illness
CHEMICALS - Obey the warning below for maintenance of components manufac-

tured or delivered by Rohr.
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE CHEMICALS, READ, UNDERSTAND, AND OBEY ALL SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CHEMICALS. THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE
INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER, THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA
SHEET (MSDS), AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS. CHEMICALS MAY CAUSE
INJURY TO YOU OR MAKE YOU SICK WHEN SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT
OBEYED. AN MSDS GIVES INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE,
KEEP, AND DISCARD CHEMICALS. GET INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER
ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP, AND DISCARD CHEMICALS.
CADMIUM - Obey the warnings below before you touch or do maintenance on
parts that are cadmium plated. Many small steel parts, including fasteners,
are cadmium plated. Stainless steel parts are not cadmium plated. Some prim-
ers and top coat finishes may contain cadmium. The Occupational, Safety, and
Health Administration (OSHA) sets mandatory limits on exposure to cadmium
dust (29 CFR 1910.1027).
WARNING: DO NOT GET CADMIUM IN YOUR MOUTH. CADMIUM THAT IS SWALLOWED CAN
CAUSE KIDNEY OR REPRODUCTIVE SYSTEM DISEASE. AFTER YOU TOUCH
CADMIUM PLATED PARTS, CLEAN YOUR HANDS BEFORE YOU EAT OR SMOKE.
GET SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER. OBEY GOVERNMENT AND
OSHA REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DISCARD PARTS THAT CONTAIN CADMIUM.
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
WARNING: DO NOT INHALE CADMIUM PARTICLES, FUMES, OR DUST. THESE PARTI-

CLES, FUMES, OR DUST CAN CAUSE LUNG OR KIDNEY DISEASE. IF MAIN-
TENANCE PROCEDURES CREATE CADMIUM PARTICLES, FUMES, OR DUST,
TELL YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY RESPIRATORS, VENTILATION, AND/OR
PROCEDURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO PERSONNEL.
The Occupational, Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA) has an applicable
DANGER warning (29 CFR 1910.1027 (m)(3)(ii)) as follows:
DANGER: CONTAINS CADMIUM. CANCER HAZARD. AVOID CREATING DUST. CAN CAUSE
LUNG AND KIDNEY DISEASE.
ASBESTOS - Obey the warning below before you touch or do maintenance on
parts that contain asbestos. Some old assembly components may contain asbes-
tos. The Occupational, Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA) sets manda-
tory limits on exposure to asbestos dust (29 CFR 1910.1001).
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE ASBESTOS DUST. THIS DUST CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
THAT CAN CAUSE CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE. DO NOT USE COMPRESSED
AIR TO CLEAN PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES THAT POSSIBLY CONTAIN ASBESTOS
DUST. IF MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES EXPOSE PERSONNEL TO ASBESTOS
DUST, TELL YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY RESPIRATORS, VENTILATION,
AND/OR PROCEDURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO PERSONNEL. OBEY GOVERN-
MENT AND OSHA REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DISCARD PARTS THAT CONTAIN
ASBESTOS.
The Occupational, Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA) has an applicable
DANGER warning (29 CFR 1910.1001 (j)(4)(ii)) as follows:
DANGER: CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS. AVOID CREATING DUST. CANCER AND LUNG
DISEASE HAZARD.
BERYLLIUM or BERYLLIUM COPPER ALLOYS - Obey the warning below before you
touch or do maintenance on parts that contain beryllium. Bronze bearings and
bushings may contain beryllium or beryllium copper alloys. The Occupational,
Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA) sets mandatory limits on exposure
to dust or fumes from beryllium or beryllium copper alloys
(29 CFR 1910.1000).
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE BERYLLIUM PARTICLES OR DUST. THESE PARTICLES OR
DUST CAN CAUSE CANCER OR LUNG DISEASE. IF MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
MAKE BERYLLIUM PARTICLES OR DUST, TELL YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY
RESPIRATORS, VENTILATION, AND/OR PROCEDURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE
TO PERSONNEL. OBEY GOVERNMENT AND OSHA REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DIS-
CARD PARTS THAT CONTAIN BERYLLIUM. READ AND OBEY THE NEWEST
APPLICABLE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS) THAT IS AVAILABLE
FROM BRUSH WELLMAN INC. (REFER TO THE ADDRESS BELOW).
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
The newest MSDS for beryllium is available from:

Brush Wellman Inc. Tel.: (800) 862-4118
Product Stewardship Department Fax: (419) 862-4414
14710 W. Portage River S. Road www.brushwellman.com
Elmore, Ohio 43416-9502
USA
CERAMIC FIBERS - Obey the warning below before you do maintenance on parts
that contain ceramic fibers. Heat resistant cloth and foil covered heat
shields and thermal blankets may contain ceramic fibers. The Occupational,
Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA) and the Refractory Ceramic Fibers
Coalition (RCFC) have a voluntary personnel protection program (PSP 2002,
Feb. 11, 2002). This program gives limits on personnel exposure to ceramic
fibers.
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE CERAMIC FIBER DUST. THIS DUST CONTAINS CERAMIC
FIBERS THAT MAY CAUSE CANCER. DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR TO CLEAN
PARTS OR ASSEMBLIES THAT POSSIBLY CONTAIN CERAMIC FIBERS. IF
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES EXPOSE PERSONNEL TO CERAMIC FIBERS, TELL
YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY RESPIRATORS, VENTILATION, AND/OR PROCE-
DURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO PERSONNEL. OBEY GOVERNMENT AND OSHA
REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DISCARD PARTS THAT CONTAIN CERAMIC FIBERS.
READ AND OBEY THE NEWEST APPLICABLE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
(MSDS).
CHROMATES (HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM) - Obey the warnings below before you touch
or do maintenance on parts that contain hexavalent chromium. Chromated prim-
ers, Alodines, and corrosion inhibiting sealants used in the manufacture and
assembly of components may contain hexavalent chromium. Emissions that are
created when you weld or thermally cut metal alloys may contain hexavalent
chromium. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) sets man-
datory limits on exposure to chromium dust (29 CFR 1910.1000).
WARNING: DO NOT GET HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM ON YOUR SKIN. REPEATED SKIN CON-
TACT CAN CAUSE DERMATITIS AND SKIN ULCERS. DIRECT EYE CONTACT
WITH HEXAVALENT CHROMATE DUSTS CAN CAUSE EYE DAMAGE. AFTER YOU
TOUCH HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM PARTS, CLEAN YOUR HANDS BEFORE YOU EAT
OR SMOKE. GET SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER. OBEY
GOVERNMENT AND OSHA REGULATIONS WHEN YOU DISCARD PARTS THAT CON-
TAIN HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM.
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM PARTICLES, FUMES OR DUST.

THESE PARTICLES, FUMES OR DUST CAN CAUSE CANCER OR LUNG DISEASE.
IF MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES MAKE HEXAVALENT CHROMIUM PARTICLES,
FUMES OR DUST, TELL YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY RESPIRATORS, VENTI-
LATION AND/OR PROCEDURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO PERSONNEL.
CRYSTALLINE SILICA (Quartz) - Obey the warning below before you touch or do
maintenance on parts that contain crystalline silica. Primers, sealants,
static conditioners, and fillers may contain crystalline silica. The Occupa-
tional, Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA) sets limits on exposure to
crystalline silica dust (29 CFR 1910.1000 Table Z-3).
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE CRYSTALLINE SILICA PARTICLES OR DUST. THESE PAR-
TICLES OR DUST CAN CAUSE SILICOSIS AND OTHER LUNG DISEASE. IF
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES MAKE CRYSTALLINE SILICA PARTICLES OR
DUST, TELL YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY RESPIRATORS, VENTILATION AND/
OR PROCEDURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO PERSONNEL.
LEAD - Obey the warnings below before you touch or do maintenance on parts
that contain lead. Soldered components and high temperature dry lubricants
may contain lead. The Occupational, Safety, and Health Administration (OSHA)
sets limits on exposure to lead (29 CFR 1910.1025).
WARNING: DO NOT GET LEAD IN YOUR MOUTH. LEAD THAT IS SWALLOWED CAN CAUSE
REPRODUCTIVE OR BLOOD SYSTEM DISEASE. AFTER YOU TOUCH LEAD
PARTS, CLEAN YOUR HANDS BEFORE YOU EAT OR SMOKE. GET SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER. OBEY GOVERNMENT AND OSHA REGU-
LATIONS WHEY YOU DISCARD PARTS THAT CONTAIN LEAD.
WARNING: DO NOT BREATHE LEAD PARTICLES, FUMES OR DUST. THESE PARTICLES,
FUMES OR DUST CAN CAUSE REPRODUCTIVE OR BLOOD SYSTEM DISEASE. IF
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES MAKE LEAD PARTICLES, FUMES OR DUST, TELL
YOUR EMPLOYER TO SUPPLY RESPIRATORS, VENTILATION AND/OR PROCE-
DURES TO PREVENT EXPOSURE TO PERSONNEL.
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
DRYING OF THERMOSETTING COMPOSITE MATERIALS
This Procedure corresponds to SAE International’s Aerospace Recommended

Practice (ARP 4977) and describes standard methods for drying commercial
aircraft composite structures prior to repair and gives general guidelines
on use and applicability.
It addresses the removal of liquids that have collected inside the

Structures through open damage, microcracks, or porosity and the removal
of absorbed moisture from the composite material. The methods described in
this document can be used along with or in addition to an approved repair
procedure or with the agreement of the original equipment manufacturer
(OEM) or regulatory authority. If this document is used for the drying of
materials other than thermosetting composite materials, the fitness for
this purpose must be determined by the user.
1. GENERAL
In this Section reference is made to visible liquids and absorbed

moisture.
A. Visible Liquids: Visible liquids are split into two categories.
(1) Liquids that dry in open-air or under heat, leaving no residue or

residue that can be easily wiped away and cleaned using the
standard methods. Water and solvents are the most commonly found
types.
(2) Liquids that do not dry with standard methods but leave a residue
or some remaining liquid that standard cleaning methods will not
remove. The most common types are Skydrol, jet fuel, and toilet
servicing fluid (blue water).
NOTE: Either category of liquid may result in a degradation of

the composite structure.
B. Absorbed Moisture: Composite structures tend to saturate with moisture.

The moisture level, if too high could be detrimental to the quality of
a bonded repair. Drying should be performed in areas that will be in
contact with the repair bondline, including repair parts and materials
(honeycomb replacement pieces may be dried prior to using when absorbed
moisture is a concern).
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(1) Some types of composites can also absorb solvents used in solvent
cleaning (Aramid reinforced laminates and honeycomb absorb more
solvent). The method of absorbed moisture removal may also be used
to ensure that solvent has completely evaporated in a shorter time.
NOTE: Bonding prior to complete solvent evaporation can cause low

bond strength.
(2) Drying a composite structure will in general consist of:
(a) Removing visible liquids.
(b) Cleaning (when liquid is other than water) and removing any
permanently contaminated area.
(c) Drying to obtain a visually dry structure before proceeding

with the repair area preparation.
(d) Performing the final drying before bonding.
2. Visible Liquid
A. General Information
(1) Liquid can collect on structures or inside through existing

openings or damaged areas. It can generally be removed by mopping,
vacuuming, or by blowing with compressed air (when it is water).
(2) Liquid can also be found inside sandwich panels as the result of
skin damage, delamination, debonding, skin microcracks, skin
porosity, or a combination of these cases.
(3) Visible liquid in honeycomb panels can cause damage due to freezing
(water), to galvanic corrosion of aluminum honeycomb, or to a
possible reduction of the structural strength characteristics if
left for a long period of time. There is also a risk of having
steam pressure build up during a hot bond repair causing
delamination or debonding.
(4) Unlike water, other fluids may deteriorate not only the honeycomb
and honeycomb/skin bond line, but also the skins. Degradation
should be suspected when the substrate shows discoloration.
(5) Removal of liquid from honeycomb panels will usually require the
cutting of one skin to obtain access. Contaminated areas that
cannot be cleaned will also have to be cut away.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(6) When the honeycomb or honeycomb/skin bond line is suspected to be

degraded the honeycomb should be replaced. Replacement may be
considered in all cases to speed up the repair process.
NOTE: Before proceeding with the repair area preparation on the

structure must be clean and visually dry.
B. Detection: Liquid can be detected visually on or inside structures and

in open damage.
(1) The presence of liquid inside honeycomb panels must be suspected

when debonding is found or when the surface is in a poor condition
(paint deterioration and/or erosion) or shows signs of porosity. A
discoloration of the composite is usually the indication of a
contamination.
(2) Nondestructive Testing Inspection (NDI) methods such as

thermography, ultrasonic checks, or X-rays can confirm the
presence of trapped liquid. On glass or aramid structures,
moisture meters can also be used.
(3) OEM’s Nondestructive Testing Manuals (NTM) must be consulted for

details of the various methods and their applicability.
C. Removal Methods: Depending on the type of fluid and on the location and
time available, various methods may be used.
(1) Mopping, vacuuming, blowing compressed air and vacuum bagging the
affected area are possible methods for water removal (refer to 4.1
for details of the various methods). Mopping and vacuuming are also
commonly used for the removal of liquids other than water. A
thorough cleaning should follow. Should cleaning prove
unsuccessful, the contaminated area shall be removed.
D. Drying Time: The criteria are to have a clean and visually dry
structure. The time required will depend on the method used.
E. Control Methods: A visual check will generally show if all the liquid
has been removed. On honeycomb panels, standard nondestructive methods
can be used to confirm removal (refer to3.1.2). If in doubt, additional
cells can be cut open. With liquids other than water, once the area is
visually clean, local heating (not exceeding 176 degrees F (80 degrees
C) could help reveal more absorbed fluid due to the tendency of fluid
to seep to the skin surface during heating. A water break test (refer
to ARP4916 - Water Break Test Method 54-02-02) will confirm the
cleanliness of the structure.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3. Absorbed Moisture
A. General Information
(1) Composites, as a result of their chemical structure, will absorb

moisture when in contact with humid air. The absorption can reach a
maximum value (saturation) that depends on the resin system and
fiber reinforcement used (carbon, aramid, or glass), on the
temperature and on the humidity of the surrounding air. Saturation
values can range from 1 to 3 percent by weight). Nonmetallic
honeycomb will generally reach saturation at a higher value (up to
5% for Nomex honeycomb). This moisture saturation combined with a
hot environment (hot/wet condition) is one of the most adverse
condition met by a structure. It is taken into account at the
aircraft design stage and in the testing of the main components.
(2) The effect of moisture during a repair will depend mainly on the
curing time and temperature and to a lesser extent on the repair
and parent materials. The strength characteristics of the bond
line and the repair patch quality could be affected.
(3) Experience has shown that, for repair purposes, complete drying of
a composite structure is not necessary. A dry surface will in
general be sufficient provided it remains dry for the complete cure
cycle. Moisture migration back to the surface during the cure cycle
should be taken into account to determine the drying time and
temperature. One way of ensuring a dry surface is to carry out a
final drying cycle (after the laminate appears dry) at the
temperature of the cure for the time of the cure (refer in all
cases to OEM’s recommendations).
(4) Because only the surface of the laminate will be dried, the drying
must take place after all stepping, scarfing, or other material
removal steps have been completed.
(5) The repair should be accomplished as soon as possible after drying

because the moisture in the laminate will return to the surface at
room temperature over a period of time.
(6) Figures 1 and 2 are given to illustrate the length of time typical
laminates take to absorb moisture and the time to completely remove
all absorbed moisture. These figures are given for information and
education only and should not be used to determine drying cycle
time and temperature. The slow migration of moisture explains why
surface drying is used and shows the importance of drying after
material removal.
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(7) Figure 1 shows the average moisture content plotted against drying
time of a composite laminate first saturated with moisture and then
dried. The curves represent laminates of different thicknesses.
Graphs for two different drying temperatures are shown.
(8) Figure 2 shows a graphical representation of the percentage

saturation across a laminate thickness at different time.
(9) Figure 2B represents the values for a skin initially dry and
exposed to humid atmosphere from one side.
(10) Figure 2C represents the values for a skin initially saturated and
then dried.
(11) Absorption and desorption time are affected by the composite skin
thickness, material type, temperature, and relative humidity.
B. Low Temperature Repairs (Temperature <212 degrees F (100 degrees C)):

There is little data available today about low temperature cure repairs
on moisture saturated structures. Nevertheless, the effect of moisture
has been found to be minor in real repair conditions where there is
always a period of time when the repair area can dry in open air. This
natural drying time occurs in addition to the final drying recommended
for all repairs.
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Moisture Content of Typical Laminates

(Average Moisture Through the Thickness)
Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Graphical Representation of the Moisture Content Across a Composite Skin (Fick

Law)
Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(1) Care should be taken though, with repair resin systems that cure at
temperatures slightly below the boiling point of water. Even
though the cure is monitored closely, when using heating blankets,
the temperature could rise locally above this critical level. In
addition, this level will drop due to the use of vacuum. For this
reason when a structure is found soaked with water, once this water
is removed and the structure is visually dry, it is necessary to
perform a final drying before bonding.
C. High Temperature Repairs (Temperature >212 degrees F (100 degrees C)):

A high moisture level will generally affect the repair lay-up bond to
the structure and the repair patch quality. Additionally there is a
high risk of debonding/delamination in areas outside the repair area if
the whole part is to be heated.
(1) When performing a high temperature repair it is necessary to have a

dry structure.
(2) The moisture content of the structure is generally unknown and

could be suitable for high temperature repairs without any further
drying. Nevertheless, when water is suspected to have been inside
the structure for a long period of time, it is essential to perform
a final drying before bonding. Dry the part after the repair area
preparation on a visually dry structure.
D. Detection: Although equipment exist that can detect the presence of

moisture, there is no practical method to quantify the moisture content
of a structure.
E. Removal Methods: The method will depend on the repair conditions and
size of damage (refer to Section 4 for details Of the various methods).
F. Drying Temperature: Recommendations of the part manufacturer should be

followed. However, common practice is to heat the structure between 140
degrees F (60 degrees C) and 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) with a rate of
temperature rise of approximately 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) per minute.
G. Drying Time: Recommendations of the part manufacturer should be

followed.
NOTE: After all evidence of visible moisture has been removed, a

safe approach would be to heat the part at the repair cure
temperature and for the time of the cure. This would require
special care and should be performed using the same repair
conditions (the same jig, tool, heat application methods,
vacuum bag, etc.) to avoid possible distortion. Heat rise
should also be controlled to avoid local debonding and
delamination due to trapped moisture/water.
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
H. Low Temperature Repairs: Common practice is to heat the structure for a

minimum of 1 hour, to remove residual moisture and to create a dry
surface layer.
I. High Temperature Repairs: The drying time will depend on the thickness
of the part, the fiber/resin system, and the drying temperature.
(1) As an indication, Figure 1 shows drying curves for laminates of

various thicknesses at two different drying temperatures.
J. Control Method: There is no simple method to detect the residual

moisture content of a structure, therefore, the control of the
temperature and drying time is necessary.
4. DRYING METHODS
A. Visible Liquid Removal- Method 1 (Water) Procedure:
(1) Use one or more of the following methods to remove as much water as
you can.
(a) Absorb the water as follows: Use any clean, dry, oil free,
water absorbent material. Put the material in the water.
Remove the material and discard. Repeat until you have removed
as much water possible.
(b) Use a vacuum to remove the water as follows:
1 Use a filter or a vacuum source that will not be damaged

by water.
2 Make vacuum pipes and nozzles to reach all the areas of

water. Put the nozzles in the water and apply the vacuum.
(c) Blow compressed air as follows:
WARNING: DO NOT USE MORE THAN 30 PSI (2 BARS) PRESSURE. DO NOT

POINT THE NOZZLE IN YOUR DIRECTION OR THE DIRECTIONS OF
OTHERS. WEAR EYE PROTECTION.
CAUTION: USE OIL FREE AND DRY COMPRESSED AIR.
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO FORCE THE WATER FURTHER INTO THE
STRUCTURE OR TO DAMAGE THE STRUCTURE WITH TOO MUCH
PRESSURE.
(d) Use a compressed air nozzle to blow the air on the water.
Continue until all the water is removed.
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(e) Use Absorbed Moisture Removal Method 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 (refer to

5).
B. Visible Liquid Removal - Method 2 (Liquid Other Than Water): Procedure:
(1) Use one or more of the following methods to remove as much liquid
as you can.
WARNING: IF THE LIQUID IS FLAMMABLE, PUT DISCARDED MATERIALS INTO

AN APPROVED FLAMMABLE WASTE CONTAINER.
(a) Absorb the liquid as follows: Use any clean, dry, oil free,
absorbent material. Put the material in the liquid. Remove the
material and discard. Repeat until you have removed as much
liquid as you can.
WARNING: IF THE LIQUID THAT YOU WILL REMOVE IS FLAMMABLE, DO NOT

ALLOW THE LIQUID OR ITS GAS TO GO INTO THE VACUUM PUMP.
PUT A FILTER IN THE VACUUM PIPE THAT WILL REMOVE THE
LIQUID AND GAS.
(b) Use a vacuum to remove the liquid as follows: Use a filter or

a vacuum source that will not be damaged by the liquid that
you will remove. Make vacuum pipes and nozzles to reach all
the areas of liquid. Put the nozzles in the liquid and apply
the vacuum.
(2) Clean the area and check that it is visually dry.
5. Absorbed Moisture Removal
A. Absorbed Moisture Removal - Method 1 (Vacuum Bag and Heating Blanket):
(1) General Information: This method uses a vacuum bag and a heating
blanket. Other heating methods can be used in conjunction with a
vacuum bag, for example:
(a) Heat Lamp
(b) Hot air gun
(2) Refer to absorbed moisture removal methods 2, 3, and 4 for these

applications.
(3) This method is usually used on honeycomb structures. If only one

skin is damaged, only one vacuum bag is required. If the damage
penetrates both skins, a vacuum bag is required on both sides, or
if the part is suitable it may be enclosed in a bag.
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(4) A second vacuum bag may also be used to hold a heat blanket to the
skin opposite the repair area. Application of heat to the skin
opposite the repair area is preferred if it is possible (see Figure
3C).
CAUTION: USE A PERFORATED METAL PLATE TO SUPPORT THE VACUUM BAG

PRESSURE ON SMALL DAMAGES ONLY. SEE FIGURE 3A. A 4 IN (101.6
MM.) WIDE DAMAGE WILL REQUIRE A 0.16 IN (4 MM.) THICK
ALUMINUM PERFORATED PLATE. DAMAGE TO THE EDGE OF THE SKIN CUT
OUT AND TO THE BAGGING EQUIPMENT MAY OCCUR IF THIN PLATES ARE
USED ON LARGE REPAIRS WHERE THE HONEYCOMB HAS BEEN REMOVED.
USE A PIECE OF HONEYCOMB INSERTED IN THE REPAIR AREA FOR
LARGE REPAIRS. SEE FIGURES 3B AND 3C.
(5) Make a vacuum bag as shown in Figure 3. Refer to ARP5143 DRAFT to

tell you how to make the bag and ARP5144 DRAFT to tell you how to
use a heating blanket. If you have access to the opposite side,
make a second vacuum bag to hold the heat blanket on the opposite
side. See Figure 3C.
(6) Equipment: The following equipment is suggested for use in this

method:
(a) Heat blankets capable of a uniform temperature distribution

over the required area.
Absorbed Moisture Removal - Method 1

Vacuum Bag and Heating Blanket
(Using a Rigid Screen)
(Maximum Damage is not to Exceed 2 Inches in Diameter)
Figure 3A
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

(Using a Honeycomb Plug)
Figure 3B
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

(Access Both Sides)
Figure 3C
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(b) Thermocouples with a monitoring device, either a chart

recorder or a digital read out.
(c) A control system that can monitor the thermocouples and adjust
the power to the heat blanket.
NOTE: For details of bagging materials, see ARP5143DRAFT.
(7) Put the intake vent line as far away from the vacuum line as you
can. This is to get good air flow across the repair area.
CAUTION: SOME TYPES OF VACUUM PUMPS ARE NOT DESIGNED FOR CONTINUOUS
OPERATION AT A PARTIAL VACUUM; CHECK THE MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS.
(8) Apply the vacuum and adjust the intake vent line flow to maintain a
vacuum of 12 in (300 mm) of mercury.
(9) Use the heat blanket control system. Perform the drying cycle in
the instructions of the OEM repair document. Monitor the
thermocouples to make sure that the required temperature is not
exceeded.
B. Absorbed Moisture Removal Method 2 (Radiant Heater):
(1) General Information: This method uses a radiant heater. To avoid

any heat damage to the structure, a calibration of the set up must
be performed.
(2) One or several heaters can be used.
(3) This method can be used in conjunction with a vacuum bag, although
other methods described are more suited.

method:
(a) Heat Lamp: 250 W lamps are commonly used.
(b) Radiator: 500 to 1900W coil elements with a reflector can be

used.
(c) Thermocouples with a monitoring device, either a chart

recorder or a digital read out
(d) A control system may be used that can monitor the

thermocouples and adjust the power to the heater.
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C. Procedure: Absorbed Moisture Removal - Method 2
NOTE: Refer to ARP4977 for additional information on the use of

radiant heaters.
(1) Do a calibration of the heater as follows:
(a) Make a graph similar to Figure 4 showing the temperature at

the center at the heated area as a function of the distance
between the heater and the surface.
(b) Use the graph to find the distance from the heater to the pan
that you require for the temperature given in the instructions
in the OEM manual.
(c) Make a second graph similar to Figure 4 showing the

temperature as a function of the distance tram the center of
the heated area at the distance chosen in step 8.2.
(d) If several heaters will be used, make the previous two graphs
for the combined heaters similar to Figure 4D.
(2) Install the heaters as follows (refer to Figure 5):
(a) Install one or several heaters to get the required temperature

on the area to be dried. Use the calibration graph to get the
distance.
(b) Install thermocouples at the center of the heated area and at

any positions where the required temperature may be exceeded.
Use the thermocouple at the center of the heated area for a
heater control system, if available.
(c) Perform the drying cycle in the instructions of the OEM repair
document. Monitor the thermocouples to make sure that the
required temperature is not exceeded.
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Figure 4A
Figure 4B
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Figure 4C
Figure 4D
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
D. Absorbed Moisture Removal - Method 3 (Hot Air Dryer):
(1) General Information: This method uses a hot air dryer (refer to
Figure 6). To avoid heat damage to the structure, it is preferable
to use a holding fixture to maintain a constant distance to the
part. Calibration of the set up is necessary.

method:
(a) Heat Gun: Heat guns with variable temperature control are
commonly used.
(b) Thermocouples with a monitoring device, either a chart

recorder or a digital read out.
(c) A control system may be used that can monitor the

thermocouples and adjust the power to the heater.
(3) Procedure: Method 3 (Hot Air Dryer)
NOTE: Refer to ARP5144 DRAFT for additional information on the

use of heat guns.
(a) For calibration of the heat gun, refer to “Absorbed Moisture

Removal - Method 2”.
(b) Install the heat gun as follows (refer to Figure 6):
1 Install the heat gun to get the required temperature on

the area to be dried. Use the calibration graph to get the
distance. If the heat gun has a variable temperature
control, make sure that the control is at the same setting
as that used to make the calibration graph.
2 Install thermocouples at the center of the heated area

and at the other positions where the required temperature
may be exceeded. Use the thermocouple at the center of the
heated area for a dryer control system, if you have one.
(c) Perform the drying cycle in the instructions of the OEM

manual. Monitor the thermocouples to make sure that the
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Radiant Heater
Figure 5

Radiant Heater
Figure 6
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
E. Absorbed Moisture Removal - Method 4 (Portable Oven):
(1) General Information: This method uses a portable oven.
(a) The heat is indirectly applied and is more evenly spread. The
oven can be made with light sheet metal (see Figure 7) and
allows larger areas to be dried.
(b) As a heat source, a hot air dryer (refer to Absorbed Moisture

Removal Method 3) can be used or any hot air supply equipment.

method.
(a) Hot air dryer 1500 to 2000 W with adjustable temperature or

equivalent hot air supply.
(b) Fabricated sheet metal oven, see figure 7.
(c) A control system may be used that can monitor the

thermocouples and adjust the power to the beater.
(3) Procedure: Method 4 (Portable Oven)
NOTE: Refer to ARP5144 for additional information on the use of

fabricated local ovens.
(a) Make a sheet metal oven, similar to that shown in Figure 7,

for the area to be repaired. You should use a hot air source
with temperature adjustment.
(b) Do a calibration to find any hot areas as follows:
1 Place the oven on a surface similar to the one to be dried

and adjust the heat gun to give approximately the
required temperature on the surface.
2 Make a map of the area covered by the oven that shows the
surface temperatures.
(c) Install the oven and the thermocouples for temperature

monitoring and the heat control system, if you have one. The
thermocouples should be installed in the hot areas previously
found in step C.2.
(d) Perform the drying cycle in the instructions of the OEM

manual. Monitor at the thermocouples to make sure that the
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Portable Oven
Figure 7
CFM56-5B
Page 21
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 22
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control


ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE INVESTIGATION
1. Types of Damage
The terms specified here will help you to find the kind of damage to the
nacelle.
A. Composite Structures
Abrasion Damage that results in a change to the cross-sectional

area because it has been scuffed, rubbed, or the
surface eroded from other causes.
Crack A fracture or complete separation in one or more of the
laminate plies of a composite structure.
Delamination A separation of the bonded laminated material plies
from each other or from faying surfaces.
Disbond Two bonded parts do not have sufficient adhesion, such
as separation of the face sheet from a honeycomb core.
Gouge Damage of all dimensions which results in a change to
the cross-sectional area. It is usually caused when the
component is hit with a sharp object which makes a
continuous smooth groove in the material.
Hole Damage goes fully through material.
Nick A local gouge with sharp edges. A series of nicks in a
line is a gouge.
Scratch A line of damage in the surface of a part which results
in a change to the cross-sectional area. It is caused
when a sharp object touches and moves across the part.
B. Sheet Metal Structures
Abrasion Damage which results in a change to the cross-sectional

Buckle Damage is almost the same as a dent, but is caused when
too much load has been put on a component or because of
adjacent damage. The buckle can be higher or lower when
compared to the contour of the component.
Crack A not fully fractured or a complete break in the
material which gives a change in the cross-sectional
area.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Dent A damage area where the material surface is pushed in

and the usual surface contour is changed. A dent is
usually caused when the component is hit with a smooth
object.
line is a gouge.
C. Bonded Acoustic Panels
Abrasion Damage which results in a change to the cross-sectional

Crack A fracture or complete separation in one or more of the
laminate plies of a composite structure.
Delamination A separation of the bonded laminated material plies
from each other or from faying surfaces.
Dent A damage area where the material surface is pushed in
and the usual surface contour is changed. A dent is
usually caused when the component is hit with a smooth
object.
Disbond Two bonded parts do not have sufficient adhesion, such
as separation of the face sheet from a honeycomb core.
line is a gouge.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Rip/Tear A line of damage to woven wire with a continuous,

ragged separation of wires.
Void Separation of the face sheet from honeycomb core or
faying surfaces.
2. Corrosion Damage
A. You must inspect the part after it is cleaned to make a decision to

repair or replace it.
B. You must fully remove all corrosion residue or the corrosion process
will continue even though the affected surface is refinished.
C. Corrosion damage is classified as follows:
(1) Light Corrosion - Discoloration or pits to a depth of approximately

0.001 in. (0,025 mm) maximum. Sand by hand or use a minimum of
chemical treatment to remove light corrosion.
(2) Moderate Corrosion - Blisters, scales, or flakes. Pits may be as

deep a 0.010 in. (0,25 mm). Sand heavily by hand or mechanical
procedure to remove moderate corrosion.
(3) Severe Corrosion - Severe blisters, exfoliation, scales, or

flakes. Depths of pits will be deeper than 0.010 in. (0,25 mm).
Sand by mechanical procedures or grind to remove severe corrosion.
3. Composite Structure Tap Test (See Figure 1).
A. Equipment
Small rod with 0.375 in. (9,52 mm) diameter ball on one end. Purchase
locally or manufacture from mild steel or brass.
B. Tap Test Procedure
(1) Test the underside of a panel which has visible damage or defects.
(a) Tap the panel surface with the ball end of the rod.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Rohr, Inc.,any otherof U.S. export control
a subsidiary Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-
ROHR, INC.
Tap Test for Delaminations

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(b) Tap the tops of the hat section reinforcements which may be on
the underside of the panel.
(c) Note any change of pitch in the sound emitted from the panel.
This shows a delamination at that place.
(d) Mark any delamination that is found.
(2) Test the outer surface of the panel. Mark the areas that indicate a
change in pitch of the sound that results. (See Figure 1.)
NOTE: Make sure that you do a complete search of the panel. It is

easier to look for delaminations if you put grid marks on
the panel. Make the marks 6.0 in. (152,4 mm) square. This
gives you a controlled search pattern.
(3) If possible, get access to the non-wetted surface of a panel. Do a

tap test.
(4) See the allowable damage section for delaminations to find if the
part is usable or repairable.
4. Heat Damage
A. Inspect the damaged area for changed color of metal and paint.
(1) The general heat ranges required to change the color of primer
paints are as follows:
Standard Heat-Changed
Primer Color Color Temperature
FR Epoxy Green Brown Above 400°F
(200°C)
Phenolic Rust Red Black Above 600°F
(315°C)
Zinc Chromate Light Green Tan Above 300°F
(150°C)
(2) The color changes to titanium because of heat are as follows:
Color Quality
Metallic Acceptable
Straw Acceptable
Gold Acceptable
Blue Acceptable
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
Color Quality
Green Acceptable
Purple Acceptable
Reddish Brown Reject
Dark Grey Reject
Light Grey Reject
White Reject
B. A tap test is necessary for all composite parts if heat damage is

found.
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE CLEANUP
1. Nick, Scratch and Gouge Removal
A. Aluminum Alloys other than Lip Skins
(1) Use abrasive paper to make the paint smooth in the damaged area.
(See Figure 1).
(2) Polish the damage with aluminum wool.
(3) Apply a protective layer. (See SRM 51-21-11 APPLICATION OF

PROTECTIVE TREATMENT TO METAL PARTS and SRM 54-02-00 GENERAL
REPAIRS - Protective treatment of Metals)
B. Aluminum Alloys on Lip Skin ONLY
(1) Blend the nick/scratch/gouge damage in accordance with A320 SRM

51-73-00 - Removal of Minor Damage. Make the blend at 20:1 ratio
minimum taper.
(2) Several nicks/scratches/gouges can be combined into a single area;

final shape must be an ellipse or circle. This will make a saucer-
like repair surface.
(a) All the small damages must be blended into a single pocket.
(b) Make the rework surface equivalent to 125 RMS or smoother.

Refer to MIL-STD-10.
(c) Ensure the depth after rework is equivalent to a nick/scratch/

gouge on the allowable damage table. See paragraph 1.B.(3).
(3) See the A320 SRM 54-10-00, Allowable Damage section Table 101,
Zones CL1 and CL2, to make sure that the Lip Skin is usable after
the nick/scratch/gouge is removed. Reworked damage is the same as a
gouge
(4) Continue with the repair or replace the Lip Skin as necessary.
(5) Apply Chemical Corrosion Conversion to area. Refer to SRM 51-21-11

APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE TREATMENT TO METAL PARTS.
Note: Use colorless material as specified in SRM 51-21-11 APPLICATION

OF PROTECTIVE TREATMENT TO METAL PARTS.
C. Titanium
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
WARNING: SMALL PARTICLES AND FINE SHAVINGS OF TITANIUM IGNITE EASILY

AND MAKE A VERY DANGEROUS FIRE HAZARD. DO NOT USE FOAM,
WATER, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE OR CARBON DIOXIDE ON TITANIUM
FIRES. WATER THAT TOUCHES MOLTEN TITANIUM CAN CAUSE A STEAM
EXPLOSION DANGER. EXTINGUISH A TITANIUM FIRE WITH FULLY DRY
TALC, CALCIUM CARBONATE, AND/OR GRAPHITE. APPLY THE POWDER
TO A DEPTH OF 1/2 IN. (13 MM) OR MORE ABOVE THE METAL THAT
BURNS.
(1) Do not grind titanium parts.
(2) Do not use stainless steel wool or 350 mesh or finer pumice.
(3) Use cloth or paper backed silicone carbide or aluminum oxide

abrasive, 80 grit or finer. (See Figure 1).
(4) Make sure the support disk for a disk sander is flexible. Use
rubber or other flexible material.
(5) Make sure the support drum for a drum sander has an outer layer of
rubber or other flexible material. Make sure the flexible material
is 0.10 in. (2,54 mm) thick.
(6) Do not sand in one place for too long. Do not use too much pressure
or speed (2000 surface feet per minute, maximum). Parts that have
heat marks which cannot be removed with methyl isobutyl
ketone(MIBK) must be replaced.
(7) Finish the surface to 32 microinches (AA)
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Abrasives Used to Sand or Scour

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(8) The direction of the finished sanded edge must be parallel with the
edge of the parent material.
D. Composites
For cleanup of damage to composite structures, see the Allowable Damage

section for the specific component.
2. Corrosion Damage Removal
A. Aluminum and Steel
(1) Remove the corrosion with rotary files, rubber backed disk
sanders, carbide tipped scrapers, or aluminum oxide abrasive
paper. (See Figure 1).
(2) Several corrosion spots can be combined into a single area; final
shape must be an ellipse or a circle. This will make a saucer-like
repair surface.
(a) All the small damages must be blended into a single pocket,
where applicable.
(b) Make the rework surface equivalent to 125 RMS or smoother.

(Refer to MIL-STD-10.)
(c) The rework depression is equivalent to a gouge on the

allowable damage table.
B. See the Allowable Damage section to make sure that the part is usable
after the corrosion is removed. Corrosion damage is the same as a
gouge.
C. Repair the part or replace it as necessary.
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
GENERAL REPAIR PROCEDURES
1. Introduction
This section gives general data and procedures for more than one repair.
Adhesive preparation and bag and cure procedures are necessary for
composite repairs. Each of the composite repairs refer to the special
instructions found in this section, if they are necessary.
2. Protective Treatment Of Metals
A. Metal Surfaces that Touch Other Metal Surfaces.
(1) The metals are classified into four groups:
Group 1 Magnesium and its alloys, Aluminum alloys 5052, 5056,

5356, 6061 and 6063, and Beryllium.
Group 2 Cadmium, Zinc, Aluminum and their alloys. (Includes the
Aluminum alloys of Group 1).
Group 3 Steel, Lead, Tin and their alloys, (except Stainless
Steels), diffused Nickel-Cadmium.
Group 4 Copper, Chromium, Nickel, Silver, Gold, Platinum,
Titanium, Cobalt and Rhodium and their alloys,
Stainless Steels, Graphite, Monel, Inconel, Brass,
Bronze.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) The necessary protective finishes for metals are as follows:
MATERIAL SIMILAR METALS DISSIMILAR METALS

Group 1 Apply Alodine and one Apply Alodine and two
Group 2 layer of 10P20-44* layers of 10P20-44*
Primer to each surface. Primer to each surface.
NOTE: For Aluminum Lip
Skins apply a clear
chemical conversion
coating and no primer.
Group 3 Cadmium plate and apply Cadmium plate and apply
one layer of 10P20-44* one layer of 10P20-44*
Primer to each surface. Primer to each surface.
Stainless None Necessary Apply two layers of
Steel 10P20-44* Primer
to each surface.
Group 4 None Necessary Apply two layers of
10P20-44* Primer
to each surface.
*Use Phenolic Primer 204-001 as an alternative to 10P20-44 Primer

in the areas where the temperature is more than 300 degrees F
(150 degrees C).
B. Install the Fasteners
(1) The specifications for protective treatment of fasteners are:
Fastener Materials that touch Fasteners

Material Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Aluminum A B A A
Other than 5056
Aluminum B B A A
Alloy 5056
Cadmium or A C A A
Zinc Plate
Chrome Plate A A A B
A = Protective treatment is necessary.
B = Protective treatment is not necessary.
C = Protective treatment is not necessary other than for cadmium
with a layer of alloy steel bolts through aluminum alloys.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Fastener Materials that touch Fasteners

Material Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
Stainless A A A B
Steels
Nickel or A A A B
Cobalt Base
Alloys
Titanium A A A B
A = Protective treatment is necessary.
B = Protective treatment is not necessary.
C = Protective treatment is not necessary other than for cadmium
with a layer of alloy steel bolts through aluminum alloys.
(2) Fasteners in areas below 300 degrees F (150 degrees C) that need
protective treatment must be wet installed with 10P20-44 Primer.
(3) Fasteners in areas above 300 degrees F (150 degrees C) that need
protective treatment must be wet installed with Phenolic Primer
204-001 (DeSoto Chemical Co., Berkeley, CA 94710).
(4) Install removable fasteners on surfaces without paint with

corrosion prevention compound, MIL-G-16173, grade 2.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C. Apply the FR Primer.
KEEP, AND DISCARD CHEMICALS. GET INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR
EMPLOYER ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP, AND DISCARD
CHEMICALS.
NOTE: Fluid-resistant epoxy (FR) primer (CAT-A-LAC 463, Sikkens

Aerospace Finishes, Torrance, CA) is recommended for areas
where temperatures are less than 300 degrees F (150 degrees C).
(1) Apply the FR Primer
(a) Measure the primer and catalyst.
(b) Add one part catalyst to one part primer in a metal or glass
container.
(c) Mix and let stand for 15 minutes.
NOTE: The mixture can be used for eight hours if stored in

closed container.
(d) Apply mixed FR Primer to surface with a brush or spray.
3. Stop Drill Cracks
A. These procedures gives instructions to drill existing fastener holes to

remove small cracks and damaged material.
(1) Ream the hole 0.016 inch (0,40 mm) oversize.
(2) If there are no other cracks, make the hole 0.063 inch (1,58 mm)
larger.
(3) If other cracks are found, make the hole larger by 0.063 inch (1,58
mm) increments until the crack is removed.
(4) Ream the hole to the finished size for installation of the
fastener.
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. The growth of a crack may be stopped if a hole is drilled at the end of

the crack as follows:
(1) Drill a 0.25 inch (6,12 mm) hole at each end of the crack. Make
sure the centers of the holes are 0.10 inch (2,45 mm) beyond the
end of the crack.
(2) Check to see if the crack has continued to the other side of the
hole.
(a) If the crack has not continued, drill the hole to 0.312 inch
(7,92 mm).
(b) If the crack has continued, make the hole larger by 0.063 inch
(1,58 mm) increments until the crack is removed.
4. Replace Sealant
A. Remove old sealant from surface of part.
B. Remove all grease, oil, dirt, and other unwanted materials from the
surface of the part.
C. Taper the ends of existing seal for a minimum of 0.5 inch (12,7 mm)
overlap onto new sealant.
NOTE: Sand the ends of the old seal to help the new seal to stick.
CHEMICALS.
D. If necessary, apply appropriate primer to the surface where sealant is

to be used.
E. Seal between touching metal parts. Refer to Figure 1.
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE CHEMICALS, READ, UNDERSTAND, AND OBEY ALL
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CHEMICALS. THESE INSTRUCTIONS
INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER, THE MATERIAL
SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS), AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS.
CHEMICALS MAY CAUSE INJURY TO YOU OR MAKE YOU SICK WHEN
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT OBEYED. AN MSDS GIVES
INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP, AND DISCARD
CHEMICALS. GET INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER ON HOW YOU
MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP, AND DISCARD CHEMICALS.
(1) Apply the sealant on the surface of one part to a thickness of

0.016 inch (0,40 mm).
(2) Attach the two parts together.
F. Fillet seal. Refer to Figure 2.
(1) Apply the sealant into the seam.
(2) Push the sealant into position with the fairing tool.
G. Injection seal. Refer to Figure 2.
(1) Put the sealant into one end of a hole until sealant comes through
the other end of the hole. Use an injection tool.
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
H. Slot seal. Refer to Figure 3.
(1) Protect the surface adjacent to the slot with masking tape.
(2) Apply the sealant to slot.
(3) Smooth the sealant and push into the slot with the spatula.
(4) Remove the masking tape.
I. Fastener seal. Refer to Figure 3.
(1) Clean fastener of all oil, grease, dirt and other unwanted
materials.
(2) Apply the sealant to the fastener hole.
(3) Apply the sealant to the fastener, washers, and nut.
(4) Install the fastener into the hole.
5. Formed/Extruded Section Repair
A. This section contains illustrated examples of Rohr Standard Extrusions

used in the construction of the CFM56-5 nacelle.
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. When the original aluminum alloy extrusions are not available,

equivalent parts can be made from the sheet material. The sheet
material must be of the same alloy and temper as the initial extrusion.
The area of the cross-section must be equal to, or more than that of
the extrusion, and the shape must be similar. It is preferable that an
equivalent be made in one piece. If the initial extrusion makes it
necessary to make an equivalent from two or more pieces, the gauge and
material specified in the applicable illustration must be used. When
the shape of an extrusion makes the build-up of an equivalent from
sheet material impossible, the equivalent may be machined from bar
stock of the same material specification and dimensions as the original
extrusion. It is not permitted to make an equivalent section from two
or more pieces to replace an extrusion that is used as an attachment
clip or fitting.
C. Types of Extruded Sections.
(1) Extrusion Type Figure Number

Angle 4
D. Extruded Section Index.
(1) Extrusion Number Figure Number

S700E0917 4 (Replaced by S700E1471)
S700E1471 4
6. Honeycomb Repair
A. Repairs for damage to the honeycomb structural materials are shown in

the Repair Section of this manual as follows.
(1) Inlet Cowl, Repairs, 54-10-00.
(2) Fan Cowl, Repairs, 54-20-00.
(3) Thrust Reverser, Repairs, 54-30-00.
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
7. Acoustic Treatment Zone Repairs. Refer to Figure 5.
A. General
Nacelle acoustic treatment zones decrease noise so that the engine

sound is not more than specified limits. Some acoustic treatment zones
are nacelle parts made to decrease noise. Some acoustic treatment zones
are parts covered with the material to decrease noise. The quantity of
noise that is decreased is less when an acoustic treatment zone is
damaged and repaired. The tables and equations that follow give the
limits of acoustic treatment zone repair areas. The engine sound will
not be more than specified limits if the repairs are in the repair
limits.
B. Instructions
Before you do a repair, measure the area that is damaged. Use the
correct table to find if the area is more than the limit in column A and
B. Measure the area of repairs to other acoustic treatment zones. The
acoustic loss limits in column A are for each blocked areas. The repair
limit in each section assumes other areas are acoustically blocked to
the limit specified in column A. The correct maximum permitted acoustic
loss (blocked) area is in column B. The maximum area assumes no other
sections are repaired/blocked. If the maximum limit is reached, then
each blocked limit does not apply to section.
(1) TABLE 1
Column A Column B Column C

Acoustic Zone (NOTE 1) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3)
Inlet 53 in.2 257 in.2 3,831 in.2
Fan Case and Reverser 84 in.2 320 in.2 6,045 in.2
NOTE 1: Maximum permitted blocked (repaired) area if all other

zones are repaired to their maximum.
NOTE 2: Maximum permitted blocked (repaired) area if no other zones

are repaired.
NOTE 3: Total treatment area used in calculations for part (2).
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) EQUATION 1
14.93 X (a) + 18.87 X (b) < 100
Where (a) is the percent area loss in the inlet treatment zone and
(b) is the percent area loss in the fan case/reverser treatment
zone.
Area loss (a) or (b) are entered in the equation as a percentage.

Example: “6.7” for 6.7% area loss.
EXAMPLE: TO CALCULATE PERCENT AREA LOSS FOR THE INLET.
a = repair area/total area X 100. The value for a 50 in2 repair

area will be 50/3831 X 100 = 1.3 (1.3%).
8. Adhesive Preparation
CHEMICALS.
NOTE: Table 2 gives the mixture and cure information for composite
repair adhesives.
Mixture:
Adhesive Parts by Pot Life Cure Cycle
Type Components Weight (Approx) (± 10°F)
EA934NA Part A 100 40 minutes at 77°F 7 days at 77°F (25°C)
Part B 33 (25°C) 2 hours at 200°F (93.3°C)
EA956 Part A 100 30 minutes at 77°F 5 days at 77°F (25°C)
Part B 58 (25°C) 2 hours at 200°F (93.3°C)
EA9390 Part A 100 2 hours at 77°F 220 minutes at
Part B 56 (25°C) 200°F (93.3°C)
EA9321 Part A 100 40 minutes at 7 days at 77°F (25°C)
Part B 50 77°F (25°C) 2 hours at 200°F (93.3°C)
Composite Repair Adhesives
Table 2
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Mixture:
Adhesive Parts by Pot Life Cure Cycle
Type Components Weight (Approx) (± 10°F)
EA9396/C2 Part A 100 90 minutes at 77°F 1 hour at 200°F (93.3°C)
Part B 30 (25°C)
EA9394 Part A 100 40 minutes at 77°F 5 days at 77°F (25°C)
Part B 17 (25°C) 1 hour at 160°F (72°C)
Composite Repair Adhesives
Table 2
9. Composite Ply Structure Repair
Refer to the Structural Identification section to find the number of plies

in a damaged area. When you make a repair, the repair plies are the same
as the number of damaged plies. You can use a plain weave fabric as an
alternative to the initial five harness ply. Use two plain weave plies for
each five harness ply. A fiberglass sanding ply is used for repairs to the
air passage surface. The sanding ply is installed on top of the repair
plies. The sanding ply is made smooth for primer and finish layers with
abrasive paper and prevents damage to the carbon fibers.
Make sure the initial skin and the repair materials are dry before you do
the repair. Water on the initial skin and the repair materials weakens the
repair. Make the repair area dry with a heat lamp at 190°-210°F
(88°-115°C) (less than the boil temperature of water) for a minimum of one
hour. There are drain holes in the bottom of the inlet cowl outer barrel.
The drain holes let the moisture drain from the inlet cowl. Reopen the
drain holes if they are covered by a repair.
10. Bag and Cure Procedure. Refer to Figure 6.
A. Introduction
This procedure gives instructions to bag and cure a composite structure

wet lay-up repair. This same procedure is done for prepreg repairs
without the use of bleeder cloth. The repair materials and equipment
are shown in Table 3 at the end of this procedure.
B. Instructions
(1) Put a layer of 1 mm thick porous parting film on the top of the
repair. Cut the parting film 3 in. (76,2 mm) more on all sides than
the edge of the repair.
(2) Put the thermocouples at an equal distance around the repair. Do

not let the thermocouples to touch the repair plies. Connect the
thermocouples to the correct recorder.
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(3) Put the layers of bleeder cloth on the porous parting film.
(a) Use one layer of bleeder cloth for each repair and sanding
ply.
(b) Cut the bleeder cloth 2 in. (50,8 mm) more on all sides than
the edge of the porous parting film.
NOTE: The layers of bleeder cloth are not necessary when a

repair is done with prepreg cloth.
(4) Put a 1 m sheet of nonporous parting film on the bleeder cloth (if
installed). Cut the nonporous parting film the same dimension as
the porous parting film.
(5) Put a silicone rubber sheet on the nonporous parting film.
(6) Put a heat blanket on the silicone rubber sheet. The heat blanket
must make an overlap of a minimum of 2 in. (50,8 mm) more than the
repair edges. Put the control thermocouple in the center of the
heat blanket. This thermocouple controls the temperature of the
cure procedure.
(7) Put four plies of fiberglass breather cloth or two plies of RC3000
breather cloth on the heat blanket. Cut the breather cloth larger
than the parting film.
(8) Put the tacky tape around the repair area. Put the tacky tape 2-6
in. (50,8-152,4 mm) more than the edge of the heat blanket. Put the
tacky tape around the flange of the vacuum probe.
(9) Put the vacuum probe on the surface of the breather cloth. Do not
put the probe on the top of a repair ply. The probe can make a dent
in the repair.
(10) Put the vacuum bag material on the repair area. Seal the edges of
the vacuum bag material with the tacky tape. Make pleats in the
vacuum bag material where necessary. Do not let sharp objects or
corners touch the vacuum bag material because the bag can break and
leak.
(11) Make a vacuum of 22 in. Hg (74.5 kPa) in the vacuum bag. Use a
vacuum pump.
(12) Disconnect the vacuum pump and do a test of the vacuum bag for
leakage. A maximum leakage of 5 in. Hg (16.9 kPa) in five minutes
is permitted.
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(13) Connect the vacuum pump and make a vacuum of 22 in. Hg (74.5 kPa)
in the vacuum bag. Do not disconnect the vacuum pump during the
cure procedure.
(14) Cure the repair with the heat blanket turned on. Refer to Table 2
for the correct temperature and cure time.
(15) When the repair is cured, remove all of the bag and cure material.
(16) Examine the repair. Pits, blisters, starved areas, or unwanted

resin are not permitted.
11. Repair Materials and Equipment. Refer to Table 3.
NOTE: You can use alternative materials with the same properties to
replace the items shown in Table 3.
DESCRIPTION DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER

Blanket, Heat ATACS 9000 V61426
Atacs Products, Inc.
850 South Cambridge Street
Seattle, WA 98108-4748
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Cloth, Bleeder Fiberglass Commercially Available
Cloth, Breather RC3000-10 V0F451
Richmond Aircraft Products, Inc.
13503 Pulmice St
Norwalk, CA 90650-5250
Phone: (562) 404-2440
www.richmondaircraft.com
Connector, Vacuum 1/8 in. Dia. Commercially Available
Film, Vacuum Bag 3-4 Mil Thick V0F451
Film, Parting Porous Commercially Available
Film, Parting Nonporous Commercially Available
Gage, Vacuum 0-22 in. Hg Commercially Available
(0-74.5 kPa)
Hose, Vacuum 1/8 in. Dia. Commercially Available
Probe, Temperature 32°-500°F Commercially Available
(0°-260°C)
Thermocouple
Bag and Cure Materials and Equipment
Table 3
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Pump, Vacuum 0-29 in. Hg Commercially Available
(0-97.9 kPa)
Sealant, Bag Tacky V53309
Schnee-Morehead
Chemicals, Inc.
111 North Nursery Road
P.O. Box 1305
Irving, TX 75060-3153
www.schnee-morehead.com
Sheet, Rubber Silicone Commercially Available
0.062-0.125 in.
(1,575-3,175mm)
Thick
Bag and Cure Materials and Equipment
Table 3
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SEALANT
SEAL BETWEEN TOUCHING METAL PARTS

C1S-296-00
Seal Between Metal Parts that Touch

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SEALANT COMES FLOW GUN

OUT THIS SIDE
INJECTION HOLE
FLOW GUN
BLOCK OFF WITH SPATULA
FINGER OR SPATULA
WHEN ONE OPENING
IS FILLED
CAVITY INJECTION SEAL HOLE INJECTION SEAL
INJECTION SEAL
C1S-297-00
APPLY SEALANT WITH FLOW GUN PRESS SEALANT INTO PLACE
Injection and Fillet Seal

Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
FLOW GUN
SPATULA
MASKING TAPE
MASKING
TAPE
DIRECTION OF FILL
APPLY SEALANT SMOOTH SEALANT

SLOT SEAL
SEALANT
SEALANT
C1S-298-00
(BOTH SIDES
OF WASHER)
FASTENER SEAL
Slot and Fastener Seal
Figure 3
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
"A" DIMENSION PART NUMBER

0.165 IN. (4,191 mm) S700E0917
0.195 IN. (4,953 mm) S700E1471
BREAK SHARP
0.950 IN. EDGES 0.005 IN.
(24,13 mm) (0,127 mm) MAXIMUM
A
0.03 R IN.
(0,762 mm)
0.060 IN.
(1,524 mm)
0.125 IN.
(3,175 mm)
PART NUMBER: S700E0917 OR S700E1471

MATERIAL: 2024-T42 ALUMINUM
ESTIMATED WEIGHT: 0.085 LB/FT OR 0.088 LB/FT
AREA: 0.070 SQ IN. OR 0.074 SQ IN.
C1S-299-00
Extruded Section - Angle

Figure 4
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Acoustic Treatment Zones

Figure 5
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Composite Repair Bag and Cure

Figure 6
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTIVE GRID ON A CORE SPLICE
1. General
This repair gives instructions to install a conductive grid across a core

repair splice. This repair is used on the inner skin side of the Fan Cowl
panels. The conductive grid gives electrical continuity if there is a
lightning strike. This repair is necessary for a core repair piece that is
larger than 10 sq. in. (64,5 sq cm).
2. Repair Instructions
A. Prepare the correct length of S700E0424 grid to cover the full length
of the core splice. Where conductive grids intersect, such as corners,
the grids must overlap a minimum of 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) and must touch
each other with unsupported adhesive between them.
B. Prepare one layer of FM350 NA Film Adhesive, approximately 2 in. (51

mm) wide. Put the adhesive film between the conductive grid and the
honeycomb core.
NOTE: You can heat tack the adhesive film on the core, if the
temperature of the adhesive film is not more than 200×F (93×C).
CHEMICALS.
C. Clean the conductive grid with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent
becomes dry.
NOTE: Wear clean gloves when you touch the grid.
D. Install the conductive grid.
(1) Prepare and install the core repair piece. (See the applicable
repair instructions).
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Rohr, Inc.,any otherof U.S.
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-
ROHR, INC.
(2) Install the conductive grid parallel to and in the center of the
splice. The conductive grid must touch the core on the inner side.
(See Figure 1). Attach the conductive grid to the honeycomb core
with unsupported adhesive.
E. Bag and cure the repair. (See the applicable repair instructions).
3. Inspect the Repair
Make sure the repair agrees with the requirements of the applicable repair
procedures and these instructions.
4. Repair Materials and Equipment

Solvent Isopropyl Alcohol Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
MIBK/MEK Blend V5E821
(60% Methyl Isobutyl Univar U.S.A., Inc.
Ketone/40% Methyl 532 E. Emaus Street
Ethyl Ketone Middletown, PA 17057-2200
Phone: (717) 944-7471
or www.univarusa.com
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
32100 Stephenson Hwy.
Madison Heights, MI 48071
Phone: (248) 583-9300
www.aerospace.henkel.com
Repair Materials and Equipment
Table 1 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Grid, Conductive S700E0424 V51563
Rohr Inc.
DBA Goodrich Aerostructures
850 Lagoon Dr
Chula Vista, CA 91910
(619) 691-2006
www.parts.asg.goodrich.com
Bonding Film Adhesive FM350 NA V28174
Supported Cytec Engineering Materials
Global Headquarters
Tempe Arizona
Phone: (480) 730-2000
www.cytec.com
Adhesive, Film EA9689 V33564
(Alternate) Unsupported Henkel Corporation
2850 Willow Pass Rd.
P.O. Box 312
Bay Point, CA 94565-0031
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Table 1 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Installation of the Conductive Grid

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
WATER BREAK TEST
1. General
A water break test is used to find oil or grease on surfaces that will
bond. Do this test after surfaces that will bond are cleaned.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU PUT WATER ON A SURFACE ADJACENT TO HONEYCOMB

MATERIAL. IF WATER ENTERS THE HONEYCOMB IT IS DIFFICULT TO REMOVE
AND THE REPAIR WILL NOT BE FULLY DRY.
2. Procedure
A. Put de-ionized or distilled water in a clean polyethylene bottle with a

small spray nozzle.
B. Spray the water onto the prepared surface until the surface is fully
covered. Alternatively, apply the water on the surface with a clean
cloth. The water must make a thin layer.
C. Keep the water on the surface for 30 seconds. The water must stay on
all of the surface. Areas where the water divides into sections or
beads are not permitted.
D. Do the cleaning procedure again if the water divides into sections or

beads in less than 30 seconds. Do the water test until the water stays
on the surface and does not break.
E. After you do the test, wipe the surface dry with a clean dry cloth.
F. Let the surface dry for 30 minutes or more before you bond it.

Cloth, Wiper Cotton Commercially Available
Spray Bottle Polyethylene Commercially Available
Table 1
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPLACE NACELLE MARKINGS
1. Introduction
This Repair gives the procedure to install markings on the nacelle

components. Three different types of markings (stencil, transfer, and
decal) are used on the nacelle.
Sheet 5.0 thru 5.14, Sheet 6.0 thru 6.24 and Sheet 7.0 thru 7.12 are used
in this repair.
This repair has different steps (3.B, 3.C, 3.D., 3.E. and 3.F) depending
on the type of marking that is being installed:
3.A. Removal of stencil, transfer or decal markings.
3.B. Installation of stencil markings.
3.C. Installation of high temperature stencil markings (Item No. -49

and -51).
3.D. Installation of transfer markings.
3.E. Installation of decal markings (-1001, -1003, -1005, -1009, -1012,

-1013, -1015, -1017, -1019, -1021, -1023 or -1025) Optional Danger
Marking Decals).
3.F. Installation of label plates (Item No. -61, -63).
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
2. General Notes and Flag Notes for Markings
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3. Replace Nacelle Markings
A. Removal of stencil, transfer or decal markings.
WARNING: WEAR APPLICABLE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) WHEN YOU

DO THIS TASK. BEFORE YOU USE PPE, READ, UNDERSTAND AND OBEY
ALL INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS USE. THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE
INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER, YOUR EMPLOYER AND
GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS. YOU CAN GET INJURED IF YOU DO NOT USE
PPE. GET INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER ON WHICH PPE IS
NECESSARY.
(1) Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
(2) Remove the marking with silicon carbide abrasive paper. If

necessary, use a plastic spatula to remove the remaining marking.
Do not remove the paint below the marking.
CAUTION: WEAR LINT FREE COTTON GLOVES WHEN YOU TOUCH THE CLEANED OR
TREATED SURFACES. BARE HANDS CAN CAUSE CONTAMINATION.
(3) If you cannot remove the marking easily, do the following:
(a) Put permacel P-112 masking tape around the edge of the
marking.
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CHEMICALS. THESE
INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER,
THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET (MSDS), AND GOVERNMENT
REGULATIONS. CHEMICALS MAY CAUSE INJURY TO YOU OR MAKE
YOU SICK WHEN SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT OBEYED. AN
MSDS GIVES INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE,
CHEMICALS.
CAUTION: DO NOT LET TURCO 5351 STRIPPER SOLUTION DRY ON THE

SURFACE.
(b) Put Turco 5351 stripper solution on the surface of the marking
with an acid brush. Let the stripper solution stay on the
surface for 15 to 20 minutes. Brush the stripper solution as
necessary to let clean solution touch the marking.
(c) Apply more Turco 5351 stripper solution on the surface to

loosen any remaining marking.
(d) Remove the Turco 5351 stripper solution from the surface with
a clean cloth wet with distilled water. Wipe the area dry with
a clean cloth.
(e) Remove the masking tape.
(f) Clean the area with a clean cotton cloth made moist with
solvent. Wipe the area with a clean lint free cotton cloth
before the solvent becomes gas.
B. Installation of stencil markings.
(1) Get stencils or make stencils from 0.015 inch (0,381 mm) thick
stencil board.
NOTE: You can re-use stencils made from 0.015 inch (0,381 mm)
thick stencil board.
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(3) Put the stencil in position.
(4) Mix the paint. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Use a color of paint that gives a contrast with the surface
color.
(5) Use a soft nylon bristle brush or a spray gun to apply one layer of
paint.
(6) Remove the stencil and remove the unwanted paint with a cotton
swab.
(7) Cure the paint. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(8) Apply a polyurethane coating.
CHEMICALS.
(a) Mix the polyurethane coating. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions.
(b) Apply one layer of the polyurethane coating over the marking
with a soft nylon bristle brush. Do not use a spray gun to
apply polyurethane coating.
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(c) Cure the polyurethane coating. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions.
C. Installation of high temperature stencil markings

(Item No. -49 and -51).
(1) Get stencils or make stencils from 0.015 inch (0,381 mm) thick
stencil board.
NOTE: You can re-use stencils made from 0.015 inch (0,381 mm)
thick stencil board.
becomes dry.
(3) Put the stencil in position.
(4) Mix the Sermatel High Temperature Ink. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTE: Use a color of ink that gives a contrast with the surface
color.
(5) Use a soft nylon bristle brush to apply one layer of the ink.
(6) Remove the stencil(s) and remove the unwanted ink with a cotton
swab.
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(7) Cure the ink. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Installation of transfer markings.
(1) Get the transfer (Refer to PPIPC 11-24-00 and 11-24-71).
NOTE You can use stencil markings if you cannot get transfer
markings.
becomes dry.
(3) Mix one part activator to one part distilled water. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) Put the transfer in the activator solution for 20 to 30 seconds.
(5) Remove the wet transfer from the activator solution and put the
transfer in position.
(6) Use a squeegee and move from the center of the transfer and work
out to the edges to remove unwanted solution and air pockets.
(7) Use a rubber roller to make sure the transfer is equally and
correctly applied.
(8) Use a sponge wet with distilled water to flush unwanted solution.
CAUTION DO NOT TOUCH THE TRANSFER FOR TWO MINUTES BEFORE YOU REMOVE
THE BACKING.
(9) Remove the backing and clean the edges of the transfer with a
sponge wet with distilled water to remove unwanted solution.
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(10) Let the transfer cure for three to four days.
NOTE: The transfer is easily damaged if it is hit by rain or

touched immediately after you apply it. The transfer will
have a satisfactory bond in two days. It will fully cure in
three to four days.
(11) Apply a polyurethane coating.
CHEMICALS.

instructions.
(b) Apply one layer of the polyurethane coating over the marking
with a soft nylon bristle brush. Do not use a spray gun to
apply polyurethane coating.

instructions.
(d) Do an adhesion test as follows:
1 Apply a 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) wide strip of #250 masking tape
to the transfer surface. Remove the tape in a sudden
vertical movement to the surface. If any of the transfer
is removed by the tape, do steps 2.A. and 2.D. again.
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
E. Installation of decal markings (-1001, -1003, -1005, -1009, -1012,

-1013, -1015, -1017, -1019, -1021, -1023 or -1025) Optional Danger
Marking Decals.
becomes dry.
(2) Remove the backing paper from the decal.
(3) Place the decal on the area and apply firm pressure with your hand
or aid.
(4) Apply a polyurethane coating around the edge of the decal.

instructions.
(b) Apply one layer of the polyurethane coating over the edges of
the decal marking with a soft nylon bristle brush. Do not use
a spray gun to apply polyurethane coating.

instructions.
(d) Do an adhesion test as follows:
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1 Apply a 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) wide strip of #250 masking tape
to the decal surface. Remove the tape in a sudden vertical
movement to the surface. If any of the decal is removed by
the tape, do steps 2.A. and 2.E. again.
F. Installation of label plates (Item No. -61, -63).
(1) Clean the area and label plate with a clean lint-free cloth and the
solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before
the solvent becomes dry.
(2) Mix the sealant. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Apply the sealant to the mating surfaces of the area to be bonded
and to the label plate. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) Cure the label plate. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Activator BSB Label/C Transferts Industrial et
Activator Publicitaires (T.I.P.)
Z.I. Nord
Rue Philippe Lebon
B.P. 411-85010
La Roche-Sur-Yon
Cedex France
Activator (Alternate.) DISA Label/FRS Transferts Industrial et
Activator Publicitaires (T.I.P.)
Brush Nylon Bristle Commercially Available
Table 1 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Brush Acid Commercially Available
Disposable Stencil Set #3 Alternate Commercially Available
Gothic Style
Distilled water Commercially Available
Gloves Cotton, Lint Free Commercially Available
Ink, High Temperature Sermatel V58913
No. 409 Black Sermatech International
No. 739 White 1566 Medical Drive, Suite 300
Pottstown, PA 19464
Phone: 610.819.1270
www.sermatech.com
Paper, Abrasive 150, 180, 280, Commercially Available
320, 400 Grit
Silicon
Carbide
Paint-Topcoat Black V0KXA5
Base-Gloss 443-3 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Converter X-304 East Water St.
Thinner TL-29 Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Base-Alt, Semi-Gloss 453-3 Phone: (847) 625-4200
Base-Alt, Flat 463-3 Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Base-Gloss 446-22 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Catalyst X530
(Alternate)
Base-Semi Gloss 456-22 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Catalyst X462
(Alternate)
Base-Flat 466-22 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Catalyst X541
(Alternate)
Paint Spray Gun Commercially Available
Polyurethane Coating Clear V0KXA5
Base 683-3-2 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Catalyst X-310A
Reducer TL-59
Table 1 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Roller Rubber Commercially Available
Sealant PR1741 1/2 V83574
PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
24811 Avenue Rockefeller
Valencia, Ca. 91355-3468
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
www.ppgaerospace.com
Sealant (Alternate) PR1750 V83574
Sealant (Alternate) CS5500 V83574
99 percent pure
or
(60% Methyl Univar U.S.A., Inc.
Isobutyl Ketone/ 532 E. Emaus Street
40% Methyl Ethyl Middletown, PA 17057-2200
Ketone Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Spatula Plastic Commercially Available
Squeegee Rubber Commercially Available
Stripper Turco 5351 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Tape, masking 1.0 inch wide Commercially Available
No. 250
Tape, masking Permacel P-112 Commercially Available

Table 1 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.0
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.1
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.2
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.3
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.4
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.5
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.6
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.7
CFM56-5B
Page 21
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.8
CFM56-5B
Page 22
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.9
CFM56-5B
Page 23
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.10
CFM56-5B
Page 24
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.11
CFM56-5B
Page 25
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.12
CFM56-5B
Page 26
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.13
CFM56-5B
Page 27
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 5.14
CFM56-5B
Page 28
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.0
CFM56-5B
Page 29
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.1
CFM56-5B
Page 30
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.2
CFM56-5B
Page 31
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.3
CFM56-5B
Page 32
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.4
CFM56-5B
Page 33
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.5
CFM56-5B
Page 34
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.6
CFM56-5B
Page 35
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.7
CFM56-5B
Page 36
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.8
CFM56-5B
Page 37
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.9
CFM56-5B
Page 38
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.10
CFM56-5B
Page 39
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.11
CFM56-5B
Page 40
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.12
CFM56-5B
Page 41
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.13
CFM56-5B
Page 42
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.14
CFM56-5B
Page 43
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.15
CFM56-5B
Page 44
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.16
CFM56-5B
Page 45
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.17
CFM56-5B
Page 46
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.18
CFM56-5B
Page 47
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.19
CFM56-5B
Page 48
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.20
CFM56-5B
Page 49
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.21
CFM56-5B
Page 50
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.22
CFM56-5B
Page 51
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.23
CFM56-5B
Page 52
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.24
CFM56-5B
Page 53
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 6.25
CFM56-5B
Page 54
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.0
CFM56-5B
Page 55
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.1
CFM56-5B
Page 56
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.2
CFM56-5B
Page 57
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.3
CFM56-5B
Page 58
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.4
CFM56-5B
Page 59
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.5
CFM56-5B
Page 60
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.6
CFM56-5B
Page 61
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.7
CFM56-5B
Page 62
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.8
CFM56-5B
Page 63
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.9
CFM56-5B
Page 64
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.10
CFM56-5B
Page 65
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.11
CFM56-5B
Page 66
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Nacelle Markings
SHEET 7.12
CFM56-5B
Page 67
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 68
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
EDGE EROSION: CHAMFER & SEAL REPAIR
1. General
A. Repairs up to 0.50 inch (12,7 mm) in length and 0.02 inch (0,5 mm) in
depth may be effected on damaged panel by filling the erosion area with
adhesive filler. Trimming the inlet/fan cowl/thrust reverser leading
edge is accomplished with the use of router guide and cutter. The inlet
cowl edge trimming may require removal of outer barrel. The fan cowl
edge trimming may require removal of the metal edge protector (if
applicable). The tool is made of steel with a threaded end to attach to
a router motor. The carbide cutter passes through the router center.
(See Figure 2.)
2. Preparation of Surface for Repair
CAUTION: DO NOT TAPER OR BREAK GRAPHITE FIBERS FROM EXPOSED GRAPHITE PLY.
WARNING: WEAR APPLICABLE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) WHEN YOU DO

THIS TASK. BEFORE YOU USE PPE, READ, UNDERSTAND AND OBEY ALL
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS USE. THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE
NECESSARY.
A. Use silicon carbide abrasive paper to feather the edge of the exterior
coating around the repair area.
NOTE: Use care not to penetrate the surface of the composite when
removing the exterior finish.
B. Mask any exterior anodized surface.
C. Where aerodynamic sealant has been applied to leading edges, fully

remove sealant in these areas by cutting the bulk of it away.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
D. Make rough the repair area and remove unwanted sealant by using
320-grit abrasive paper or fine Scotch Brite pad moistened wet with
solvent. Trim loose fibers from roughed area.
E. Remove unwanted material with clean compressed air.
CHEMICALS.
F. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3. Apply Adhesive Filler
CHEMICALS.
A. Mix EA956 adhesive per manufacturer’s instruction. Add 15 percent by

weight of 1/32 inch (0,794 mil) end milled glass fibers and mix
thoroughly.
NOTE: Pot life of 40 minutes at 75°F (24°C) for a 1 lb (453,59 g)

quantity of resin.
NOTE: EA934NA without glass fibers may be used as an alternative to

EA956.
B. Apply adhesive to repair area with a small brush until flush with
adjacent area. Remove all excess adhesive prior to cure.
C. Cure for 24 hours at 70 to 80°F (21 to 27°C) or for 2 hours at 70 to

80°F (21 to 27°C) followed by 1 hour at 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C).
D. Make rough the filled area and the adjacent area with 150-180-grit
abrasive paper.
NOTE: Do not penetrate the surface of the composite material.
E. Remove unwanted material with clean compressed air.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
4. Trim Leading Edge of Inlet/Fan Cowl/Thrust Reverser
A. Assemble router guide with cutter and router motor with 1/4 inch (6,350
mil) collet. (See Figure 2.)
B. Place router guide assembly on Inlet/Fan cowl or Thrust Reverser

leading edge. (See Figure 2.)
C. Trim edge of Inlet/Fan cowl/Thrust Reverser. (See Figure 1.)
D. Remove unwanted material with clean compressed air.
CHEMICALS.
E. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
5. Apply Adhesive on Trimmed Edge
CHEMICALS.MIX EA956 OR EA934NA ADHESIVE PER MANUFACTURER’S
INSTRUCTIONS.
A. Apply adhesive to cut leading edge to prevent moisture entrapment and

edge erosion.
B. Cure for 24 hours at 70 to 80°F (21 to 27°C) or for 2 hours at 70 to

80°F (21 to 27°C) followed by 1 hour at 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C).
6. Paint Repaired Areas
A. Apply surface paint per applicable instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
7. Inspection of Repair
A. Visually inspect completed repair for irregularities. If low areas are

found, reapply, cure, and make rough per applicable sections of this
repair.

Adhesive, Epoxy EA956 V33564
Base Part A Henkel Corporation
Catalyst Part B 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Alternate Adhesive
Adhesive, Epoxy EA934NA V33564
Catalyst Part B
Chopped Fiberglass Type 181/120 Commercially Available
Lamp, Heat 180°- 250°F Commercially Available
(82°- 121°C)
Milled Fiberglass 1/32 inch (0,794 mil) Commercially Available
Paper, Abrasive 150,180,320-grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Router Guide Locally Fabricated
Scotch Brite pad Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
Table 1 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Spatula Metal or Commercially Available
Plastic
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 1 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Typical Edge Erosion

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Router Guide Assembly

Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
EDGE EROSION: PROTECTIVE PAINT REPAIR
NOTE: Laminar X500 paint (8W5 base/50C3 curing agent/66C20 thinner) is for
filling fiber porosities and providing erosion resistance and a
smoother finish. It is recommended that this paint application be
performed after the leading edge is repaired per the procedure in the
applicable repair.
9. Preparation of repair area for paint application.
A. If an inlet cowl outer barrel repair has been done, remove the
aerodynamic sealant between the lipskin and the outer barrel leading
edge. If a fan cowl repair has been done, remove the aerodynamic
sealant between the metal edge protector and the fan cowl door edge, if
applicable.
CHEMICALS.
B. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
C. Apply masking tape to prevent paint overspray. See Figure 1.
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Laminar X-500 Paint Application

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
10. Preparation of the X500 Laminar Paint:
CHEMICALS.
A. Agitate the base (8W5) for 5 minutes.
B. Add, while stirring, 4 parts-by-weight of base (8W5) to 1 part of

curing agent (50C3) into a nonabsorbent container.
C. Add 40 percent-by-weight of Laminar X500 Fast Reducer (66C20) and mix

thoroughly until a uniform viscosity is attained.
D. Allow the mixed material to cure at least 15 minutes before

application.
NOTE: Pot life for mixed material is approximately 6 hours at 70°-75°F

(21°-29°C).
11. Application of X500 Laminar Paint:
CHEMICALS.
A. Apply 6 coatings of Laminar X500 paint in two coat steps with an

overlap of 0.30 inch (7,62 mm). Allow the first two coatings to dry at
least 5 minutes before applying the next two coatings. Allow at least
another 5 minutes before applying the last two coatings. See Figure 1.
B. Allow material to dry 1 to 4 hours at 70°F-75°F (21°C-29°C) Remove the

masking tape after repair has cured.
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
12. If paint has been applied to the inlet cowl outer barrel or fan cowl
leading edge, reapply the aerodynamic sealant per the applicable Repair.

Brush, Paint Commercially Available
Cloth, Wiping Commercially Available
Container Metal or Plastic Commercially Available
Paint Laminar X-500 V0KXA5
8W5 Base Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
50C3 Curing Agent East Water St.
66C20 Thinner Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Spray Gun Commercially Available
Tape, Masking 2.0 inches (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 201
EDGE EROSION: PROTECTIVE CERAMIC COATING REPAIR
13. General
This procedure gives instructions to apply a ceramic-epoxy coating on the

outboard side of the Inlet Cowl, Fan Cowl or Thrust Reverser to prevent
erosion of the carbon laminate leading edge due to grit or rain. The
repair removes the damaged or cracked paint and applies a 6-8 mil ceramic
coating. The additional application of a clear coat protects against UV
damage and resists grit erosion. Application of an improved aerodynamic
sealant forward of the inlet and fan cowl composite leading edges will
provide additional erosion protection. Repair any damage per the
appropriate section of the SRM prior to applying the ceramic coating.
Color matching of the ceramic coating can be accomplished by contacting
the manufacturer.
A. Prepare the area for application of coating.
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE THE EXISTING PAINT. DO NOT DAMAGE
THE EXPANDED COPPER SCREEN (ECS) OR THE GRAPHITE FIBERS
UNDERNEATH THE PAINT PRIMER.
(1) Remove the aerodynamic sealant from between the lipskin and outer
barrel; see Figure 201 or Fan Cowl metal edge protector and the fan
cowl door edge, see Figure 202.
becomes dry.
(3) Apply masking tape to cover the rivet row and prevent coating from
covering rivet heads. Do not apply ceramic coating over heads of
Monel rivets.
(4) Remove paint and primer from the leading edge area. Do not abrade
into the expanded copper screen. Lightly sand areas that have been
in contact with the silicone aerodynamic sealant.
becomes dry. The ceramic coating will not adhere to a
silicone-contaminated surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: IF DAMAGE TO THE GRAPHITE PLIES EXISTS THEN REPAIR PER THE
SRM PRIOR TO PERFORMING THIS REPAIR.
(6) Option: Break corner 0.020 inch (0,50 mm) radius or chamfer the
leading edges to 45°x 0.50 inch (1,27 mm) with 150-grit Silicon
carbide abrasive paper. See Figure 201, 202 or 203, options 1 or 2.
(7) Perform water break free test per SRM 54-02-02. If the part is new
or a spare that has not seen service then wipe clean with MEK
solvent or equivalent.
B. Prepare the Ceramic coating.
NOTE: IF DESIRED CONTACT THE MANUFACTURER TO COLOR MATCH THE CERAMIC

COATING. THE UNOPENED CERAMIC COATING PART A AND PART B HAS
UNLIMITED SHELF LIFE, BUT IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE COATING BE
USED WITHIN 2 YEARS FROM DATE OF DELIVERY FOR BEST RESULTS.
CAUTION: THE CERAMIC COATING PART A CONTAINS A HIGH AMOUNT OF CERAMIC

PARTICLES (84%) WHICH MUST BE PLACED INTO FULL SUSPENSION
PRIOR TO MIXING WITH CATALYST PART B. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO
USE COATING IN QUANTITIES OF PINTS OR QUARTS. IT IS NOT
REQUIRED TO USE THE MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDED CYCLONE PAINT
SHAKER. FIELD TRIALS HAVE INDICATED THAT THE STANDARD PAINT
SHAKERS AT OPERATORS OR OVERHAUL SHOPS WORK WELL FOR SMALL
APPLICATIONS USING PINTS OR QUARTS.
(1) Shake part A thoroughly until all ceramic particles are suspended
in the resin. Generally a four to six minute shake at 72°F (22°C)
will place the ceramic particles into suspension. Failure to
properly mix part A will prevent ceramic coating from performing or
curing properly.
NOTE: The time required to put ceramic particles into full

suspension varies with according to temperature and length
of material storage time (shelf storage). It can take up to
30 minutes for part A material that has sat on the shelf.
REGARDLESS OF TIME NEEDED, SHAKE ALL CERAMIC MATERIAL PART
A INTO SUSPENSION PRIOR TO PROCEEDING. Shaking the can for
extended periods of time will cause the material to get
warm. This can cause a reduced pot-life. This is especially
noticeable for larger batches. For kits that have sat on
the shelf for extended periods of time, it is recommended
that Part A be shaken for 30 minutes. Let the material cool
to ambient temperature for 4 hours prior to admixing. Then
shake again for 5 minutes immediately prior to admixing.
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) Examine the can to assure all solids are in suspension prior to
proceeding with the mixing step.
CAUTION: POUR PART A INTO PART B
(3) Combine the ceramic coating by pouring part A into part B Catalyst.
Ensure all of part A is poured into part B. Mix with a disposable
wooden tool. Shake until both part A and parts B are thoroughly
mixed together. DO NOT OVER SHAKE. Over shaking can cause a heat
build up and exothermic reaction. Shaking time is temperature
dependent. Generally a two to four minute shake at 72°F (22°C)
should thoroughly mix the components.
CAUTION: POT LIFE OF MIXED CERAMIC COATING IS APPROXIMATELY 4 TO 6

HOURS AT 72°F (22°C). COLDER TEMPERATURES WILL INCREASE POT
LIFE AND WARMER TEMPERATURES WILL DECREASE POT LIFE. KEEP
CANS OUT OF DIRECT SUNLIGHT TO PREVENT HEAT BUILD UP.
(4) Thinning is not normally required. If thinning is required for

viscosity reduction, use MEK or Acetone or Isopropanol 99% pure.
Only 15% of the total solution are epoxy resin and the resin is the
only ingredient that can be thinned. DO NOT THIN CERAMIC COATING
MORE THAN 5% BY TOTAL VOLUME. DO NOT OVER THIN. Be Careful, coating
is easy to over thin. Over thinning dilutes the high solids and
creates excessive over spray and can cause some color changes.
(5) Strain shaken ceramic coating with a standard paint strainer and
pour the coating in the spray equipment.
NOTE: Spray coating for best results using conventional, airless,

HVLP or cup gun. The air source must be dry. The compressed
air source should be outfitted with air dryers as needed to
supply moisture-free air. Use pressure feed equipment such
HVLP equipment or Binks 2001 spray equipment with a 563CVT
needle, 63CVT fluid nozzle and 63PB air nozzle. Airless:
use reversible carbide tip with orifice size of 0.019 to
0.021 inches (0,482 to 0,533 mm). If applying with a
roller, use short nap such as 0.25 inch (6,35 mm). Roller
or brush application will not produce the best aesthetic
results but are acceptable.
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C. Test equipment an coating thickness.
(1) Spray 1 coat (2 passes) of ceramic coating to piece(s) of prepared

aluminum sheet using the equipment set up for the repair. Practice
obtaining the proper thickness and various application techniques.
CAUTION: APPLY CERAMIC COATING ONLY IF THE SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AND

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE ARE ABOVE 40°F (4,4°C). NO
APPLICATION OF CERAMIC COATING IS PERMITTED WHEN SUBSTRATE
IS WET OR WHEN RELATIVE HUMIDITY IS GREATER THAN 85%.
MOISTURE WILL INHIBIT THE CATALYST REACTION AND THE CERAMIC
COATING WILL NOT CURE OR PERFORM PROPERLY.
(2) Use a Wet Film Thickness Gauge 1 to 80 mil scale (25-2000 Micron
Scale) to measure the coating thickness, 6 to 8 mils (152 to 203
microns). Note that the ceramic material has an extremely high
solids content (84%). Therefore the final film thickness is
extremely sensitive to application technique. The optimum dry film
thickness for leading edge protection is 6 to 8 mils (152 to 203
microns). If coating is applied too thick it will crack on an in
service unit.
NOTE: Make sure you obtain the proper thickness of the coating
before you apply the coating for the repair for the leading
edge.
D. Apply ceramic coating to the leading edge.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A TACK RAG ON THE PREPARED AREA. CONTAMINATION OF

THE SURFACE WILL RESULT AND THE COATING WILL PINHOLE.
(1) Make sure masking tape is over the rivet heads. Use figures 201 or
Figure 202 as guidelines and mask over the location of the rivet
hole pattern on the Inlet Cowl or Fan Cowl leading edge. The Thrust
Reverser leading edge is masked aft of the forward edge
approximately 0.5 inch (12, 7 mm) see Figure 203.
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: APPLY CERAMIC COATING ONLY IF THE SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AND

AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE ARE ABOVE 40°F (4,4°C). NO
APPLICATION OF CERAMIC COATING IS PERMITTED WHEN SUBSTRATE
IS WET OR WHEN RELATIVE HUMIDITY IS GREATER THAN 85%.
MOISTURE WILL INHIBIT THE CATALYST REACTION AND THE CERAMIC
COATING WILL NOT CURE OR PERFORM PROPERLY.
(2) Apply one coat (2 passes) of ceramic coating to the leading edge
area. Coating thickness will be 6 to 8 mils (152 to 203 microns).
Measure thickness in several areas using a wet film thickness
gauge. Do not apply coating more than 9 mils (229 microns) thick.
It is better to have the coating thinner than thicker. The optimum
dry film thickness for leading edge protection is 6 to 8 mils (152
to 203 microns).
NOTE: If the ceramic coating was applied too thick, greater than
9 mils, then the material may experience some micro
cracking during service. During field trials it was shown
that the micro cracking of thick coatings still protected
the leading edge from erosion and pieces did not fall off
the leading edge. Reapplication of the coating may not be
necessary unless for aesthetic purposes imposed by the
operator.
(3) Some pinholes may occur in the coating and are considered
acceptable by most operators, although a high number of pinholes
indicate a contaminated surface prior to application. A small
number of pinholes will not inhibit the edge erosion properties of
the coating. If the number of pinholes exceeds operator
expectations immediately wipe the area with a clean cloth and
solvent. Remove all coating in affected area or the entire surface.
Reapply coating per the appropriate sections of this repair.
(4) Remove masking tape approximately 10-20 minutes after coating

application. This will allow the coating to flow to a uniform slope
with the existing paint.
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(5) Fully cure the ceramic coating; see Figure 204 chart “Cure time
versus Temperature.” Cure time is temperature dependent. The
coating has a touch dry finish within approximately 3 hours at 72°F
(22°C). The coating has a 70% cure in 12 hours. Cure times lengthen
at lower temperatures and shorter cure times at higher
temperatures. Allow the coating to cure a minimum of 4 hours at the
original temperature and humidity when applied. Coating will sag
and run if moved into a dry room too quickly after application.
Record the temperature and humidity.
(6) Clean up equipment before the coating hardens in sprayer. Purge and
clean spray equipment within 15 minutes of the final spray. Flush
equipment with Acetone, MEK or Isopropanol 99% pure until solvent
sprays clear. Disassemble and clean equipment to manufacturer
recommendations. Material left in spray equipment will solidify
and damage equipment. Use precautionary measures applicable to any
catalyzed material.
E. Apply Clear Polyurethane coating within 12 to 18 hours.
NOTE: The Shelf life of each unmixed polyurethane component in closed

containers at 40 to 100°F (5 to 38°C) is:
683-3-2 Polyurethane: 1 Year

X-310A Catalyst: 1 Year
TL-59 Reducer 2 Years
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A TACK RAG ON THE CERAMIC COATING. DO NOT APPLY
ANY SOLVENTS TO THE CERAMIC SURFACE. THE NEW CERAMIC COATED
SURFACE IS READY FOR CLEAR POLYURETHANE.
(1) Obey the manufacturer instructions to mix the polyurethane

coating, catalyst, and reducer. Let the mixture stand for 15
minutes. The best conditions to mix and apply the clear
polyurethane coating are 60 to 95°F (15 to 35°C) at a relative
humidity of 35 to 75 percent.
NOTE: The Pot life of the polyurethane coating mixture is 4 hours

at 77°F (25°C).
(2) Apply one coating of clear polyurethane coating mixture over the
new ceramic coating. Overlap polyurethane coating 0.25 in. (6,35
mm) aft of previous ceramic coating. Clear polyurethane shall be
applied with a SOFT BRISTLE brush instead of a spray gun. Practice
applying clear polyurethane on previous ceramic coating test piece
to ensure proper application method.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE A SPRAY GUN TO APPLY CLEAR POLYURETHANE.
(3) Let the clear polyurethane coating dry in the air for 15 minutes
before you move it into a dry room. At 77°F (25°C) the coating is
dry to touch in 3 hours & dry hard in 8 hours.
NOTE: It is not necessary to fully cure the clear polyurethane

coating after a repair. The polyurethane does not change
the strength of the structure.
(4) After full cure, make sure the clear coat is applied correctly. Do
a visual examination of the polyurethane coating. Reapply clear
coat as required.
F. Repairs of the Ceramic coating after full cure.
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(1) Pinhole repairs: Abrade coating pinhole areas with appropriate

silicon carbide abrasive paper to remove contamination. Repair by
wiping with solvent and then reapply ceramic coating and clear
polyurethane per appropriate sections of this repair document.
(2) Large area repairs: Remove the remaining damaged ceramic coating
by using appropriate silicon carbide abrasive paper. Do not damage
existing ECS or graphite epoxy skin. Repair by wiping area clean
with solvent. Reapply ceramic coating and clear polyurethane per
appropriate sections of this repair document.
G. Apply the Aerodynamic sealant to leading edge area.
(1) Make sure that old sealant has been successfully removed from joint
area. See step 2.A. (1)
NOTE: It is not necessary to use a primer for the PR1995 sealant.

The PR1995 sealant does not require a primer and also bonds
very well to areas where silicone sealants previously were
used.
(2) Apply PR1995 aerodynamic sealant to the joints between the lip
segment and the outer barrel. The edge of the PR1995 aerodynamic
sealant should be applied flush with the edge of the leading edge
laminate. The entire leading edge of the laminate should be covered
by the sealant to form an into the wind slope effect. See figures
201 and Figure 202.
(3) Apply PR1995 aerodynamic sealant to the joints between the Fan Cowl
Metal Edge Protector and the fan Cowl door forward edge. The edge
of the PR1995 aerodynamic sealant should be applied flush with the
edge of the leading edge laminate. The entire leading edge of the
laminate should be covered by the sealant to form an into the wind
slope effect.
NOTE: It is not necessary to apply aerodynamic sealant to the

Thrust Reverser leading edge. The Thrust Reverser leading
edges do not have joints for aerodynamic sealants.
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Ceramic Coating CeRam-Kote 54 TZM V0U675
Ceram-Kote Coatings, INC.
P.O. Box 2119
1800 Industrial Drive
Big Spring, Texas, 79720-7894
Phone: (800) 543-2326
www.ceram-kote.com
Sealant PR1995 V83574
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
99 percent pure
or
Ketone/40% Methyl Ethyl 532 E. Emaus Street
Ketone Middletown, PA 17057-2200
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Brush Nylon Bristle (soft) Commercially Available
Spray Equipment Paint Commercially Available
Polyurethane Clear V0KXA5
Coating: Base 683-3-2 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Catalyst X-310A East Water St.
Reducer TL-59 Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Masking Tape #250 Commercially Available
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 21
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Wet Film 1 to 80 mil Scale Commercially Available
Thickness Gauge (25 to 2000 Microns) Commercially Available
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 22
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Outer Barrel Edge Erosion Ceramic Coating Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 23
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Fan Cowl Leading Edge Erosion Ceramic Coating Repair

Figure 202 (Sheet 1 of 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 24
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Fan Cowl Leading Edge Erosion Ceramic Coating Repair - Option 1

CFM56-5B
Page 25
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Fan Cowl Leading Edge Erosion Ceramic Coating Repair - Option 2

CFM56-5B
Page 26
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Thrust Reverser Leading Edge Erosion Ceramic Coating Repair

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 27
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Cure Time Versus Temperature

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 28
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
SEALANT PREPARATION
1. Introduction
This procedure gives instructions on how to mix and prepare the DOW
CORNING sealant, DC90-006, for use with repairs on nacelle components.
Kits consist of the proper proportions of base compound and accelerator.
All the kit contents are to be mixed. When sealant is supplied in full
containers, mix 10 parts-by-weight of accelerator or catalyst with 100
parts-by-weight of base compound. The list of materials and instructions
to apply this sealant for repairs are given in the related SRM repair
section. It is necessary to apply DOW CORNING primer PR-1200 and allow to
dry before sealant is applied.
2. Machine Mixing of DC90-006 Sealant
CHEMICALS.
A. Remove air from the base in standard vacuum equipment for 2 hours at
26-29 inches of mercury (88-98 kPa).
B. Use a Semco Pressure Mixer (Model 1350 or 1378) and mix 100
parts-by-weight of DC90-006 base with 10 parts-by-weight of DC90-006-2
catalyst.
C. Cover the container to prevent contamination of the mixture.
NOTE: The pot life of the mixture is 2 hours maximum.
3. Hand Mixing of DC90-006 Sealant
A. Slowly mix the accelerator into the base compound and fully mix for
approximately 7-10 minutes. Be sure to remove mixture from sides and
bottom of the container to include all the compound in the mixture and
to make sure of a correct mix.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. Regularly remove the paddle to permit all unmixed compound to mix

fully. Slow mixing by hand is recommended. For best results, remove air
from the product in a standard vacuum equipment for 30 minutes at 26-29
inches of mercury (88-98 kPa).
NOTE: The pot life of the mixture is 2 hours maximum.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
A. Alternate Consumables
These cleaning materials can be used as a substitute for the cleaners/
solvents specified in the repairs or other sections of this manual.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control


ROHR, INC.
SURFACE FINISH REPAIR
1. General
This procedure gives the instructions to repair the surface finish of the
inlet cowl, fan cowl, and thrust reverser. This procedure has four sets of
instructions:
A. Repair the surface finish of the solid external airwetted surface of

the skins.
B. Repair the surface finish of the solid internal skins (including repair
of the red topcoat of the thrust reverser blocker doors). Applies to
Allowable Damage Zones TAA2 solid skins.
C. Repair the surface finish of the perforated inner skins (inlet cowl).
Applies to Allowable Damage Zone CA 1 and CA 6 Perforated skin.
D. Repair the surface finish of the inner aft ring (thrust reverser).
Applies to Zone T5.
2. Solid External Skin Surface Finish Repair

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE THE PAINT REMOVAL COMPOUNDS ON CARBON/EPOXY PARTS.

THE COMPOUNDS CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE EPOXY IN THE PARTS. THE DAMAGE
MAKES THE PARTS WEAK UNTIL THEY CAN NOT HOLD THE NECESSARY
STRUCTURAL AND AERODYNAMIC LOADS.
CAUTION: DO NOT BREAK OR MAKE THIN THE CARBON FIBERS IN THE REPAIR AREA.
CAUTION: FOR THE FAN COWL, DO NOT CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE EXPANDED COPPER
SCREEN (ECS) WHEN YOU REMOVE THE SURFACE FINISH. THE ECS IS
NECESSARY FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION.
A. Remove the surface finish from the carbon/epoxy parts of the repair
area with 150 to 180-grit abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
B. Apply the yellow primer to the external skin repair.
CAUTION: THE YELLOW PRIMER MUST HAVE A POLYURETHANE TOPCOAT THAT IS

RESISTANT TO HYDRAULIC FLUID.
(1) Remove the gloss from the surface around the repair with 150-grit
abrasive paper.
becomes dry.
(3) Apply masking tape to the repair area to give protection to the
adjacent surfaces.
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(4) Apply two layers of the yellow primer to the repair surface. The
thickness of each layer of the cured primer must be 0.0005-0.0010
inch (0.013-0.025 mm). Refer to the instructions from the
manufacturer of the primer.
(5) Let the yellow primer cure. Refer to the instructions of the
(6) Apply a polyurethane topcoat above the yellow primer. Refer to the
Airframe Manufacturer Specifications for specified topcoat data
and A320 SRM 51-23-00 and SRM 51-75-12.
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3. Solid Internal Skin Surface Finish Repair

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE PAINT REMOVAL COMPOUNDS ON CARBON/EPOXY PARTS. THE

COMPOUNDS DAMAGE THE EPOXY IN THE PARTS. THIS WILL MAKE THE
PARTS WEAK AND NOT ABLE TO HOLD THE NECESSARY STRUCTURAL AND
AERODYNAMIC LOADS.
A. Remove the surface finish from the carbon/epoxy parts with 150 to
180-grit abrasive paper.
B. Apply the green primer to the internal skin repair.
(1) Remove the gloss from the surface around the repair with 150-grit
abrasive paper.
becomes dry.
(3) Apply masking tape to the repair area to give protection to the
adjacent surfaces.
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(4) Apply the green primer to the surface. The thickness of a layer of
the cured green primer must be 0.0005-0.0008 inch (0.012-0.020
mm). Refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the primer.
(5) Let the green primer cure. Refer to the instructions from the
C. For the Thrust Reverser Pivoting Doors - Apply the Red Topcoat
becomes dry.
(2) Apply masking tape to the repair area to protect the adjacent
surfaces.
(3) Apply the red topcoat on the green primer. Refer to the
instructions from the manufacturer of the red topcoat.
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Let the red topcoat cure. Refer to the instructions from the
manufacturer of the red topcoat.
4. Perforated Internal Skin Surface Finish Repair

NECESSARY.

CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
C. Apply masking tape to the repair area to protect the adjacent surfaces.
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
CAUTION: THE PRIMER THAT FILLS THE HOLES IN THE PANEL CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE ACOUSTIC PROPERTIES OF THE PANEL. DO NOT FILL THE HOLES IN
THE PANEL WITH THE PRIMER.
D. Apply the aluminum primer to the perforated skin repair.
(1) Hang the part with the surface that has holes on the bottom.
(2) Use a 1/4 inch (6,35 mm) nap mohair paint roller to apply two
layers of the primer. Do not soak the roller with primer. Use light
roller pressure to apply the primer. Do a test of the roller and
primer on a isolated piece of perforated skin before you apply the
primer to the repair area. Do not fill the holes with primer. Each
layer of the cured primer must be 0.0005-0.0012 inch (0,012-0,030
mm). Refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the primer.
(3) Let the aluminum primer cure. Refer to the instructions from the
5. Inner Aft Ring Surface Finish Repair (Thrust Reverser)

NECESSARY.

CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
C. Apply masking tape to the repair area to protect the adjacent surfaces.
CHEMICALS.
D. Apply the 37002/92057/C25/90S primer to the surface of the repair area

with a spray gun. Refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of
the primer.
E. Let the primer cure. Refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of
the primer.
F. Apply a thin finish coat on the primer with a spray gun. Apply the
finish coat within 72 hours.
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(1) Apply two layers of the Epoxy Topcoat above the primer in the
repair area with a spray gun. Apply the second layer of finish coat
in a direction that is across the first layer of finish coat. Refer
to the instructions from the manufacturer of the finish coat.
(2) Let the finish coat cure. Refer to the instructions from the
manufacturer of the finish coat.
(3) Apply one more layer of finish coat less than 16 hours after you
apply the first layer of finish coat. Apply the second layer of
finish coat in a direction that is across the first layer of finish
coat. Refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the finish
coat.
(4) Let the finish coat cure. Refer to the instructions from the
manufacturer of the finish coat.

Paper, Abrasive 150, 180, 280, 320-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Roller, Paint 1/4 inch (6,35 mm) Commercially Available
Nap, Mohair
Tape, Masking Commercially Available
Cloth, Wiping Cotton Commercially Available
Table 1 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Primer, Epoxy Aluminum VOKXA5
Polyurethane Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings East
Base 463-6-4 Water St.
Converter X306 Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Thinner TL52 Phone: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
or
Alternate, Epoxy VOKXA5
Polyurethane Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Base 446-21
Converter X-530
Thinner
Primer, Epoxy VOKXA5
Primer 37002 (S15/76) Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Hardener 92057 (S66/16)
Thinner C25/90S
Primer, Epoxy Green V0KXA5
Base 10P4-2 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Converter EC-117S
Thinner TR-19 or TR-20
Alternate Primer Green V33461
Primer, Epoxy 44GN060 Deft Inc.
Two Part Component A 1751 Von Karman Ave.
Component B Irvine CA 92614
Phone: (800) 544-3338
Fax: (949) 474-7269
www.deftfinishes.com
Primer, Epoxy Yellow V83574
Base 513X390 PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
Converter 910X624 DBA PPG Aerospace Div. ASC-Los
Angeles
24811 Avenue Rockerfeller
Valencia, CA 91355-3468
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Topcoat, Epoxy Red V0KXA5
Base 466-21-1302 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Curing Solution X-541 East Water St.
Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com .
Table 1 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Thinner Distilled or Commercially Available
Deminoralized Water
Table 1 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other of
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
STRUCTURAL IDENTIFICATION - INLET COWL
1. General
The outer barrel is made of graphite-epoxy composite plies. Some of the

structure is made of aluminum which includes the inner barrel skins and
the inlet lip. The honeycomb core of the inner barrel is made of aluminum
and HFT non-metallic material. Other parts of the inlet cowl are made of
titanium, inconel, and corrosion resistant steel.
2. Configuration Differences
The improved acoustic inlet, hereafter referred to as Configuration 2, is

identical to the existing inlet, hereafter referred to as Configuration 1,
except where changes were made to incorporate the improved acoustic
standard inner barrel.
3. Structure Description
The inlet cowl has an inlet lip, an inner barrel, an outer barrel, a
forward bulkhead, and an aft bulkhead. The inlet lip is made of aluminum
alloy and it is attached to the forward bulkhead which is made of
titanium. The inner barrel has three acoustic panels. The acoustic panels
are made of glass reinforced honeycomb core (Configuration 1) or aluminum
honeycomb core (Configuration 2) sandwiched between an inner and outer
skin. The inner skin is made of aluminum sheet. The outer skin is made of
perforated aluminum sheet to absorb sound. The inner barrel acoustic
panels are attached to the forward bulkhead and the aft bulkhead. The aft
bulkhead is made of titanium. Farthest aft is the fan blade fragment
containment shield and the engine attachment ring. Both of these parts are
made of titanium. The outer barrel is made of composite plies and is
attached to the forward and aft bulkheads.
4. Structure Identification
Structures are identified in illustrations (figures) and Tables. The

figures and Tables do not identify fasteners. The structure is identified
on the figure by a number. The same number appears on the Table that
follows the figure. The Table gives the component description, gage
(thickness) and material. When a composite fabric ply is identified in the
material column, the warp direction is given. The full view of the part
has a compass rose to help find the warp direction. Where there are
structural differences between the existing inlet (Configuration 1) and
the improved inlet (Configuration 2), the tables and figures are used for
each, and so identified.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Inlet Cowl Assembly

Figure 1
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Inlet Lip Assembly

Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
ITEM DESCRIPTION INCH/(mm) MATERIAL
1 INLET LIP SKIN - LEFT 0.080 (2,03) 2219-0 BARE AL SHEET,
(HEAT TREAT T-62)
2 INLET LIP SKIN - LOWER 0.080 (2,03) 2219-0 BARE AL SHEET,
(HEAT TREAT T-62)
3 INLET LIP SKIN - RIGHT 0.080 (2,03) 2219-0 BARE AL SHEET,
(HEAT TREAT T-62)
4 SPLICE 0.080 (2,03) 2219-0 BARE AL SHEET,
(HEAT TREAT T-62)
(HEAT TREAT T-62)
(HEAT TREAT T-62)
Inlet Lip Assembly

Table 2
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Forward Bulkhead Assembly

Figure 3
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 CAPPING ANGLE - RIGHT 0.080 (2,03) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET,
ANNEALED
2 CAPPING ANGLE - LEFT 0.080 (2,03) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET,
ANNEALED
3 CAPPING ANGLE - TOP 0.080 (2,03) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET,
ANNEALED
4 BULKHEAD WEB - RIGHT 0.080 (2,03) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET,
ANNEALED
5 BULKHEAD WEB - LEFT 0.080 (2,03) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET,
ANNEALED
6 BULKHEAD WEB - TOP 0.080 (2,03) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET,
ANNEALED
Forward Bulkhead Assembly

Table 3
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Aft Bulkhead Assembly

Figure 4
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 BULKHEAD WEB - TOP 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
2 BULKHEAD WEB - RIGHT 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
3 BULKHEAD WEB - LEFT 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
4 CAPPING ANGLE - LEFT 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
5 CAPPING ANGLE - RIGHT 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
6 CAPPING ANGLE - LOWER 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
7 FRAME - TOP 0.100 (2,54) 2024T42 ALUMINUM EXTRUSION
8 FRAME - RIGHT 0.100 (2,54) 2024T42 ALUMINUM EXTRUSION
9 FRAME - LEFT 0.100 (2,54) 2024T42 ALUMINUM EXTRUSION
10 CHANNEL 0.040 (1,02) AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
11 COVER 0.050 (1,27) 6AL-4V TITANIUM SHEET
Aft Bulkhead Assembly

Table 4
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Outer Barrel Panel Assembly

Figure 5 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 5 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 5 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 COMPOSITE PLY 0.014 (0,36) GRAPHITE/EPOXY FABRIC,
PREPREG, R922-1 CGG 108,
CELION 6K FIBER, WARP 45°
2 TAPE 0.005 (0,13) GRAPHITE/EPOXY TAPE, PREPREG,
12-922-1, CELION 12K FIBER,
WARP 0°
WARP 0°
7 COMPOSITE PLY 0.005 (0,13) FIBERGLASS/EPOXY FABRIC,
PREPREG, EA9101/120, WARP
OPTIONAL
8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLY EXPANDED COPPER SCREEN,
FM300M-ECS-.10
WARP 0°

Table 5
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 6 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 6 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
2 TAPE 0.005 (0,13) GRAPHITE/EPOXY TAPE,
PREPREG, 12-922-1,
PREPREG, 12-922-1,
7 COMPOSITE PLY 0.005 (0,13) FIBERGLASS/EPOXY FABRIC,
PREPREG, EA9101/120, WARP
OPTIONAL
8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLY EXPANDED COPPER SCREEN,
FM300M-ECS-.10
PREPREG, 12-922-1,

Table 6
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 7
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
2 TAPE 0.005 (0,13) GRAPHITE/EPOXY TAPE,PREPREG,
12-922-1,CELION 12K FIBER,
WARP 0°
3 COMPOSITE PLY 0.014 (0,36) GRAPHITE/EPOXY
FABRIC,PREPREG, R922-1 CGG
108,CELION 6K FIBER, WARP 45°
5 TAPE 0.005 (0,13) GRAPHITE/EPOXY TAPE,PREPREG,
12-922-1,CELION 12K FIBER,
WARP 0°
7 COMPOSITE PLY 0.005 (0,13) FIBERGLASS/EPOXY
FABRIC,PREPREG, EA9101/
120,WARP OPTIONAL
8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION PLY EXPANDED COPPER
SCREEN,FM300M-ECS-.10

Table 7
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Access Panel Assembly

Figure 8
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 DOUBLER 0.050 (1,27) 2024-T3 AL PLATE
2 ACCESS PANEL 0.063 (1,60) 2024-T3 CLAD AL SHEET
3 DOUBLER 0.063 (1,60) 2024-T3 CLAD AL SHEET
Access Panel Assembly

Table 8
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inner Barrel Panel Assembly

Figure 9
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 10 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 21
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 10 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 22
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 HAT 0.048 (1,22) 2004-F BARE AL SHEET (OPTIONAL -
HEAT TREAT T62)
2 CORE 1.510 (38,35) HONEYCOMB, PAA 5052 ALALLOY,
3/8 IN. CELL,0.003 IN. FOIL
THICKNESS
3 PERFORATED SKIN 0.050 (1,27) 2024-T3 BARE AL SHEET, (SOLUTION
HEAT TREAT, AGED TO T42)
4 SKIN 0.025 (0,64) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET,(HEAT TREAT
T42)
5 DOUBLER 0.250 (6,35) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET,(HEAT TREAT
T42)
6 CORE 0.955 (24,26) HONEYCOMB, PAA 5052 AL ALLOY,
1/8 IN. CELL, 0.003 IN. FOIL
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
9 PERFORATED SKIN 0.032 (0,81) 2024-T3 BARE AL SHEET, (SOLUTION
10 SEPTUM CORE ASSEMBLY 1.469 (37,31) HONEYCOMB BIAS WEAVE GLASS-
(CONFIG 1) REINFORCED 4.0 LB/CU FT, 3/8
HEXCELL HFT WITH STAINLESS STEEL
WIRE SEPTUM
11 CORE 1.438 (36,53) HONEYCOMB, PAA 5052 ALALLOY,
THICKNESS
12 DOUBLER 0.025 (0,64) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT TREAT
T42)
13 DOUBLER 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT TREAT
T42)
14 CORE (CONFIG 2) 1.22 (30,99) HONEYCOMB, PAA 5052 AL ALLOY,
THICKNESS
Table 10 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 23
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
16 SEPTUM (CONFIG 2) PAEK (POLYARYLETHERKETONE), 105
RAYL

Table 10 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 24
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 11
CFM56-5B
Page 25
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 DOUBLER 0.025 (0,64) 2024-T3 BARE AL SHEET
2 SKIN 0.025 (0,64) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET (HEAT
TREAT T42)
(CONFIG 1) REINFORCED 4.0 LB/CU FT,
3/8 HEXCELL HFT WITH STAINLESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
5 PERFORATED SKIN 0.032 (0,81) 2024-T3 BARE AL SHEET,
(SOLUTION HEAT TREAT, AGED TO
T42)
6 CLOSURE 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
7 HAT 0.048 (1,22) 2004-F BARE AL SHEET, (OPTIONAL
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
RAYL
Table 11
CFM56-5B
Page 26
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 12
CFM56-5B
Page 27
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 END 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
HEXCELL HFT WITH STAINLESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
RAYL

Table 12
CFM56-5B
Page 28
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 13
CFM56-5B
Page 29
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
TREAT T42)
2 SKIN 0.025 (0,64) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
5 SPLICE 0.100 (2,54) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
6 DOUBLER 0.063 (1,60) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
T42)
TREAT T42)
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
Table 13 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 30
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
16 SEPTUM (CONFIG 2) PAEK (POLYARYLETHERKETONE),
105 RAYL

Table 13 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 31
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 14
CFM56-5B
Page 32
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 END 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 14
CFM56-5B
Page 33
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 15 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 34
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 15 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 35
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
TREAT T-42)
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
T42)
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
TREAT T-42)
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
Table 15 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 36
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 15 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 37
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 16
CFM56-5B
Page 38
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
TREAT T-42)
TREAT T-42)
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
T42)
6 DOUBLER 0.025 (0,64) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET
TREAT T-42)
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
Table 16 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 39
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
105 RAYL

Table 16 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 40
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 17
CFM56-5B
Page 41
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 17
CFM56-5B
Page 42
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 18
CFM56-5B
Page 43
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 CLOSURE 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET (HEAT
TREAT T-42)
2 SKIN 0.025 (0,64) 2024 BARE AL SHEET (HEAT TREAT
T-42)
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
5 PERFORATED SKIN 0.032 (0,81) 2024-T3 BARE AL SHEET (SOLUTION
7 CLOSURE 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET (HEAT
TREAT T-42)
8 HAT 0.048 (1,22) 2004-F BARE AL SHEET (OPTIONAL
- HEAT TREAT T-62)
THICKNESS
10 PERFORATED SKIN 0.050 (1,27) 2024-T3 BARE AL SHEET (SOLUTION
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 18
CFM56-5B
Page 44
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 19
CFM56-5B
Page 45
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 19
CFM56-5B
Page 46
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 20 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 47
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 20 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 48
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
TREAT T-42)
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
T42)
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
TREAT T-42)
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
Table 20 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 49
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 20 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 50
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 21
CFM56-5B
Page 51
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
TREAT T42)
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
THICKNESS
T42)
THICKNESS
TREAT T-42)
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 21
CFM56-5B
Page 52
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
2 (RIBBON DIRECTION
OPTIONAL) 3 (RIBBON DIRECTION
OPTIONAL)
RADIAL
325
RIBBON
DIRECTION
1
X-X
RADIAL
325
7
RIBBON
DIRECTION
8 (CONFIG 1)
9, 10, 11 (CONFIG 2)
C1S-066-01
Y-Y

Figure 22
CFM56-5B
Page 53
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
5 END 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET (HEAT
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
105 RAYL

Table 22
CFM56-5B
Page 54
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 23
CFM56-5B
Page 55
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
TREAT T42)
- HEAT TREAT T62)
THICKNESS
T42)
TREAT T-42)
6 SPLICE 0.100 (2,54) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET, (HEAT
TREAT T42)
THICKNESS
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
T42)
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
Table 23 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 56
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
RAYL

Table 23 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 57
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 24
CFM56-5B
Page 58
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
5 END 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0 BARE AL SHEET (HEAT
TREAT T-42)
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
STEEL WIRE SEPTUM
THICKNESS
THICKNESS
RAYL

Table 24
CFM56-5B
Page 59
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 60
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
ALLOWABLE DAMAGE - INLET COWL
1. Inlet Lip Structure (See Figure 101)
A. Allowable Damage Zones:
CL1 Lip segment splice fastener area and fastener areas of lip
skin to inlet cowl forward bulkhead attachment, 1.4 inches
(36 mm) from all edges of the lip skin segments.
CL2 All areas of the lip skin not in zone CL1.
B. Allowable Damage Limits: (See Table 101)
You can find the definitions of types of damage in section 54-01-00,

Damage Investigation.
CFM56-5B
Page 101
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Lip Allowable Damage Zones

Figure 101
CFM56-5B
Page 102
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Damaged/
Nick/ Loose/
Dent/ Scratch/ Missing
Description Crack Buckle Gouge Holes Corrosion Fasteners
Zone CL1 J/K B D1/D3 E F H
Zone CL2 A C D2/D3 E G
NOTE: You must repair damage that is not specified before the next flight.
Specified Damage Limits and Procedures:
A. No cracks allowed.
B. Dents maximum diameter 1.00 in. (25,4 mm). Maximum depth 0.10 in. (2,54
mm). Must be smooth without sharp creases, gouges or cracks. Pulled or
loose rivets are not permitted. Must be divided from other dents by a
minimum of 10 in. (254,0 mm). Maximum of three dents in each segment.
Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months
(whichever is earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles
/ 24 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
C. Dents maximum depth 0.20 in. (5,08 mm). Maximum diameter 2.00 in. (50,8
mm). Must be smooth without sharp creases, gouges or cracks. Must be
divided from other dents by a minimum of 10 in. (254,0 mm). Maximum of
three dents in each segment. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight
Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight
Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
Dents of maximum diameter of 2.00 in. (50,8 mm) with a minimum dent
diameter to maximum dent depth ratio of 30, inspect at every 7500 Flight
Dent must be smooth without sharp creases, gouges or cracks and divided
from other dents by a minimum of 10 in. (254, mm). Three dents maximum in
each segment are allowed.
NOTE: Determine if D1 or D2 can be satisfied, if not determine if D3 can be
satisfied, if not contact UTAS.
D1. Nick/Scratch/Gouge maximum length 4.0 in. (101,6 mm) in any direction.
Minimum remaining thickness at the Lip Skin Outer Barrel side shall be
0.062 in. (1,57 mm). Minimum remaining thickness Lip Skin Inner Barrel
side and Lip Skin Splice areas shall be 0.060 in. (1,52 mm). The area
around fastener heads shall have no damage for 0.010 in. (0,25 mm) from
the fastener head. Maximum width 0.10 in. (2,54 mm). Must be divided from
other damage by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm) minimum. Permanent with Damage
Cleanup per SRM 54-01-01 blending of the fastener heads is not permitted.
Inlet Lip Allowable Damage
Table 101 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 103
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Damaged/
Nick/ Loose/
Dent/ Scratch/ Missing
Description Crack Buckle Gouge Holes Corrosion Fasteners
Minimum remaining thickness shall be 0.057 (1,45 mm). Maximum width 0.10
in. (2,54 mm). Must be divided from other damage by 2 times the length
minimum. No more than 16 damages within any 16 sq. in. (10323 sq. mm)
area. Permanent with Damage Cleanup per SRM 54-01-01.
Maximum depth 0.015 in. (0,381 mm). Maximum width 0.10 in. (2,54 mm). Must
be divided from other damage by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm) minimum. Monitor at
750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is
earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar
months (whichever is earliest).
E. Holes maximum diameter 0.25 in. (6,35 mm). Must be divided from other
holes by 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) minimum. Fill hole with aluminum blind rivet
wet with sealant.
F. Remaining thickness after damage clean up must be a minimum of 0.072 in
(1.83 mm). Restore surface finish of reworked area.
G. Remaining thickness after damage clean up must be a minimum of 0.063 in
(1.60 mm). Restore surface finish of reworked area.
H. One missing fastener is permitted with two intact fasteners on either
side. Maximum four missing fasteners per lip segment. All fasteners must
be present in splice with five intact fasteners on either side of splice.
Maximum of five rivet heads per segment with minor abrasion, scuffing,
nick, or lightning strike burn mark but not loose is temporarily
acceptable. Install blind CR3552-5 fasteners wet with sealant at missing
fastener locations within 10 flight cycles. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours /
750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is earliest). Install
NAS1200M6 fasteners wet with sealant at or before next 7500 Flight Hours
/ 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
J. For outer rivet row refer to SB RA32071-120.
K. For inner rivet row no cracks allowed.
Inlet Lip Allowable Damage
Table 101 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 104
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
2. Outer Barrel Composite Structure. (See Figure 102).
C1 Outer barrel panel composite skins. Includes all areas not in

Zone C2.
C2 Outer barrel edges. 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) from all edges and
cutouts.
C3 Metallic access panels and doors.
B. Allowable Damage Limits: (See Table 102).

CFM56-5B
Page 105
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Outer Barrel Composite Structure Allowable Damage Zones

Figure 102
CFM56-5B
Page 106
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Scratch/
Description Abrasion Crack Delamination Gouge Hole
Zone C1 A B C D E
Zone C2 A - - D -
Zone C3 - B - D E
A. Abrasions are permitted only on the surface resin. Damage to the carbon
fiber is not permitted. If carbon fibers are damaged then the damage is a
scratch. Apply the correct sealing tape to protect the damage and replace
any damaged sealing tape. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles
B. Maximum crack length is 3.0 in. (76,2 mm) in any direction. Must be
divided from other cracks, holes, disbonds by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm). Five
cracks maximum are permitted in each barrel half. Cracks wider than 0.01
in. (0,254 mm) are holes. Stop drill cracks in Zone C3. Apply the correct
sealing tape to protect the damage. Make a record of the damage. Monitor
at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever
is earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24
calendar months (whichever is earliest).
C. Maximum delamination diameter is 3.0 in. (76,2 mm). Must be divided from
other damage by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm) minimum. Must be a minimum of 0.25
in. (6,35 mm) from the panel edge. Length must not be more than 1.00 in.
(25,4 mm) parallel to the panel edge. Maximum of five delaminations in
each panel. Make a record of the damage. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours /
750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is earliest). Repair at
7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever
is earliest).
D. Maximum scratch depth 0.01 in. (0,254 mm) in a 6.0 in. (152,4 mm) maximum
length. Maximum width 0.10 in. (2,54 mm). Must be divided from other
damage by 8.0 in. (203,2 mm) minimum. Six gouges/scratches in each barrel
half maximum. Apply the correct sealing tape and replace any damaged
sealing tape. Make a record of the damage. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours /
750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is earliest). Replace
tape if peeled or damaged.
E. Maximum hole diameter in the outer barrel is 3.0 in. (76,2 mm). Minimum of
1.0 in. (25,4 mm) from panel edges. Must be divided from other damage by
10.0 in. (254,0 mm). Maximum of three holes in each panel. Apply the
correct sealing tape. Make a record of the damage. Monitor at 750 Flight
Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months
(whichever is earliest).
Outer Barrel Composite Structure Allowable Damage
Table 102
CFM56-5B
Page 107
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3. Acoustic Inner Barrel Structure. (See Figure 103).
CA1 Perforated aluminum inner face sheet.

CA2 HFT Honeycomb core with septum.
CA3 Solid aluminum outer face sheet.
CA4 Riveted joints, (splice areas).
CA5 Bonded joints.
CA6 Area 5.0 in. (127,0 mm) from the engine attach ring.

CFM56-5B
Page 108
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Acoustic Inner Barrel Allowable Damage Zones

Figure 103
CFM56-5B
Page 109
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Description Disbond Dent Gouges Crack Scratch

Zone CA1 A B C D F
Zone CA2 A - - - -
Zone CA3 A B C D F
Zone CA4 - - C E F
Zone CA5 A B C D F
Zone CA6 - - C - F
A. Disbonds maximum width 1.50 in. (38,1 mm) in any direction. Must be
divided from other disbonds by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm). It is not permitted to
have a disbond directly opposite on the other face sheet. Maximum length
in a bonded joint (closure) is 15 percent of joint length. No more than
0.20 in. (5,08 mm) to the edge of the joint strip. Monitor at 750 Flight
Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months
B. Dents maximum depth 0.12 in. (3,048 mm). Maximum diameter 1.50 in. (38,1
mm). Must be smooth without sharp creases, gouges, and cracks. Crushed
core is permitted. Must be divided from other dents by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm)
minimum. Must be 1.50 in. (38,1 mm) minimum distance from honeycomb core
edges. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months
C. Gouge maximum depths 0.010 in. (0,254 mm). Maximum width 0.10 in. (2,54
mm). Maximum length 1.00 in. (25,4 mm). Must be divided from other gouges
by 10.0 in. (254,0 mm). Must be 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) minimum distance from
honeycomb core edges. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4
calendar months (whichever is earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours /
5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
D. Cracks maximum length 1.50 in. (38,1 mm). Must be divided from other
cracks by 10.0 in. (254, mm). Stop drill both ends of cracks. Monitor at
750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is
earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar
months (whichever is earliest). Restore Surface Protection per A320
CFM56-5B 54-02-01 and SRM 51-21-00.
E. Cracks must stop between two adjacent fasteners in joint of ten or more
fasteners. Cracks must be divided from other cracks by a minimum of 10.0
in. (254,0 mm). Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4
calendar months (whichever is earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours /
5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
Acoustic Inner Barrel Allowable Damage
Table 103 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 110
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
F. Scratches maximum depth 0.005 in. (0,127 mm). Maximum length 1.00 in.
(25,4 mm). Must be divided from other damage by 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) minimum.
Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months
Acoustic Inner Barrel Allowable Damage

Table 103 (Sheet 2)
4. Inlet Cowl Bulkheads. (See Figure 104).
CB1 Forward bulkhead panel webs.

CB2 Aft bulkhead panel webs.
CB3 Stiffeners, angles, or fittings.
CB4 Forward and Aft bulkhead fasteners and joints.
You can find the definitions of types of damage in section 54-01-00.

CFM56-5B
Page 111
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Cowl Bulkhead Allowable Damage Zones

Figure 104
CFM56-5B
Page 112
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Description Crack Dent/Buckle Scratch/Gouge Hole

Zone CB1 A C D E
Zone CB2 A C D E
Zone CB3 B - D E
Zone CB4 B - D E
A. No cracks are permitted.
B. Cracks must stop between two fasteners. One fastener space maximum
length. Must be divided from other cracks by 10.00 in. (254,0 mm)
minimum. Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar
months (whichever is earliest). Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000
Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
C. Dents maximum depth 0.10 in. (2,54 mm). Maximum length 3.0 in. (76,2 mm).
Must be 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) from web edges or stiffeners minimum. Must be
smooth without sharp creases, gouges, and cracks. Must be divided from
other dents or buckles by 10 in. (254,0 mm) minimum. Monitor at 750
Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever is
earliest).
D. Scratch or gouge maximum length 6.0 in. (152,4 mm) in circumferential
direction. Maximum length 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) in radial direction. Maximum
depth 0.01 in. (0,254 mm). Maximum width 0.10 in. (2,54 mm). Must be 6.0
in. (152,4 mm) minimum from equivalent damage. Monitor at 750 Flight
E. Holes are not permitted.
Inlet Cowl Bulkhead Allowable Damage

Table 104
CFM56-5B
Page 113
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
INLET COWL REPAIR INDEX
Repair No. Title Page

Repair No. 1 Surface Finish Restoration (refer to 54-02-07
Repair General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 2 Carbon Composite Skin Damage
Less Than 0.010 inch (0,25 mm) Deep . . . . . . . . 201
More Than 0.010 inch (0,25 mm) Deep . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 4 Hole In Outer Barrel Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 5 Inlet Lip External Patch Repair . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 6 Inlet Lip Flush Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 7 Aft Bulkhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 8 Aft Bulkhead Web Puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 9 Aft Bulkhead Web Crack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 10 Replacement of Aerodynamic Sealant. . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 11 Edge Erosion Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 12 Expanded Copper Screen (ECS) Repair . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 13 Acoustic Panel Crack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 14 Backskin Disbond/Corrosion Repair
(No Core Damage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 15 CPC Application to Corrosion
Susceptible Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 16 Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel Allowable
Corrosion Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 17 Temporary Repair for Inner Barrel Corrosion . . . . . 201
Repair No. 18 Corrosion Repair of Leading Edge
of Inlet Cowl Acoustic Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 19 Closures and Aft Doubler Hot Bond Replacement
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 20 Inlet Cowl Lipskin Attach Area External Patch
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 21 Inlet Lip Flush Patch Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 22 Inlet Cowl PTFE Glass Cloth Tape
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 23 Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel Panel Nick, Gouge,
Dent or Small Hole, 1.0 Inch (25,4 mm)
Diameter or Less . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Repair No. 24 (DELETED) Anti-Ice Exhaust Duct Assembly Repair of
the Cracked Attached Welds of the Duct
Separators - REFER to CMM 71-00-17 Repair 19 . . . 201
Repair No. 25 Inlet Cowl Aft Bulkhead Frame Repair -
12 O’Clock Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 26 Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel Partial Penetration
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 27 Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel Full Penetration
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 28 Repair for Mismatch - Inlet to Fan Cowl
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 29 Inlet Cowl Access Panel Elongated Holes
Dimple Washer Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 1
SURFACE FINISH RESTORATION
1. General
The data that was in this procedure is at this time in the Repair General
section.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 2
CARBON COMPOSITE SKIN DAMAGE
LESS THAN 0.010 INCH (0,25 MM) DEEP
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to repair damage to the composite skin

that is less than 0.010 inch (0,25 mm) deep, 0.10 inch (2,54 mm), and 6.0
inches (152,4 mm) long. The depth of the damage does not include the
thickness of the primer and paint layers. The damaged area is filled with
adhesive and made smooth with abrasive paper. No carbon fabric is used for
this repair.

NECESSARY.
A. Remove all loose fibers and make the edges of the damaged area smooth.
Use 150-grit or finer abrasive paper.
CAUTION: DO NOT BREAK OR MAKE THE CARBON FIBERS THIN IN THE AREA TO BE
REPAIRED. IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED, THEN THE PART CAN BE WEAKER
THAN THE INITIAL PART.
B. Remove the paint layers around the damaged area with 150-grit abrasive
paper. Do not damage or remove carbon fibers.
NOTE: The first primer layer is yellow and the outer primer layer is
grey.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
C. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
CHEMICALS.
D. Mix the correct quantity of EA934NA adhesive for the repair area. (See
General Repair Procedures).
NOTE: EA956 or EA9321 can be used as an alternative to EA934NA

adhesive. See General Repair Procedures for instructions to mix
and cure.
E. Apply the adhesive mixture to the repair area with a knife or spatula.
Put a sufficient quantity of adhesive to fill the repair area and be
above the skin surface.
F. Cure the adhesive with a heat lamp at 180°-200°F (83°-93°C) for 60

minutes.
G. Complete the repair.
REPAIRED. IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED, THEN THE PART CAN BE
WEAKER THAN THE INITIAL PART.
(1) Make the repair smooth with 150- to 320- grit abrasive paper. The
cured adhesive must make a continuous surface with the skin around
the repair.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(3) Apply primer and top layers. (See Repair No. 1).

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Alternative Adhesives:
Catalyst Part B
Catalyst Part B
Lamp, Heat 180°-250°F Commercially Available
(82°-121°C)
Paper, Abrasive 150- to 320-grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Spatula Metal or Plastic Commercially Available
NOTE: Different sources for these materials can be found in 54-00-00, “Bulk
Material Supplier List”.
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 3
MORE THAN 0.010 INCH (0,25 MM) DEEP
1. General

that is more than 0.010 inch (0,25 mm) deep. The depth of the damage does
not include the thickness of the primer and paint layers. The damaged area
is filled with an adhesive/microballoon mixture. Wet lay-up carbon fabric
repair plies are put on the damaged area.
2. Repair Instructions (See Figure 201).

NECESSARY.
Use 150 grit or finer abrasive paper.
B. Find the number of repair plies and put Teflon tape around the edge of
the repair area.
(1) See the Structural Identification section to find the thickness

and number of skin plies in the damaged area. One repair ply is
necessary for each skin ply that is damaged. A minimum of two
repair plies are necessary for the repair.
(2) Put Teflon tape 2.0 inch (50,8 mm) or more from the edge of the
damage. Find the correct distance as follows:
(a) Measure 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) from the edge of the damage for the
first repair ply.
(b) Measure 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) more for each repair ply overlap.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT BREAK OR MAKE THE CARBON FIBERS THIN IN THE REPAIR AREA.
IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED THEN THE PART CAN BE WEAKER THAN THE
INITIAL PART.
C. Remove the paint layers around the damage with 150 grit abrasive paper.
Do not damage or remove carbon fibers.
NOTE: The first primer layer is yellow on the external skin and green
on the internal skin.
CHEMICALS.
D. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
E. Prepare the repair plies.
(1) Get a piece of carbon fabric of sufficient size to cut the

necessary repair plies.
NOTE: The Structural Identification Section will show the correct

warp direction of the plies.
(2) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA9390 adhesive to impregnate the

carbon fabric. (See General Repair Procedures).
NOTE: The weight of the adhesive must approximately be the same

weight as the dry carbon fabric.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(3) Soak the carbon fabric with adhesive.
(a) Cut a piece of non-porous parting film that is larger than the
piece of carbon fabric.
(b) Put the carbon fabric above the non-porous parting film on a
flat surface.
(c) Soak the carbon fabric with the adhesive. Put a piece of non-
porous parting film above the fabric. Make sure the adhesive
is equally applied to the piece of fabric with a roller.
F. Cut the repair plies with a sharp knife and templates.
NOTE: The repair plies can be rectangular or circular to be on the

area of damage.
(1) Cut the first repair ply 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) more on all sides than
the damaged area. Cut the corners of the ply at 45 degrees to a
length of 0.5 inch (12,7 mm).
(2) Cut the second repair ply 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) more on all sides
than the repair ply below it. Cut the corners of the ply at 45
degrees to a length of 0.5 inch (12,7 mm).
(3) Cut all repair plies that are necessary 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) more on
all sides than the ply below it. Cut the corners of the ply at 45
G. Fill the damaged area with adhesive/microballoon mixture.
(1) Make a microballoon mixture of EA9390 with five percent by weight

of phenolic microballoons in the adhesive.
(2) Put the adhesive/microballoon mixture in the damaged area. Put a

sufficient quantity to make a continuous surface with the surface
of the skin.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
H. Install the repair plies. (See Figure 201)
CAUTION: REMOVE THE NON-POROUS PARTING FILM FROM THE TWO SIDES OF THE
REPAIR AND SANDING PLIES. THE REPAIR WILL BE WEAK IF THE NON-
POROUS PARTING FILM STAYS WITH A FABRIC PLY AND BECOMES PART
OF THE REPAIR.
(1) Remove the non-porous parting film from the side of the first
repair ply that will touch the repair area. Install the ply turned
so that it agrees with the skin ply orientation. (See Structural
Identification Section).
(2) Make the repair ply smooth with a roller. Remove the non-porous
parting film from the ply.
(3) Remove the non-porous parting film from the side of the second
repair ply that will touch the first repair ply. Install the ply
turned so that it agrees with the skin ply orientation.
(4) Make the repair ply smooth with a roller. Remove the non-porous
parting film from the ply.
(5) Do steps (3) and (4) for each repair ply and the fiberglass ply.
I. Bag and cure the repair. (See General Repair Procedures).
CAUTION: DO NOT BREAK OR MAKE THE CARBON FIBERS THIN IN THE REPAIR PLY.
IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED THEN THE REPAIR CAN BE MADE WEAKER.
J. Make the repair smooth so that it makes a continuous surface with the
skin. Use 150 or 320 grit abrasive paper. Do not damage the carbon
fibers on the skin with the abrasive paper.
CHEMICALS.
K. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
L. Apply primer and top layers. (See Repair No. 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Adhesive System, EA9390 V33564
Epoxy Part A Henkel Corporation
Base Part B 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
Catalyst P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Fabric, Fiberglass Type 181 Commercially Available
Fabric, Carbon Style AH370-5H V52331
Construction Hexcel Corporation
11 × 11 11711 Dublin Blvd
Dublin, CA 94568-2832
Phone: (203) 696-0666
Fax: (203) 316-5139
www.hexcel.com
Microballoons Phenolic Malayan Adhesives and Chemicals
135 micron (5 mil) No. 9 Jalan Utas 15/7
40200 Shah Alam Selangor Danul
Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Paper, Abrasive 150 - 320 grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Roller 2.0 inch (50,4 mm) dia. Commercially Available
Steel or Plastic
Solvent Isoprophyl Alcohol Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Teflon 2.0 inch (50,4 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Repair of Scratch, Nick or Gouge More Than 0.010 Inch (0,25 mm) Deep
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 4
HOLE IN OUTER BARREL SKIN
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to repair damage that goes fully through
the composite skin. You do not have access to the inner side of the skin.
A fiberglass backup plate is prepared and installed. Wet layup carbon
fabric fill plies and repair plies are installed.
A. Clean up the damaged area.

NECESSARY.
(1) Cut out the damaged skin. Remove all of the loose particles,
cracks, and delaminations.
(2) Cut an oval or rectangle shaped hole in the skin. This will permit
a backup plate to go through. Make sure the cutout has rounded
corners with a 0.50 inch (12,7 mm) radius.
NOTE: A round hole is not correct for this repair. An oval or a

rectangle shaped hole will permit the correct sized backup
plate to go through.
(3) Cut a 45 degree bevel in the sides of the hole. The bevel must face
out from the cowl.
(4) Make the edges of the cutout smooth with 80 grit or finer abrasive
paper.
B. Prepare the skin around the cutout. (See Figure 201).
(1) Find the number of skin plies in the damaged area. (See Structural
Identification).
(2) Put Teflon tape around the edge of the repair area on the outer
surface of the skin.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(a) Measure 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) from the edge of the damage for the
first repair ply.
(b) Measure 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) more for each repair ply overlap.
(c) Put a 2.0 inch (50,8 mm) wide Teflon tape band around the edge
of the repair area.
REPAIRED. IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED THEN THE PART CAN BE
(3) Lightly sand the area around the repair. Remove the paint with 150
grit abrasive paper. Do not damage or remove carbon fibers.
NOTE: The first primer layer is yellow.
(4) Lightly sand the inner surface of the skin. You can get access to
the inner surface through the cutout. Sand an area 1.0 inch (25,4
mm) wide around the edge of the cutout where the backup plate will
touch. Use 150 grit abrasive paper.
(5) Clean the inner and outer surface of the skin with a clean lint-
free cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-
free cloth before the solvent becomes dry.
C. Prepare the fiberglass backup plate.
(1) Cut a piece of fiberglass fabric of sufficient size to make three

backing plies.
(2) Cut a piece of non-porous parting film that is larger than the
piece of fiberglass fabric.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA9390 adhesive to soak the fiberglass

fabric. (See General Repair Procedures).

weight as the dry fiberglass fabric.
(4) Put the fiberglass fabric above the non-porous parting film on a
flat surface.
(5) Soak the fiberglass fabric with adhesive. Put a piece of non-porous
parting film above the fabric. Make sure the adhesive is equally
applied to the piece of fabric with a roller.
(6) Cut three pieces of fiberglass fabric 1.5 inches (36,75 mm) larger
on all sides than the damage cutout.
(a) Cut two pieces of fabric with the warp parallel to the longest
dimension of the cutout.
(b) Cut a third piece of fabric with the warp 90 degrees to the
first two pieces.
(7) Cut one piece of peel ply (porous parting film) 1.5 inches (36,75
mm) larger on all sides than the cutout.
(8) Layup the backing plate.
(a) Put a piece of non-porous parting film that is larger than the
backing ply on a flat surface. Make sure that the flat surface
is resistant to temperatures more than 210°F (99°C).
(b) Put the peel ply above the non-porous parting film.
(c) Put a fiberglass fabric ply with the warp parallel to the
longest dimension of the cutout above the peel ply.
(d) Put the ply with the warp 90 degrees to the longest dimension
of the cutout on the first ply.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(e) Put the remaining ply above the second ply.
(9) Bag and cure the backup plate. (See General Repair Procedures).
(10) Cut the backup plate so that it makes an overlap of 1.0 inch (25,4
mm) of the cutout.
(11) Drill holes in pairs as necessary near the centerline of the backup
plate. Use a 0.07 inch (1,78 mm) drill bit.
D. Install the backup plate on the inner surface of the skin. (See Figure
202)
(1) Mix EA9390 adhesive with 5 percent by weight of phenolic

microballoons. (See General Repair Procedures)
NOTE: Microballoons are used only in the adhesive mixture which

attaches the backup plate to the inner skin.
(2) Remove the peel ply from the backup plate.
(3) Put a loop of lockwire through the holes in the backup plate.
Loosely twist each loop of lockwire one turn. (See Figure 202)
(4) Clean the side of the backup plate that will touch the inner
surface of the skin and the inner faying surface of the skin with a
clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a
clean lint-free cloth before the solvent becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(5) Apply adhesive to the peel ply side of the backup plate only where
it will touch the skin.
(6) Apply adhesive to the inside area of the skin where the backup
plate will touch. The area is a 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) wide band around
the outside of the cutout.
(7) Put the backup plate through the cutout. Adjust the backup plate so
that the edges are 1 inch (25,4 mm) more than the edges of the
cutout.
(8) Put a small metal rod through the lockwire loops across the repair
cutout.
CAUTION: DO NOT MAKE THE LOCKWIRE TOO TIGHT, IT WILL WARP THE BACKUP
PLATE.
(9) Twist the lockwire around the rod so that the backup plate tightly
touches the inner side of the skin. Do not pull the backup plate
into the cutout at all.
(10) Apply adhesive to the holes for the lockwire in the backup plate.
(11) Cure the adhesive at 190 - 210 degrees F (88 - 99 degrees C) for
220 minutes with a heat lamp.
(12) Remove the small metal rod and cut the lockwire at the surface of
the backup plate.
(13) Clean the unwanted material from the repair with a clean lint-free
cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free
cloth before the solvent becomes dry.
E. Prepare the repair plies.
(1) Cut a piece of carbon fabric of sufficient size to make the

necessary fill and repair plies. (See Structural Identification).
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
piece of carbon fabric. Put the non-porous parting film on a flat
surface and the carbon fabric above it.
(3) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA9390 adhesive to soak the carbon

fabric.

weight as the dry carbon fabric.
(4) Soak the carbon fabric with adhesive. Put a piece of non-porous
parting film above each piece of fabric. Make sure the adhesive is
equally applied to the fabric with a roller.
F. Cut the fill and repair plies with a sharp knife and templates. (See
Structural Identification and Figure 201)
(1) Cut the fill plies to fit the cutout so that they agree with the
warp direction of the skin.
(2) Cut the first repair ply to be 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) more on all sides
than the repair cutout. Cut the corners of the ply at 45 degrees to
length of 1.0 inch (25,4 mm).
(3) Cut the second repair ply 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) more on all sides
than the repair ply below it. Cut the corners of the ply at 45
(4) Cut all repair plies that are necessary 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) more on
all sides than the ply below it. Cut the corners of the ply at 45
G. Install the carbon fabric fill plies in the cutout. (See Figure 202)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Apply EA9390 adhesive to the surface of the backup plate with a
brush.
(2) Remove the non-porous parting film from the surface of the fill ply
that will touch the repair.
(3) Install the fill ply so that it is turned correctly.
(4) Make the fill ply smooth with a roller.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE NON-POROUS PARTING FILM IS REMOVED FROM THE TWO
SIDES OF THE FILL PLIES. THE REPAIR WILL BE WEAK IF THE
NON-POROUS PARTING FILM STAYS WITH A FABRIC PLY AND BECOMES
PART OF THE REPAIR.
(5) Remove the remaining piece of non-porous parting film.
(6) Do steps (1) thru (5) for each fill ply.
(7) Make sure the fill plies make a continuous surface with the skin.
H. Install the repair plies. (See Structural Identification and Figure

201).
(1) Remove the non-porous parting film from the surface of the repair
ply that will touch the repair.
(2) Install the repair ply so that the repair cutout is in the center.
(3) Make the repair ply smooth with a roller.
SIDES OF THE REPAIR PLIES. THE REPAIR WILL BE WEAK IF THE
NON-POROUS PARTING FILM STAYS WITH A FABRIC PLY AND BECOMES
PART OF THE REPAIR.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(5) Do steps (1) through (4) for each repair ply. Make sure that each
repair ply makes an overlap of 0.75 inch (19,0 mm) on the repair
ply below it.
I. Bag and cure the repair. (See General Repair Procedures)
CAUTION: DO NOT BREAK OR MAKE THE CARBON FIBERS THIN IN THE REPAIR PLY.
IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED THEN THE REPAIR CAN BE MADE WEAKER.
skin. Use 150 or 320-grit abrasive paper. Do not damage the carbon
CHEMICALS.
K. Clean the unwanted material from the repair with a clean lint-free
cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth
before the solvent becomes dry.
L. Apply primer and top layers. (See Repair No. 1)

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Construction 11 × 11 Hexcel Corporation
11711 Dublin Blvd
Dublin, CA 94568-2832
Phone: (203) 696-0666
Fax: (203) 316-5139
www.hexcel.com
Film, Parting Non-porous Commercially Available
Cloth, Peel Ply Porous parting film Commercially Available
Lamp, Heat 180 - 200 degrees F Commercially Available
(83 - 93 degrees C)
Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Paper, Abrasive 80-, 150-, 320-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Roller 2.0 inch (50,8 mm) Dia. Commercially Available
Steel or Plastic
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Teflon 2.0 inch (50,8 mm) Wide Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Installation of the Repair Material on the Inlet Cowl

Figure 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Installation of the Repair Material on the Inlet Cowl

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Backup Plate and Cutout in the Inlet Cowl Skin

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 5
INLET LIP EXTERNAL PATCH REPAIR
1. General
A. The inlet lip skin is divided into three repair areas (See Figure 201).
Flush patches (See Repair No. 6) must be used in Area “A” of the lip.
You can use flush patches in some sections of areas “B” and “C”. You
can use external patches in this repair for areas “B” and “C.” You can
use external patches in Area “A” temporarily. This will permit you to
ferry the inlet cowl to a location where you can do a flush-patch
repair.
B. This repair is applicable to dents and hole damage.
(1) Find the area where a repair is necessary (A, B, or C). (See Figure
201)
B. Make the repair patch.
(1) Make a patch for the damaged skin out of 2219-0 bare aluminum
sheet, 0.080 inch (2,03 mm) thick with 0.50 in (13 mm) minimum
corner radius.
(2) Heat treat the patch to T62.
NOTE: It is permitted to use 2219-T62 aluminum sheet in areas “B”

and “C” if it is not necessary to form the patch.
NOTE: It is permitted to use 2024-T3 aluminum sheet for a maximum

of 10 flight hours only on 642-1000-505 inlets that have a
restrictor on the anti-ice duct.
(3) Make sure the edges of the patch are tapered two times the
thickness from 0.020 inch (0,51 mm) above skin. (See Section A-A on
Figure 202).
C. Prepare the patch for installation on the inlet cowl lip.
(1) Put the patch on the lip over the damaged area.
(2) Drill No. 40 pilot holes in the patch and lip skin.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(3) Ream the rivet holes to 0.205 inch (5,21 mm) diameter through the
skin and patch with a No. 5 drill bit.
(4) Countersink the rivet holes for CR3552-6-3 flush rivets.
(5) Make a mark on the lip skin to show where you will install the
patch on the skin.
(6) Remove the patch and clean the burrs from the patch and skin.
CAUTION: UNWANTED MATERIAL WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE INTERIOR OF THE

INLET LIP CAVITY DURING THE ANTI-ICE SYSTEM OPERATIONS. ALL
FASTENER TAILS MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE CAVITY BEFORE YOU
INSTALL THE EXTERNAL PATCH.
(7) Remove the surface finish from the patch area of the skin with
(8) Clean the skin with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
(9) Apply Alodine 1000L to the patch.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(a) Polish both sides of the patch with Scotch Brite pads until
you get a water break-free surface.
NOTE: A water break-free surface will permit a continuous

film of water for 30 seconds.
(b) Apply Alodine 1000L solution to the clean repair surfaces. Do

one of the methods that follow:
1 Put the patch in the solution for 2 to 5 minutes.
or
2 Apply the solution to the repair surfaces with a nylon

brush or cheesecloth swab. Apply the solution again as
necessary to keep the surfaces wet for 2 to 5 minutes. Do
not permit the solution to dry on the surface.
(c) Flush the surface thoroughly with clean water.
(d) Let the surface dry for 30 minutes.
(e) Do a visual examination. Look for an equally colorless surface

after treatment.
(10) Apply PR-1200 primer to the surfaces of skin and patch that will
touch.
(11) Cure the primer at 65 - 75 degrees F (19 - 23 degrees C) for 30

minutes.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(12) Apply RTV157 sealant or PR1995 primerless sealant to the surfaces

of skin and patch that will touch.
D. Install the patch on the inlet cowl lip.
(1) Install the patch on the inlet lip skin with temporary fasteners
(clecos).
(2) Install the CR3552-6-3 rivets wet with RTV157 sealant or PR1995
primerless sealant.
(3) Cut, or remove with a file, the blind rivet stems to make a smooth
surface with the skin.

Aluminum, Sheet 2219-0 Bare AL Commercially Available
Alloy 0.080 inch
(2,03 mm) Thick
HT-T62
Aluminum, Sheet 2024-T3 Bare AL Commercially Available
Alloy 0.080 inch
(2,03 mm) Thick
Coating, Chemical Alodine 1000L V71410
Conversion Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Paper, Abrasive 240-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Primer PR-1200 V5D028
Dow Corning Corporation
3901 South Saginaw Road
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Rivet CR3552-6-3 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Santa Ana, CA 92705-5484
Phone: (714) 545-5511
www.cherryaerospace.com
Sealant, Silicone RTV157 V01139
Momentive Performance Material Inc.
260 Hudson River Rd.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Sealant, Primerless PR1995 V5D028
(Alternate) Dow Corning Corporation
99 percent pure
or
Ketone Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Wiper Cloth, Cotton Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A REPAIR MAXIMUM SIZE

AREA OF REPAIR
AIR 60 SQ INCHES
INTAKE A (387 sq cm)
COWL
85 SQ INCHES
B
A (548 sq cm)
90 SQ INCHES
C
(580 sq cm)
MAXIMUM REPAIR DOUBLER

LENGTH NOT TO EXCEED
10.0 IN (254 mm)
OUTER
BARREL
PANEL
EXTERNAL
LIP SURFACE
INLET AREA C
7.0 INCHES
(177,8 mm)
FORWARD
BULKHEAD
INNER
LEADING BARREL
EDGE
AREA A
8.5 INCHES
(215,9 mm)
INTERNAL
SURFACE
AREA B
7.0 INCHES
(177,8 mm)
A-A
C1S-097-01
Inlet Cowl Lip Repair Area

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
0.75 INCH CR3552-6-3

1.00 INCH
(19 mm) BLIND
(25.4 mm)
(TYPICAL) RIVETS
(TYPICAL)
REPAIR DOUBLER
EXISTING LIP
SKIN
2D
TYP
CUT OUT PROFILE
A A
10.0 INCH
(254 mm)
MAXIMUM
TYPICAL TAPER
FOR ALL EDGES.
TAPER MUST NOT
R 0.50 INCH TOUCH RIVET HOLES
(13 mm)
(TYPICAL)
2 x THICKNESS
0.020 INCH THICKNESS

(0.508 mm)
THICKNESS SEALANT
0.40 INCH
(10.16 mm)
(TYPICAL) A-A
C1S-089-01
Inlet Lip External Patch

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 6
INLET LIP FLUSH PATCH
1. General
This repair gives procedures to make a flush patch with an internal

doubler in Zone CL2 of the aluminum inlet lip skin. Refer to the Allowable
Damage section for specific zones. See Figure 201.
This repair can be used if the edge of the cut out is 1.75 inch (44,45 mm)
minimum from any area denoted as Zone CL1, the edge of the cut out is 1.75
inch (44,45 mm) minimum from a previous repair or splice, and the cut out
is not larger than 10 inch (254 mm) in the hoop direction.
For damage in Zone CL1, refer to the specific repair, if applicable. For
damage that exceeds the above limits or for damage at a splice location,
replace the lip skin segment.
A. Cut out the damaged skin. See Figure 201 and 202.
becomes dry.
(2) Cut out the damaged area in a square, rectangle or oval shape with
1.0 inch (25,4 mm) corner radius minimum.
(3) Remove the burrs and sharp edges with abrasive paper.
(4) Remove the unwanted pieces from the lip skin with a vacuum.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. Make the flush patch and internal doubler. See Figure 202.
(1) Make a flush patch from 2219-0 bare aluminum sheet, 0.071 to 0.080
inch (1,803-2,032 mm) thick to agree with the thickness and contour
of the repair area. Make a gap of 0.020 to 0.030 inch (0,508-0,762
mm) between the lip skin and flush patch.
NOTE: You can use a spare lip skin to cut out a flush patch if
the thickness and contour agrees.
(2) Make a internal doubler from 2219-0 bare aluminum sheet, 0.080 inch
(2,032 mm) thick to agree with the contour of the damaged skin.
NOTE: It may be necessary to cut the internal doubler to install

it. If you cut the internal doubler, make doubler straps
(splices) to overlap two rivets on the adjacent doubler
section on each side of the cut.
(4) Heat treat the flush patch, internal doubler and doubler straps (if
required) to 2219-T62. Refer to AMS 2770 or equivalent.
C. Prepare the flush patch, internal doubler and doubler straps (if
required) for installation on the lip skin. See Figure 202.
(1) Put the internal doubler on the inside of the inlet lip skin and
hold in place with clamps.
(2) Lay out the rivet pattern on the lip skin.
(3) Make fastener holes in doubler, doubler straps (if required) and
lip skin. Refer to Figure 502, SRM 51-44-00 FASTENERS - HOLE AND
DRILL DATA and SRM 51-46-00 COUNTERSINKING.
NOTE: If necessary, you can use oversize rivets.
WARNING: YOU MUST REMOVE ALL UNWANTED MATERIAL AND PIECES FROM THE LIP
SKIN AREA BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE REPAIR PARTS. UNWANTED
MATERIAL AND PIECES CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE INSIDE OF THE LIP
SKIN.
(5) Remove unwanted pieces from the lip skin with a vacuum.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(6) Apply alodine to the flush patch, internal doubler, doubler straps
(if required) and bare edges of the lip skin. Refer to the
(7) Apply primer to the flush patch, internal doubler, doubler straps
(if required) and bare edges of the lip skin. Refer to the
D. Install the flush patch, internal doubler and doubler straps (if
required) on the lip skin. See Figure 202.
(1) Put the internal doubler and doubler straps (if required) in the
inlet lip skin and hold in place with temporary fasteners.
(2) Wet install the internal doubler and doubler straps (if required)
with rivets.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(3) Put the flush patch on the internal doubler and hold in place with
temporary fasteners. Refer to SRM 51-42-00 FASTENER INSTALLATION
AND REMOVAL.
(4) Wet install the flush patch (if required) with rivets.
becomes dry.
(6) Apply aerodynamic sealant. Refer to Repair No. 10.

Aluminum, Sheet 2219-0 Commercially Available
Bare AL Alloy
0.071 in. Thick
Aluminum, Sheet 2219-0 Commercially Available
Bare AL Alloy
0.080 in. Thick
Coating, Alodine 1000 V71410
Chemical Henkel Corporation
Conversion 32100 Stephenson Hwy.
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Coating, Alodine 1500 V71410
Chemical Henkel Corporation
Conversion (Alt)
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Paper, Abrasive 150-320-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Primer, urethane 910-175 V83574
020-044 PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
825-009 DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Rivet CR3522P-5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rivet, oversize CR3522-5 V05693
(Alt) Cherry Textron Inc
Rivet, (Alt) NAS9308M-5 Commercially Available
Rivet, oversize NAS9311M-5 Commercially Available
(Alt)
Sealant, RTV157 V01139
Silicone Momentive Performance Material Inc.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Cowl Lip Skin

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Cowl Lip Skin

Figure 202 (SHEET 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Cowl Lip Skin

Figure 202 (SHEET 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 7
AFT BULKHEAD SPLICE
1. General
This repair gives the procedures to replace damaged aft bulkhead sections
with splice plates.
WARNING: SMALL PARTICLES AND PIECES OF TITANIUM MAKE A VERY DANGEROUS

FIRE CONDITION. DO NOT USE FOAM, WATER, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
OR CARBON DIOXIDE ON TITANIUM FIRES. WATER THAT TOUCHES MOLTEN
TITANIUM CAN CAUSE A STEAM EXPLOSION. EXTINGUISH A TITANIUM
FIRE WITH FULLY DRY TALC, CALCIUM CARBONATE, OR GRAPHITE. APPLY
THE POWDER TO A HEIGHT OF 1/2 INCH (13 MM) OR MORE ABOVE THE
METAL THAT IS ON FIRE.
A. Cleanup the damage area (See Figure 201).
(1) Find the area of the aft bulkhead that must be removed.
(2) Make a mark on the bulkhead adjacent to a zee stiffener where you
will cut the bulkhead to remove the damaged area.
(3) Make a mark where you will install the splice plates.
(a) The plate must be approximately 2 in. (50,8 mm) wide for the
correct rivet edge distance.
(b) It must make an overlap approximately 1 in. (25,4 mm) on both

the bulkhead and the replacement section.
(4) Remove the fasteners and zee stiffeners in the damaged area.
(5) Cut out and remove the damaged bulkhead section.
B. Prepare the replacement bulkhead section and splice plates.
(1) Make a replacement section from 0.063 in. (1,6 mm) 6AL-4V annealed
titanium sheet or the same gage as the bulkhead material.
(2) Put the replacement section on the inner and outer frames.
(3) Cut the replacement section so there is a maximum gap of 0.030 in.
(0,76 mm) between the sections and the bulkhead.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
(4) Drill pilot holes in the replacement section with a No. 40 drill
bit. Make sure you align the initial holes in the inner and outer
frames.
(5) Make the splice plates from 0.063 in. (1,6 mm) 6AL-4V annealed
titanium. The plates must make an overlap of the bulkhead and the
replacement section by 1 in. (25,4 mm).
(6) Drill pilot holes in the splice plates with a No. 40 drill bit.
Make sure you align the initial holes in the zee stiffeners and the
inner and outer frames.
(7) Attach the splice plates and zee stiffeners to the bulkhead with
temporary fasteners (clecos).
(8) Attach the replacement bulkhead section to the inner and outer
frames with clecos.
(9) Drill pilot holes through the splice plates and replacement
section and with a No. 40 drill bit. Make sure you keep the correct
edge distance for CR3553-5 rivets in the plates and the replacement
section.
(10) Ream all pilot holes to a 0.177 in. (4,49 mm) diameter. Use a No.
16 drill bit.
(11) Remove the zee stiffeners, splice plates, and replacement section
from the bulkhead.
(12) Remove the burrs from the parts and fastener holes.
C. Install the replacement bulkhead section, zee fasteners, and splice

plates.
(1) Apply PR-1200 primer to the mating surfaces of the bulkhead

sections, splice plates, zee stiffeners, and inner and outer
frame.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
(2) Cure the primer at 65°-75°F (19°-23°C) for 30 minutes.
(3) Apply RTV157 sealant to the mating surfaces of the bulkhead

sections, splice plates, zee stiffeners, and inner and outer
frames.
(4) Install the zee stiffeners, splice plates, and replacement section
with clecos.
(5) Install the CR3553-5 rivets wet with RTV157 sealant.
(6) Cut or remove the blind rivet stems with a file to make a smooth
surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other U.S.
a subsidiary export
of Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Rivet CR3553-5-2 V05693
CR3553-5-3 Cherry Textron Inc
CR3553-5-4 1224 E. Warner St.
CR3553-5-5 Santa Ana, CA 92705-5484
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Titanium Sheet 6AL-4V Annealed, Commercially Available
0.063in. (1,6 mm)
6AL -4
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 8
AFT BULKHEAD WEB PUNCTURE
1. General
This repair gives the procedures to repair puncture damage in the aft
bulkhead sections.
WARNING: SMALL PARTICLES AND PIECES OF TITANIUM MAKE A VERY DANGEROUS FIRE
CONDITION. DO NOT USE FOAM, WATER, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE, OR CARBON
DIOXIDE ON TITANIUM FIRES. WATER THAT TOUCHES MOLTEN TITANIUM CAN
CAUSE A STEAM EXPLOSION. EXTINGUISH A TITANIUM FIRE WITH FULLY DRY
TALC, CALCIUM CARBONATE, OR GRAPHITE. APPLY THE POWDER TO A HEIGHT
OF 0.25 INCH (13,0 MM) OR MORE ABOVE THE METAL THAT IS ON FIRE.
A. Prepare the damaged area. (See Figure 201)
(1) Stop drill holes the ends of cracks that extend from the puncture.
Use a No. 30, 0.1285 inch (3,263 mm) drill bit.
(2) Use a router to remove all bent web material and cracks. Make the
edges of the cutout smooth with 180, 320 grit silicone carbide
abrasive paper.
(3) Find the size of the necessary repair doubler. Make a mark of the
repair doubler outline on the bulkhead. Keep the correct edge
distance for CR3553-5 blind fasteners.
NOTE: The repair doubler must keep the minimum edge distance for
blind fasteners at the cutout and the doubler outer edge.
B. Prepare the doubler and bulkhead web.
(1) Make a repair doubler from 6AL-4V annealed titanium sheet. Refer to
the structural identification for the thickness of the aft
bulkhead web. Make the repair doubler from material one gage
thicker than the damaged web.
(2) Drill pilot holes in the doubler for doubler-to-web attach rivets.
Use a No. 40, 0.0980 inch (2,489 mm) drill bit. Refer to Figure 201
to find the pilot hole locations.
(3) Put the doubler on the bulkhead web. Use the doubler as a template
to drill pilot holes in the web for doubler-to-web fasteners. Use a
No. 40, 0.0890 inch (2,260 mm) drill bit.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Attach the doubler to the web with temporary fasteners.
(5) Ream the doubler and web pilot holes with a No.16, 0.1770 inch
(4,4958 mm) drill bit.
(6) Remove the doubler from the web. Make the burrs smooth on the
doubler and web rivet holes.
(7) Clean the mating surfaces of the doubler and the web with a clean
lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean
lint-free cloth before the solvent becomes dry.
(8) Apply PR-1200 primer to the mating surfaces of the web and the
doubler.
(9) Cure the primer at 65 - 75 degrees F (19 - 23 degrees C) for 30

minutes.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(10) Apply RTV157 silicone sealant to the mating surfaces of the web and
the doubler.
(11) Find the correct length of the CR3553-5 rivets to fasten the web to
the doubler.
C. Install the doubler on the web.
(1) Put the repair doubler on the aft bulkhead web with temporary
fasteners.
(2) Install CR3553-5 rivets wet with RTV157 silicone sealant.
(3) Cure the sealant for 30 minutes at 65 - 75 degrees F (19 - 23

degrees C).
(4) Cut the blind rivet stems or remove them with a file to make a
smooth surface
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
replace the items shown in Table 201..

Blind Rivet Tool Commercially Available
Doubler, Repair 6AL-4V Titanium, Commercially Available
Annealed
Material Thickness
As Necessary:
0.050 inch
(1,270mm)
Bit, Drill No. 16, Commercially Available
0.1770 inch
(4,4958 mm)
No. 30, 0.1285 inch
(3,263 mm)
No. 40, 0.0980 inch
(2,489 mm)
Paper, Abrasive 180, 320 Grit Commercially Available
Silicone Carbide
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Rivet, Blind CR3553-5 V05693
(Length as Cherry Textron Inc
Necessary) 1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Aft Bulkhead Web Puncture Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 9
AFT BULKHEAD WEB CRACK
1. General
This repair gives the procedures to repair cracks in the aft bulkhead web.
WARNING: SMALL PARTICLES AND PIECES OF TITANIUM MAKE A VERY DANGEROUS

FIRE CONDITION. DO NOT USE FOAM, WATER, CARBON TETRACHLORIDE,
OR CARBON DIOXIDE ON TITANIUM FIRES. WATER THAT TOUCHES MOLTEN
TITANIUM CAN CAUSE A STEAM EXPLOSION. EXTINGUISH A TITANIUM
FIRE WITH FULLY DRY TALC, CALCIUM CARBONATE, OR GRAPHITE. APPLY
THE POWDER TO A HEIGHT OF 1/2 INCH (13 MM) OR MORE ABOVE THE
METAL THAT IS ON FIRE.
A. Prepare the damaged area. (See Figure 201).
(1) Stop drill holes at the end of cracks. Use a No. 30, 0.1285 in.
(3,263 mm) drill bit. Make the burrs smooth around the holes.
(2) Find the size of the repair doubler. Make a mark of the repair
doubler outline on the bulkhead. Keep the necessary edge distances
for the CR3553 blind fasteners.
NOTE: The repair doubler must keep the minimum edge distance for
blind fasteners at the crack, and at the outer edges of the
doubler.
B. Prepare the doubler and bulkhead web.
(1) Make a repair doubler from 6AL-4V annealed titanium sheet. See the
structural identification section for the thickness of the aft
bulkhead web. Make the repair doubler from material one gage
thicker than the damaged web.
(2) Drill pilot holes in the doubler, for doubler-to-web attach

rivets, with a No. 40, 0.0980 in. (2,489 mm) drill. Refer to Figure
201 to find locations for the pilot holes.
(3) Put the doubler on the bulkhead web. Use the doubler as a template
and drill pilot holes in the web for doubler-to-web edge fasteners,
with a No. 40, 0.0980 in. (2,489 mm) drill bit.
(4) Attach the doubler to the web with temporary fasteners (clecos).
Ream the doubler and web pilot holes with a No. 16, 0.1770 in.
(4,4958 mm) drill bit.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(5) Remove the doubler from the web. Make the burrs on the doubler and
web rivet holes smooth.
(6) Make a paper or clear plastic template to find the locations for
the crack stabilizing rivets. Use the template to make a mark of
the locations on the doubler.
(7) Attach the doubler to the web with temporary fasteners. Drill pilot
holes in the doubler and the web for the crack stabilizing rivets.
Use a No. 40, 0.0980 in. (2,489 mm) drill bit.
(8) Ream the crack stabilizing rivet holes in the doubler and web with
a No. 27, 0.1440 in. (3,657 mm) drill bit.
(9) Remove the doubler from the web. Remove the burrs on the doubler
and web rivet holes.
(10) Clean the mating surfaces of the doubler and the web with a clean
(11) Apply PR-1200 primer to the mating surfaces of the web and the
doubler.
(12) Cure the primer at 65°-75°F (19°-23°C) for 30 minutes.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(13) Apply RTV157 silicone sealant to the mating surfaces of the web and
the doubler.
(14) Find the length of CR3553-5 rivets for the doubler-to-web edge
fasteners. Find the length of CR3553-4 rivets for the crack
stabilizing fasteners.
C. Install the doubler on the web.
(1) Install the repair doubler on the aft bulkhead web with temporary
fasteners.
(2) Install CR3553-5, and CR3553-4 rivets wet with RTV157 silicone
sealant.
(3) Cut the blind rivet stems or remove them with a file so they make a
smooth surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Blind Rivet Tool Commercially Available
Doubler, Repair 6AL-4V Titanium, Commercially Available
Annealed, Sheet,
Material Thickness
as required:
0.050 in. (1,270
mm)
Bit, Drill No. 16, 0.1770 in. Commercially Available
(4,4958 mm)
No. 27, 0.1440 in.
(3,657 mm)
No. 30, 0.1285 in.
(3,263 mm)
No. 40, 0.0980 in.
(2,489 mm)
Paper, Abrasive 180, 320 Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
CR3553-5 Cherry Textron Inc
(Length as 1224 E. Warner St.
Necessary) Santa Ana, CA 92705-5484
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
99 percent pure
or
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Ketone Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Aft Bulkhead Web Crack Repair

Fig 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 10
REPLACEMENT OF AERODYNAMIC SEALANT
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to remove and replace aerodynamic

sealant. Sealant is applied in the joints and splices of the inlet cowl.
Refer to Figure 201 to find the correct locations of sealant.
A. Remove all loose or damaged sealant.
(1) Use a plastic or wood tool to remove all sealant that is damaged or
is separated from the adjacent joint surfaces.
(2) Make the surfaces of the joint rough where the primer and sealant
will be applied. Use aluminum oxide abrasive paper 320-grit or
finer.
B. Clean the surfaces of the joint.
CAUTION: SURFACES MUST BE FULLY CLEAN AND DRY OR THE PRIMER AND
SEALANT WILL NOT BOND CORRECTLY.
(1) Clean the surfaces of the joint with a clean lint-free cloth and
the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth
C. Apply primer to the joint surfaces for DC93-006 sealant.
NOTE: If PR1995 sealant (primer not required) is used, then skip to

step E.
(1) Put masking tape on both sides of the joint surface. Put the
masking tape 0.25 inch (6,35 mm) more than the edge of the joint on
each side.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) Mix the PR-1200 primer. Obey the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Use a nylon brush to apply a thin coat of PR-1200 primer to the
joint. Do not put primer on adjacent surfaces of undamaged sealant
where the new sealant will touch.
(4) Let the primer dry at room temperature, until the finish has
reached a dull appearance (60 to 90 minutes) before DC93-006-1
sealant is applied.
D. Apply sealant to the joints.
(1) Mix 10 parts-by-weight of DC93-006 sealant base with 1

part-by-weight of DC93-006-1 catalyst in a plastic container. Use
a plastic spatula to mix the sealant. (Refer to Table 201 for
alternate sealant.)
(2) Put a cover over the container to prevent contamination of the

mixture. Keep it in a cool place until you use it.
NOTE: The useful life of the DC93-006-1 mixture is about 60

minutes at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). Heat will decrease
the gel and cure time of the adhesive mixture. DC93-006-6
has a useful life of 4 hours.
(3) Apply DC93-006 sealant to the joints in the area between the
masking tape. Use a plastic spatula or an injection flow gun.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Use a plastic spatula to make the surface of the sealant smooth and
level with the adjacent surfaces to 0.010 inch (0,254 mm) below the
surfaces.
(5) Remove the masking tape before a surface skin forms on the sealant.
(6) Cure the DC93-006-1 sealant for 10 hours at 72 - 82 degrees F (22 -

28 degrees C) at a relative humidity of 50 percent or more. DC93-
006-6 sealant has a cure time of 48 hours.
(7) Alternative cure method:
Cure the DC93-006-1 sealant for 2 hours at72 - 82 degrees F

(22 - 28 degrees C) (gel time), then cure it for 2 hours at
190 degrees F (88 degrees C) at a relative humidity of 50 percent
or more. The minimum required hardess is 30. (DC93-006-6 sealant
has a minimum hardness of 35.)
NOTE: If necessary, extend the cure time to reach minimum

hardness. This sealant is a condensation-cured silicone and
requires humidity of at least 50 percent.
E. Apply Sealant, PR1995 Alternate (Primerless)
(1) Put masking tape on both sides of the joint surface. Put the
masking tape 0.25 inch (6,35 mm) more than the edge of the joint on
each side.
(2) Mix PR1995 Class B sealant Part A: Part B, 1 part-by-weight (part

A) with 10 parts by weight (part B) in a plastic container. Use a
plastic spatula to mix the sealant.
(a) Cover the plastic container to prevent contamination of the

mixture. Store it in a cool place until used.
NOTE: The useful life of the PR-1995 Class B sealant mixture

is about 2 hours at 77 degrees F
(25 degrees C).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply the PR1995 Class B sealant to a level in line with, but not
above the adjacent surface, and not more than 0.010-inch (0.254 mm)
below the adjacent surface. (See Figure 201)
(a) Use a plastic spatula to make the surface of the sealant level
in line with, but not above the adjacent surface, and not more
than 0.010 inch (0,254 mm) below the adjacent surface. (See
Figure 202)
(b) Remove masking material before surface skin forms on the

sealant.
(4) Allow sealant to cure at room temperature, 67 - 77 degrees F (19 –

25 degrees C), for 24 hours.
(5) Heat accelerate is permissible as follows: Let the product sit for
2 hour at ambient condition [67 - 77 degrees F (19 – 25 degrees
C)], then 2 hours at 190 degrees F (88 degrees C). After 2 hours
check for hardness. Minimum required hardness is 30. If
necessary, extend cure time to meet minimum hardness. This sealant
is a condensation-cured silicone, and requires humidity of at
least 50%.

Brush, Nylon Commercially Available
Injection Flow Gun Commercially Available
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Sealant DC93-006 (2 part) V5D028
-1 catalyst Dow Corning Corporation
Sealant, Alternate DC93-006 (2 part) V5D028
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Sealant, Alternate PR-1995 Class B V83574
(Primer not required) PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
(2 Part) DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Spatula Plastic Commercially Available
Paper, Abrasive 320-grit or finer Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Aerodynamic Sealant And Application

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 11
EDGE EROSION DAMAGE
1. General
This procedure gives instructions for repair of erosion damage to

composite panel edges. You cannot have damage more than 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
long and 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) deep for this repair.
A. Prepare the surface.

NECESSARY.
(1) Remove the paint layers around the damage and make a smooth tapered
edge on the layers. Cut loose fibers. Do not sand the carbon fabric
and damage good fibers.
becomes dry.
B. Apply Adhesive Filler and Cure the Repair.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA934NA adhesive to fill the damaged

area. (See General Repair Procedures).
NOTE: EA956 adhesive with chopped glass fibers can be used as an

alternative to EA934NA.
(2) Put adhesive in the damaged area with a spatula. Put Teflon tape
above the uncured adhesive to make a smooth surface.
(3) Cure the adhesive at 200°F (93°C) for 60 minutes with a heat lamp.
C. Complete the repair.
(1) Remove the Teflon tape. Make the surface of the adhesive smooth
with 150- to 180-grit abrasive paper. Do not damage or remove
carbon fibers.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Alternate Adhesive
Catalyst Part B
Chopped Fiberglass Type 181/120
(82°-121°C)
Paper, Abrasive 150-, 180-grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Plastic
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (50.8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 12
EXPANDED COPPER SCREEN ECS REPAIR
1. General.
This repair gives procedures to repair the expanded copper screen.
2. Repair Procedures
A. Prepare the damaged surface. (See Figure 201 and 202.)
(1) Put Teflon tape around the repair area. Put the Teflon tape 2 in.
(50,8 mm) more than the edge of the damaged area.

NECESSARY.
(2) Use abrasive paper to remove the adhesive material in the damaged
area to find the ECS material. Use 150-grit abrasive paper.
(3) Remove the unwanted material with a clean lint-free cloth and
solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the
solvent becomes dry.
B. Prepare the ECS material for installation.
(1) Cut a piece of ECS material to make an overlap of the original ECS
material by 2.0 in. (50.8 mm). Cut the corners of the repair piece
at 45 degrees with rounded edges to a length of 1 in. (25.4 mm).
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(2) If the ECS material is not clean, flush it with solvent. Dry the
ECS material in the air for 30 minutes.
C. Install the ECS material on the panel.
(1) Mix the correct amount of EA9390 adhesive. (See 54-02-00, General
Repair Procedures).
(2) Put the ECS material over the repair area. Make sure the ECS
material touches the original ECS material with a 2.0 in. (50,8 mm)
overlap.
NOTE: A sanding ply is not used over or under the ECS material.
Extra adhesive is used as an alternative to a sanding ply.
(3) Apply a large quantity of adhesive mixture to the surface of the

ECS material and masked area with a spatula.
D. Bag and cure the ECS repair. (See Figure 202 and 54-02-00, General
Repair Procedures).
E. Complete the repair.
(1) Remove the vacuum bag, heat blanket, breather plies, silicone
rubber sheet, nonporous parting film, bleeder plies, temperature
probes, vacuum probe, porous parting film, mask band, and tacky
tape.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(2) Apply the sanding adhesive.
CHEMICALS.
(a) Mix the correct quantity of EA956 adhesive. (See 54-02-00,

(b) Apply the EA956 adhesive mixture to a thickness of 0.060-0.080

in. (1.52-2.03 mm) on the outer surface of the cured ECS
material. You will apply unused adhesive as a sanding layer
before the repair is painted.
(c) Cure the EA956 adhesive mixture. (See 54-02-00, General Repair
Procedures).
(3) Make the repair surface smooth so that you can paint it. Use 150-,
(4) Remove the abrasive dust from the repair surface with a clean lint-
free cloth and solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free
(5) Apply primer and topcoats to the repair. (See Repair No. 1, Surface
Finish Restoration).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Rohr, Inc.,any otherof Goodrich
U.S. export control
a subsidiary Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-
ROHR, INC.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Catalyst Part B
Blanket, Heat 250°F (121.1°C) V61426
10W/Sq in. Atacs Products, Inc.
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Connector, Vacuum 1/8 in. (3.175 mm) Commercially Available
Diameter
ECS Material CU 040 CX V0KWM1
“Aerostrike” Astroseal Products Mfg Co.
85 Airport Industrial Park Road
P.O. Box 377
Chester, CT 06412
Phone: (860) 526-8605
www.astrosealproducts.com
Film, Bagging 0.002 in. (0,0508 V0F451
mm) Richmond Aircraft Products, Inc.
Film, Parting Nonporous V0F451
Gauge, Vacuum 0-30 in. Commercially Available
(0-762 mm) Hg
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Hose, Vacuum 1/8 in. (3,175 mm) Commercially Available
Diameter
Knife, Utility Commercially Available
Paper, Abrasive 150-, 320-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Probe, Temperature 0°-250°F Commercially Available
(-18°-121°C)
Probe, Vacuum 1/8 Inch Commercially Available
(3.175 mm) Dia.
Roller 2 in. (50.80 mm) Commercially Available
Diameter,
Steel or Plastic
Rubber, Sheet 0.062-0.236 in. V0F451
(1.57-5.99 mm) Richmond Aircraft Products, Inc.
Sealant, Bag Tacky V53309
Schnee-Morehead
Chemicals, Inc.
P.O. Box 1305
Irving, TX 75060-3153
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape Teflon 2 in. (50.80 mm) Wide Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
Inlet Cowl Repair Area (Typical)

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Expanded Copper Screen Repair

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 13
ACOUSTIC PANEL CRACK
1. General
This repair gives instructions to repair cracks or small holes in the

acoustic panel perforated skin. The crack must not be more than 6.0 in.
(152,4 mm) long or the hole more than 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) diameter to do this
repair. A doubler is installed to reinforce the damaged area. The doubler
is bonded and riveted to the perforated skin.
A. Stop drill (No. 30 drill) a hole at each end of the crack. Remove all of
the drill debris. (See Figure 201).
B. Make a doubler from sheet stock of same material and gage as original
skin. Use non-perforated material. (See Table 201). Use a doubler with
full radius and chamfered edge at 45 degrees on all sides. Apply a
chemical conversion coating on the chamfered surface with a brush.
C. Drill rivet holes in the doubler and perforated skin at 0.75 in. (19,0
mm) pitch and 0.31 in. (7,9 mm) edge margin. Use a No. 16 drill bit.
Temporarily attach the doubler.
D. Remove the doubler and remove the burrs from the rivet holes. Remove
all drill debris.
CHEMICALS.
E. Clean the repair area and doubler with a clean lint-free cloth and
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
F. Mix the correct amount of EA9321 adhesive. (See 54-02-00, General

Repair Procedures).
G. Apply adhesive to the repair area and doubler back face with a brush.
H. Put the doubler over the repair area and align the rivet holes. Attach
the doubler with CR3253-5-2 blind rivets. Install rivets wet with
adhesive.
I. Put a piece of nonporous parting film over the repair area and attach
it with tape.
J. Put a heat blanket over the parting film and cure the repair at
190°-210°F (88°-99°C) for 60 minutes.
K. Remove the heat blanket and parting film. Make a smooth surface between
the doubler and stabilized woven wire with 150-, 320-grit abrasive
paper.
CHEMICALS.
L. Remove the abrasive dust from the repair area with a clean lint-free
cloth and solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Blanket, Heat 0°-250°F V61426
(32°-121°C) Atacs Products, Inc.
10W/sq. in. 850 South Cambridge Street
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Brush Bristle Commercially Available
Drill Bit No. 16 Commercially Available
No. 30
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Silicon Carbide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Wipes Cloth, Cotton Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Acoustic Panel Crack Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 14
BACKSKIN DISBOND/CORROSION REPAIR - NO CORE DAMAGE
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to repair backskin disbond and corrosion

when there is no damage to the core. The damaged skin is cut out and a
filler piece and doubler pieces are bonded under vacuum pressure and
riveted to the repair area. The maximum size limit of the skin cutout is
16 inches in the circumferential (hoop) direction and 6 inches in the fwd/
aft direction. If the panels are removed from the inlet, they must be put
in a tool to keep their shape during cure.
A. Remove the thermal blanket, if applicable. See Figure 201. Wipe the
backskin area with a clean cotton cloth made moist with solvent. Wipe
the area with a clean lint free cotton cloth before the solvent becomes
gas.
B. Find the disbonds and corrosion. See Figure 202.
(1) Do a tap test on the backskin to find disbonded/corroded skin. Make

a mark around the disbonded/corroded area. Make the mark in a
regular shape (circle, rectangle or square). Corners must have a
0.5 in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius. If damage is within a distance of
1.0 in. (25,4 mm) minimum from the cutout edge to the cowl edge or
closure edge, a closure doubler is necessary. (See Figure 204 and
205).
C. Remove corrosion and prepare the panel for repair.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHEMICALS TO REMOVE CORROSION. USE ONLY

MECHANICAL METHODS.
(1) Remove a small quantity of corrosion at a time with 180-240 grit

aluminum oxide abrasive paper or equivalent.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) Flush the repair area with solvent. Flush the repair area again
until water and dirt are removed.
(3) Wipe the repair area dry with a clean cotton cloth. Make the area
dry with compressed air.
(4) Put masking tape around the edge of the repair area where you will
put the doubler or doublers. The doublers must have a regular
shape. The doublers must make an overlap of the cutout by a minimum
of 1.0 in. (25,4 mm). See Figures 202 or 204.
(5) Make the doubler area rough with 180-240 grit aluminum oxide
abrasive paper. Remove the finish to the bare metal.
becomes dry.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL NOT TO CUT INTO THE HONEYCOMB CORE WHEN YOU CUT
THE SKIN.
(7) Cut out the damaged skin inside the marks and use a 0.5 inch
minimum corner radius. The skin thickness is 0.025 in. (0,635 mm).
Do not cut into the honeycomb core. Remove the damaged skin from
the honeycomb core.
NOTE: It is permitted to freeze the cutout with dry ice to easily

remove the skin in pieces.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
D. Do the inspection again for corrosion.
(1) Visually examine the repair area with a 5-10X glass.
(2) Repeat step 2.C. again until all corrosion is removed.
E. Find the repair to do. See Figures 202 thru 205.
(1) Measure the distance to the closure edge to find the repair to do.
(2) Group corroded areas that are close together under one repair
doubler. If corrosion exceeds the repair limitations, do the panel
replacement.
(3) Mask off the core areas to prevent the Pasa Jell 105 applied in
step 2.F. from going into the honeycomb core cells. If the Pasa
Jell 105 goes into the cells, rinse out the core with demineralized
water. Do a Litmus check to make sure all the Pasa Jell 105 has
been removed.
F. Apply Pasa Jell 105 to the repair area.
(1) Make the bonding surface rough with a Scotch Brite pad to a
water-break condition. See section 54-02-02.
NOTE: Wear clean gloves for the remainder of the preparation to

prevent contamination from dirt and oils from your hands.
(2) Apply Pasa Jell 105 to all bonding surfaces and let stand for 8-10
minutes.
(3) Flush with demineralized water. Wipe with a cheese cloth moist with
demineralized water several times until a neutral surface is
obtained.
(4) Do a test with litmus paper to make sure the surface is

neutralized. The litmus paper should show a neutral reading of pH
7.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any otherof U.S. export control

Rohr, Inc., a subsidiary Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-
ROHR, INC.
(5) Allow the area to air dry at room temperature for 60 minutes.
G. Make the repair pieces. See figures 203 thru 205.
CAUTION: FIT ALL THE FILLERS AND DOUBLERS TO BE BONDED. THE PARTS MUST
FULLY CONTACT WITH LIGHT FINGER PRESSURE TO PREVENT GAPS AND
DISBONDS.
(1) Make the filler from 0.025 in. (0,635 mm) 2024-T42 or -T3 aluminum
to fit in the cutouts. The filler repair piece can have a maximum
edge gap of 0.050 in. (1,27 mm) with the skin. Make both surfaces
and edges rough with 180-240 grit aluminum oxide paper. Make sure
the repair parts make the same contour with light finger pressure.
(2) Make the backskin doubler from 0.032 in. (0,813 mm) 2024-T42 or -T3
aluminum to install over the filler. See Figure 203 or 205. The
doubler should have a minimum overlap of 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) with the
existing skin, except for the backskin doubler edge that meets the
closure. Make both surfaces and edges rough with 180-240 grit
aluminum oxide paper. Make sure the repair parts make the same
contour with light finger pressure.
(3) Make the closure doubler from 0.032 in. (0,813 mm) 2024-T42 or -T3
aluminum to install over the doubler and closure. See figure 205.
The closure doubler must be the same as the previous backskin
doubler except it must make a minimum overlap on the closure of 1.0
in. (25,4 mm). Make both surfaces and edges rough with 150-grit
aluminum oxide paper. Make sure the repair parts make the same
contour with light finger pressure.
(4) Install all fillers and doublers with Verifilm under vacuum
pressure to check for proper contact and adhesive thickness.
Adjust the contour as necessary.
(5) Do a water break test on the filler and doubler repair pieces. See
54-02-02, Water Break Test.
(6) Position the repair pieces and drill the rivet holes. See Figure
203 or 205.
NOTE: Make sure that you keep a 2D minimum rivet edge distance
and 4D minimum rivet spacing.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(7) Phosphoric or Chromic acid anodize the repair pieces.
H. Apply primer.
(1) Apply a thin coat of adhesive primer to fully cover all the
surfaces of the existing skin, fillers and doublers. The primer
thickness must be 0.0001 to 0.0004 in. (0,003 to 0,01 mm).
(2) Make sure the primer thickness is correct.
(a) Apply a layer of primer to only one side of a one square foot
aluminum sheet. The aluminum sheet must be the same thickness
as the repair parts.
(b) Weigh the aluminum sheet. It must not increase in wet weight
by more than 0.90 grams for a correct primer thickness.
(3) Let the primer dry in the air for 60 minutes. Then cure the primer
at 200°F (93°C) for 60 minutes.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
WARNING: THE REPAIR PARTS MUST BE CURED WITHIN 120 HOURS AFTER THE
ADHESIVE HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM REFRIGERATED STORAGE.
I. Install the repair parts.
(1) Apply a layer of FM350 NA Film Adhesive to the side of the filler
repair piece that touches the core. Install the filler repair
piece.
(2) Apply a layer of FM350 NA Film Adhesive to the side of the backskin
doubler repair piece that touches the filler. Install the doubler.
(3) If a closure splice is used, apply a layer of FM350 NA Film

Adhesive to the side of the closure splice repair piece that
touches the backskin doubler. Install closure splice.
(4) Mix DC90-006 sealant. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION: USE TACK RIVETS TO HOLD THE REPAIR DOUBLERS IN PLACE AND TO
PREVENT MOVEMENT DURING CURE.
(5) Make sure all the rivet holes line up.
(6) Apply PR-1200 primer to the tack rivet hole locations. Let dry for
30 minutes. Install tack rivets CR3223-5-2 or equivalent wet with
sealant.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
J. Double bag and cure repair.
(1) Put a minimum of four thermocouples at the edge of the repair. Do

not put the thermocouples on the repair area. Use Teflon tape to
attach the thermocouples.
(2) Put porous parting film and breather cloth over the repair area.
(3) Put tacky tape on masking tape to seal bag edges.
(4) Apply first vacuum bag and put two vacuum probes at opposite ends
of the 1st vacuum bag. Apply vacuum and examine for leaks. Maintain
22 in. Hg. minimum.
(5) Put parting film above the vacuum bag. Use Teflon tape to put the
heat blanket above the repair. The heating blanket must stop at the
vacuum bag.
(6) Put parting film above the heat blanket. Put one thermocouple in
the center, top of heat blanket. Position breather cloth.
NOTE: The heat blanket should extend a minimum of 4 in.

(101,6 mm) more than the repair patch edges, if possible.
Use one more heat blanket at heatsink areas or use
insulation blankets to prevent low temperature areas.
(7) Put masking tape around the edges of the first bag. Put tacky tape
on the masking tape to seal the bag edges.
(8) Apply second vacuum bag and put two vacuum probes at opposite ends
into vacuum bag. Cut a hole in vacuum bag to permit vacuum probes
from the first vacuum bag to go into the second vacuum bag, use
tacky tape to seal around probes. Ensure vacuum in first bag is 22
in. Hg. minimum. Apply vacuum in second bag and examine for leaks.
Use 10 in. Hg. maximum in second bag.
CAUTION: TOO HIGH OF A PRESSURE IN SECOND VACUUM BAG MAY LIFT REPAIR
PARTS FROM THE SURFACE AND RESULT IN A UNSATISFACTORY REPAIR
DUE TO LACK OF PRESSURE.
(9) Connect four thermocouples to temperature recorder and one to

temperature controller.
(10) Increase the heat at 2° to 12°F (1° to 7°C) per minute and cure at
340°-360°F (171°-182°C) for 60 minutes under 22 in. Hg minimum
vacuum.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(11) Let the assembly cool with vacuum applied until reaching 150°F
(66°C).
(12) Carefully remove the assembly from vacuum bag as assembly may stay
hot.
NOTE: If the panel is removed, you can use one vacuum bag and a
forced air oven to cure.
(13) Remove the vacuum bags and all of the materials used to cure the
repair. Remove the masking tape.
(14) Examine the repair. Do a tap test to make sure that there are no
disbonds.
(15) Apply PR-1200 primer to all rivet hole locations. Let dry for 30
minutes.
(16) Mix DC90-006 sealant. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(17) Install the rivets per Figure 202 thru 205 wet with sealant. Wipe
off excess sealant with a clean cloth. Do not remove the tack
rivets.
(18) Cure the sealant. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
K. Examine the repair area for disbonds.
(1) Perform A-Scan inspection of backskin for disbonds. No disbonds

allowed.
L. Apply primer, equivalent primers may be used.
(1) Apply 2 coats of primer per SRM 54-10-00, Repair No. 1, section
3.B, “Internal Surface Restoration”. Fully cure the primer between
coats.
M. Identify the repair.
(1) Mark Repair No. 14 adjacent to the Identification plate using a

permanent marker or stencil.
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Bonding Film FM350 NA V28174
Adhesive Supported Cytec Engineering Materials
Global Headquarters
Tempe Arizona
Phone: (480) 730-2000
www.cytec.com
(Alternate) Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Adhesive Primer BR6750 V04622
Cytec Engineered Materials
1440 North Kraemer Blvd
Anaheim CA 92806
Phone: (714) 666 4342
Adhesive Primer BR154 V0V7G8
(Alternate) Cytec Industries Inc.
5 Garret Mountain Plz
West Paterson, NJ 07242-3317
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Blanket, Heat 400°F minimum V61426
(120°C) Atacs Products, Inc.
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Connector, Vacuum 1/8 in. (3 mm) Commercially Available
Diameter
Cover, Container Metal or Plastic Commercially Available
Bit, Drill No. 20 Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Hose, Vacuum 1/8 in. (3 mm) Commercially Available
Diameter
Litmus paper Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Paper, Abrasive 150, 320-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Pasa Jell 105 V4E208
Bergdahl Associates, Inc
2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com
Probe, 400°F Commercially Available
Temperature (120°C)
Pump, Vacuum 0 -30 Hg. Commercially Available
Scotch Brite Pad Various Grit Commercially Available
Tape, Teflon 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Sealant DC90-006-2 V5D028
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Alternate Sealant RTV88 Sealant V01139
9910 Catalyst Momentive Performance Material Inc.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
VeriFilm Commercially Available
Rivet, Blind CR3223-5-2 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rivet, Blind NAS9304E5-2 Commercially Available
(Alternate-O/S)
Rivet, Blind CR3253-5-2 V05693
(Over-Sized) Cherry Textron Inc
Sheet, aluminum 0.025 inch thick Commercially Available
2024T42
(Alternate) 2024T3
2024T42
(Alternate) 2024T3
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Back Skin Location (With and Without Thermal Blanket)

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Repair Doubler More Than 1.0" from Closure

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Repair Doubler Less Than 1.0 in. from Closure

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Repair Doubler Less Than 1.0" from Closure

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Doubler Repair Less Than 1.0 in. From Closure

Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Double Bag Repair Cure

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 15
CORROSION PREVENTATIVE COMPOUND (CPC)
APPLICATION TO CORROSION SUSCEPTIBLE AREAS
1. General
This repair provides the limits when CPC (Amlguard) is applied on the
Inlet Cowl non-acoustic & acoustic surfaces, fastener areas and splices.
This procedure can be applied in the shop or on wing as time permits. If
damage is found, it shall be repaired prior to application of the CPC. The
damage is usually in the form of corrosion on surface areas. This
procedure provides instructions on how to apply a non-diluted 100 percent
Amlguard solution to the non-acoustic areas of the Inlet Cowl panels or
backskin areas and a diluted 10 percent Amlguard/90 percent Acetone
solution to the acoustic areas with a 100 percent acetone rinse of the
acoustic area. This CPC may be reapplied at regular intervals to inhibit
the effects of corrosion, reference Service Bulletin RA32071-108.
If the damage is in the limits established in the CMM or SRM, remove

corrosion, refer to the approved blend repair and proceed with this
procedure. If the depth of the damage is more than the limits, repair with
CMM or SRM or replace the panel and proceed with this procedure.
The following Acoustic Zones indicate CPC application limits:
Zone 1 - Non-acoustic areas around perimeter of air wetted acoustic

panel. Apply non-diluted 100% Amlguard solution to this area.
Zone 2 - Acoustic areas on the inner barrel panel on 642-1000 inlets.
Apply a diluted 10 percent Amlguard/90 percent Acetone
solution to these areas. Rinse with 100% acetone solution in
less than 20 minutes to prevent acoustic blockage.
Use the Amlguard as an integral part of a regular maintenance program to

prevent corrosion. This material will displace salt water and moisture
leaving a clean, corrosion preventative film. It is intended for use on
areas such as: around fasteners, seams, access panels and those regions
approved in this repair. Do not use on moving parts which require a
lubricated surface or around liquid oxygen fittings. Do not use alternate
CPC’s in the acoustic area, Zone 2, Figure 201, acoustic blockage may
result on the wire septum.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
2. Apply CPC to Corrosion Susceptible Non-acoustic Areas, Zone 1

(See Figures 201 and 202)
CHEMICALS.
A. Wipe off excess dirt and moisture from the surface to be protected.
Clean the area where the CPC’s will be applied with acetone. Wipe the
area with a lint-free cotton cloth before the solvent dries.
CAUTION: IF THE NON-DILUTED CPC SOLUTION EXTENDS INTO THE ACOUSTIC AREA,
THE AREA MUST BE WIPED/RINSED WITH ACETONE TO REMOVE THE
UNWANTED CPC. THE PRESENCE OF DRY NON-DILUTED CPC SOLUTION ON
THE ACOUSTIC AREA CAN SIGNIFICANTLY AFFECT THE ACOUSTIC
PERFORMANCE OF THE PANEL.
B. Locate the areas to apply CPC. Mask off the acoustic portion of the
panel to prevent any 100 percent Amlguard solution from the core area
and cause to block wire mesh septum. If the solution extends into the
acoustic area, wipe and rinse the area with acetone to remove the
unwanted CPC.
WARNING: DUE TO THE LOW FLASH POINT, 55°F (13°C) OF AMLGUARD, DO NOT
APPLY TO INLET COWL AREAS WHEN THE AREAS ARE STILL HOT,
(LIPSKIN, AFT ENGINE ATTACH AREA). ALLOW INLET COWL TO COOL
PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF CPC. IT IS REQUESTED TO ALLOW 5-8 HOURS
DRYING TIME AT 55°F (13°C) MINIMUM FOR AMLGUARD/ACETONE
SOLUTION PRIOR TO NEXT ENGINE START.
CHEMICALS.
C. Apply Amlguard to non-acoustic areas, Zone 1. See Figure 201

and Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(1) Apply a uniform coat of 100 percent Amlguard solution by brush or

spray methods on the forward edge and fastener area perimeter of
the non-acoustic areas of the acoustic panel, see Figures 201 and
202, Zone 1.
NOTE: Application of Amlguard by wiping is not recommended. It

will result in a non-uniform coating, thin areas, and
possible pin holes. If this occurs it will allow a path for
corrosion to initiate.
(2) Allow the Amlguard to dry for 30 minutes at 55°F (13°C) minimum
before a second coat is applied. Remove masking tape. Dry the
Amlguard for 5 to 8 hours at 55°F (13°C) minimum prior to next
engine start.
NOTE: Reapplication of Amlguard is necessary where coating has

been eroded by abrasion. Reapplication of the CPC should
follow Section 2 and be applied as applicable, reference
Service Bulletin RA32071-108.
3. Apply CPC to Corrosion Susceptible Lower Acoustic Surfaces, Zone 2

(See Figures 203 and 204)
CHEMICALS.
A. Wipe off excess dirt and moisture from the surface to be protected.
Clean the area where the CPC’s will be applied with acetone. Wipe the
area with a lint-free cotton cloth before the solvent dries.
B. Locate the areas to apply CPC. Mask off the non-acoustic portion of the
inner panel.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF CPC. IT IS REQUESTED TO ALLOW 5-8 HOURS
DRYING TIME AT 55°F (13°C) MINIMUM FOR AMLGUARD/ACETONE
C. Assemble a shop hose, stopper and nozzle wand, see Table 201. Use the
shop hose equipped with 10-15 psi of clean dry compressed air (shop
air) to insert into the stopper center hole, see Figures 203 and 204.
Insert the stopper with hose attached into the nozzle wands open end
with a twist motion. The stopper should be securely installed with a
tight fit.
CAUTION: APPLICATION OF DILUTED CPC TO THE ACOUSTIC AREA ZONE 2 IS

LIMITED TO THE LOWER ACOUSTIC AREA, 3 O’CLOCK TO 9 O’CLOCK
POSITION FOR ON WING APPLICATIONS. IN ORDER TO APPLY CPC’S TO
THE ENTIRE INNER INLET ACOUSTIC SURFACES, THE INLET SHALL HAVE
TO BE IN A SHOP ENVIRONMENT AND ROTATED 180° SO THAT THE REGION
WHERE THE CPC IS APPLIED IS ON THE LOWEST AREA.
D. Apply 10 percent Amlguard/90 percent Acetone solution to lower acoustic

areas and rinse, Zone 2. See Figures 201, 202, 203 and 204.
NOTE: Approximately 500 ml per square foot of the Amlguard/acetone

solution is necessary for proper application. It is acceptable
to apply CPC solution to acoustic area one square foot at a time
until the lower acoustic area is complete.
(1) Mix a 10 percent Amlguard/90 percent Acetone solution. Apply by

pouring, spraying or brushing the Amlguard solution to the lower
acoustic area, a squirt bottle may be used.
NOTE: Application of Amlguard by pouring, spray or brush in Zone

2 is acceptable. The diluted Amlguard solution will enter
the perforated holes freely. Using pressurized air to force
the solution into the panel will provide corrosion
protection to the backskin.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(2) Use filtered, pressurized air (regulated 10-15 psi) and the
assembled stopper/wand device to force the solution through the
wire septum and on the backskin of the acoustic panel. Align the
wand assembly as shown in Figures 203 and 204. Sweep the wand
assembly over the inner barrel surface that has the CPC solution.
Maintain complete surface contact of the wand assembly opening
against the inner panel perforated sheet. Allow 25 percent overlap
of each sweep to ensure complete coverage. Continue to sweep the
area until all the CPC solution is forced through the perforated
sheet and septum.
NOTE: Misalignment of the nozzle wand opening on the perforated

sheet will allow the air pressure to bleed from the
openings edges. Correct alignment of the nozzle wand
opening against the perforated sheet is necessary to
properly allow the CPC solution to penetrate the wire mesh
septum and deposit on the backskin.
(3) Apply 100 percent Acetone rinse within 20 minutes to the same area
by the same method. Allow 5-8 hours drying time at 55°F (13°C)
minimum prior to the next engine start.
4. Apply CPC to Forward, Side Closures and Splices

(See Figure 205)
A. Gain access to the forward, side closure area and splice area through
the aft bulkhead access panels and anti-ice duct access panel. To gain
access to the forward and side closures, remove the outer barrel
panels.
CHEMICALS.
B. Wipe off excess dirt and moisture from the surfaces to be protected,
forward closure, side closures and splice areas. Clean the area where
the CPC’s will be applied with acetone. Wipe the area with a lint-free
cotton cloth before the solvent becomes gas.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
C. Apply 100 percent Amlguard solution to closures and splice areas, See
Figure 205.
CAUTION: AVOID CONTACT WITH SKIN AND EYES. DO NOT BREATHE VAPORS. USE
ADEQUATE VENTILATION DURING APPLICATION. FOLLOW THE
MANUFACTURER’S HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.
(1) Apply a uniform coat of 100 percent Amlguard solution by brush or

spray on the closures and splice areas. The CPC should cover the
fastener area of the side closure splices.
NOTE: Application of Amlguard by wiping is not recommended. It

will result in a non-uniform coating, thin areas and
possible pin holes. If this occurs it will allow a path for
corrosion to initiate.
PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF CPC. IT IS REQUESTED TO ALLOW 5-8
HOURS DRYING TIME AT 55°F (13°C) MINIMUM FOR AMLGUARD
(2) Allow the Amlguard to dry for 30 minutes at 55°F (13°C) minimum
before applying a second coat. Excess Amlguard on surface of the
backskin closures and splices does not need to be removed. Dry the
Amlguard for 5 to 8 hours at 55°F (13°C) prior to next engine
start.
NOTE: Reapplication of Amlguard is necessary after a period of

time, reference Service Bulletin RA32071-108. Prior to
reapplication the areas should be cleaned with acetone.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
NOTE: Alternate CPC’s may not be used in acoustic areas.

Cloth Lint-free, Cotton Commercially Available
Corrosion Preventive SO-SURE (AMLGUARD) V0FTT5
Compound, (CPC) MIL-C-85054, LHB Industries
Type 2 8833 Fleischer Place
St. Louis, MO 63134-1000
Phone: (800) 542-3697
www.lbindustries.com
Masking Tape As Applicable Commercially Available
Nozzle, Wand F/A-237 C. V. Vacuum & Janitorial
Supply
295 Broadway
USA
Tel: 619-422-7233
Stopper, Size #8 59581-367 VWR
3745 Bayshore Blvd.
Brisbane, CA 94005
USA
Solvent Acetone Commercially Available
Tool-Rubber Cup Kit RA32071-104-551 V51563
Rohr Inc.
DBA Goodrich
Aerostructures
850 Lagoon Dr
(619) 691-2006
NOTE: The wand and the stopper are available in a kit form (Service Bulletin
RA32071-104-551 kit part number), from Goodrich Corporation,
Aerostructures Group.
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CPC IS APPLIED TO FAYING SURFACE

ALONG JOINT, ALL AROUND.
ZONE 1
NON-ACOUSTIC
BARRIER AREA
2.64 IN.
(67,0 mm)
ZONE 2
ACOUSTIC
AREA
2.03 IN.
(51,56 mm)
2.24 IN.
(56,90 mm) 2.98 IN.
(75,70 mm)
TYPICAL FOR LOWER ACOUSTIC PANEL
ZONE 1 - APPLY 100% CPC SOLUTION TO NON-ACOUSTIC AREAS.

ZONE 2 - APPLY 10% AMLGUARD/90% ACETONE SOLUTION AND
A 100% ACETONE RINSE TO ACOUSTIC AREAS. C1S-163-01
Acoustic Area for Application of CPC’s for the Inlet Cowl

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
B
A
AIR
INTAKE
COWL
REERENCE PART NUMBER

FORWARD 642-1000
CLOSURE
ZONE 1
ZONE 2
ZONE 1
SECTION A-A
C1S-164-01
Acoustic Area for Application of CPC’s for the Inlet Cowl (642-1000)
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
INLET
COWL
A SWEEP CPC
APPLICATION
NOZZLE OVER
CPC SOLUTION
B
MINIMUM
OVERLAP TYPICAL
1/4 WIDTH INNER
OF NOZZLE BARREL
PANEL
NOZZLE
TOTAL
WIDTH
C1S-165-00
Method of Applying CPC on the Inlet Cowl

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
Position of Nozzle/Wand Opening on the Inlet Cowl

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
AIR
INTAKE
COWL
APPLY CPC'S TO
TI STRAP SPLICE
AREAS (3 PLCS)
SIDE SPLICE
FWD AREA
CLOSURE
CLOSURE
C1S-169-01
APPLY CPC TO SIDE

CLOSURES, FWD CLOSURES
AND SPLICE AREA
Forward, Side Closure and Splice Locations for Application of CPC

Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 16
INLET COWL INNER BARREL ALLOWABLE CORROSION LIMITS
1. General
Allowable corrosion limits permit an operator to determine if a corroded

inlet cowl can be returned to service with a blend repair or must have a
more permanent repair. Damage permitted by this document leaves sufficient
intact structure to carry ultimate loads. Therefore, the inner barrel will
still be capable of fulfilling its design function.
2. Allowable Damage Usage
A. Unlimited Usage
Minor damage not affecting the structural integrity or functional

capability of the component and requiring blend repair.
3. Types of Corrosion damage.
A. The types of corrosion damage that may occur on the inlet cowl inner
barrel acoustic panels are defined below. (See Figures 201-205).
Surface -Galvanic corrosion which may result in corrosion on the

surface of the aluminum skin and is due to dissimilar metal contact
over time.
Disbond -Separation of aluminum skin from aluminum or HFT core due to

exfoliation corrosion of the aluminum skin. Usually due to standing
water from cleaning solutions with high PH levels.
Delamination -A separation of skin from faying surface of face sheet or

internal doubler. Usually due to exfoliation corrosion from the face
sheet side of the aluminum skin. The skin may then delaminate or
separate from the adhesive bond line
Hole -Exfoliation corrosion which results in a penetration of material.

This will usually occur on aluminum skin bonded to core.
A gouge or nick is not a type of corrosion damage but results in the

removal of material that will initiate a corrosion path. Therefore for
the purpose of this document it will be addressed in Table 201.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
4. Clean the panel corroded areas.
A. Put a mark around the panel area where the protection is to be applied.
CAUTION: USE CARE NOT TO CUT INTO ANY NON-CORRODED DOUBLERS BENEATH THE
PERFORATED SKIN, CLOSURES OR AFT DOUBLERS.
B. Mask around the panel area. Use masking tape and Kraft paper.
C. Remove adhesive and primer from any corroded area. Use 80 grit minimum
aluminum oxide abrasive paper and wire brush.
CHEMICALS.
D. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
5. Inspect for corrosion on panel.
A. Do a visual and tap test on the panel to find corroded and disbonded
skin.
B. Visually examine at 5-10X magnification. Corrosion is not allowed.
6. Remove corrosion.
WARNING: DO NOT USE CHEMICALS FOR CORROSION REMOVAL. USE ONLY MECHANICAL
METHODS. USE EXTREME CAUTION TO NOT ENLARGE ANY BARE METAL
AREAS.
A. Remove small quantities of corrosion at a time with a minimum of 80

grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper or equivalent.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
B. Flush blend area with solvent. Flush the area repeatedly until the
water and dirt are removed. Wipe the repair area dry with a clean
cotton cloth.
C. Remove any masking tape.
D. Make the area dry.
E. Visually examine at 5-10X magnification. Corrosion is not allowed.
7. Determine extent of corrosion area.
A. Dimensionally inspect the corroded area to determine if the area is

acceptable, refer to table 201 and figures 201 thru 205.
B. If area is dimensionally acceptable, clean, alodine and prime, refer to

the applicable SRM section and repairs.
C. If area is dimensionally beyond the limits established in this repair

then repair. Refer to the applicable SRM or CMM repairs.
8. Damage Zones
A. The zones to inspect for corrosion on the inlet cowl Inner Barrel are:
(See Figures 201 thru 205.)
IC1 - Forward fastener leading edge-Perforated Skin.

IC2 - Forward Closure.
IC3 - Side Closures.
IC4 - Forward Backskin.
IC5 - Aft Backskin.
IC6 - Aft Doubler for Aft Bulkhead Flange Attachment.
IC7 - Aft Doubler for engine attach ring.
APPENDIX A
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
9. GENERAL
The following corrosion prevention procedures may be effected by applying

chemical conversion coating, primer and dissimilar metal protection to the
area of the inner bond panels. The inner barrel assembly must be removed
from the inlet cowl for this procedure. A chemical conversion coating and
primer is applied to the corroded areas, any trimmed edges or drilled
holes on the panel. All fasteners are installed wet with dissimilar metal
protection during installation and the rivet or Hi-Lok tails/heads are
covered.
10. Prepare the Panel Area
CHEMICALS.
A. Clean the panel backskin/closure area with a clean lint-free cloth and
the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before
B. Put a mark around the panel area where the protection is to be applied.
C. Mask around the inside of the panel area. Use masking tape and Kraft
paper.
D. Apply Alodine 1200 or equivalent to the corroded areas, trimmed edges

and predrilled holes. Do not apply to non-corroded primed surface of
panel.
WARNING: ALODINE IS A HAZARDOUS MATERIAL THAT CAN CAUSE INJURY OR

ILLNESS IF NOT CORRECTLY USED. BEFORE YOU USE THIS PRODUCT,
READ THE APPLICABLE MANUFACTURER’S “MATERIAL SAFETY DATA
SHEET” AND OBEY THE SAFETY AND HEALTH PRECAUTIONS.
(1) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare Alodine 1200.
NOTE: Touch application of Alodine is permitted for trimmed edges

and drilled holes.
(2) Apply the Alodine 1200 on the panel area, refer to the
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
E. Apply 2 coats primer to the trimmed edges and drilled holes, see SRM
54-10-00, Repair No. 1, (equivalent primer may be used), allow primer
to dry between coats.
CORROSION- CORROSION- CORROSION- NICK CORROSION-

DESCRIPTION SURFACE DISBOND DELAMINATION GOUGE HOLE
Zone IC1 A NONE A A NONE
Zone IC2 B N/A B B N/A
Zone IC3 C N/A C C N/A
Zone IC4 D D N/A D D
Zone IC5 E E N/A E E
Zone IC6 F N/A NONE F N/A
Zone IC7 G N/A NONE G N/A
NOTE: All dimensions are after corrosion removal-blending.
Code: N/A = Not Applicable.
NONE = None Allowed, accomplish repair.
A. Maximum depth 0.032 inches (0,81 mm) to a distance 4.00 inches1 (101,6 mm) in
both directions, length and width. Must be separated from adjacent damage by
6.0 inches (152,4 mm) of undamaged structure. No corrosion of internal
doubler is allowed in conjunction with perforated skin corrosion. Fasteners
must be in place, no loose fasteners permitted. Perform temporary repair,
permanent repair or replace panel if beyond limits.
B. Forward closure can have corrosion thru the entire part, 0.032 inches (0,81
mm) deep and the entire length or surface area. No corrosion of internal
doubler or perforated skin is allowed in conjunction with the forward closure
corrosion. The closure replacement should be accomplished at the next major
check not to exceed 5,000 flight hours. Repair with applicable CMM repairs.
C. Side closure can have corrosion thru the entire part, 0.032 inches (0,81 mm)
deep and the entire length or surface area. No corrosion of internal doubler
or perforated skin is allowed in conjunction with the side closure corrosion.
The closure replacement should be accomplished at the next major check not to
exceed 5,000 flight hours. Repair with applicable CMM repairs.
D. Maximum depth 0.025 inches (0,63 mm) and a corrosion maximum dimension of 2.2
inches (55,9 mm). Areas of corrosion must be separated from other corrosion
holes by 7.8 inches (198 mm) of structure remaining intact. Multiple damage
sites exceeding a total of 2.2 inches (55,9 mm) in any 10.0 inches (254 mm)
should be repaired. Apply protection, refer to Appendix A for areas within
limits. The damage must not be opposite a void or disbond on other face
sheet. Perform temporary repair or permanent repair, refer to SRM or CMM if
damage is beyond limits. SRM or CMM repairs can be performed if damage is in
allowable corrosion limits.
Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
E. Maximum depth 0.025 inches (0,63 mm) and a corrosion maximum dimension of 3.3
inches (83,82 mm). Areas of corrosion must be separated from other corrosion
holes by 6.7 inches (170,18 mm) of structure remaining intact. Multiple
damage sites exceeding a total of 3.3 inches (83,82 mm) in any 10.0 inches
(254 mm) of circumference should be repaired. Apply adhesive filler and
protection, refer to Appendix A for areas in limits. The damage must not be
opposite a void or disbond on other face sheet. Perform permanent repair,
refer to SRM or CMM if damage is beyond limits.
F. Maximum depth 0.060 inches (1,52 mm) over the entire surface area.
G. Maximum depth 0.040 inches (1,02 mm) over the entire surface area.
NOTE: Allowing 4 inches (101,6 mm) of corrosion to be blended on zone IC1 in the
aft direction may lead to exposing the honeycomb core. If this should
occur, the exposed area must be potted with adhesive in order to prevent
excess moisture ingress.
Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel

Table 201 (Sheet 2)
(1) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare primer.
NOTE: Touch application of primer is permitted for trimmed edges

and drilled holes. Let the primer dry in the air for 30
minutes for this application.
(2) Optional, use a spray gun to apply a coat of primer on the panel
areas.
(3) Let the primer on the area completely dry in the air, refer to the
F. Apply dissimilar metal protection to periphery of panel.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Apply a 0.002-0.004 inch (0,05-0,10 mm) layer of dissimilar metal

protection around outer perimeter of the inner barrel panel, wide
enough to ensure protection of the panel area from dissimilar
mating parts, TI Splices, etc.
(2) Cure the compound, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions. Use

explosion proof heat lamp or equivalent.
G. Inspect the panel. Look at the dissimilar metal protection. Make sure
that it makes a continuous smooth surface with the existing paint.
Check all trimmed edges and drilled holes for primer protection.
INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
H. Remove any sharp edges from the TI straps to form a radius in order to
prevent scratches on protective primer and start a corrosion path.
I. Prefit the titanium straps to ensure form fit around backskin when
installed.
CHEMICALS.
J. Install rivets wet with dissimilar metal protection. Do not remove

sealant from around the heads of the rivets after installation. Cure
material, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
K. Install the Hi-Loks for the straps, etc., wet with dissimilar metal
protection. Wipe excess from around Hi-Lok heads before material cures.
Coat the collars of the H-Loks with dissimilar metal protection. Allow
the materials to cure.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
L. Identify the repair. Write the repair number adjacent to the assembly
part number.

Gun, Paint Spray Commercially Available
Lamp, Heat Commercially Available
Oven 400°F (204°C) Commercially Available
Paper, Abrasive 80-400 Grit Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
Paper, Kraft Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Masking 2.0 inches (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Brush, Wire Commercially Available
Dissimilar Metal Commercially Available
Protection
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Alternates MIL-S-81733 V83574
PS870/PR1436G PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
MIL-S-8802 ASC-Los Angeles
PR1440 24811 Avenue Rockefeller
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Alodine 1200 or V71410
Alternate Iridite Henkel Corporation
14-2 32100 Stephenson Hwy.
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Corrosion Zones on 642-1025 Acoustic Panel

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Location of Corrosion to 642-1025 Acoustic Panel

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Zones of Corrosion to 642-1025 Acoustic Panel

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Area for Dissimilar Metal Protection

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Area for Hole Dissimilar Metal Protection

Figure 207
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 17
TEMPORARY REPAIR FOR INNER BARREL CORROSION
1. General
This repair is applicable to the 642-1000 Inlet Cowl corrosion/disbond of

the lower acoustic panel forward backskin p/n 642-1025-23. The repair
provides instructions to locate damage zones and install a doubler which
is bonded and fastened to the inner barrel panel. To accomplish this
repair the inlet cowl should be in the shop with the lower outer barrel
removed. This repair is considered time limited, (temporary), for a period
of 18 months with periodic monitoring at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight
Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever the earliest).
A. Remove the lower outer barrel skin.
(1) Remove all blind rivets that attach the lower outer barrel to the
cowl assembly, refer to applicable CMM instructions.
(2) Remove the outer barrel from assembly.
B. Clean the backskin, if applicable.
(1) Clean the backskin area with a clean lint-free cloth and the
C. Inspect the backskin area, see Figure 201.
(1) Inspect the backskin for visible signs of corrosion.
(2) Tap test the backskin to determine areas of skin to core disbond.
Mark areas of disbond with a permanent marker of contrasting color.
(3) Compare the total damaged area to the allowable limits and
determine if a repair will be required.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(4) All corroded and disbonded backskin is required to be removed for

this repair and will require a filler.
D. Clean corrosion and prepare area for repair.
(1) Remove the corroded and disbonded backskin, pittings and other
minor corrosion should be blended and removed for this repair.
Remove the backskin in the disbonded and corroded areas.
(2) Remove all loose corrosion products from the backskin and the
exposed core. Ensure all debris is removed from the core area.
becomes dry.
(4) Lay down a sheet of Mylar and mark a hole pattern grid over the
backskin for this repair, refer to the following criteria:
(a) Maintain a minimum of 0.50 inch (12,7 mm) distance from the
fastener holes to the closures.
(b) Mark the location of one row of blind rivets around each
damaged area at 0.62 (15,75 mm) inch spacing. The rivets
should be at 0.50 inch (12,7 mm) from edge of cutout and will
attach the doubler to the backskin.
(c) The perimeter blind rivets must be in an undamaged area of the

backskin, (i.e. not corroded, not disbonded).
(d) Mark the location of Hi-Loks inside the damaged areas at 2.40
inch (60,96 mm) spacing. The Hi-Loks will go through the
doubler and the entire panel.
E. Locate and mark the hole pattern, see Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(a) For damaged areas too close to the closures, a splice doubler
will be installed over the backskin doubler and the closure
with a row of blind rivets on each side of the splice, see
Figure 203.
(1) If there are several damage zones too close to each other, group
them all together and consider them as one damage. Consider all
skin to core disbonds as damaged areas.
F. Pot fastener holes for Hi-Lok locations.
(1) Place the inlet cowl on a stand with the lower panel located on
top.
(2) Pot the exposed honeycomb core (areas where backskin has been
removed) at the Hi-Lok hole locations. The potted area to be 0.75
inch (19,05 mm) in diameter.
(3) Mix EA9394 compound, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Viscosity can be increased by adding milled glass fibers up to 20%
maximum by weight.
(4) Inject potting compound into the core cells until flush with
existing core surface.
(5) Remove excess adhesive with a clean cloth and the solvent.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(6) Cover holes on the perforated skin side with Teflon tape to prevent
potting compound from expanding out of holes.
(7) Cure EA9394 compound for one hour at 160°-180°F with heat lamps or
heating blanket. The potting may be cured at room temperature
(77°F) (25°C) for 24 hours.
(8) Remove the Teflon tapes and wipe clean the acoustic panel surfaces.
Ensure that no potting compound remains on the surface.
G. Prepare the fillers and doublers.
(1) Make fillers to fit the cut areas of backskin from 0.025 inch
(0,635 mm) thick 2024-T3 aluminum sheet.
(2) Make doublers for the backskin from 2024-T3 aluminum sheet, 0.025
inch (0,635 mm) or 0.032 inch (0,813 mm) thick. Doublers/fillers
are to conform to the contour with light finger pressure.
NOTE: For large area doublers which require compound contour

forming, make the doubler from the 642-1025-23 lower panel
production forward backskin.
(3) Trim doubler such that there is a 0.50 inch (12,70 mm) fastener
edge distance all around and the doubler(s) have a 1.0 inch (25,4
mm) overlap of damaged area all around.
(4) Make the closure doublers from 0.032 in. (0,813 mm) thick 2024-T3
aluminum sheet, approximately 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) wide.
(5) Position 0.025 in. (0,635 mm) 2024-T3 fillers in all areas with
exposed core. Trim to fit irregular holes in backskin. Fillers to
fit contour with light finger pressure.
H. Perform etch & prime of repair parts and repair area.
NOTE: The following procedure will not be required for the doubler if
the production skin (642-1025-23) is used as the doubler. The
production backskin is anodized and primed.
(1) Perform etch and prime on all bond surfaces of the repair parts
(fillers & doublers) and existing backskin.
(2) Do a water break test on all repair surfaces, refer to SRM section
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
minutes. Flush with demineralized water and do a test with litmus
paper. The litmus should show a neutral reading of pH 7. Air dry at
room temperature.
(4) Apply Alodine 1200 to the non-bonding surfaces only. Follow

manufacturers instructions for application and rinse.
(5) Apply a thin coat of epoxy primer to repair surfaces and cure,
refer to the manufacturers instructions.
I. Drill pilot holes in backskin, fillers and closure doubler.
(1) Ensure fastener pattern is visible on fillers. Use Mylar or

equivalent to transfer the hole pattern to the doublers. Prefit
doublers/fillers to proper location and alignment.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(2) Drill 1/8 inch (3,175 mm) diameter pilot holes at all locations
marked for blind rivets, only through the doubler(s) and the
backskin or closures.
(3) Drill 5/32 inch (3,969 mm) diameter pilot holes at all Hi-Lok
locations through the entire panel (backskin, potting and the
perforated skin). Use a drill guide to maintain perpendicularity.
(4) Before enlarging holes to their final size, ensure that the
doublers and fillers are secured to the backskin and all pilot
holes are aligned.
(5) Enlarge all holes for blind rivets using #20 drill size. The final
hole size for blind rivets to be 0.160-0.164 inch (4,06-4,17 mm)
diameter.
(6) Enlarge all holes for Hi-Loks using 3/16 inch (4,762 mm) diameter
drill. Final hole size for Hi-Loks to be 0.190-0.193 inch
(4,83-4,90 mm) diameter. Use a drill guide to maintain
perpendicularity.
(7) Remove all doublers/fillers from panel and deburr all holes in the
doublers/fillers and acoustic panel.
(8) Apply alodine 1200 and epoxy primer to inside holes and cut edges,
refer to the manufacturers instructions.
J. Install the repair, see Figure 203.
(1) Ensure that all repair surfaces (doublers, fillers and backskin)
are clean.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(2) Mix EA9394, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Apply a total bondline thickness of 0.030 inches (0,762 mm) using
EA9394 adhesive to faying surface of fillers, doublers and closure
doublers.
(4) Position the fillers, backskin and closure doublers in place and
secure with clecos.
(5) Install HL18PB-6-26 Hi-Lok pins, HL70-6 collars and AN960C10L

washers through the doubler and the panel.
(6) Install CR3223-5-1 blind rivets through the doublers and backskin
in all perimeter areas.
(7) Install CR3223-5-2 rivets in areas common to the closure

doubler(s).
(8) Install all fasteners wet with EA9394 sealant.
(9) Cure repair for one hour at 160°-180°F (71°-82°C).
K. Install the outer barrel skin.
(1) Reinstall the lower outer barrel skin using production blind
rivets, refer to standard shop practices.
L. Identify Repair.
(1) Mark repair number adjacent to identification plate using

permanent marker or stencil
M. Periodic inspection
(1) Inspect the air wetted surface for any loose/missing fasteners at
every 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 calendar months
(whichever the earliest).
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Primer, Epoxy MIL-P-23377 Commercially Available
Chemical Coating Alodine 1200 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Blanket, Heat 400°F minimum (204°C) V61426
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Sheet, Aluminum 2024-T3 or -T4 Commercially Available
0.025/0.032 in. thick
Alum. Oxide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Scotch Brite Pad Various Grit Commercially Available
Tape, Teflon 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) Wide Commercially Available
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Pin, Hi-Lok HL18PB-6-26 V51563
Rohr Inc.
850 Lagoon Dr
(619) 691-2006
Collar, Hi-Lok HL70-6 V51563
Rohr Inc.
Washer AN960C10L Commercially Available
Rivets, Blind CR3223-5-1 V05693
CR3223-5-2 Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Forward Backskin 642-1025-23 V51563
(Lower Panel Only) Rohr Inc.
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Inlet Acoustic Panel - Inspection Area

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Repair Fastener Hole Pattern

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Repair Doubler Installation

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Repair Doubler Installation

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 18
CORROSION REPAIR OF LEADING EDGE OF INLET COWL ACOUSTIC PANEL
1. GENERAL
This document provides repair procedures for corrosion of the inlet

cowl-inner barrel leading edge air-wetted surface. The type of repair is
dependent on the extent of damage. For light corrosion the repair may be
accomplished by the removal of the corrosion, apply a chemical etching
compound, primer and paint. For more extensive corrosion a doubler is
bonded and fastened in place over the damaged area. Corrosion of the air
wetted leading edge along with corrosion of the forward closure is not
allowed. If corrosion exists on both areas then an analysis must be made
on a case by case basis.
For minor corrosion damage that does not require a doubler, identify area
and apply primer and paint as required after corrosion removal. Loose
rivets are replaced. For larger corrosion damage the different types of
doubler repairs are classified by the extent of corrosion removed. The
Type 1B and 1C repairs are limited in size with the circumferential length
of damage limited to 12 inches (305 mm) and the total length per panel not
to exceed 38 inches (965 mm). The separation between corrosion sites must
be at least 10 inches (254 mm). The doubler repairs are identified as
follows:
Type 1A - Metal countersunk filler with external doubler, see figures 204
and 205.
Type 1B - Filler and external doubler for perforated skin, see figure 206.
Type 1C - Filler and external doubler for perforated skin and internal
doubler, see figure 207.
Panels with corrosion more than the limits can be addressed on a case by
case basis. Contact Rohr, Inc. for an analysis.
2. Cleaning Instructions.
A. Pressure wash inner barrel panels to remove visible dirt. Use pH 10 or

lower cleaners to neutral pH7. High pH cleaners are not allowed.
B. Flush area with isopropyl alcohol and wipe with a clean cloth.
C. Provide a good flow of air to the area at 140°-160°F (60°-71°C) until

dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
3. Prepare damaged area.
A. Find the corrosion.
(1) Do a visual and tap test on the perforated sheet edge to find
corroded skin. See figure 201. Make a mark around the corroded
area.
B. Remove corrosion from the panel edge.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHEMICALS FOR CORROSION REMOVAL. USE ONLY

MECHANICAL METHODS. USE EXTREME CAUTION TO NOT ENLARGE ANY
BARE AREAS.
(1) Remove small quantities of corrosion at a time with 80 to 240 grit

aluminum oxide abrasive paper and a wire brush or equivalent.
(2) Visually examine at 5-10X magnification. Corrosion is not allowed.

If corrosion is found repeat step B. (1).
C. Clean the area.
(1) Flush the repair area with solvent. Flush the repair area
repeatedly until all unwanted material is removed. Remove the
solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent becomes
dry. Allow the area 30 minutes to dry.
4. Determine repair type.
A. Perform a dimensional inspection to confirm the type of repair required

to perform, see applicable figures 201 thru 208. If damage is beyond
allowable repair dimensions, the damage description should be forwarded
to Rohr, Inc. for repair analysis.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
5. Make the repair pieces.
A. Make a filler cut to proper size and a doubler from 0.063 in. (1,60 mm)
2024-T3 or T42 Aluminum. Make a 45° chamfer on the external edges of
the doubler. Prefit the filler/doubler to make sure that it will
install correctly. Make sure the repair parts can make the same contour
with light finger pressure. Option: Use VeriFilm to check if parts fit.
Drill the necessary rivet holes, see applicable figures.
NOTE: Make sure you keep a 2D rivet edge distance.
B. Flush the doublers and fillers with solvent. Flush the repair area
repeatedly until all unwanted material is removed. Remove the solvent
with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent becomes dry. Allow the
area 30 minutes to dry.
6. Perform etch/primer procedure of repair parts and repair area.
A. Etch surfaces.
(1) Do a Water Break test on the filler/doubler and repair areas. See
SRM section 54-02-02, Water Break Test.
NOTE: To avoid contamination of the surface from dirt and oils on

your hands, clean gloves must be worn for the remainder of
the preparation.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
minutes.
NOTE: Optional method of filler/doubler surface preparation;

Phosphoric acid anodize repair fillers/doublers instead of
Pasa Jell 105.
(3) Flush with demineralized water and do a test with litmus paper to
make sure all contaminants are removed. The litmus paper should
show a neutral reading of pH 7.
CAUTION: THE ALODINE MUST BE APPLIED IN LESS THAN ONE HOUR AFTER
ETCHING PROCEDURE WITH PASA JELL 105.
(4) Air dry at room temperature.
B. Apply Alodine 1200 or equivalent.
(1) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare Alodine 1200.
NOTE: Touch application of Alodine is permitted for minor

scratches.
(2) Apply the Alodine 1200 per manufacturers instructions on the

repair parts over non bonding surfaces. Flush alodine with
demineralized water and air dry for 30 minutes.
C. Apply adhesive primer to all surfaces.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare primer.
NOTE: Maximum time between Pasa Jell 105 application and primer
application is 1 hour.
(2) Apply adhesive primer by spray method on all surfaces to a dry film
thickness of 0.0001 - 0.0004 in. (0,002 to 0,010 mm) thick.
(3) Apply a layer of primer to one side of a 1 ft. by 1 ft. (304,8 by

304,8 mm) aluminum sheet the same as the repair surfaces. The wet
weight shall increase by 0.031 oz. (0,90 gm.) if layer thickness is
correct.
(4) Allow repair areas to air dry for a minimum of 30 minutes, then
cure with heat lamps at 340°-360°F (171°-182°C) for 60-70 minutes.
The repair parts may be cured in an oven.
(5) Apply aluminized paint to the exterior surface of the doubler only,
per SRM 54-10-00 Repair #1, section 4.
(6) Cover repair areas/parts for protection until use.
7. Install the repair parts.
NOTE: Measure hole diameter and grip length prior to fastener

installation.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
A. Apply PR-1200 primer to the fastener holes. Let the primer dry for 30
minutes minimum.
CHEMICALS.
B. Apply a layer of EA9321 or EA9394 adhesive to the bonding sides of the

repair fillers and doublers. Install the repair filler/doubler in
position.
CHEMICALS.
C. Mix DC90-006 sealant, refer to SRM section 540205.HTM54-02-05 or RTV88/

9910 sealant, refer to the manufacturers instructions.
D. For Type 1 repairs install CR3522-5 or oversize CR3552-5 rivets wet

with sealant in the first row, in second and third staggered row of
fasteners use CR3522-4 fasteners, see applicable figures, for type 1A
use metal countersink fillers.
E. Fully cure the adhesive.
(1) For EA9394: Cure for 60 minutes at 150°-170°F (66°-77°C).
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(2) For EA9321: Cure for 120 minutes at 190°-210°F (88°-99°C).
8. Apply Aluminized paint and aero sealant.
CHEMICALS.
A. Apply aluminized paint to the exterior surface of the repair area

around the doubler, refer to SRM 54-10-00, Repair #1, section 4.
CHEMICALS.
B. Apply Aerosealant to inlet lipskin/panel gap refer to SRM 54-10-00,

Repair #10.
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY AMLGUARD TO ACOUSTIC AREAS.
9. Apply AMLGUARD-Corrosion Preventative Compound (CPC). Refer to SRM repair

No. 15.
10. Inspect the repair. Look at the dissimilar metal protection. Make sure
that it makes a continuous smooth surface with the existing paint.
Visually examine at 5-10X magnification. Corrosion is not allowed.
11. Identify the repair. Write the repair number adjacent to the assembly part
number. Use a permanent marker with a color that contrasts.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

Aluminum Alloy 2024-T3 or Commercially Available
2024-T42
0.063 in. thick
(1,60 mm) minimum
Aluminum Paint Base 463-6-4 V0KXA5
RPS13.97 Type 4 Converter X-432 Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Thinner TL-52 East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Clothing, Commercially Available
Protective
Paper Litmus Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
99 percent pure
or
Ketone Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Masking 2.0 in. (50,8mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Dissimilar Metal MIL-S-81733 V83574
Protection PS870-PR1436G PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
MIL-S-8802 DBA PPG Aerospace Div
PR1440 ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Sealant DC90-006 V5D028
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Sealant RTV88/9910 V01139
(Alternate) Momentive Performance Material Inc.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Anaheim CA 92806
Phone: (714) 666 4342
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
EA9394 Henkel Corporation
Alodine 1200 Commercially Available
(Alt.)
Iridite 14-2
Bit, Drill No. 20 or 30 Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Cherry Textron Inc
Oversize Rivet, Blind CR3552-4 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
Cherry Textron Inc
Paper, Kraft Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Corrosion Location on 642-1000 Inlet

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Example of Corrosion Levels on Leading Edge

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Examples of Type 1 Repairs

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Example of Type 1A Doubler Repair

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Example of Type 1A Repair

Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Example of Type 1B Repair

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Example of Type 1C repair

Figure 207
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Example of Type 1B or 1C Repair Circumferential length limited to 12 inches

(305 mm), Total length per panel less than 38 inches (965 mm) with a separation
between corrosion sites of at least 10 inches (254 mm).
Figure 208
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 19
CLOSURES AND AFT DOUBLER HOT BOND REPLACEMENT REPAIR
1. General
This document gives instructions for the replacement of the inlet cowl
inner barrel closures and aft doubler where corrosion has occurred beyond
limits. The damaged closures or doubler are removed and a new closure or
doubler is hot bonded in position using vacuum and/or autoclave pressure.
The inner barrel panels are removed for this repair and supported in a
tool capable of 400°F (204°C) minimum to retain panel shape during 350°F
(177°C) cure. The replacement of closures or aft doubler may be required
if the quantity of corroded material removed is more than the allowable
limits. (Refer to CMM 71-11-19, Repair #15 or SRM Allowable Limits
54-10-00).
The closures are supplied in a heat treated condition (2024-T42). They

must be Phosphoric acid anodized and primed before installing. This may
have been done at the repair facility, If not, arrangements for Rohr, Inc.
to supply anodized and primed closures should be made in advance, (see
Figure 201 for applicable part numbers). The closures are trimmed and
holes drilled after bonding.
2. Repair Preparations
CHEMICALS.
A. Clean the backskin area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
3. Cleaning Instructions
A. Pressure wash inner barrel panel to remove visible dirt. Use pH 10 or

lower cleaners, (neutral pH 7). High pH cleaners not allowed.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
B. Flush the repair area with isopropyl alcohol. Remove the solvent with a
C. Apply circulatory air to the area at 140°-160°F (60°-71°C) until dry.
4. Prepare Damaged Area
A. Find the disbonds and corrosion.
(1) Do a visual and tap test on the closures and aft doubler to find
disbonded/corroded skin. See Figure 201 or 202. Make a mark around
the disbonded/corroded area.
B. Remove corrosion from the panel.
NOTE: Do not use chemicals for corrosion removal. Use only mechanical
methods. Use extreme caution not to enlarge any bare metal
areas.
(1) Remove small quantities of corrosion at a time with 180-240 grit

aluminum oxide abrasive paper and a wire brush or equivalent.
(2) Visually examine at 5-10X magnification. Corrosion is not allowed.

If corrosion is found repeat step B.1.
(3) Flush the repair area with solvent repeatedly until all dirt is
removed. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C. Determine extent of corrosion damage.
(1) Dimensionally inspect corroded area to determine if closure

requires replacement. It is acceptable to have corrosion removed
by blending to a maximum depth as referenced in CMM 71-11-19 Repair
#15 or SRM allowable limits 54-10-00. If dimensions are exceeded,
closure(s) or aft doubler must be replaced by this repair.
D. Remove Closure or Aft Doubler.
WARNING: ACCIDENTAL CONTACT OF DRY ICE OR COLD GAS WITH EYES OR SKIN
MAY CAUSE SEVERE FROSTBITE. STORE AND USE THIS MATERIAL IN A
WELL VENTILATED AREA. DRY ICE IS NON TOXIC BUT CAN CAUSE
RAPID ASPHYXIATION AND DEATH BY DISPLACING OXYGEN IN
CONFINED AREAS THAT DO NOT HAVE ADEQUATE VENTILATION. WEAR
CHEMICAL GOGGLES OR FACE SHIELDS AND COVER SKIN TO PREVENT
CONTACT. PROTECTIVE GLOVES WITHOUT GAUNTLET, LONG SLEEVES
AND CUFFLESS TROUSERS SHOULD BE WORN.
CAUTION: PROTECT ADJACENT STRUCTURE. ANY DISBOND BETWEEN SKIN AND

CORE OF INNER BARREL IS NOT ALLOWED. REFER TO SRM 54-10-00
FOR DISBOND REPAIR. THE DRY ICE AND REMOVAL OF CLOSURE/AFT
DOUBLER OPERATION SHOULD BE ACCOMPLISHED QUICKLY.
CAUTION: DO NOT HIT PANEL WHEN THE FROZEN CLOSURE IS REMOVED, DISBOND
OF SKIN BELOW MAY RESULT. CAREFULLY LIFT CLOSURE FROM
FORWARD EDGE USING PLASTIC WEDGE. THIS MAKES SURE INTERNAL
DOUBLER WILL STAY IN PLACE.
(1) Freeze closure or aft doubler with dry ice to break the adhesive
bond. See Figure 203.
(2) Isolate panel from cold with a thermal blanket. Do not damage the
skin or internal doubler to core adhesive bond.
(3) Use a plastic wedge to carefully remove all of the corroded closure
or aft doubler from the panel. Use care not to damage the core
below.
NOTE: Wedge should be of hard plastic with a taper of 10 to 1.
E. Inspect for corrosion on closure area.
(1) Mask off repair areas.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(2) Use aluminum oxide abrasive paper, 180-240 grit, to remove

unwanted cured adhesive from faying surface. Glass bead blasting
is permitted, use care to only remove residual adhesive.
NOTE: Use caution to not increase any bare metal areas.
becomes dry.
(4) Allow to air dry for 30 minutes.
NOTE: Do not use chemicals for corrosion removal. Use only

mechanical methods.
(5) If corrosion is found, remove corrosion in small quantities with

180-240 grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper or equivalent and
report depth of material removed from inner doubler to Rohr, Inc.
for a case by case evaluation.
(6) Flush the repair area with solvent repeatedly until all dirt is
removed. Wipe the repair area with a clean cotton cloth.
(7) Make the area dry with compressed air.
(8) Perform Water break free test.
(9) If corrosion remains, repeat step E.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
5. Repair Damaged closure Core Less Than 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) From Core Edge.
NOTE: If closure core damage is more than 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) from core
edge, remove damaged core and residual adhesive. Prepare area,
refer to steps 6, 7 and 8 before accomplishing step 9.
A. Prepare Damaged closure Core.
(1) Carefully bend the damaged core cells from the inner barrel and
make straight.
(2) Mix adhesive, refer to SRM 54-02-00, General Repair Procedures and
inject core cell cavities with EA9394 adhesive.
(3) Use a plastic spatula or injection flow gun to form a solid fill
area.
(4) Fully cure for 60 minutes at 150° to 170°F (66° to 77°C) prior to
bonding closure.
6. Prepare New Closures or Aft Doubler (if applicable).
A. Prefit and net trim repair parts.
NOTE: Confirm the proper P/N’s, refer to Figure 201, have been
obtained. The parts are supplied in a heat treated condition
(2024-T42), anodized and primed. If closure(s) are supplied
bare they must be anodized and primed before installation.
(1) Position the replacement forward/side closure(s) on the acoustic

panel for prefit.
(2) Install in place and scribe for net trim. Trim and deburr
closure(s) edges.
NOTE: Make sure closure fits net with no more than light finger
pressure. Optional to VeriFilm Check part fit.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(3) Anodize repair parts if applicable.
(a) If required, process clean and anodize, refer to standard

processes.
7. Perform etch procedure of repair area and repair parts if applicable.
A. Etch repair area.
(1) Do a water-break free test on the repair areas, see SRM section

the preparation.
(2) Apply Pasa Jell 105 to all bonding surfaces (except core) and let
stand for 8-10 minutes.
show a neutral reading, (pH 7).
(4) Dry at room temperature.
8. Perform prime procedure of repair area and repair parts if applicable.
A. Apply adhesive primer to repair surface and repair parts if applicable.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(1) Follow manufacturers instructions to prepare adhesive primer.
NOTE: Maximum time between clean and primer application is 16

hours.
(2) Apply primer by spray method on all surfaces to a dry film

thickness of .0001 to .0004 in. (0 to 0,01 mm).
(3) Apply a layer of primer to one side of a 1 ft. by 1 ft. (304,8 x

304,8 mm) aluminum sheet the same as the repair surface. The wet
weight shall increase by 0.90 gm. if layer thickness is correct.
(4) Allow repair area to air dry for a minimum of 30 minutes, then cure
with heat lamps or oven at 340°-360°F (171°-182°C) for 60 to 70
minutes.
(5) Cover closure/aft doubler areas and repair parts for protection
until use.
9. Repair Damaged closure Core More Than 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) From Core Edge.
A. Prepare Damaged closure Core.
NOTE: Ensure damaged core has been removed, refer to note in section
5. Ensure repair area is etched and primed, refer to section 7
and 8 prior to bonding. Fabricate new core, refer to Structural
Identification 54-10-00 and prefit onto panel. Core edges are
primed the same as section 8.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Bond in the new core with FM350 NA Film Adhesive on core to face
surface.
(2) Use FM410-1 foaming adhesive for core to core splice.
NOTE: Make sure new core aligns with contour.
(3) Put Teflon tape where closure(s) and adjacent panel touch to
prevent adhesive leakage.
(4) Cover repair with a sheet of porous parting film. Cover with 2
plies of 181 fiberglass bleeder cloth and 1 ply of nonporous
parting film and silicon rubber sheet.
(5) Put a heat blanket on the silicon rubber sheet.
(6) Put 2 plies of RC3000-10 breather cloth and a nylon bagging film, 2
in. (50,8 mm) larger than the repair, around the repair area.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(7) Put thermocouples and vacuum probe below bagging film and seal bag
edges with tacky tape. See Figure 204.
NOTE: Breather cloth and vacuum bag must extend over edge to
bottom of panel land.
NOTE: The oven is an alternate heat source instead of the heat

blanket.
NOTE: Optional method is to apply mechanical pressure for bonding

pressure, 10-35 psi. Throw-in-blocks (intensifiers) should
be used to make sure of pressure application. Put
thermocouples near bond line.
(8) Cure repair assembly per manufacturer’s requirements.
NOTE: Heat/cool rate is 2°-10°F (3°-7°C) per minute.
(9) Remove vacuum bag, breather cloth, heat blanket, rubber sheet,
nonporous parting film, bleeder cloth, porous parting film and
Teflon tape.
NOTE: Use care to not damage the panel or cause delamination of

the bond.
NOTE: If optional method was used, remove pressure devices,

Teflon tape and unwanted adhesive from repair area.
10. Install and Bond Closures or Aft Doubler using double bag procedure.
NOTE: The use of clean cotton gloves is recommended to protect the parts
to be bonded from contamination.
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: THE PANEL MUST BE SUPPORTED IN A TOOL TO RETAIN SHAPE DURING

HIGH TEMPERATURE OVEN CURE. ENSURE THE TOOL IS CAPABLE OF
WITHSTANDING 400°F (204°C) AND MATCHES THE CONTOUR OF THE BOND
PANEL.
CHEMICALS.
A. Apply one layer of FM350 NA Film Adhesive to the faying surfaces in the
area of the replacement closures or aft doubler.
NOTE: A maximum of three, .094 in. (2,39 mm) tack rivets per closure
may be used to prevent closure movement during bonding. Keep .35
in. (8,89 mm) edge distance. After bonding, remove tack rivets
and seal holes.
B. Position the closure or aft doubler onto the inner barrel. Use tack
rivets as required to maintain proper position. Use Teflon tape to
temporarily secure in place.
NOTE: Position Teflon tape around part to panel interface to prevent

excessive adhesive bleed.
C. Put a minimum of four thermocouples at the edge of the repair. Use

Teflon tape to attach thermocouples.
D. Put porous parting film and breather cloth over the repair area. Put
masking tape around the structure. An optional method is to envelope
bag the entire panel.
E. Apply the first vacuum bag and put two vacuum probes at the opposite
end of the vacuum bag. Apply vacuum and examine for leaks. Maintain 22
in. Hg. minimum.
F. Put parting film over the 1st vacuum bag. Put the heat blanket over the
repair using Teflon tape to hold in place. The heat blanket should stop
at the vacuum bag.
G. Put masking tape around the edges of the first bag. Put tacky tape in
place for the next vacuum bag.
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
H. Apply second vacuum bag over heat blanket and put two vacuum probes at
the opposite ends into the vacuum bag. Cut a hole in the vacuum bag top
to permit vacuum probes from the first vacuum bag to go into the second
vacuum bag, use tacky tape to seal around probes. Ensure vacuum in
first bag is 22 in. Hg minimum. Apply vacuum in the second bag and
examine for leaks. Use 10 in. Hg maximum in second bag.
CAUTION: TOO HIGH OF A VACUUM PRESSURE IN THE SECOND BAG MAY LIFT REPAIR
PARTS FROM SURFACE AND RESULT IN UNSATISFACTORY REPAIR DUE TO
LACK OF PRESSURE.
I. Connect four thermocouples to temperature recorder and one to

temperature controller.
J. Cure repair assembly per manufacturer’s requirements.
K. Permit the assembly to cool with vacuum applied. Remove assembly from
vacuum bag, be careful as assembly may be hot. Remove all of the
materials used to cure the repair. Remove masking tape.
NOTE: If panel is removed, one vacuum bag and a forced air oven cure
is an equivalent alternate.
L. Examine the repair. Do a tap test to make sure that there are no
disbonds.
M. Perform A-Scan inspection of closures, aft bulkhead and backskin for

disbonds caused by the high temperature cure. No disbonds are allowed.
11. Drill Fastener Holes and Trim Edges.
A. Align parts and drill.
(1) Keep proper position and match drill with available holes in
structure as a pattern. Use fittings to ensure holes are located
properly in the aft doubler.
(2) Perform a final trim of closure(s) after bonding in place.
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply 2 coats of primer to surface and rivet holes, refer to SRM
54-10-00 Repair #1, section 3.B. “Internal Surface Restoration”.
Fully cure primer between coats.
NOTE: If a small quantity of primer was removed, touch up bare

areas, dry 30 minutes, then apply adhesive primer and air
dry for minimum 2 hours. Drying temperature should be at
room temperature of 72°F (22°C). If primer was removed over
all the area, prime by this repair.
12. Apply internal primer to areas and edges.
NOTE: Use clean cotton gloves to protect the repair parts from
contamination.
(1) Apply primer to internal surface of panel, panel edges and holes,
refer to SRM 54-10-00, Repair #1, Section 3.
13. Apply Heat-Resistant Sealant to Tack Rivet Holes, OPTIONAL.
A. Cleaning.
(1) Remove tack rivets and make the tack rivet holes rough with a
Scotch Brite pad.
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(3) Use a lint-free cheese cloth to apply a thin layer of Dow Corning
1200 primer to repair area.
NOTE: Wear clean cotton cloth gloves to protect the repair parts
from contamination.
(4) Allow primer to air dry for 30 minutes at 77°F (25°C) at 30%
humidity.
(5) Avoid touching the dried primer to prevent contamination of the

surface.
(6) Mix DC90-006 sealant with DC90-006-2 catalyst per 54-02-05 or

RTV88/9910, follow the manufacturers instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(7) Apply a bead of sealant to surface of tack rivet holes.
(8) Remove unwanted sealant with a clean lint-free cotton cloth.
(9) Cure sealant for 24 hours at 72°F (22°C).

Adhesive EA9394 V33564
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Anaheim CA 92806
Phone: (714) 666 4342
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Bonding Film Adhesive FM350 NA V28174
Supported Cytec Engineering Materials
Global Headquarters
Tempe Arizona
Phone: (480) 730-2000
www.cytec.com
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Adhesive Loctite EA9658 Aero V33564
(Alternate) Supported Adhesive Henkel Corporation
Film 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
(0.100 psf areal P.O. Box 312
weight) used only Bay Point, CA 94565-0031
with EA9258.1 Aero Phone: (800) 257-7522
Primer www.aerospace.henkel.com
Adhesive, Foaming FM-410-1 V0V7G8
RMS025, Ty 2N Cytec Industries Inc.
Cl 3, Gr 100
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Dissimilar Metal DC90-006 V5D028
Sealant Dow Corning Corporation
Alternate Sealant RTV88/9910 V01139
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Converter EC-265 or EC-273 East Water St.
Thinner TR-114 or TR-102 Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Alternate Primer V0KXA5
Primer, Epoxy Green Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Base 10P4-2
Converter EC-117S
Bagging Film Nylon 2 mil. V0F451
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Tape, Tacky V53309
Schnee-Morehead
Chemicals, Inc.
P.O. Box 1305
Irving, TX 75060-3153
Heat Lamps 400°F (204°C) Commercially Available
minimum
Oven 400°F (204°C) Commercially Available
Paper Litmus Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
99 percent pure
or
Isobutyl Ketone/40% 532 E. Emaus Street
Methyl Ethyl Ketone Middletown, PA 17057-2200
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Masking 2.0 in (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
wide
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Dissimilar Metal MIL-S81733 V83574
Protection PS870/PR1436G PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
(Alternate) DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Henkel Corporation
Alodine 1200 Commercially Available
Iridite (Alternate) 14-2 Commercially Available
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rivet, Blind NAS1398B4 Commercially Available
(Alternate)
(Alternates) CR3524-4 Cherry Textron Inc
CR3222-4
CR3552-4
Table 201 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Inner Barrel Lower Panel (Typical for 642-1000 Inlet)

CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
-153
SIDE
CLOSURE A
-200
END
-103
AFT
DOUBLER
-417
FORWARD
CLOSURE
-198
END -119 SIDE B
PANEL CLOSURES AFT

642-1025 FWD SIDE A SIDE B DOUBLER
-417
UPPER -103
-198 END -153 -119
-509
-200 END
EXAMPLE: A 642-1000 INLET COWL HAS A 642-1025-509

UPPER PANEL WITH A 642-1025-417 FWD CLOSURE WITH
A -198 AND -200 END. C1S-186-01
Inner Barrel Upper Panel (Typical for 642-1000 Inlet)

CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Inner Barrel Side Panel (Typical for 642-1000 Inlet)

CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Inner Barrel Closure and Aft Doubler locations (Typical)

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 221
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
BONDED WITH
FM350 NA FILM
CLOSURE (TYPICAL) ADHESIVE
AFT DOUBLER
2024-T42,
BONDED WITH
FM350 NA FILM
ADHESIVE
C1S-193-01
Forward & Side Closures and Aft Doubler (Typical)

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 222
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
Envelope Vacuum Bag Lay-Up for Oven

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 223
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
SKIN
CLOSURE
PERFORATED
SHEET
(ACOUSTIC)
BR6750 PRIMER
EXISTING FM350 NA FILM
FASTENER HOLES ADHESIVE
(TYPICAL)
BEAD OF DC90-006
SEALANT (TYPICAL)
END
PIECE
C1S-195-03
Completed Repair, Forward Closure (Typical)
Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 224
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 20
INLET COWL LIPSKIN ATTACH AREA EXTERNAL PATCH REPAIR
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to install an external patch at the

lower exterior rivet row (between 90° and 270°) when the exterior rivet
holes are cracked. The repair cuts and removes the cracked segment of the
lip skin and installs a filler and an external doubler. The maximum length
of lipskin cutout is 20 inches (508 mm). The patch repair permits the use
of blind rivets to attach the patch. Use the CMM 71-11-19 repair No. 20
procedure for lipskin segment replacement.
A. Cut out and remove the cracked lipskin segment with the cracked rivet
holes. See Figure 201.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DRILL OUT THE RIVETS THAT ATTACH THE
CRACKED LIP SEGMENT. THE RIVET HEADS MUST BE DRILLED AND THE
RIVETS PUNCHED OUT. DO NOT INCREASE THE DIMENSION OF THE
RIVET HOLES.
(1) Drill out the existing rivets from the cracked lipskin attach area,
figure 201.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL NOT TO CUT INTO THE STRUCTURE BELOW THE CRACKED
LIP SEGMENT. A THIN SHEET OF METAL CAN BE PUT BETWEEN THE LIP
AND THE CAP ABLE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CAP ANGLE.
(2) Cut out the damaged area. The cut line must be centered between the
existing rivet locations and extend forward of the cap angle edge
1.48 in. (37,59 mm). Make sure sufficient edge margin is maintained
at the existing rivet locations.
(3) Make the edges of the cutout area smooth with 150-grit Aluminum
oxide paper.
B. Prepare repair area, see figure 201.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT DRILLED RIVETS AND ALL UNWANTED MATERIAL HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FROM THE INLET LIP CAVITY. FAILURE TO REMOVE ALL
UNWANTED MATERIAL WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE LIP SEGMENT
DURING ANTI-ICE OPERATION.
(1) Remove all unwanted material from inside the inlet lip cavity.
(2) Examine all holes in the lipskin for damage.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C. Make the filler and doubler, see figure 201.
(1) Measure the lipskin thickness and make a filler patch to fit the
lip cutout using dimensions in ill/ICR2001.tiffigure 201. Match
the filler thickness using 0.071 inch (1,80 mm) to 0.080 inch (2,03
mm) thick 2219-T6 clad aluminum sheet. Note that the filler
thickness may be less than the 0.080 in. (1,80 mm) doubler
thickness because of material thinning in this area due to
manufacturing.
NOTE: Make sure you permit a clearance between the filler patch
and adjacent surfaces that is not more than 0.030 inch
(0,76 mm).
(2) Make an external doubler from 0.080 inch (2,03 mm) 2219-T6 aluminum
sheet to fit over the cutout. See Figure 201 to determine the width
and length using the edge distance and fastener spacer to
accommodate a double row of rivets. Chamfer the external doubler
60° as shown in figure 201.
(3) Form the filler patch and the doubler to the contour of the lip.
D. Drill attach holes in the repair parts.
(1) Use figure 201 and mark the location of the hole pattern on the
filler and lip segment.
(2) Drill 0.125 inch (3,175 mm) pilot holes at each hole location.
(3) Attach the external doubler onto the lip segment. Drill pilot holes
into the doubler that are common to the lip.
(4) Attach the doubler and filler patch together with clamps. Drill
pilot holes into the doubler that are common to the filler.
(5) Use a No. 16 drill to drill the holes to the final size. The final
hole size must be 0.176-0.180 inch (4,47-4,57 mm). Make sure you
install clecos as the holes are drilled.
(6) Drill the remaining holes from the center to the ends of the lip
segment. Make sure you install clecos as the holes are drilled.
(7) Countersink the holes in the external doubler for the CR3552P5
rivets.
(8) Remove the repair parts from the inlet cowl and deburr the holes.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(9) Remove all unwanted material from the inlet cowl and the lip
segment area.
E. Prepare nose lip segment for installation.
(1) Clean the repair parts with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(2) Apply Alodine 100L to the rivet holes, and the edges of the filler
patch and doubler.
(3) Apply PR1200 primer to the doubler and interior surface of the
filler patch.
(4) Cure the primer at 65-75°F (18-24°C) for 30 minutes.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
Rohr, Inc., a subsidiary of Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation

ROHR, INC.
(5) Apply RTV106 sealant to the mating surfaces of the doubler, lip
segment and filler patch.
F. Attach repair parts.
(1) Make sure all unwanted material has been removed from inside of the
inlet lip.
(2) Install the external doubler and filler patch on the lip skin and
attach with clecos.
(3) Use a 269C3 grip gage to determine the grip length of the rivets.
(4) Attach the filler patch and external doubler to the inlet lip with
CR3552P5 rivets. Make sure you install the rivets wet with RTV157
sealant or equivalent.
(5) Apply aerodynamic sealant to the joint between the lip segment and
the doubler. See figure 201. Follow procedures in SRM Repair No.
10.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Chemical Coating Alodine 1000L V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Sealant RTV106 V01139
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Aluminum Sheet- 2219-T6 Clad Commercially Available
Filler 0.071 in. (1,80 mm)
thick
Doubler 0.080 in. (2,03 mm)
thick
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Rivet, Blind CR3552P5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Grip Gage 269C3 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Inlet Lip Segment External Patch Repair for Cracked Rivet Holes
between 90° and 270° only
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 21
INLET LIP FLUSH PATCH
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to install a flush patch at the inboard

or outboard rivet row when the rivet holes are cracked and this repair
gives instructions to install a flush patch on the outboard side or
inboard side of the lipskin when damaged/dented. The repair cuts and
removes the damaged or cracked segment of the lip and installs a filler
and a doubler. The removed segment of a cracked lip must be maximum ten
rivet holes, see fig 201. The removed segment of a dent/damage is limited
to 20.0 inches (508 mm) in length, see fig 202. The patch repair permits
the use of blind rivets to attach the patch. These repairs do not apply at
the three lipskin segment splice plate locations. If damage exceeds the
limits given, use the CMM 71-11-19 repair No. 20 procedure for lipskin
segment replacement.
A. Cut out and remove the dent/damaged or cracked lipskin segment. (See
Figure 201 for rivet hole cracks and see Figure 202 for dented/damaged
lipskin.)
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DRILL OUT THE RIVETS THAT ATTACH THE
CRACKED LIP SEGMENT. THE RIVET HEADS MUST BE DRILLED AND THE
RIVETS PUNCHED OUT. DO NOT INCREASE THE DIMENSION OF THE
RIVET HOLES.
(1) Drill out the rivets from the cracked area, figure 201.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL NOT TO CUT INTO THE STRUCTURE BELOW THE DAMAGED OR
CRACKED LIP SEGMENT. A THIN SHEET OF METAL CAN BE PUT BETWEEN
THE LIP AND THE CAP ANGLE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE CAP ANGLE.
(2) Cut out the damaged area. The cut line must be centered on the
damaged area. Make sure sufficient edge margin is maintained at the
existing rivet locations.
(3) Make the edges of the cutout area smooth with 150-grit Aluminum
oxide paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. Prepare repair area, see figure 201 or 202.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT DRILLED RIVETS AND ALL UNWANTED MATERIAL HAVE
BEEN REMOVED FROM THE INLET LIP CAVITY. FAILURE TO REMOVE ALL
UNWANTED MATERIAL WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE LIP SEGMENT
DURING ANTI-ICE OPERATION.
(1) Remove all unwanted material from inside the inlet lip cavity.
(2) Examine all holes in the lipskin for damage.
C. Make the filler and doubler, see figure 201 or 202.
(1) Measure the lipskin thickness and make a filler patch to fit the
lip cutout and match the thickness from 0.071 inch (1,80 mm) to
0.080 inch (2,03 mm) from 2219-T6 clad aluminum sheet. Note that
the filler thickness may be less than the 0.080 in (2,03 mm)
doubler thickness because of material thinning in this area due to
manufacturing.
NOTE: Make sure you permit a clearance between the filler patch
and adjacent surfaces that is not more than 0.030 inch
(0,76 mm).
(2) Make an internal doubler from 0.080 inch (2,03 mm) 2219-T6 aluminum
sheet approximately 2.50 inch (63,5 mm) wide to fit underneath the
cutout, see figure 201 or 202.
(3) Form the filler patch and the doubler to the contour of the lip.
D. Drill attach holes in the repair parts.
(1) Use figures 201 or 202 and mark the location of the hole pattern on
the filler and lip segment.
(2) Drill 0.125 inch (3,175 mm) pilot holes at each hole location.
(3) Attach the doubler onto the lip segment with clamps. Drill pilot
holes into the doubler that are common to the lip.
(4) Attach the doubler and filler patch together with clamps. Drill
pilot holes into the doubler that are common to the filler.
(5) Use a No. 16 drill to drill the holes to the final size. The final
hole size must be 0.176-0.180 inch (4,47-4,57 mm). Make sure you
install clecos as the holes are drilled.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(6) Drill the remaining holes from the center to the ends of the lip
segment. Make sure you install clecos as the holes are drilled.
(7) Countersink the holes in the lip segment and filler for the
CR3552P5 rivets.
(8) Remove the repair parts from the inlet cowl and deburr the holes.
(9) Remove all unwanted material from the inlet cowl and the lip
segment area.
E. Prepare nose lip segment for installation.
(1) Clean the repair parts with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(2) Apply Alodine 1000L to the rivet holes, and the edges of the filler
patch and doubler.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply PR-1200 primer to the doubler and interior surface of the
filler patch.
(4) Cure the primer at 65-75°F (18-24°C) for 30 minutes.
(5) Apply RTV106 sealant to the mating surfaces of the doubler, lip
segment and filler patch.
F. Attach repair parts.
(1) Make sure all unwanted material has been removed from inside of the
inlet lip.
(2) Install the doubler and filler patch on the lip skin and attach
with clecos.
(3) Use a 269C3 grip gage to determine the grip length of the rivets.
(4) Attach the filler patch and doubler to the inlet lip with CR3552P5
rivets. Make sure you install the rivets wet with RTV157 sealant or
equivalent.
(5) Apply aerodynamic sealant to the joint between the lip segment and
the doubler. (See SRM Repair No. 10.)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Chemical Alodine 1000L V71410
Coating Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Filler 0.071 in. (1,80 mm) thick
Doubler 0.080 in. (2,03 mm) thick
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

Rivet, Blind CR3552P5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Grip Gage 269C3 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SPLICE PLATE
TYPICAL
(3 PLACES)
INLET
COWL
FILLER
CRACK AREA A A 0.080 IN.
TYPICAL INTERIOR (2,03 mm) THICK
SIDE OR
CR3552P5 0.071 IN.
0.35 IN. TYPICAL
(8,89 mm) 0.75 IN. (1,80 mm) THICK
HOLE SIZE = 0.176- 2219-T6
E.D. TYP. (19,05 mm) 0.180 IN.
TYP. CLAD AL. SHEET
(4,47-4,57 mm) DIA.
DOUBLER:
0.080 IN.
(2,03 mm) THICK
2219-T6
ALUM SHEET
4.0 IN. 0.50 R 0.030 IN.

(101,6 mm) (12,7 mm) (0,76 mm)
TYP. MAX
10 RIVETS
LENGTH
MAX ACOUSTIC
PANEL
EXISTING NEW
RIVETS RIVETS
C1S-252-00
Inlet Lip Segment Flush Patch Repair for Cracked Rivet Holes
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
Inlet Lip Segment Flush Patch Repair for Dented Lipskin

Figure 202
(1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 22
INLET COWL PTFE GLASS CLOTH TAPE REPLACEMENT
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to replace the PTFE Glass Cloth tape
installed at the aft edge of the inlet cowl.
A. Prior to removal of the old tape, find and mark the line of symmetry at
Nacelle Radial 0 degree. Refer to Figure 201.
B. Remove the old tape.
C. Clean the repair surface.
(1) Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and isopropyl
alcohol. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before
D. Apply new PTFE Glass Cloth tape.
(1) Use the line of symmetry mark to position the new fiberglass tape
onto the inlet cowl.
(2) Apply the PTFE Glass Cloth tape 3M 5453 (Ref. P/N 642-1000-33).
Refer to Figure 201.
(3) Use a roller, or equivalent, to make sure that the tape has good
contact to the inlet cowl surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Solvent Isopropyl Commercially Available
Alcohol (99% pure)
Cloth Cotton Commercially Available
Roller Metal Commercially Available
Tape, PTFE Glass 5453 V76381
Cloth 3M Corporate Headquarters
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
www.3m.com/industrial.com
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Apply New Fiberglass Tape

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 23
INLET COWL INNER BARREL PANEL NICK, GOUGE, DENT OR SMALL HOLE,
1.0 INCH (25,4 MM) DIAMETER OR LESS
1. General
This Repair gives the procedure to repair nicks, gouges, dents and small
holes in the perforated skin of the acoustic panel (Zone CA1) that are
less than 1.0 inch (25,4 MM) diameter. The area to be cut out must be a
minimum distance of five times the cutout diameter from other repairs.
Before doing the repair, refer to SRM 54-02-00 Acoustic Treatment Zone
Repairs to find the permitted acoustic loss.
CHEMICALS.
A. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
B. Prepare the damaged area for repair.
(1) Do a tap test to find the size of the damage.
(2) Put Teflon tape 0.5 inch (12,7 mm) wide around the area to be cut
out.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

NECESSARY.
WARNING: REMOVE DAMAGED CORE AND SEPTUM MATERIAL ONLY AS DEEP AS

NECESSARY TO REMOVE DAMAGE. DO NOT REMOVE UNDAMAGED CORE AND
SEPTUM MATERIAL.
WARNING: THE AREA TO BE CUTOUT MUST NOT BE MORE THAN 1.0 INCH (25,4 MM)
IN DIAMETER AND MUST BE A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF FIVE TIMES THE
CUTOUT DIAMETER FROM OTHER REPAIRS.
C. Remove the damage area.
(1) Use a hole saw or a drill and cut through the damaged perforated
skin. Use the smallest diameter hole saw or drill possible, turning
at 18,000-23,000 rpm. Do not cut through the septum unless the
damage goes through it.
(2) Vacuum the cutout area to remove loose pieces.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
D. Mix the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer instructions.

(See 54-02-00, General Repair Procedures.) Add phenolic micro-balloons
5 percent by weight and mix fully to get a paste consistency.
E. Fill the cutout area with adhesive.
(1) Fill the cutout area with adhesive. Use a plastic syringe, spatula
or equivalent tool.
(2) Smooth the excess adhesive into the perforated holes next to the
cutout.
F. Prepare the repair area for cure.
(1) Put a piece of non-porous parting film over the cutout. Hold the
parting film in position with Teflon tape.
(2) Put pin holes through the non-porous parting film where it overlaps
the perforated skin to let the gas escape.
G. Cure the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer instructions.
H. Complete the repair.
(1) Remove the parting film and Teflon tape.
(2) Do a tap test to the repair area. No disbonds are permitted.
(3) Make the repair and the adjacent surface smooth with 150 to
320-grit silicon carbide abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(5) Apply aluminized paint to the repair area. Refer to

SRM 54-10-00, Repair No. 1, Step 4 Inner Barrel Perforated Skin
Finish Restoration.

Part A Henkel Corporation
Part B 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
(Alternate) Part A Henkel Corporation
Part B
Part B
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Silicon Carbide
Tape, Teflon 0.5 Inches (12,7 mm) Wide Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE LOCATION
SMALL HOLE 1.0 in. (25,4 mm)
MAXIMUM
SEPTUM
NON-PERFORATED
PERFORATED SKIN
SKIN
CORE
DRILL TO A DEPTH
TO REMOVE DAMAGE
TEFLON MASKING TAPE
ADHESIVE
C1S-358-00
MIXTURE
Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel Panel Nick, Gouge, Dent or Small Hole
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 24
ANTI-ICE EXHAUST DUCT ASSEMBLY REPAIR OF THE CRACKED ATTACH WELDS
OF THE DUCT SEPARATORS
DELETED 06/08/2018
REFER TO CMM 71-00-17 REPAIR 19
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 25
INLET COWL AFT BULKHEAD FRAME REPAIR - 12 O’CLOCK POSITION
1. General
This Repair is applicable to the aft facing flange of the aft bulkhead
frame, near the 12 o’clock position between the 22 degree and 338 degree
radials, where the frame has rubbed on the pylon seal. See Figure 201
(Sheet 1 and 2).
This Repair gives three repair methods for three types of damage:
Method A: Repair of the inner and/or outer face of the flange for damage
depth 0.020 inch (0,508 mm) maximum, width 0.025 inch (0,635
mm) maximum, length 0.89 inch (22,606 mm) maximum after
blending. Distance from other repairs 3.0 inch (76,2 mm)
minimum. See Figure 201 (Sheet 3 and 4).
Method B: Repair of the aft edge of flange for damage depth 0.025 inch
(0,635 mm) maximum after blending. Distance from other repairs
3.0 inch (76,2 mm) minimum. See Figure 201 (Sheet 3 and 4).
Method C: Repair of the inner and/or outer face and aft edge of the
flange for damage depth 0.020 inch (0,508 mm) maximum, length
0.89 inch (22.606 mm) maximum after blending. Distance from
other repairs 3.0 inch (76,2 mm) minimum. See Figure 201 (Sheet
5 and 6).
A. Remove the rubstrip that is adjacent to the damaged area.

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: DO NOT INCREASE THE DIAMETER OF THE HOLES IN THE AFT FLANGE
OF THE FRAME WHEN YOU DRILL THE FASTENERS.
(1) Remove the fasteners that attach the rubstrip to the aft flange.
(2) Remove and discard the rubstrip.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B. Repair Method A. See Figure 201 (Sheet 3 and 4).
(1) Remove the nick, scratch or gouge damage. Blend the damage to a 10
to 1 blend ratio. Refer to 54-01-01 Para 1A. Damage Cleanup.
becomes dry.
(3) Mix and apply alodine to the repair area. Refer to the
(4) Mix and apply primer to the repair area. Refer to the
(5) Install the rubstrip. See Para 2.E, Option 1,2 or 3.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
C. Repair Method B. See Figure 201 (Sheet 3 and 4)
(1) Blend out the damaged edge. Make a radius of R=0.25 to 0.50-in
(6,4 to 12,7 mm).
(2) Remove burrs and sharp edges with abrasive paper.
becomes dry.
(4) Mix and apply alodine to the repair area. Refer to the
(5) Mix and apply primer to the repair area. Refer to the
(6) Install the rubstrip. See Para 2.E, Option 1,2 or 3.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
D. Repair Method C. Figure 201 (Sheet 5 and 6)
(1) Put marks at the location of the damaged area(s) to be cut out.
(a) Make the cut out large enough so you can install the repair
filler(s) with a minimum of two CR3522-5 or CR3524-5 rivets
with 3D to 4D distance between rivets.
NOTE: Make the cut out the minimum area necessary to remove
the damage.
NOTE: Keep 1.5 to 2D minimum edge distance from new and

existing fastener locations in the aft flange of the
frame.
NOTE: Keep 1.5 to 2D minimum edge distance from new fastener

locations in the repair filler.
(b) If two cut outs are within 7.5 inches (191 mm) of each other,
use one repair doubler to include both areas.
(2) Cut out the damaged area. Make a corner radius of R=0.25 to 0.50
in. (6,4-12,7 mm).
(4) Make a repair filler(s) to fit in the cut out area.
(a) Make a repair filler from 0.100 (2,54 mm) thick 2024-T3 or
2024T42 (alternate material 2024-0) aluminum sheet, heat
treated to 2024T42.
(b) Maximum gap between the cut line and the repair filler(s) not
more than 0.050 in (1,3 mm).
(c) Make the repair filler(s) to agree with the contour of the aft
flange.
(5) Put marks at the location of where you will install the repair
angle doubler.
CAUTION: DO NOT INCREASE THE DIAMETER OF THE HOLES IN THE AFT BULKHEAD
WEB WHEN YOU DRILL THE FASTENERS.
(6) Remove the fasteners (bolts and rivets) on the aft bulkhead web
where the repair angle doubler will fit. Keep the NAS6303U3 bolts
and AN960C10 washers for installation.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(7) Make the repair angle doubler.
(a) Make the repair angle doubler from 0.100 in (2,54 mm) 2024-0
aluminum alloy sheet. The minimum bend radius is R=0.22 in.
(5.6 mm) and the corner radius is R=0.375 in. (9,52 mm).
NOTE: It is permitted to make a repair angle doubler from

0.050 in. (1,27 mm) thick 301 stainless steel sheet
(1/4 hard). Minimum bend radius R=0.090 in. (2,29 mm).
NOTE: It is permitted to make the repair angle doubler from

an existing angle splice (P/N 642-1018-47) if the
number of fasteners will fit on the part.
(b) Make the repair angle doubler long enough so that a minimum of
three additional rivets can be installed on each side of the
trimmed area of the aft flange and aft bulkhead web.
NOTE: Make a minimum of 1.5 to 2D edge distance from the

existing fastener locations on the aft bulkhead web.
NOTE: Make a minimum of 1.5 to 2D edge distance and 3D to 4D

distance between new and existing fastener locations.
(c) Make the repair angle doubler to agree with the contour of the
aft flange of the frame and aft bulkhead web.
(8) If the repair angle doubler and/or filler(s) are made from 2024-0,
heat treat to 2024-T42 condition.
(9) Make a template and drill the repair angle doubler.
(a) Put the repair angle doubler in position and mark around the
repair angle doubler.
(b) Remove the repair angle doubler.
(c) Make a template the size of the repair angle doubler flange
that will fit to the aft bulkhead web.
(d) Put the template into position and mark the fastener (rivets
and/or bolts) holes that are used to attach the repair angle
doubler to the aft bulkhead web.
(e) Remove the template and drill the holes in the template.
(f) Use the template to drill the holes in the repair angle
doubler flange that will fit to the aft bulkhead web.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(g) Remove the burrs and sharp edges with abrasive paper.
(10) Drill the repair angle doubler and filler(s).
(a) Put the repair angle doubler in position and hold with
temporary fasteners.
CAUTION: DO NOT DRILL THE HOLES FOR THE RUBSTRIP.
(b) Mark and drill the holes to 0.160 - 0.164 in (4,06-4,16 mm)
for the CR3522-5 or CR3524-5 rivets through the aft flange of
the frame and the repair angle doubler.
(c) Remove the burrs and sharp edges in the repair angle doubler
where the filler(s) will go with abrasive paper.
(d) Put the filler(s) into position and hold in position.
(e) Drill the holes through the repair angle doubler and filler(s)
to 0.160 - 0.164 in (4,06-4,16 mm).
(f) Countersink the holes in the aft flange and filler(s) to 0.054
in (1,37 mm) depth for the CR3522-5 or 0.037 in (0,94 mm)
depth for the CR3524-5 rivets.
(g) Remove the repair angle doubler and filler(s) and remove the
burrs and sharp edges with abrasive paper.
(11) Mix and apply alodine to the repair parts and the repair area.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(12) Install the repair angle doubler and filler(s).
CHEMICALS.
(a) Mix the sealant. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(b) Apply sealant to the mating surfaces of the repair angle

doubler, filler(s) and repair area.
(c) Put the repair angle doubler and filler(s) in position and
hold with temporary fasteners.
(d) Wet install the CR3523-5 or CR3553-5 rivets in the repair

angle doubler and aft bulkhead web with sealant.
(e) If applicable, install the NAS6303U5 bolts and AN960C10

washers in the aft bulkhead web.
(f) Wet install the CR3522-5 or CR3524-5 rivets in the repair

angle doubler, filler(s) and aft flange of frame with sealant.
(g) Apply a fillet of sealant around the repair angle doubler and
in the gap between the repair filler and the edge of the cut
out. Remove unwanted sealant.
CHEMICALS.
(h) Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the
solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(i) Cure the sealant. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Install the rubstrip by Option 1, Option 2, or Option 3.
(a) Option 1 - Install rubstrip with double-sided tape.
1 Etch the mating surface of the rubstrip only per AMS

2491D. The etched surface will have a uniform, dull, dark
brown-to-black color.
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE CHEMICALS, READ, UNDERSTAND, AND

OBEY ALL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CHEMICALS.
THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE
MANUFACTURER, THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
(MSDS), AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS. CHEMICALS MAY
CAUSE INJURY TO YOU OR MAKE YOU SICK WHEN SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT OBEYED. AN MSDS GIVES
INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP, AND
DISCARD CHEMICALS. GET INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR
EMPLOYER ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP, AND
DISCARD CHEMICALS.
2 Clean the rubstrip and the aft flange of the frame area
with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove the
solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent
becomes dry.
3 Cut a piece of double sided tape to the same length as the

rubstrip.
4 Peel off one side of the protective backing of the tape

and put the tape into position on the aft flange of the
frame. Press the tape firmly with finger pressure.
5 Peal off the protective backing.
6 Put the etched surface of the rubstrip onto the aft flange
of the frame and press firmly with finger pressure. Make
sure the rubstrip is tight on the tape.
(b) Option 2 - Install rubstrip with screws, nuts and washers.
1 Put the rubstrip in position on the aft flange of the

frame and align the pilot holes with the holes in the aft
flange of the frame.
2 Hold the rubstrip in position with temporary fasteners.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT INCREASE THE DIAMETER OF THE HOLES IN THE AFT

FLANGE OF THE FRAME WHEN YOU DRILL THE RUBSTRIP.
3 Match drill the rubstrip, repair angle doubler and filler

(if applicable) through the fastener holes in the aft
flange to 0.166-0.171 in. (4,21-4,34 mm).
4 Remove the rubstrip and remove the burrs from the holes.
5 Countersink the holes in the rubstrip to match the

fasteners you will install.

DISCARD CHEMICALS.
6 Mix the sealant. Refer to the manufacture’s instruction.
7 Put the rubstrip in position and wet install the screws,

washers and nuts with sealant.
8 Remove the unwanted sealant with a clean cotton cloth

made moist with solvent. Wipe the area with a clean lint
free cotton cloth before the solvent becomes gas.
(c) Option 3 - Install rubstrip with plastic fasteners.
1 Put the rubstrip in position on the aft flange of the

frame and align the pilot holes with the holes in the aft
flange of the frame.
2 Hold the rubstrip in position with temporary fasteners.
CAUTION: DO NOT INCREASE THE DIAMETER OF THE HOLES IN THE AFT

FLANGE OF THE FRAME WHEN YOU DRILL.
3 Match drill the rubstrip, repair angle doubler and filler

(if applicable) through the fastener holes in the aft
flange to 0.182-0.187 in. (4,62-4,74 mm).
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
4 Remove the burrs from the holes.
5 Countersink the holes in the rubstrip to match the

fasteners you will install.
6 Put the rubstrip in position and install the plastic

fasteners.

DISCARD CHEMICALS.
7 Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the

Bolt NAS6303U3 Commercially Available
Bolt NAS6303U5 Commercially Available
Brush Nylon bristle Commercially Available
Coating, chemical Alodine 1200 V71410
conversion Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Fastener, panel, S700R1545-1 V51563
plastic, countersunk Rohr Inc.
850 Lagoon Dr
(619) 691-2006
Nut NASM45938/2-2L Commercially Available
Paper, abrasive 150-400 grit, aluminum Commercially Available
oxide
Converter EC-265 or EC-273 East Water St.
Thinner TR-114 or TR-102 Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Alternate Primer V0KXA5
Primer, Epoxy Green Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Base 10P4-2
Converter EC-117S
Rivet, flush head CR3522-5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rivet, flush head CR3524-5 V05693
Rivet, protruding CR3523-5 V05693
head Cherry Textron Inc
Rivet, protruding CR3553-5 V05693
head, oversize (Alt) Cherry Textron Inc
Screw 100 degree Commercially Available
Screw, slotted nylon A-A-55623-147 Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Sealant PR812 V83574
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Sealant (Alt) P/S 700 V83574
PPG Aerospace/
Sealant (Alt) CS 1900 V83574
PPG Aerospace/
Sheet, aluminum 0.100 inch thick 2024-0 Commercially Available
alloy per QQ-A-250/5 (bare)
or QQ-A-250/4 (clad)
Sheet, aluminum 0.100 inch thick 2024-0 Commercially Available
alloy (Alt) per QQ-A-250/4 (clad)
Sheet, 301 stainless 0.050 inch thick per Commercially Available
steel AMS5517
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Splice P/N 642-1018-47, Goodrich Corporation
Length: 7.75 inch, TI- Aerostructures Group
6AL-4V per AMS4911
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Tape, adhesive F9473PC V76381
3M Corporate Headquarters
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Washer AN960C10 Commercially Available
Washer NAS1149CN832B Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Aft Bulkhead Frame Repair

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3.0 in. (76,2 mm) MIN. FROM

OTHER DAMAGE
1.0 in. (25,4 mm) MAX. AFTER BLEND OUT

10 X DEPTH BLEND RATIO
0.025 in . (0,635 mm)

MAX. WIDTH
0.020 in. (0,508 mm)

MAX. DAMAGE
DEPTH
0.89 in. (22,61 mm) MAX. AFTER BLEND OUT

10 X DEPTH BLEND RATIO
METHOD 'A' DAMAGE
0.25 in. (6,35 mm) MAX.

AFTER BLENDING
3.0 in. (7,62 mm) MIN.
FROM OTHER
DAMAGE
2.0 in. (50,8 mm) MAX.
0.25-0.50 in. AFTER BLENDING
(6,35-12,7 mm) RADIUS
MAINTAIN 1.5D FASTENER

EDGE DISTANCE (MIN.) TO
EDGE OF REMOVED MATERIAL
C1S-532-01
METHOD 'B' DAMAGE

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 26
INLET COWL INNER BARREL PARTIAL PENETRATION REPAIR
1. General
This Repair is applicable to first and second generation inner barrel

panels.
The maximum dimension of the partial penetration damage that can be

repaired is 8.0 X 8.0 in (203 mm X 203 mm) and 2D (D = largest single
measurement of damage) from an existing repair. The repair must be more
than 3.0 in (76,2 mm) from the forward and side edges of the inner barrel
panel, and 4.0 in (102 mm) from the aft edge of the inner barrel panel. Put
together separate damages into one repair if they are 3.0 in (76,2 mm)
from each other. See Figure 201.
Do Repair No. 23 for damage less than 1.0 in (25.4 mm).
Refer to SRM 54-02-07 Acoustic Treatment Zone Repairs for the total
allowable acoustic loss before you do this repair.
A. Cut out the damage area. See Figure 202.

NECESSARY.
becomes dry.
(2) Do a tap test to find the extent of damage.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE MORE INNER SKIN THAN NECCESSARY.
(3) Use a cutting tool turning at 18,000 to 23,000 RPM and make a
geometrical shaped cutout with 0.50 in (12,7 mm) corner radius
minimum to remove the damaged inner skin.
CAUTION: DO NOT CUT INTO THE BACKSKIN.
(4) Use a hole saw turning at 18,000 to 23,000 RPM and remove the
damaged core. Cut the core to the backskin.
CAUTION: DO NOT PUT PRESSURE ON THE BACKSKIN WHEN YOU GRIND.
CAUTION: YOU MUST LEAVE THE LAYER OF ADHESIVE ON THE BACKSKIN TO

PERMIT THE REPAIR PLUG TO PROPERLY BOND.
(5) Use a grinding disc and remove the core down to the adhesive pieces
on the inner face of the backskin. Carefully remove the adhesive
pieces. Leave the layer of adhesive.
(6) Remove the surface finish from the perforated skin to 1.5 in (38.1
mm) from the cutout.
(7) Use scissors or a sharp knife and remove the loose wire mesh septum
from the core.
CAUTION: YOU MUST REMOVE ALL LOOSE WIRE MESH STRAND AND TRIM THE WIRE
MESH SEPTUM BACK TO AVOID CONTACT WITH THE REPAIR PLUG.
CONTACT WITH THE REPAIR PLUG CAN CAUSE GALVANIC CORROSION.
(8) Trim the wire mesh septum 0.050-0.100 in (1,27-2,54 mm) back from
the edge of the core.
(9) Vacuum clean the repair area to remove unwanted material.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. Make the repair parts. See Figure 203.
(1) Make a core filler plug to match the cutout.
(a) Make the plug so the distance between the plug and the
existing core is not more than one cell.
(b) Make the plug so the drain slots in the plug match the slots
in the existing core.
(c) Make the plug so it is flush with the perforated skin and the
distance between the plug and the backskin is 0.010-0.030 in
(0,254-0,762 mm).
NOTE: The distance is necessary for a proper adhesive bond

line.
(2) Make a repair doubler to agree with the contour of the perforated
skin.
(a) Chamfer the doubler all around.
C. Drill the repair doubler. See Figure 204.
CAUTION: DO NOT DRILL INTO THE BACKSKING WHEN YOU DRILL THROUGH THE
REPAIR DOUBLER AND PERFORATED SKIN.
(1) Mark a double row hole pattern on the repair doubler. Use 2D edge
distance and 4D rivet spacing.
(2) Drill #40 pilot holes through the repair doubler.
(4) Put the repair doubler into position.
(5) Drill the #40 pilot holes through the repair doubler and perforated
skin and hold in position with temporary fasteners.
(6) Drill the holes through the repair doubler and perforated skin to
0.160 - 0.164 in (4,06-4,16 mm).
(7) Countersink the holes in the repair doubler to 100 degrees and
0.226-0.236 in (5,74-5,99 mm) deep.
NOTE: Do not countersink the holes if you will use universal head
rivets.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
(8) Remove the repair doubler and remove burrs and sharp edges with
abrasive paper.
D. Install the core filler plug and repair doubler. See Figure 204.
(1) Clean the core filler plug, repair doubler and cutout with a clean
(2) Etch the repair doubler and repair area. Refer to the
(3) Apply alodine to the outer surface of the repair doubler. Refer to
Repair No. 1.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(4) Apply aluminized epoxy primer to the outer surface of the repair
doubler. Refer to Repair No. 1.
(5) Apply BR-127 primer to the inner surface of the repair doubler, and
to the perforated skin repair area. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(6) Mix the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(7) Apply the adhesive to the backskin, the outer diameter of the core
filler plug and the inner diameter of the cutout.
(8) Put the core filler plug into the cutout.
(9) Apply adhesive to the mating surfaces of the repair doubler, core
filler plug and the perforated skin.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
(10) Clean the adhesive from the fastener holes and countersinks with a
(11) Put the repair doubler into position and wet install the rivets
with sealant.
becomes dry.
E. Cure the repair parts.
(1) Put and piece of parting film over the repair area and hold in
position with Teflon tape.
(a) Make vent holes in the tape to allow gas to escape.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) Cure the repair parts. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Remove the parting film and tape.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Core, aluminum Honeycomb, PAA V0WL95
5056 AL Alcore, Inc.
alloy, 3/8 in. 1502 Quarry Drive
cell, Edgewood, MD 21040-1047
0.003 in. foil Phone (410) 676-7100
thickness, www.alcore.com
slotted 0.070-
.090 in. (1.78-
2.29 mm) slots,
Non-perforated
Expanded
Etch, chemical Pasa-Jell 105 V4E208
2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com
Film, parting Nonporous Commercially Available
Knife Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

Paper, abrasive 150-400 grit, Commercially Available
aluminum oxide
Primer BR-127 V0V7G8
Cytec Industries Inc.
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Rivet, flush head CR3524-P5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rivet, flush head (Alt) CR3524-EE5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
Rivet, universal head CR3523-P5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
Rivet, universal head CR3523-5 V05693
Scissors Commercially Available
Sealant - two part DC90-006 sealant V5D028
PR-1200 primer Dow Corning Corporation
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Sealant (Alt) RTV 88/9910 V01139
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Sealant (Alt) PR1995 V83574
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Sheet, aluminum alloy 0.050 in (1,27 Commercially Available
mm) thick 2024-
T42 per QQ-A-
250/4
Sheet, aluminum alloy 0.050 in (1,27 Commercially Available
(Alt) mm) thick 2024-
T3 per QQ-A-250/
4
Solvent Isopropyl Commercially Available
Alcohol
99 percent pure
or
Ketone Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Teflon 0.5 in (12,7 mm) V76381
wide 3M Corporate Headquarters
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Inner Barrel Partial Penetration Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 27
INLET COWL INNER BARREL FULL PENETRATION REPAIR
1. General
This Repair is applicable to first and second generation inner barrel

panels.
The maximum dimension of the full penetration damage that can be repaired
is 5.5 X 5.5 in (140 mm X 140 mm) and 2D (D = largest single measurement of
damage) from an existing repair. The repair must be more than 3.0 in (76,2
mm) from the forward and side edges of the inner barrel panel, and 11.0 in
(279.0 mm) from the aft edge of the inner barrel panel. Put together
separate damages into one repair if they are 3.0 in (76,2 mm) from each
other. See Figure 201.
Refer to SRM 54-02-07 Acoustic Treatment Zone Repairs for the total
allowable acoustic loss before you do this repair.
A. Cut out the damage area. See Figure 202.

NECESSARY.
becomes dry.
(2) Do a tap test to find the dimension of the damage.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT REMOVE MORE INNER BARREL PANEL THAN NECCESSARY.
(3) Use a cutting tool turning at 18,000 to 23,000 RPM and make a
geometrical shaped cutout with 0.50 in (12,7 mm) corner radius
minimum to remove the damaged inner skin.
(4) Use a hole saw turning at 18,000 to 23,000 RPM and remove the
damaged core and backskin.
CAUTION: DO NOT CUT INTO THE BACKSKIN WHEN YOU REMOVE THE ADDITIONAL
INNER SKIN AND CORE MATERIAL.
(5) Use a hole saw turning at 18,000 to 23,000 RPM and remove an
additional 1.25 in (38,1 mm) of the inner skin and core around the
cutout to the backskin.
CAUTION: DO NOT PUT PRESSURE ON THE BACKSKIN WHEN YOU GRIND.
CAUTION: YOU MUST LEAVE THE LAYER OF ADHESIVE ON THE BACKSKIN TO ALLOW
THE BACKSKIN REPAIR PLATE TO PROPERLY BOND.
(6) Use a grinding disc and remove the core down to the adhesive pieces
on the inner face of the backskin. Carefully remove the adhesive
pieces. Leave the layer of adhesive.
(7) Remove the surface finish from the perforated skin to 1.5 in (38.1
mm) from the cutout.
(8) Use scissors or a sharp knife and remove the loose wire mesh septum
from the core.
CAUTION: YOU MUST REMOVE ALL LOOSE WIRE MESH STRAND AND TRIM THE WIRE
MESH SEPTUM BACK TO AVOID CONTACT WITH THE REPAIR PLUG.
CONTACT WITH THE REPAIR PLUG CAN CAUSE GALVANIC CORROSION.
(9) Trim the wire mesh septum 0.050-0.100 in (1,27-2,54 mm) back from
the edge of the core.
(10) Vacuum clean the repair area to remove unwanted material.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
B. Make the repair parts. See Figure 203.
(1) Make a backskin repair plate from 0.032 aluminum sheet to the
dimension of the cut out.
(a) Make the backskin repair plate to agree with the contour of
the backskin.
(2) Make a core filler plug to match the cut out.
(a) Make the plug so the distance between the plug and the
existing core does not exceed one cell.
(b) Make the plug so the drain slots in the plug match the slots
in the existing core.
(c) Make the plug so it is flush with the perforated skin and the
distance between the plug and the backskin repair plate is
0.010-0.030 in (0,254-0,762 mm).
NOTE: The distance is necessary for a proper adhesive bond

line.
(3) Make a repair doubler from 0.050 aluminum sheet to agree with the
contour of the perforated skin.
(a) Chamfer the doubler all around.
C. Drill the backskin repair plate. See Figure 204.
(1) Layout a double row hole pattern on the backskin repair plate. Use
2D edge distance and 4D rivet spacing.
(2) Drill #40 pilot holes through the backskin repair plate.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(4) Put the backskin repair plate into position.
(5) Drill the #40 pilot holes through the backskin repair plate and
backskin and hold in position with temporary fasteners.
(6) Drill the holes through the backskin repair plate and backskin to
0.160 - 0.164 in (4,06-4,16 mm).
(7) Remove the backskin repair plate and remove burrs and sharp edges
with abrasive paper.
D. Drill the repair doubler. See Figure 204.
CAUTION: DO NOT DRILL INTO THE BACKSKIN WHEN YOU DRILL THROUGH THE
REPAIR DOUBLER AND PERFORATED SKIN.
(1) Mark a double row hole pattern on the repair doubler. Use 2D edge
distance and 4D rivet spacing.
(2) Drill #40 pilot holes through the repair doubler.
(4) Put the repair doubler into position.
(5) Drill the #40 pilot holes through the repair doubler and perforated
skin and hold in position with temporary fasteners.
(6) Drill the holes through the repair doubler and perforated skin to
0.160 - 0.164 in (4,06-4,16 mm).
(7) Countersink the holes in the repair doubler to 100 degrees and
0.226-0.236 in (5,74-5,99 mm) deep.
NOTE: Do not countersink the holes if you will use universal head
rivets.
(8) Remove the repair doubler and remove burrs and sharp edges with
abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
E. Install the backskin repair plate, core filler plug and repair doubler.
See Figure 204.
(1) Clean the backskin repair plate, core filler plug, repair doubler
and cutout with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove
the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent becomes
dry.
(2) Etch the backskin repair plate, repair doubler and repair area.
(3) Apply alodine to the outer surface of the repair doubler. Refer to
Repair No. 1.
(4) Apply aluminized epoxy primer to the outer surface of the repair
doubler. Refer to Repair No. 1.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(5) Apply BR-127 primer to the inner surface of the repair doubler,
backskin repair plate and the perforated skin repair area. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
(6) Mix and apply the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer’s

instructions.
(7) Clean the adhesive from the fastener holes and countersinks with a
clean cotton cloth made moist with solvent. Wipe the area with a
clean lint free cotton cloth before the solvent becomes gas.
with sealant.
(9) Apply adhesive to the mating surfaces of the outer diameter of the
core filler plug and the inner diameter of the cutout.
(10) Put the core filler plug into the cutout.
(11) Apply adhesive to the mating surfaces of the repair doubler, core
filler plug and the perforated skin.
with sealant.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
F. Cure the repair parts.
(1) Put and piece of parting film over the repair area and hold in
position with Teflon tape.
(a) Make vent holes in the tape to allow gas to escape.
(2) Cure the repair parts. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Remove the parting film and tape.
3. Repair Materials and Equipment. See Table 201.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.

5052 AL alloy, 3/8 Alcore, Inc.
in. cell, 0.003 1502 Quarry Drive
in. foil Edgewood, MD 21040-1047
thickness, slotted Phone (410) 676-7100
www.alcore.com
(alternate) 5056 AL alloy, 3/8 Alcore, Inc.
in. cell, 0.003
in. foil
thickness, slotted
Etch, chemical Pasa-Jell V4E208
2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com
Knife Commercially Available
Paper, abrasive 150-400 grit, Commercially Available
aluminum oxide
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Rivet, flush head CR3524-P5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rivet, flush head CR3524-EE5 V05693
Rivet, universal head CR3523-P5 V05693
Rivet, universal head CR3523-5 V05693
Scissors Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Sealant - two part DC90-006 sealant V5D028
PR-1200 primer Dow Corning Corporation
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Sealant (Alt) RTV 88/9910 V01139
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Sealant (Alt) PR1995 V83574
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Sheet, aluminum alloy 0.032 in (1,27 mm) Commercially Available
thick 2024-T42 per
QQ-A-250/4
(Alt) thick 2024-T3 per
QQ-A-250/4
thick 2024-T42 per
QQ-A-250/4
(Alt) thick 2024-T3 per
QQ-A-250/4
99 percent pure
or
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.

Ketone Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Teflon 0.5 in (12,7 mm) Minnesota Mining and Mfg. Co.
wide Sales Center
3130 Lexington Ave S
P.O. Box 33211
Saint Paul, MN 55133
Phone: (612) 733-3300
V2V131
Table 201 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Inner Barrel Full Penetration Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 28
REPAIR FOR MISMATCH - INLET TO FAN COWL INTERFACE
CAUTION: THIS REPAIR WILL AFFECT THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF THE INLET COWL. IF
THE INLET COWL IS INSTALLED ON A DIFFERENT NACELLE, RE-INSPECT FOR
MISMATCH AT THE FAN COWL INTERFACE AND ADJUST AS NECESSARY.
1. General
This repair is for inlet cowls that have a positive mismatch with the
leading edge of the fan cowl doors. Locally manufactured shims are
installed between the aft bulkhead and the outer barrel panel to remove
mismatch. The shimming should be reinspected and adjusted as necessary
when the cowl is installed on a different nacelle. This repair is not
applicable at the outer barrel splice located at Radial 332 degree, and
the access panel between Radial 128 degree and 152 degree.
2. Repair instructions
A. Identify mismatch areas.
(1) Inspect the fan cowl doors for correct rigging in accordance with
the Aircraft Maintenance Manual chapter 71-13-00. Adjust if
required.
(2) Examine the total circumference of the interface between the inlet
cowl and the fan cowl doors. Identify and mark any areas where
there the positive mismatch is more than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). (See
Figure 201.)
NOTE: A positive mismatch of 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) or less is

acceptable and does not require rework. The maximum
positive mismatch that may be corrected by this repair is
0.160 inch (4.0 mm). Any mismatch above 0.160 inch should
be reported to Goodrich Aerostructures.
B. Prepare area and shim(s). (See Figure 202.)
(1) Remove the rivets in the areas that require shim(s). Refer to SRM
51-42-00 Fastener Installation and Removal.
(2) Make shim(s) from 321 CRES sheet. Make the shims for each mismatch
area to the following specifications.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(a) Length - Equal to the distance along the contour where

mismatch exists, but not to exceed 4.3 inches (109.2 mm).
NOTE: The length of an individual CRES shim segment shall

not exceed 4.3 inches (109.2 mm). For mismatch areas
that are longer, make shims in segments and space them
0.060-0.100 inch (1.52-2.54 mm) apart.
NOTE: Commercially pure titanium sheet may be used as an

alternate shim material. Titanium shims may be any
needed length. A single titanium shim may be used to
correct a mismatch that is longer than 4.3 inches
(109.2 mm).
(b) Width - 1.0 inch (25.4 mm).
(c) Thickness - Equal to the amount of mismatch in the area.

However, the total thickness of one or more shim layers shall
not exceed 0.12 inch (3.0 mm).
(3) Taper shims at ends to achieve a smooth transition along the

contour.
C. Prepare shims for installation.
(1) Position the shim(s) between the inlet outer barrel and aft
bulkhead frame. Use clamps to hold the shim(s) in place.
(2) Use a #16 drill to make pilot holes in the shim(s). Drill through
the existing holes in the outer barrel.
(3) Remove the shim(s). Enlarge the holes in the shim(s) to 0.196-0.200
inch (4.98-5.08 mm) diameter. Deburr the holes.
(4) Clean the shim(s) and the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth
and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(5) Apply PR-1200 primer to both sides of the shim(s). Air dry at room
temperature for 2 hours minimum.
(6) Apply DC90-006 sealant mixture to the shim(s). Follow vendor’s

instructions for mixing.
D. Install shim(s). (See Figure 202.)
(1) Put the shim(s) in place between the outer panel and the aft
bulkhead. Ensure all holes are aligned. Attach with clecos.
(2) Install CR3552PR-5 rivets in holes. Wet install with DC90-006

sealant. Fastener grip length to be determined at installation.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Remove the unwanted sealant from the outer barrel surface with a
(4) Cure sealant to manufactures instructions.
E. Inspect
(1) Inspect repaired area(s) for loose rivets or any other defects.

Shim 321 CRES Sheet Commercially available
Shim (alternate) Commercially pure Commercially available
titanium sheet
Rivets, Blind CR3552PR-5 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Inspect Area and Rework Limits

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
4.30 INCH
(109.2 mm)
INDIVIDUAL
SHIM SHIM SPACING
MAXIMUM 0.060 INCH (1.52 mm)
LENGTH TO .100 INCH (2.54 mm)
1.00 INCH
(25.4 mm)
0.040 INCH
(1.01 mm) MAXIMUM
TAPER SHIM(S) AT ENDS SHIM
OF POSITIVE MISMATCH THICKNESS
AREA ONLY 0.120 INCH
(3.00 mm)
INSTALL
*CR3552PR-5
INLET COWL
OUTER PANEL
RUB STRIP
SHIM
AFT BULKHEAD
OUTER CAP
AFT BULKHEAD WEB

* FASTENER LENGTH
DETERMINED AT TIME
OF INSTALLATION
C1S-512-00
Shim Detail and Installation

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 29
INLET COWL ACCESS PANEL ELONGATED HOLES DIMPLE WASHER REPAIR
1. General
This permanent repair installs dimpled washers to repair elongated hole

damage on the inlet cowl access panel. This repair applies to
P/N 642-1014-503 access panel.
The repair allowable limits are:
(3) Maximum of three dimpled washers can be installed at each forward

and aft edge.
(4) Maximum of one dimpled washer can be installed at each upper and
lower edge.
(5) Minimum of two intact holes between dimpled washers.
(6) No dimpled washers in the corners.
A. Prepare the elongated hole(s). (See Figure 201).
WARNING: WEAR APPLICABLE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

WHEN YOU DO THIS TASK. BEFORE YOU USE PPE, READ,
UNDERSTAND AND OBEY ALL INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS USE. THESE
INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE
MANUFACTURER, YOUR EMPLOYER AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS.
YOU CAN GET INJURED IF YOU DO NOT USE PPE. GET
INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER ON WHICH PPE IS
NECESSARY.
(1) Drill out the elongated hole(s) to the minimum diameter that makes
the hole(s) round, but not to exceed 0.316 in (8,03 m) diameter.
NOTE: The original hole diameter is 0.202 in (5,13 mm) and the
original countersink diameter is 0.315 in (8,00 mm).
(2) Deburr the hole(s).
B. Prepare the repair area. (See Figure 201).
(1) Mask the repair area.
(2) Abrade the surface to remove the paint.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Clean the area with a clean lint-free cloth made moist with
(4) Apply a layer of metal bond preparation compound. Refer to the

(5) Remove unwanted metal bond preparation compound with a clean lint-
free cloth made moist with demineralized water.
(6) Air dry the surface.
(7) Do a check for acid contamination with blue litmus paper. If the
litmus paper turns red, flush again with demineralized water.
(8) Air dry the surface.
C. Prepare and repair area and install the dimpled washer(s). (See Figure
201).
(1) Prepare and apply the primer to the faying surface of the access
panel repair area and to the faying surface of the dimpled
washer(s). Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) Prepare the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
(3) Apply a layer of adhesive to the faying surface of the dimpled

washer(s). Remove unwanted adhesive.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Put the dimpled washer(s) into position and apply pressure using
weights or clamps.
(5) Cure the adhesive per the manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Restore the surface finish.
(1) Restore the surface finish. (Ref to 51-75-12, Para 4).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Cloth, Lint-Free Cotton Commercially Available
Paper, abrasive 280-400 aluminum Commercially Available

oxide paper
or
Scotch Brite abrasive Commercially Available

pad
Paper, Litmus Blue Commercially Available
Paste, adhesive EA934NA V33564

or Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
EA 9394 V33564
Henkel Corporation
Preparation compound, PASA-JELL 105 V4E208
metal bond Bergdahl Associates, Inc
2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com

West Paterson, NJ 07242-
3317
phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com

99 percent pure
or

Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Ketone Middletown, PA 17057-
2200
or Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
Turco 6646 V71410

Henkel Corporation
Madison Heights, MI
48071
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Washer, dimpled NAS1169DD10L Commercially Available

Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
OUTER BARREL
A
FAN COWL
B
C1S-500-00
Inlet Cowl Access Panel Elongated Holes Dimple Washer Repair

CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
AF
T
UPPER
FW
LOWER D
0.316 INCH (8, 03 mm) MAXIMUM

REPAIR HOLE SIZE B
DIMPLE
WASHER
C
C1S-501-00
MAXIMUM OF (1) DIMPLE WASHER ON EACH UPPER OR LOWER EDGE

MAXIMUM OF (3) DIMPLE WASHERS ON EACH FWD OR AFT EDGE
Inlet Cowl Access Panel Elongated Holes Dimple Washer Repair

CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 30
INNER BARREL PANEL SMALL DENTS
1.5-INCHES (38,1 MM) IN DIAMETER OR LESS
1. General
This repair gives the procedure to repair small dents in the perforated
skin of the acoustic panel (Zone CA1) that are 1.5 inches (38,1 mm) in
diameter or less and that are 0.029 inches (0,74 mm) deep or less. The
width over depth ratio must be greater than or equal to 20. The aspect
ratio (length/width) of the dent must be less than or equal to 1.5. The
distance between the dent edge and the edge of other damage must be
greater than or equal to 4D and the distance between the dent edge and the
panel edge must be greater than or equal to 2D, where ‘D’ is the largest
dimension of the dent.
Before you do this repair, refer to SRM 54-02-00 Acoustic treatment Zone
Repairs to find the total acoustic loss for the repair(s).
2. Repair Instructions. Refer to Figure 201.
CHEMICALS.
A. Clean the area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove the
solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent becomes dry.
(1) Do a tap test to determine if a disbond exists. No disbond allowed.

If there is a disbond contact UTAS.
(2) Put teflon tape 0.50-0.70 inches (12,7-17,8 mm) beyond and around
the damaged area.
C. Inject the damaged area with adhesive.
CFM56-5B
54-10-00 Repair No. 30
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(1) Clean the area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove
dry.
CHEMICALS.
(2) Mix the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Inject damaged area with adhesive through the perforated holes.
Use a plastic syringe or equivalent tool.
(4) Completely fill all the cells below the damaged area plus one cell
beyond. Refer to Fig 201.
(5) Smooth the excess adhesive into the perforated holes adjacent to
the repair area.
D. Cure the repair.
(1) Put a piece of non-porous parting film over the repair area. Hold
the parting film in position with teflon tape.
(2) Put several pin holes in the non-porous parting film to permit gas
to escape.
(3) Cure the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) Remove the parting film and teflon tape.
CFM56-5B
54-10-00 Repair No. 30
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
E. Finish the repair.
(1) Do a tap test to the repair area. No disbonds are permitted.
(2) Make the repair and the adjacent surface smooth with 150 to 320-
grit silicon carbide abrasive paper.
CHEMICALS.
(3) Clean the area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove
dry.
(4) Apply aluminized paint to the repair area. Refer to SRM 54-02-09,
step 4 Perforated Internal Skin Surface Finish Repair.
CFM56-5B
54-10-00 Repair No. 30
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Adhesive EA9394 (Two Part) V33564
Part A Henkel Corporation
Part B 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Adhesive, Epoxy EA9321 (Two Part) V33564
Part B
Adhesive, Epoxy EA934NA (Two Part) V33564
Silicon Carbide
Syringe Plastic Commercially Available
Tape, Teflon 0.5-Inches Commercially Available
(12.7 mm) Wide
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
54-10-00 Repair No. 30
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
MIBK/MEK Blend V5E821 V5E821
(60% Methyl Isobutyl U.S.A., Inc.
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
54-10-00 Repair No. 30
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE LOCATION
SEPTUM
DAMAGE EXTENT
1.50 INCHES (38,1 mm)
NON-PERFORATED MAXIMUM DIAMETER
PERFORATED SKIN
SKIN
CORE
1 CELL BEYOND DAMAGE

0.5-0.7 INCHES
(12,7-17,8 mm)
TEFLON TAPE
PERFORATED SKIN
SEPTUM
CORE
NON-PERFORATED SKIN
COMPLETELY FILL CELLS BELOW

DAMAGED AREA PLUS ONE CELL
BEYOND DAMAGED AREA
TEFLON TAPE
COMPLETELY FILL CELLS BELOW

DAMAGED AREA PLUS ONE CELL
BEYOND DAMAGED AREA
C1S-358-01
SECTION A-A
Inlet Cowl Inner Barrel Panel Dent Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
54-10-00 Repair No. 30
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
STRUCTURAL IDENTIFICATION - FAN COWL
1. General
Two fan cowl doors make a aerodynamic fairing around the fan section of
the engine. You open the fan cowl doors to get access to the engine fan
section. Some aircraft configurations have strakes on the inboard fan cowl
doors. The fan cowl doors are attached to the pylon with three hinges for
each door. The right fan cowl connects to the left fan cowl with three
latches at the bottom centerline.
The inner and outer skins of the fan cowl doors are graphite/epoxy
composite plies. The closure skins are fiberglass/epoxy composite plies.
The core between the inner skin and outer skin is aluminum. The oil access
door and the pressure relief door are aluminum. The strake is aluminum.
The fan cowl structure is identified in the illustrations (figures) and

tables. The figures and tables do not identify the fasteners. In the
figures, each piece of structure has a number. The same number shows in
the table that follows the figure. The table gives the component
description, gauge (thickness) and material. The warp direction is given
for fabrics and tapes. The full view of the part has a indicator to show
the warp direction.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
OUTER SKIN
ASSEMBLY
HOIST
POINTS
A
STRAKE
INNER SKIN
ASSEMBLY
B
OIL TANK
ACCESS
DOOR
C1S-001-03
Left Fan Cowl Door - Primary Structure

Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1 2A
3
A
B
C1S-420-01

Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 STRAKE 642-3025-501 ALUM. ALLOY EXTRUSION, 2024-0,
QQ-A-200/3, HEAT TREATED TO T-42
AFTER MACHINING
OR
STRAKE 642-3025-503 ALUM ALLOY PLATE, 7050-T7451,
AMS4050
2 ACCESS DOOR, OIL RIVETED ASSEMBLY, REFER TO ITEMS 3
TANK THROUGH 5
2A ACCESS DOOR, OIL CASTING, A357.0-T6
TANK
3 OUTER SKIN 0.050 (1,27) 2024-0, CLAD ALUM SHEET, QQ-A-250/5
4 SHIM 0.063 (1,60) ALUM ALLOY, MIL-S-22499, COMP 1,
TYPE 1, CLASS 2
5 INNER SKIN 0.050 (1,27) 2024-0, CLAD ALUM SHEET, QQ-A-250/5

Table 1
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
A 0°
-45° +45°
UP
AFT 90°
B
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
C
M N M N M
P P
R R
M N M N M
S S
2
V Y
U U AY W W
AY
(642-3003 REV H)
V Y
C1S-425-00
1
A CONFIGURATION A
Left Fan Cowl Door - Closure Plies and Core

Figure 2 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
2 2
AP
Z AT
AA AA AU AU
AR AR
Z AT
AP
0° B
-45° +45° CONFIGURATION A
UP
(642-3003 REV H)
AFT 90°
C1S-426-00
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD

Figure 2 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
AM
AN AN
AW
AV AV
AM AS
AW
AS AS
2
AS AF
AJ AF AG AF
AJ
AJ AJ AJ AJ
AH AH AH AH AH AH
AF AG
AF AF
C
0° CONFIGURATION A
-45° +45°
UP
(642-3003 REV H)
AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
C1S-427-00
WARP DIRECTION FWD

Figure 2 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
A 0°
-45° +45°
UP
AFT 90°
B
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
C
M N M N M
P P
R R
M N M N M
S S
V Y
U U AY W W 1
AY
(642-3003 REV H)
V Y
C1S-428-00
A CONFIGURATION B

Figure 2 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
AP
Z AT
AA AA AU AU
AR AR
Z AT
AP
0° B
-45° +45° CONFIGURATION B
UP
(642-3003 REV H)
AFT 90°
C1S-429-00
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD

Figure 2 (Sheet 5)
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
AM
AN AN
AW
AV AV
AM AS
AW
AS AS
2
AS AF
AJ AF AG AF
AJ
AJ AJ AJ AJ
AH AH AH AH AH AH
AF AG
AF AF
C
0° CONFIGURATION B
-45° +45°
UP
(642-3003 REV H)
AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
C1S-430-00
WARP DIRECTION FWD

Figure 2 (Sheet 6)
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
5 5
4 3
2
(642-3003 REV H)
C1S-431-00
N-N M-M

Figure 2 (Sheet 7)
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
4
6
5
2 3 7 2
2 4
7 3 2
2 7 P-P 2
3
4 2
6 5
R-R 3
4 2
5
(642-3003 REV H)
6
C1S-432-00
3
S-S

Figure 2 (Sheet 8)
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
4 2
3
2 2
7 3 7
U-U 4
2
3
4
2
2 2
7
6
4
7
2
1
3
2 7 5
Z-Z
2
V-V 2
3
2 Y-Y
(642-3003 REV H)
C1S-433-00
2 4 7 W-W 7

Figure 2 (Sheet 9)
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
5
6
2
2
4
AA-AA 4
6 5
2 3 4
6
6 5 5
AH-AH 3
2
4
6
5
2
2 7 AJ-AJ 3
6 5
2 (642-3003 REV H)
C1S-434-00
2 7 AN-AN 3

Figure 2 (Sheet 10)
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
4 4 2
3
3
2
5
6
7
2 3
2
3
5
2
4 2
6
AM-AM 6
5
3
7
5
4
2
(642-3003 REV H)
6
6
C1S-435-00
5
AF-AF AG-AG AP-AP

Figure 2 (Sheet 11)
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
4 6 5
1
2 3
4 1
6 5
3
AY-AY
5 6
2 2
7 4
AR-AR
(642-3003 REV H)
C1S-436-00

Figure 2 (Sheet 12)
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 CORE 0.742 (18,847) 5052 ALUMINUM ALLOY, NON-PER
FORATED 12.0 LB/CU FT, 0.125-INCH
(3,175 MM) CELL, 0.003-INCH
(0,0762 MM) THICK FOIL
(4,7625 MM) CELL, 0.001-INCH
3 OUTER SKIN ASSEMBLY N/A REFER TO FIGURE 4
4 INNER SKIN ASSEMBLY N/A REFER TO FIGURE 3
5 CLOSURE PLY 0.0145 (0,3683) GRAPHITE, 5 HARNESS, PRE-PREG,
WARP DIRECTION OPTIONAL
6 CLOSURE PLY 0.005 (0,127) FIBERGLASS, STYLE 120, PRE-PREG,
7 POTTING COMPOUND N/A EPOXY PASTE COMPOUND

Table 2
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
A B B 0°
135° +45°
C D
90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION
E
C
D
E CUTOUT
F F
UP
D
FWD
CUTOUT
D
H
G G
VIEW WHEN YOU LOOK OUTBOARD
C1S-007-02
Left Fan Cowl Door - Inner Skin Assembly

Figure 3 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
FAN
COWL
2 EDGE
2 2
2 1
3 FAN
4 COWL
EDGE
3
2
1 CORE CORE
SURFACE SURFACE
B-B
A-A
2
5
1
2
1 CORE
SURFACE
CORE
SURFACE
D-D
C1S-008-03
C-C

Figure 3 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
FAN COWL 1
2 5 2 2
EDGE
CORE
F-F SURFACE
CUTOUT
EDGES
CORE
2 SURFACE
FAN COWL 2
E-E EDGE 3
4 CORE
SURFACE
3
1 CUTOUT CORE 2
2
EDGES SURFACE
2 1
G-G
FAN COWL EDGE
C1S-009-03
H-H

Figure 3 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 GRAPHITE TAPE 0.005 (0,13) PRE-PREG, WARP 0°
2 GRAPHITE FABRIC 0.014 (0,36) 5 HARNESS, PRE-PREG, WARP 45°
5 FIBERGLASS FABRIC 0.005 (0,13) STYLE 120, PRE-PREG, WARP
DIRECTION OPTIONAL

Table 11
CFM56-5B
Page 21
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
B C
A A
0°
B C 135° +45°
E
90°
G G
PLY MATERIAL
E F F WARP DIRECTION
CORE
SURFACES
D D G G
UP
D D
G G
FWD
H H
J K
C1S-014-02
VIEW WHEN YOU

LOOK OUTBOARD
J K
Left Fan Cowl Door - Outer Skin Assembly
Figure 4 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 22
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
FAN
COWL
4 2 4 2 2 CORE
EDGE
SURFACE
2 AIR
1 6 AIR PASSAGE
3 PASSAGE
SURFACE SURFACE
2
A-A
1
2
FAN
COWL 4 2
EDGE CORE
SURFACE
3
AIR 2
PASSAGE 4
SURFACE
4
1
2
2 B-B
CORE
SURFACE 3
4
CORE
FAN 2 2
SURFACE
COWL 4 2
2 EDGE C1S-015-03
3
2 1 AIR
PASSAGE
C-C D-D SURFACE

Figure 4 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 23
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
2 2 2
2
5 1 3 4 4
CORE
SURFACE
AIR
PASSAGE E-E
SURFACE
2 CORE
3 2 SURFACE
4
1 2 FAN
COWL
EDGE
AIR PASSAGE
CORE 1 4 SURFACE
2 2
SURFACE 3 2 4 2
F-F
AIR PASSAGE
SURFACE
G-G
2 CORE
2
3 SURFACE
1 4
AIR PASSAGE H-H

C1S-016-03
SURFACE

Figure 4 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 24
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CORE
SURFACE
CORE
SURFACE
2 2
2
2
4
3
4
2 AIR
1 AIR PASSAGE 2 PASSAGE
SURFACE SURFACE
4
3
2
1
FAN COWL FAN COWL

EDGE EDGE
J-J K-K
C1S-017-03

Figure 4 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 25
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 0.005 (0,13) WIRE MESH - EXPANDED COPPER
SCREEN (ECS)
DIRECTION OPTIONAL
6 DOUBLER 0.016 (0,41) TI 6AL-4V SHEET AMS 4911

Table 14
CFM56-5B
Page 26
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
OUTER SKIN
ASSEMBLY
A
PRESSURE
RELIEF DOOR
B
EXIT
DUCT
INNER SKIN
ASSEMBLY
C1S-018-03
Right Fan Cowl Door - Primary Structure

Figure 5 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 27
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
5
4
A 7
B
C1S-419-00

Figure 5 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 28
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C
C1S-421-00

Figure 5 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 29
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 DOOR, PRESSURE RELIEF RIVETED ASSEMBLY, REFER TO ITEMS 2
THROUGH 5
2 INNER SKIN 0.063 (1,60) 2024-0, CLAD ALUM SHEET, QQ-A-250/5
3 SHIM 0.250 (6,35) 7075-T7351, AL ALLOY EXTRUSION, QQ-
A-250/12
4 SHIM 0.250 (6,35) 7075-T7351, AL ALLOY EXTRUSION, QQ-
A-250/12
5 OUTER SKIN 0.032 (0,81) 2024-0, CLAD ALUM SHEET, QQ-A-250/5
6 DEFLECTOR ALUM INVESTMENT CASTING, A356-T61,
AMS4218
7 CORE 0.500 (12,70) INCONEL 625, 6-35 RB-N
8 PLATE 0.063 (1,60) CRES SHEET, TYPE 321, AMS5510
9 FRAME 0.040 (1,02) CRES SHEET, TYPE 321, AMS5510
10 STRAKE 642-3025-502 2024-0, AL ALLOY EXTRUSION, QQ-A-
200/3, HEAT TREATED TO T-42 AFTER
MACHINING
OR
STRAKE 642-3025-504 AL ALLOY PLATE, 7050-T7451, AMS4050

Table 5
CFM56-5B
Page 30
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
A
0°
-45° +45°
UP
B AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
P R P 8
8 P
J J
R L L
P P P
K K
8
1
(642-3004 REV H)
C1S-442-00
A CONFIGURATION B
Right Fan Cowl Door - Closure Plies and Core

Figure 6 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 31
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
0°
-45° +45°
UP
AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
1
AC 3 N
AK AK AM AM
AC N
AD
M 2
Z
Z
AC
AA AA
M
AD AE
AC AB AB
(642-3004 REV H)
1
C1S-443-00
B
CONFIGURATION B AE

Figure 6 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 32
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
0°
-45° +45°
UP
AFT 90°
1 PLY MATERIAL FWD
WARP DIRECTION
AG
AF AF
AG
AP AN AP
W Y
AJ T T
AH AN AH
AJ
8 8
S U 8
S
(642-3004 REV H)
C1S-444-00
U C W
CONFIGURATION B

Figure 6 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 33
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
0°
-45° +45°
E UP
AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
8
P R P P
8
J J
R L L
P P P
K K
8
(642-3004 REV H)
C1S-445-00
1
D
CONFIGURATION A

Figure 6 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 34
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
0°
-45° +45°
UP
AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
AC
N
AK AK AM AM
1
AC N
AD
1 2
3 M
Z
Z
AC
AA AA
M
1
AD AE
AC AB AB
(642-3004 REV H)
C1S-446-00
1
E
CONFIGURATION A AE

Figure 6 (Sheet 5)
CFM56-5B
Page 35
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
0°
-45° +45°
UP
1 AFT 90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION FWD
1
AG
1
AF AF
AG 1
AP AN AP
W Y
AJ T T
AH AN AH
AJ 8 8 8
S U S
(642-3004 REV H)
C1S-447-00
U
F W
CONFIGURATION A

Figure 6 (Sheet 6)
CFM56-5B
Page 36
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
7
1 8 1 5
6
5 7
1 8 1 4
7
6
8
1 1
4 J-J
7
5
6
4 K-K 1
7
5 (642-3004 REV H)
6
C1S-448-00
1 L-L
4

Figure 6 (Sheet 7)
CFM56-5B
Page 37
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
7 5
4
7 4
8 8
1 1
8
4 5
4
5
1
1
1 8 Y-Y
7
(642-3004 REV H)
P-P
C1S-449-00
R-R U-U
Figure 6 (Sheet 8)
CFM56-5B
Page 38
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1 6
6
5 1
5
7 4
6 1
4 4
7 7 7
1 6
5
5
7
1
4
5
AJ-AJ
7
(642-3004 REV H)
W-W
C1S-450-00
6 AN-AN

Figure 6 (Sheet 9)
CFM56-5B
Page 39
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
1 7
5
6
7 7
5
6 6
4 T-T
1
7 1 8 1 5
5 7
1
4 8
7
6 (642-3004 REV H)
1 8
S-S
C1S-451-00
1 1

Figure 6 (Sheet 10)
CFM56-5B
Page 40
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
5 7
1
6
4
7 6
6
7
8 Z-Z 4 1
1 5
8 1
AA-AA
4
5 7
8
6
(642-3004 REV H)
1
1 AB-AB 4
C1S-452-00

Figure 6 (Sheet 11)
CFM56-5B
Page 41
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.

Figure 6 (Sheet 12)
CFM56-5B
Page 42
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 6 (Sheet 13)
CFM56-5B
Page 43
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
7
6
4 8 1 5
AF-AF
7 5
6
4
AH-AH
1
5 8 1
1 8
1
AK-AK 4
1
1 8 8 5 1
AM-AM 4
7 5
6 6
(642-3004 REV H)
C1S-455-00
1
AP-AP 4

Figure 6 (Sheet 14)
CFM56-5B
Page 44
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
(4,7625 MM) CELL, 0.001-INCH
(9,525 MM) CELL, 0.003-INCH
(3,175 MM) CELL, 0.003-INCH
4 OUTER SKIN ASSEMBLY N/A REFER TO FIGURE 8
5 INNER SKIN ASSEMBLY N/A REFER TO FIGURE 7
6 CLOSURE PLY 0.005 (0,127 FIBERGLASS, PRE-PREG, STYLE 120,
7 CLOSURE PLY 0.145 (3,683) GRAPHITE, 5 HARNESS, PRE-PREG,
8 POTTING COMPOUND N/A EPOXY PASTE COMPOUND

Table 6
CFM56-5B
Page 45
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
A B B
0°
135° +45°
D C
90°
PLY MATERIAL
WARP DIRECTION
C
D
B B
E
CUTOUT
E C UP
FWD
C
A A F
A F
C1S-019-03
VIEW WHEN LOOK OUTBOARD

A CUTOUT
Right Fan Cowl Door - Inner Skin Assembly

Figure 7 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 46
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
2
3 FAN COWL 1 4 2 FAN
1 4 4
2 3 OR CUTOUT COWL
EDGE EDGE
CORE SURFACE
CORE B-B
SURFACE
A-A
5
2
4
2 4
1
CORE CORE
SURFACE SURFACE
C1S-020-03
C-C D-D

Figure 7 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 47
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
5
5
4 4
2
1 3
4
3
2
CORE
CORE 1 SURFACE
SURFACE
F-F
E-E
C1S-042-03

Figure 7 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 48
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
5 FIBERGLASS FABRIC 0.005 (0,13) STYLE 120, PRE-PREG

Table 7
CFM56-5B
Page 49
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
C B
A A
C B 0°
D D D 135° +45°
90°
PLY MATERIAL
D WARP DIRECTION
F F G G
H H
UP
D D FWD
J J
CORE
SURFACES
K K
L
C1S-021-03
VIEW WHEN YOU

LOOK OUTBOARD
L
Right Fan Cowl Door - Outer Skin Assembly
Figure 8 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 50
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
FAN COWL
CORE EDGE
1 6 3 4 2 4 2 2
2 SURFACE
2
2
2
4
4
A-A AIR PASSAGE 3
SURFACE 2 AIR PASSAGE
6 SURFACE
1
FAN COWL
EDGE CORE
SURFACE
2
2
4
2
4
AIR PASSAGE
3 SURFACE
2
1 B-B
1 4 4 2
CORE FAN
2 3 2
SURFACE 4 COWL
EDGE
CORE
SURFACE
C1S-022-03
C-C AIR PASSAGE D-D

SURFACE

Figure 8 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 51
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
5 2 4 4
1 3 4 2
2
CORE
SURFACE
AIR PASSAGE E-E

SURFACE
2 4
2 CORE
1 3 2 SURFACE
FAN COWL
EDGE
AIR PASSAGE
CORE 1 3 2 SURFACE
F-F
SURFACE 4
2 4 4 2
G-G AIR PASSAGE

SURFACE
4 2 CORE
1 4 SURFACE
2 3 2 4
FAN COWL
EDGE
H-H
C1S-023-03
AIR PASSAGE
SURFACE

Figure 8 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 52
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CORE 2 4 4 4 2
SURFACE 1 3 2
FAN
COWL
EDGE
AIR PASSAGE J-J

SURFACE
3 2
1 CORE
4 4 4 2
2 SURFACE
AIR PASSAGE K-K

SURFACE
2
4
4
2
4
3
2 AIR PASSAGE
1 SURFACE
CORE
C1S-024-03
SURFACE
L-L

Figure 8 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 53
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 0.005 (0,13) WIRE MESH - EXPANDED COPPER
SCREEN (ECS)
DIRECTION OPTIONAL
6 DOUBLER 0.016 (0,41) TI 6AL-4V SHEET AMS 4911

Table 26
CFM56-5B
Page 54
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
ALLOWABLE DAMAGE - FAN COWL
1. Fan Cowl Door Allowable Damage Zones: (See Figures 101 and 102).
A. Allowable damage zones are:
D1 Areas 5.0-inches (127,0 mm) or less from the hinges and also area
1.75-inches (44,5 mm) or less from the latches of the fan cowl
door.
D2 Areas 3.0-inches (76,2 mm) or less from the access panels and
fittings, core pan down areas and core ramp areas.
D3 2 ply skin thickness areas with full depth core except as noted
near hinges and latches.
D4 Forward, aft, top and bottom edges of the fan cowl door.
D5 Door lands, pandowns, and other areas without the honeycomb core.
D6 2 ply area between 1.75-inches (44,5 mm) and 5.00-inches (127 mm)
above latch fittings edge.
2. Fan Cowl Allowable Damage Limits
A. Allowable damage limits are:
Type of Damage Zone Requirements and Disposition
Abrasion D1, D2, Surface finish and surface resin only.

D3, D4,
D5 There is no damage to the carbon fibers
permitted.
Seal the abrasion with aerodynamic aluminized

speed tape.
Monitor at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles /

4 calendar months (whichever is earliest).
CFM56-5B
Page 101
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Crack D3 3.0-inches (76,2 mm) long maximum.
In all allowable damage limits above, smaller

damages that are enveloped by the allowable
damage size limits may be treated as a single
damage.
10.0-inches (254,0 mm) minimum separation from

other damage.
The cumulative maximum number of damages of any

type, or combination of damage types, per side
for each door is 5.
Seal the crack with aerodynamic aluminized speed

tape.

Repair at 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles

Crack D4, D5 10.0-inches (254 mm) minimum separation from

(Between two other cracks.
adjacent fasteners
in joint of ten or The cumulative maximum number of damages of any
more fasteners) type, or combination of damage types, per side
for each door is 5.
Seal the crack with aerodynamic aluminized speed

tape.


CFM56-5B
Page 102
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Scratch and Gouge D1, D2 3.0-inches (76,2 mm) long maximum.
D3, D4,
D5 0.01-inch (0,254 mm) deep maximum.

damage.
10.0-inches (254 mm) minimum separation from

other damage.

for each door is 5.
Seal the damage with aerodynamic aluminized speed

tape.

Disbond/Delamination D3 3.0-inches (76,2 mm) diameter maximum.

damage.
10-inches (254 mm) minimum separation from other

damage.
Cracks on the surface are not permitted.

for each door is 5.


CFM56-5B
Page 103
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Disbond/Delamination D5 0.20-inch (5,08 mm) maximum length or diameter
parallel to the edge of the panel or pandown.

damage.

damage.

for each door is 5.


Hole D3 3.0-inches (76,2 mm) diameter maximum in inner or

outer skin only. There is no hole permitted
through the two skins (full penetration).

damage.

damage.

for each door is 5.
Seal the hole with aerodynamic aluminized speed

tape.


CFM56-5B
Page 104
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Dent (inner skin) D3 3.0-inches (76,2 mm) diameter maximum.
0.060-inch (1,524 mm) deep maximum.

damage.
The ratio of the diameter to the depth must be

more than 50.
3D (3 times the diameter of the maximum dent

size) from other dents, unless you can group many
dents into one dent and continue in the limits
given above.

other damage that is not a dent.
There is no disbond or delamination permitted

adjacent to the dent.
There are no broken carbon fibers permitted.
CFM56-5B
Page 105
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Dent (outer skin) D3 1.5-inches (38,1 mm) diameter maximum.
0.030-inch (0,762 mm) deep maximum.

damage.
The ratio of the diameter to the depth must be

more than 50.
3D (3 times the diameter of the maximum dent)

from other dents, unless you can group many dents
into one dent and continue in the limits given
above.

other damage that is not a dent.
There is no disbond or delamination permitted

adjacent to the dent.

for each door is 5.
Do the cosmetic repair at 6000 Flight Hours /

4500 Flight Cycles / 20 calendar months
(whichever is earliest) for dents that are more
than permitted by the aero-smoothness
specifications. See A320 CFM56-5B 51-10-00 and
A320 CFM56-5B SRM 54-00-00 - General for Aero-
smoothness requirements.
NOTE: Dents that are greater than 1.5-inches

(38,1 mm) diameter, but no more than 3.0-
inches (76,2 mm) diameter are permitted
with the specifications that follow:
3.0-inches (76,2 mm) diameter maximum.
Dent does not deform the inner skin.
10.0-inches (254 mm) minimum separation

from other damage.
CFM56-5B
Page 106
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Dent (outer skin) D3 The cumulative maximum number of damages of
Cont. any type, or combination of damage types,
per side for each door is 5.
Do a tap test and visual inspection at 750

Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4
calendar months (whichever is earliest). to
make sure the damage is not larger.
Do A320 CFM56-5B SRM 54-20-00 Repair No. 11 no

later than the subsequent 7500 Flight Hours /
5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months
Abrasion D6 Only Surface finish and surface resin only.
There is no damage to the carbon fibers
permitted. Seal the abrasion with aerodynamic
Aluminized Speed tape.
Repair at 750 Flight Hours/750 Flight Cycles/4
calendar months (Whichever is earliest).
Scratch and Gouge D6 Only 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) long maximum.
(Outer/Inner Skin) 0.01-inch (0,254 mm) deep maximum.
damage.
5 times the length of the longest damage is the
minimum separation from other damages.
The cumulative maximum number of damages of
any type, or combination of damage types, per
side for each door is 5.
Seal the damage with aerodynamic Aluminized Speed
tape.
CFM56-5B
Page 107
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Disbond/Delamination D6 Only 1.0 inch (25,4 mm) long maximum.
(Outer/Inner Skin) In all allowable damage limits above, smaller
damage.
5 times the diameter of the largest damage is the
minimum separation from other damage.
Cracks on the surface are not permitted.
Hole D6 Only 1.0-inch (25,4 mm) diameter maximum in inner or

(Outer/Inner Skin) outer Skin only.
damage.
There are no hole permitted through the two
skins.
minimum separation from other damage.
Seal the hole with aerodynamic Aluminized Speed
tape.
Dent D6 Only 1.0-inches (25,4 mm) diameter maximum.

(Outer/Inner Skin) 0.050-inch (1,27 mm) deep.
damage.
The ratio of the diameter to the depth must be 50
or greater.
minimum separation from other dents, unless you
can group many dents into one dent and continue
within the, limits given.
calendar months (whichever comes first). For
dents that are more than permitted by aero-
smoothness specifications; see A320 CFM56-5B SRM
51-10-00 and A320 CFM56-5B SRM 54-00-00 General
for aero-smoothness requirements.
CFM56-5B
Page 108
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ZONE D1 5 INCH (127 mm)

TYPICAL FOR
ZONE D1
A A
ZONE D3
ZONE D2 3 INCH (76,2 mm)
TYPICAL FOR
ZONE D2
ZONE D4
ZONE D5
ZONE D5
STAY OUT
ZONE
ZONE D4 ZONE D2
STAY OUT
ZONE
SECTION A-A
TYPICAL FOR ZONE D4
FWD & AFT EDGES
ZONE D2
ZONE D5
B
ZONE D5
ZONE D6
VIEW WHEN YOU

LOOK OUTBOARD
C1S-425-03
1.75 inch
(44,5 MM)
B ZONE D1
LH Fan Cowl Allowable Damage Zones

Figure 101
CFM56-5B
Page 109
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
5 INCH (127 mm)

TYPICAL FOR ZONE D1
ZONE D1
ZONE D3
ZONE D4 ZONE D2
ZONE D4
ZONE D5
STAY OUT ZONE
3 INCH (76,2 mm) ZONE D5

TYPICAL FOR STAY OUT
ZONE D2 ZONE
A A
ZONE D4
ZONE D2 SECTION A-A

TYPICAL FOR
FWD & AFT EDGES
STAY OUT ZONE

ZONE D5

EDGE OF
2 PLY ZONE
C1S-442-03
1.75 inch VIEW WHEN YOU

(44,5 MM) ZONE D1 LOOK OUTBOARD
RH Fan Cowl Allowable Damage Zones
Figure 102
CFM56-5B
Page 110
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ZONE D3
ZONE D2
REINFORCED PLY
STEPDOWN
ZONE D5
ZONE D1 ZONE D1
ZONE D2
ZONE D6
OR
ZONE D3
ZONE D1
9.08 INCH (230,63 mm)

TYPICAL
SEAL REF
ONLY
ZONE D5
c1s-577-00
D4
B-B
LH Fan Damage Allowable Damage Zone

Figure 103
CFM56-5B
Page 111
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 112
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
FAN COWL REPAIR INDEX

Repair General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Less Than 0.010 in. (0,25 mm) Deep . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 3 Edge Erosion Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 4 To Be Provided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repair No. 5 To Be Provided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repair No. 6 Expanded Copper Screen (ECS) Repair . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 7 Carbon Composite Skin Damage More Than 0.010-Inch (0.25
mm) Deep - Wet Layup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 8 Leading and Trailing Edge Damage Repair . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 9 Replacement of Aerodynamic Sealant around the Edge Pro-
tectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 10 Dent Repair - Cosmetic - Inner and Outer F
an Cowl Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 11 Skin and Core Repair Repair - Two-Ply Areas - Wet Layup
Procedure (Damage That Does Not Go 201
Through the Fan Cowl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repair No. 12 Skin and Core Repair - Prepreg Procedure
(Damage that Goes Through the Fan Cowl) . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 13 Left Hand Fan Cowl - 6 O’Clock Frame - Gearbox
Interference 201
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 1
1. General
section.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 2
LESS THAN 0.010 IN. (0,25 MM) DEEP
1. General

that is less than 0.010 in. (0,25 mm) deep. The depth of the damage does
not include the thickness of the primer and paint layers. The damaged area
is filled with adhesive and made smooth with abrasive paper. No carbon
fabric is used for this repair.

NECESSARY.
Use 150-grit or finer abrasive paper.
REPAIRED. IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED THEN THE PART CAN BE WEAKER
THAN THE INITIAL PART.
B. Remove the paint layers around the damaged area with 150-grit abrasive
paper. Do not damage or remove carbon fibers.
NOTE: The first primer layer is yellow and the outer primer layer is
grey.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
D. Mix the correct quantity of EA934NA adhesive for the repair area. (See
NOTE: EA956 or EA9321 can be used as an alternative to EA934NA

adhesive. See General Repair Procedures for instructions to mix
and cure.
E. Apply the adhesive mixture to the repair area with a knife or spatula.
Put a sufficient quantity of adhesive to fill the repair area and be
above the skin surface.
F. Cure the adhesive with a heat lamp at 180°-200°F (83°-93°C) for 60

minutes.
G. Complete the repair.
(1) Make the repair smooth with 150-, 320-grit abrasive paper. The
cured adhesive must make a continuous surface with the skin around
the repair.
CHEMICALS.
H. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Alternative Adhesives:
Catalyst Part B
Catalyst Part B
Lamp, Heat 180°-250°F (82°-121°C) Commercially Available
Paper, Abrasive 150-, 320-grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
99 percent pure
or
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 3
EDGE EROSION DAMAGE
1. General
This procedure gives instructions for repair of erosion damage to

composite panel edges. You cannot have damage more than 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
long and 0.02 in. (0.5 mm) deep for this repair.
A. Prepare the surface.

NECESSARY.
(1) Remove the paint layers around the damage and make a smooth tapered
edge on the layers. Cut loose fibers. Do not sand the carbon fabric
and damage good fibers.
becomes dry.
B. Apply adhesive filler and cure the repair.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
(1) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA934NA adhesive to fill the damaged

area. (See General Repair Procedures).
NOTE: EA956 adhesive with chopped glass fibers can be used as an

alternative to EA934NA.
(2) Put adhesive in the damaged area with a spatula. Put Teflon tape
above the uncured adhesive to make a smooth surface.
(3) Cure the adhesive at 200°F (93°C) for 60 minutes with a heat lamp.
C. Complete the repair.
(1) Remove the Teflon tape. Make the surface of the adhesive smooth
with 150- to 180-grit abrasive paper. Do not damage or remove
carbon fibers.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Alternate Adhesive
Catalyst Part B
Chopped Fiberglass Type 181/120
(82°-121°C)
Paper, Abrasive 150- to 180-grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Plastic
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (50.8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 6
EXPANDED COPPER SCREEN (ECS) REPAIR
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to repair damage to the expanded copper

screen (ECS). ECS gives lightning protection to the fan cowl. This repair
can be used in combination with other types of repairs.
2. Repair Instructions (See Figure 201).

NECESSARY.
(1) Remove the finish to find the ECS material. Use 150-, 320-grit
abrasive paper. Remove at least 2 in. (50,8 mm) of finish on all
sides of the repair. The repair ECS material must make an overlap
of at least 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) to the initial ECS material.
CAUTION: DO NOT PUT MASKING TAPE ON BARE ECS. WHEN THE MASKING TAPE IS
REMOVED IT WILL REMOVE THE ECS WITH IT.
becomes dry.
B. Prepare the ECS repair piece.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., otherof U.S.
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
(1) Cut a piece of ECS repair material of sufficient size to make an

overlap of the repair area. You must make an overlap of at least 2
in. (50,8 mm) on all sides. Cut the corners of the repair piece at
45 degrees to a length of 1.0 in. (25,4 mm). Form and prefit to the
repair area.
NOTE: The ECS repair piece must fully touch the original skin
with a 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) overlap minimum.
(2) Flush the repair piece with solvent to remove all unwanted
materials. Allow it to dry in the air for 30 minutes.
C. Install the repair piece.
(1) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA9390 adhesive to attach the repair

piece and fill the repair area. (See 54-02-00, General Repair
Procedures).
(2) Apply a 0.020 inch thick layer of EA9390 adhesive on the outer
surface where the ECS repair piece will touch.
(3) Install the ECS repair piece and attach it tightly. Make sure that
the ECS repair piece fully touches the original ECS with a 2.0 in.
(50,8 mm) overlap minimum.
NOTE: Do not install a sanding ply above or below the ECS repair
piece.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
(4) Bag and cure the repair. (See 54-02-00, General Repair
Procedures).
D. Apply the sanding adhesive.
(1) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA956 adhesive. (See 54-02-00,

NOTE: You can use EA9390 as an equivalent adhesive.
(2) Apply EA956 adhesive 0.060-0.080 in. (1,52-2,03 mm) thick on the
outer surface of the cured ECS material. Adhesive that is not used
will be applied as a sanding layer before paint is applied.
(3) Cure the adhesive. (See 54-02-00, General Repair Procedures).

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: DO NOT FULLY REMOVE THE ADHESIVE WITH ABRASIVE PAPER. YOU CAN
DAMAGE THE ECS MATERIAL.
(4) Use 150-, 320-grit abrasive paper to make a smooth repair surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
E. Apply primer and top layers. (See Repair No. 1).

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Catalyst Part B
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Silicon Carbide
Tape, Teflon 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) Wide Commercially Available
Expanded copper CU 040 CX V0KWM1
screen (ECS) Astroseal Products
Astroseal Products Mfg Co.
85 Airport Industrial Park Road
P.O. Box 377
Chester, CT 06412
Phone: (860) 526-8605
www.astrosealproducts.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
VACUUM
BAG BREATHER
CLOTH
HEAT
BLANKET SILICON
RUBBER
SHEET
BLEEDER
CLOTH
NONPOROUS
POROUS PARTING
PARTING FILM
FILM
VACUUM
PROBE
BAG ADHESIVE
SEALANT
ORIGINAL TEMPERATURE 2.00 IN. (50.8 mm)
STRUCTURE PROBE (4) ECS OVERLAP ALL AROUND
ECS REPAIR ON TOP OF ORIGINAL STRUCTURE
NOTE: BAG SAME AS ABOVE ADHESIVE
2.00 IN. (50.8 mm)

OVERLAP ECS REPAIR PLIES
(AS APPLICABLE)
ECS REPAIR ON TOP OF REPAIR PLIES

C1S-096-00
ECS Repair Piece
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 7
CARBON COMPOSITE SKIN DAMAGE MORE THAN 0.010 IN. (0,25 MM) DEEP
- WET LAYUP PROCEDURE
1. General
A. This procedure gives the instructions for the repair of damage to the
skin of the fan cowl that is more than 0.010 in. (0,25 mm) deep. Use
this repair to remove the damaged skin and replace the damaged skin
with the filler and doubler plies with the wet layup procedure. In all
allowable damage limits below, smaller damages that are enveloped by
the allowable damage size limits may be treated as a single damage.
B. This repair applies only to the two-ply areas of the fan cowl with
these specifications:
(1) The damage cutout diameter must be < 6.0 in. (152,4 mm), or the
damage cutout must be < 4.0 in. (101,6 mm) by 4.0 in. (101,6 mm).
(2) The damage must be > 5.0 in. (127,00 mm) from a core pandown,
hinge, latch, panel edge/cutout or existing repair.
(3) Three repairs maximum are permitted in each fan cowl.
C. This repair applies only to the two-ply areas of the fan cowl with
these specifications: Zone D6 only.
(1) The damage cutout diameter can be < 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) in the two
ply areas. Or the damage area can be < 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) by 1.0 in.
(25,4 mm).
(2) The damage must be > 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) from a core pandown, hinge,
latch, or other repair.
(3) Three repairs maximum are permitted in each side of each door of
the fan cowl.
D. The manufacturer recommends that you do the repair in a maintenance

area where you can control the atmosphere.
E. Refer to Goodrich Aftermarket Technical Services for aid if the damage

is more than permitted.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
2. Repair Instructions for the Fan Cowl (Main Body, Full-Depth Core)

NECESSARY.
A. Examine the fan cowl damage. Do one of the inspections that follow:
(1) Do an ultrasonic inspection around the damaged area to find the

dimension of the damaged, disbonded, and delaminated skin. See NTM
51-40-00.
(2) Do a tap test inspection around the damaged area to find the
dimension of the damaged, disbonded, and delaminated skin. Refer
to Section 54-01-00 of this manual. See NTM 51-10-03.
B. Remove the damaged skin. (Refer to Figure 201.)
CAUTION: A CUTTING TOOL SLOWER THAN 18,000-23,000 RPM, CAN CAUSE

DISBONDS AND DELAMINATIONS.
(1) Remove all loose particles, cracks, disbonds, and delaminations.

Use a cutting tool at 18,000-23,000 rpm. Make the cutout a regular
geometric shape (circle, oval, rectangle, etc.).
(2) Make a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius on all corners.
(3) Make a 45-degree chamfer on the sides of the cutout that open to
the external surface.
(4) Make the edges of the cutout smooth. Use 80-grit or finer abrasive
paper.
C. Examine the fan cowl to make sure you remove all of the damaged,
disbonded, and delaminated skin. Do one of the following inspections:
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection around the damaged area. See NTM 51-40-
00.
(2) Do a tap test inspection around the damaged area. Refer to Section
54-01-00 of this manual. See NTM 51-10-03.
D. Find how many plies are in the damaged skin.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Measure the thickness of the damaged skin.
NOTE: The dimensions given below do not include primer or finish

paint that can be on the sample pieces of skin.
(a) The 2-ply outer skin is approximately 0.025 in. (0,635 mm)
thick.
(b) The 2-ply inner skin is approximately 0.020 in. (0,508 mm)
thick.
or
(2) Visually count the plies.
(a) Use the abrasive paper to taper sand the edge of a piece of
damaged skin.
(b) Count the plies in the skin. 2-ply skin is two graphite plies
and a lightning protection mesh.
E. Give protection to the area around the repair area.
(1) Apply 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) wide Teflon tape to make a protective band
around the repair area.
FABRIC TYPE REPAIR AREA SIZE REPAIR PLY QUANTITY

5-harness 2.75 IN. (69,85 mm) 3
Plain Weave 3.25 IN. (82,55 mm) 6
Table 201
F. Use the abrasive paper to remove the surface finish and ECS ply from
the repair area that is in the mask band area. The ECS ply is on the
outer skin only.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
G. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
H. Dry the repair area. Refer to Section 54-00-01 of this manual.
I. Cut the barrier, filler, repair, and sanding plies.
NOTE: To prevent damaged edges, first cut the plies approximately 0.5
in (12,7 mm) larger than the final size shown in this step. You
can cut the plies to final size after you soak them in the
adhesive and immediately before you install them.
(1) Cut the barrier ply.
NOTE: The barrier ply seals the honeycomb core area, keeps the
adhesive out of the core during the procedures that follow,
and prevents corrosion between the core and the graphite
skin.
(a) Cut a piece of fiberglass material that is sufficient to make

a cover above the core and keep the adhesive out of the core
during the procedures that follow.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) Cut the filler plies.
(a) Cut a sufficient quantity of filler plies until they make a

continuous surface with the adjacent skin. Make the warp
direction of the filler plies 0 degrees. Refer to Structural
Identification, Section 54-20-00 of this manual to find the
ply warp direction.
(3) Cut the repair plies. If you use 5-harness fabric, cut three repair
plies. If you use the plain weave fabric, cut six repair plies.
(a) Cut the No. 1. 5-harness fabric repair ply.
1 Cut the No. 1. 5-harness repair ply until it makes a 1.0

in. (25,4 mm) overlap on all sides of the skin cutout and
filler plies. Adjust as needed near Latch Fitting. See
Figure 201. Make the warp direction 0 degrees. Refer to
Structural Identification, Section 54-20-00 of this
manual to find the ply warp direction.
2 Cut the corners of the repair ply to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
minimum radius.
(b) Cut the No. 1. plain weave fabric repair ply.
1 Cut the No. 1. plain weave repair ply until it makes a

0.50 in. (12,7 mm) overlap on all sides of the skin cutout
and filler plies. Adjust as needed near Latch Fitting.
See Figure 201. Make the warp direction 0 degrees. Refer
to Structural Identification, Section 54-20-00 of this
manual to find the ply warp direction.
minimum radius.
(c) Cut the No. 2. 5-harness repair plies and the 5-harness repair
plies that follow.
1 Cut the No. 2. 5-harness repair plies, and the 5-harness

repair plies that follow, until each repair ply has a 0.75
in. (19,01 mm) overlap from the edges of the before repair
ply. Adjust as needed near Latch Fitting. See Figure 201.
Make the warp direction 0 degrees.
2 Cut the corners of the 5-harness repair plies to a 0.5 in.

(12,7 mm) minimum radius.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(d) Cut the No. 2 plain-weave fabric repair plies and the plain-
weave repair plies that follow.
1 Cut the No. 2. plain-weave repair plies, and the plain-

weave repair plies that follow, until each repair ply has
a 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) overlap from the edges of the before
repair ply. Make the warp direction 0 degrees.
2 Cut the corners of the plain-weave repair plies to a 0.5

in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius.
(4) On outer skin only make an ECS repair piece, refer to SRM 54-20-00
Repair No. 6.
(5) Cut the sanding ply (for outer skin only).
(a) Cut a piece of fiberglass material until it has a 0.25 in.

(6,35 mm) overlap from the edges of the last repair ply.
(b) Cut the corners of the sanding ply to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
minimum radius.
J. Soak the barrier, filler, repair, and sanding plies with the adhesive.
(1) Put the plies on isolated sheets of non-porous parting film.
(2) Apply the adhesive to one side of each ply. Refer to the
instructions from the manufacturer of the adhesive.
(3) Put the non-porous parting film on each ply.
(4) Use a roller to soak the plies with the adhesive.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
K. Install the barrier ply.
(1) Apply a thin layer of adhesive to the top of the core. Refer to the
instructions from the manufacturer of the adhesive.
(2) Remove the barrier ply from the bottom parting film. Put the
barrier ply into position in the cutout on the top of the core.
(3) Make the ply smooth with a roller. Make sure there are no wrinkles
in the ply.
(4) Remove the top parting film from the barrier ply.
L. Install the filler plies in the cutout.
(1) Apply a thin layer of adhesive to the top of the barrier ply and
the inner surfaces of the cutout. Refer to the instructions from
the manufacturer of the adhesive.
(2) Remove the first filler ply from the bottom parting film and put
the filler ply in position in the cutout.
in the ply.
(4) Remove the top parting film.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(5) Do again the steps (2) through (4) to install all of the filler
plies.
M. Install the repair plies.
(1) Install the No. 1 repair ply.
(a) Remove the ply from the bottom parting film and put the ply on
the center of the skin cutout and above the filler ply. Make
sure the 5-harness fabric ply has an overlap of 1.0 in. (25,4
mm) from all edges of the cutout. Adjust as needed near Latch
Fitting. See Figure 201. Make sure the plain-weave fabric
repair ply has an overlap of 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) from all edges
of the cutout.
(b) Make the ply smooth with a roller. Make sure there are no
wrinkles in the ply.
(c) Remove the top parting film.
(2) Install the remaining repair plies.
the center of the No. 1 ply. Make sure the No. 2., and each
subsequent 5-harness repair ply has an overlap of 0.75 in.
(19,1 mm) from all edges of the ply that is before. Adjust as
needed near Latch Fitting. See Figure 201. Make sure the No.
2., and each subsequent, plain weave repair ply has an overlap
of 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) from all edges of the ply that is
before.
(b) Make the repair ply smooth with a roller. Make sure there are
no wrinkles in the ply.
(d) Do steps (a), (b), and (c) again to install all of the repair
plies.
N. Install the sanding ply (outer skin only).
(1) Remove the ply from the bottom parting film and put the ply in
position on the repair plies. Make sure the ply has an overlap of
0.25 in. (6,35 mm) from all edges of the last repair ply.
in the ply.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
O. On outer skin Only install an ECS Repair piece, refer to SRM 54-20-00
Repair No. 6.
P. Bag and cure the repair. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this manual.
Q. Use 180-320 grit Silicon Carbide abrasive paper and make the surface
and the edges of the repair smooth. Do not go into the fibers of the
sanding ply with the abrasive paper.
R. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
S. Examine the repair to make sure there are no disbonds or delaminations.
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection of the repair area. See NTM 51-40-00.
or
(2) Do a tap test inspection of the repair area. Refer to Section

T. Repair the ECS ply (outer skin only). Refer to Repair No. 6, Section
54-20-00 of this manual.
U. Repair the surface finish. Refer to Repair No. 1, Section 54-20-00 of

this manual.
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Blanket, Heat 0-250 Deg F (0-121 V61426
Deg C) Atacs Products, Inc.
20x20 inch (508x508 850 South Cambridge Street
mm) Seattle, WA 98108-4748
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Lamp, Heat Explosion Proof Commercially Available
(alternate)
Probe, Temperature 0-250 Degrees F Commercially Available
(0-121 Degrees C)
Pump, Vacuum 0-30 Commercially Available
Inches-of-Mercury
(0-0,100 MPa)
Abrasive Paper Silicon Carbide Commercially Available
150 Grit
320 Grit
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Catalyst Part B
(alternate)
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Fabric, Graphite, Style AH370-5H V2B975
5-Harness, Dry Hexcel Corp
1913 N King St
Seguin, TX 78155-2197
Phone: (830) 379-1580
Fax: (830) 379-9544
Customer Service: 1-866-601-5430
www.hexcel.com/contact/sales
office
Fabric, Graphite, Style AGP193-P V2B975
Plain Weave Hexcel Corp
Film, Bagging 3 mm Nylon V0F451
Film, Parting Porous V0F451
Film, Parting Non-Porous V0F451
Film, Peel Ply B-100 V0F451
Tape Double Sided Commercially Available
Tape, Teflon 2-Inch Wide Commercially Available
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

TYPICAL FOR
ZONE D1
A A
ZONE D3
TYPICAL FOR
ZONE D2
ZONE D4
ZONE D5
STAY OUT
ZONE
ZONE D5
STAY OUT
INNER ZONE
SKIN ZONE D2
ZONE D5 ZONE D4
ZONE D4 VIEW WHEN YOU

LOOK OUTBOARD
OUTER ZONE D2
ZONE D5
SKIN
SECTION A-A B
TYPICAL FOR
FWD & AFT EDGES 5 INCH
ZONE D6 ZONE D5 (127 mm)
C1S-425-04
1.75 INCH
(44,5 mm)
B ZONE D1
LH Fan Cowl Damage Zones - Inner Skin Shown Outer Skin Opposite
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ZONE D3
ZONE D2
REINFORCED PLY
STEPDOWN
ZONE D5
ZONE D2 ZONE D2
ZONE D2
OUTER
SKIN
ZONE D6
OR
ZONE D3
ZONE D1
INNER
SKIN
9.08 INCH
(230,63 mm)
TYPICAL
SEAL REF
ONLY
ZONE D5
c1s-577-01
D4
B-B
Fan Cowl Damage Zones

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
5 INCH (127 mm)

TYPICAL FOR ZONE D1
ZONE D1
ZONE D3
ZONE D4 ZONE D2
ZONE D4
ZONE D5
STAY OUT ZONE INNER
3 INCH SKIN
ZONE D5
(76,2 mm)
ZONE D2 ZONE
A A
ZONE D4 OUTER
SKIN
ZONE D2 SECTION A-A
TYPICAL FOR
FWD & AFT EDGES
VIEW WHEN YOU
LOOK OUTBOARD
STAY OUT ZONE
ZONE D5
5 INCH
ZONE D6 (127 mm)
EDGE OF
2 PLY ZONE
C1S-442-04
1.75 INCH
(44,5 mm) ZONE D1
RH Fan Cowl Damage Zones - Inner Skin Shown Outer Skin Opposite
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DAMAGED SKIN
INNER OR OUTER REMOVED
SKIN 45°
INNER OR OUTER CORE

SKIN
C1S-458-01
Typical Damage More than 0.010 In. (0,25 mm) Deep

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
UNDAMAGED CORE
FILLER PLIES AS REQUIRED
REPAIR PLY NO. 1
REPAIR PLY NO. 2
REPAIR PLY NO. 3
FIBERGLASS
SANDING PLY
0.50 in. (12,7 mm)

CORNER RADIUS
TYPICAL (Minimum)
FIBERGLASS PLY 5-HARNESS REPAIR PLY

OVERLAP 0.25 in. (6,35 mm) NO. 1 OVERLAP: 1.0 in. (25,4 mm)
5-HARNESS REPAIR PLY
NO. 2 AND NO. 4 OVERLAP: REPAIR PLY NO. 1
0.75 in. (19,05 mm)
5-HARNESS REPAIR PLY REPAIR PLY NO. 2
NO. 2 AND NO. 3 OVERLAP: REPAIR PLY NO. 3
0.75 in. (19,05 mm)
FIBERGLASS SANDING PLY
NO. 1 OVERLAP:
1.0 in. (25,4 mm)
C1S-459-01
FIBERGLASS BARRIER PLY (If used)

GRAPHITE FILLER PLY
NOTE: MAY NEED ADJUSTMENT IF LESS THAN 2.5 in.
FROM LATCH/HINGE, i.e. 1.0/0.25/0.25 OR 0.5/0.5/0.5 OVERLAP ON SIDE ADJACENT TO LATCH/HINGE.
Install the Repair Materials (5-Harness Fabric)

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
UNDAMAGED CORE
FILLER PLIES AS
REQUIRED
REPAIR PLY NO. 1
REPAIR PLY NO. 2
REPAIR PLY NO. 3
REPAIR PLY NO. 4
REPAIR PLY NO. 5

REPAIR PLY NO. 6
FIBERGLASS
SANDING PLY
0.50 in. (12,7 mm)
CORNER RADIUS
TYPICAL (MINIMUM)
REPAIR PLY NO. 6

REPAIR PLY NO. 5
FIBERGLASS SANDING PLAIN WEAVE REPAIR PLY
REPAIR PLY NO. 4
PLY OVERLAP: 0.25 in. OVERLAP: 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) TYP.
REPAIR PLY NO. 3
(6,35 mm)
REPAIR PLY NO. 2
REPAIR PLY NO. 1
PLAIN WEAVE REPAIR PLY
OVERLAP: 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) FIBERGLASS
TYP. SANDING PLY
FILLER PLY
C1S-460-01
FIBERGLASS BARRIER PLY

(If used)
NOTE: DO NOT USE PLAIN WEAVE FOR DAMAGE IN ZONE D6
Install the Repair Materials (Plain-Weave Fabric)

CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REDUCE AS SHOWN LESS THAN

2.5 INCHES (63,5 MM) FROM LATCH FITTING
ZONE D3 EDGE REFERENCE ONLY TRANSITION ZONE

SEE FIGURE 2
NO. 1 PLY, 1.0 INCHES (25,4mm)

EXCEPT AS NOTED
EXCEPT AS NOTED
EXCEPT AS NOTED
NO. 1 PLY, 0.75 INCHES (19,1 mm) MINIMUM
IF LESS THAN 2.5 INCHES (63,5mm) ZONE D6 LOWER EDGE
FROM LATCH FITTING REFERENCE
NO. 2 PLY, 3 PLY 0.5 INCHES (12,7mm) MINIMUM EACH
REDUCE AS NEEDED IF LESS THAN 2.5 INCHES
(63,5 mm) FROM LATCH FITTING
U
P
FWD
STA
198.740
C1S-579-00
Damage Separation Requirements

CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 8
LEADING AND TRAILING EDGE DAMAGE REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair is limited to repair of damage to the lands of the leading

and trailing edges.
B. No damage is allowed in Zone D1 of the fan cowl. Refer to Figure 101 in

the Allowable Damage section.
C. The damage must be less than 6.0 in. (152 mm) long (circumferential
direction) and 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) or less wide (forward and aft
direction). The damage must be 6.0 in. (152 mm) or more from any other
edge repair or damage.
D. Do this repair in a clean room with the temperature controlled at 60-77

deg F (20-25 deg C) and humidity controlled at 50% or less.
E. Refer to Repair No. 6 to repair damage to the Expanded Copper Screen

(ECS) on the external skin.
F. Refer to Repair No. 1 to repair damage to the paint.
G. It is recommended that you do the ‘Edge Erosion: Protective Ceramic

Coating Repair’ after you do this repair. Refer to 54-02-04 in this
manual.

NECESSARY.
A. Clean up the damaged area. (Refer to Figures 201 through 204)
(1) Remove a section of the door land edge protector which extends
approximately 5 in. (127 mm) beyond the completed repair. Make
allowance for at least two attach rivets on each side of the
removed section which are not affected by the repair.
(2) Mark cut lines on the edge protector to permit a

0.34 in. (8,63 mm) edge margin for the attach rivets at the end of
the edge protector sections which you will not removed
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: USE A THIN PIECE OF STAINLESS STEEL OR ALUMINUM UNDER THE

EDGE PROTECTOR WHEN YOU CUT IT. THIS WILL PROTECT THE DOOR
LAND FROM DAMAGE BY THE CUTTING TOOLS.
(3) Cut the edge protector at the cut lines. Remove the cut section
from the door land. Use a thin piece of stainless steel or aluminum
under the edge protector when you cut it to protect the door land
from damage by the cutting tools.
(4) Make a template for rivet location and edge trim of repair.
(a) Make a template from a piece of 0.04 inch (1,02 mm) 2024-T3
aluminum sheet. The template must extend a distance of two
fasteners beyond the cut edges of the edge protector.
(b) Align the template with the edge of the door land. Use a 0.125
in. (3,175 mm) diameter drill to match drill holes in the
template through the edge protector holes in the door land.
(5) Cut out the damaged area of the skin to remove all loose pieces,
cracks, and delamination. Make a 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius
on the inner corners of the cutout. Taper the sides of the cutout
45 degrees. Make the edges of the cutout smooth with 80-grit or
finer abrasive paper.
(6) Mask the repair area with 2.0 in. (51,0 mm) wide Teflon tape.
(a) For 5-harness fabric, mask an area that is 5.0 in. (127.0 mm)
from the edge of the cutout.
(b) For plain weave fabric, mask an area that is 5.75 in. (146.0
mm) from the edge of the cutout.
CAUTION: DO NOT SAND INTO THE EXISTING CARBON FABRIC SKIN.
(7) Sand the masked area to remove the outer expanded copper screen
(ECS) ply. Use 150-grit abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
B. Prepare the repair materials.
(1) Make a backup plate from 0.090-0.120 in. (2,29-3,05 mm) thick,
2024-T3 aluminum to match the contour of the inner land and ramp
area. Make the backup plate so that it extends a minimum of 2.0 in.
(50,8mm) beyond the repair area.
(2) Make filler, repair, and sanding ply templates from thin sheet
metal of non-porous release fabric to use as tools when you cut the
plys. Make the templates match the shape and size of the plys.
(3) Put nonporous parting film between the backup plate and the inner
land and ramp of the door. Hold the backup plate and parting film
in position with clamps or Teflon tape. Refer to Figure 205.
(4) Cut the plies.
NOTE: To prevent frayed edges, cut the plies approximately 0.5 in

(12,7 mm) larger than the final size. You will cut them to
final size after you soak them with adhesive and before you
install them.
(a) Cut the filler plies.
1 Make the filler plies the same shape as the cutout. Make
the filler plies larger than the cutout to permit you to
remove excess fabric after it is soaked with adhesive.
Cut a sufficient quantity of plies to make the height of
the repair level with the inner and outer surfaces of the
door land. Refer to Figure 201 to find the quantity and
type of replies that are required.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(b) Cut the repair plies.
1 Repair Ply 1 - Cut the repair plies to the shape of the

repair. Make the repair plies larger than the cutout to
permit you to remove excess fabric after you soak the
plies with adhesive.
a For 5 harness fabric, cut the first repair ply so

that it will make a 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) overlap on all
sides of the cutout. Cut the corners of the ply to a
minimum radius of 0.5 in. (12,7 mm).
b For plain weave fabric, cut the first repair ply so

that it will make a 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) overlap on all
sides of the cutout. Cut the corners of the first
repair ply to a minimum radius of 0.5 in. (12,7 mm).
2 Remaining Repair Plies - Cut the remaining repair plies

to the shape of the repair. Make the remaining repair
plies larger than the cutout to permit you to remove
excess fabric after you soak the plies with adhesive.
a For 5 harness fabric, cut the second repair ply, and

all plies after, so that they will make a 0.75 in.
(19,1 mm) overlap on all sides of the ply that is
before. Cut the corners of the ply to a minimum
radius of 1.0 in. (25,4 mm).
b For plain weave fabric, cut the second repair ply,

and all plies after, so that they will make a 0.50
in. (12,7 mm) overlap on all sides of the ply that is
before. Cut the corners of each remaining repair ply
to a minimum radius of 0.5 in. (12,7 mm).
(c) Cut the sanding ply.
1 Cut the fiberglass sanding ply so that it will make a 0.25

in. (6,4 mm) overlap on all sides of the last carbon
fabric repair ply. Make the sanding ply larger than the
cutout to permit you to remove excess fabric after you
soak the ply with adhesive.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(5) Soak the repair plies and sanding ply with adhesive.
(a) Mix the EA9390 adhesive. (See Repair General)
(b) Put the repair or sanding ply on a piece of nonporous parting

film.
(c) Apply adhesive to the ply.
(d) Cover the ply with nonporous parting film.
(e) Use a roller to fully soak the adhesive into the ply.
(6) Cut filler plies from the adhesive soaked fabric.
(a) Mark the outline of the templates on the nonporous parting

film that covers each ply. Refer to the Structure
Identification section for the correct ply direction.
(b) Mark the ply direction on the nonporous parting film that
covers the ply.
(c) Use a sharp tool to cut the ply.
(7) Install the plies in the repair area.
(a) Filler plies.
1 Remove the nonporous parting film from one side of the

filler ply.
2 Put the ply inside the cutout with the remaining piece of
nonporous parting film facing up.
3 Use a roller or similar tool to remove the wrinkles from

the ply.
4 Remove the nonporous parting film from the ply.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
5 Install the remaining filler plies with this procedure

until they are level with the surface of the door land.
(b) Repair plies.

repair ply.

the ply.
5 Install the remaining repair plies with this procedure.
(c) Sanding ply.

sanding ply.

the ply.
(8) Cure the repair (Refer to Figure 205).
(a) Make a vacuum bag around the repair area. Refer to the General
Repair section 54-02-00 and Figure 205.
(b) Apply 20 inches-of-mercury (67.5 kPa) vacuum inside the bag.
(c) Use the heat blanket to cure the fill plies at 190-210 deg F
(88-99 deg C) for 220 minutes. The cure time does not begin
until the temperature is 190 deg F (88 deg C). Do not increase
the heat more than 2-8 deg F (1-4 deg C) per minute.
(d) Let the repair cool to less than 150 deg F (66 deg C) before
you remove the heat blanket, vacuum bag materials, and backup
plate.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(e) Remove the heat blanket, vacuum bag materials, and backup
plate.
C. Prepare the repair surface for installation of the edge protector.
(1) Taper the edge of the repair plies with 150 to 320-grit abrasive
paper. Use a 4 to 1 taper ratio. Refer to Figures 203 and 204.
(2) Sand the air-wetted (exterior) surface of the repair to a feather

edge that is ready to paint. Use 150 to 320-grit abrasive paper. Do
not damage the ECS ply.
becomes dry.
D. Repair the Expanded Copper Screen. Refer to Repair No. 6.
E. Install the edge protector on the door land (Refer to Figure 206)
(1) Put the template on the under surface of the door land and install
temporary fasteners at each end. Clamp the center part of the
template to the door land to remove all gaps.
(2) Drill rivet holes through the repair section (repair ply overlap
area only) with a 0.125 in. (3,175 mm) drill.
(a) Drill one hole at each end of the template for an attach rivet
located 0.34 in. (8,63 mm) from each end of the replacement
edge protector.
(b) Drill another attach rivet hole 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) away from
the end rivet holes.
(c) Countersink the holes in the outer surface of the fan cowl
door to accept CSR902B-4-3 rivet heads.
(d) Install temporary fasteners in the rivet holes.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(3) Trim the door edge to match the template.
(4) Remove the template.
(5) Cut a replacement edge protector of the required length from

extrusion stock S700E0917. Butt-splice the edge protector joints
to provide 0.01-0.06 in. (0,25 to 1,52 mm) distance from the
adjacent edge protector sections.
(6) Put the replacement edge protector on the fan cowl door and hold it
in position.
(7) Drill 0.125 in. (3,175 mm) rivet holes through the door land and
the edge protector as follows.
(a) Drill rivet holes at each end of the replacement edge

protector, keep a 0.34 in. (8,63 mm) edge margin.
(b) Drill another rivet hole 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) away from each end
rivet.
(c) Countersink the rivet holes in the edge protector and the door
land for double flush rivets.
(8) Remove the replacement edge protector.
(9) Remove sharp edges and burrs from the replacement edge protector.
(10) Install the replacement edge protector.
CHEMICALS.
(a) Apply PR1995 Class B sealant to the mating surfaces of the

repair and the replacement edge protector.
(b) Fill any spaces under the ends of the existing edge protectors
with PR1995 Class B sealant.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(c) Put the replacement edge protector on the door land and wet
install the CSR902B-4-3 rivets with PR1995 Class B sealant.
Use squeeze installation method.
(d) Shave the heads of the rivets so they are level with the
surfaces of the fan cowl and the edge protector.
(e) Remove unwanted sealant.
F. Finish the repair surface.
(1) Apply paint primer and topcoat. Refer to Repair No. 1, Surface
Finish Restoration.

Blanket, Heat 0-250 Deg F V61426
(0-121 Deg C) Atacs Products, Inc.
10x10 in. (245x245 mm) 850 South Cambridge Street
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Drill 0.125 in. (3,175 mm) Commercially Available
Construction 11X11 Hexcel Corporation
11711 Dublin Blvd
Dublin, CA 94568-2832
Phone: (203) 696-0666
Fax: (203) 316-5139
www.hexcel.com
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.

or Commercially Available
Plain Weave Dry Carbon
Fabric 3K-70-PW
Probe, Temperature 0-250 Deg F Commercially Available
(0-121 Deg C)
Pump, Vacuum 0-20 Inches-of-Mercury Commercially Available
(0-67,5 MPa)
Gauge, Vacuum 0-20 Inches-of-Mercury Commercially Available
(0-67,5 MPa)
Hose, Vacuum 1/8 in. Diameter Commercially Available
Roller 2 in. (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
Diameter, Steel or
Plastic
Paper, Abrasive 80, 150, 320-Grit Commercially Available
Silicon Carbide
Rivet CSR902B-4-3 V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Rubber Sheet 0.062-0.125 in. Commercially Available
(1,57-3,18 mm) Thick,
Silicone
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (50,8 mm) Wide Commercially Available
Template 0.040 2024-T3 Commercially Available
Inch Aluminum Sheet
Edge Protector S700E0917, Aluminum Refer to Formed/Extruded
Extrusion 2024-0 Per QQ-A-200/3 Sections 54-02-00
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Sealant, PR1995 V83574
Primerless PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(1) ECS
(2) CARBON FABRIC (0 DEG)
(3) CARBON TAPE (0 DEG)
(11) FIBERGLASS FABRIC
C1S-377-00
Typical Fan Cowl Edge (Edge Protector Not Shown)

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
APPROX 2.0 in.

(50,8 mm)
1.0 in.
(25,4 mm) EXISTING EDGE
0.34 in. PROTECTOR
(8,64mm)
REPLACEMENT
EDGE PROTECTOR
EDGE PROTECTOR
FASTENER LOCATION
(Typical)
0.34 in.
(8,64 mm) FIBERGLASS
APPROX 1.0 in.
SANDING PLY
5.0 in. (127,0 mm) (25,4 mm)
MINIMUM
APPROX
2.0 in.
(50,8 mm)
0.5 in. (12,7 mm)

MINIMUM
CUTOUT/
C1S-378-00
FILLER
PLIES
Typical Edge Protector Layout

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
Typical 5-Harness Fabric Repair Layout

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Typical Plain Weave Fabric Repair Layout

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
VACUUM HOSE
VACUUM BAG
BREATHER PLIES
HEAT BLANKET
SILICONE RUBBER SHEET
NONPOROUS PARTING FILM
BLEEDER CLOTH PLIES
POROUS PARTING FILM
TEMPERATURE
PROBE
BAG SEALANT
BACK-UP
BAG SEALANT TEFLON TAPE CORE
PLATE
C1S-381-00
Cure the Repair

Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
ECS REPAIR PLY OVERLAP

CSR902B-4-3 WITH EXISTING ECS
RIVET 2 in. (50,8 mm) MINIMUM
0.40 in.
(10,16 mm)
EDGE
PROTECTOR
C1S-382-00
Edge Protector Installation (Ply Thickness and Taper Not to Scale)

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 9
REPLACEMENT OF AERODYNAMIC SEALANT AROUND THE EDGE PROTECTORS
1. General
This repair procedure gives instructions for the removal and replacement
of aerodynamic sealant at the joint between the edge protector and the fan
cowl, and the butt joints between segments of the edge protectors. (Refer
to Figures 201 and 202, and Table 201)
A. Remove all loose or damaged sealant.
(1) Use a plastic or wood tool to remove all sealant, which is damaged,
or which has separated from surfaces of the joint. Use care to
prevent damage to the composite material on the fan cowl.
(2) Use aluminum-oxide, abrasive paper 320-grit, or finer, to make the

surfaces of the joint rough where the primer and the new sealant
will be applied.
CAUTION: SURFACES MUST BE MADE FULLY CLEAN AND DRY OR THE PRIMER AND
SEALANT WILL NOT BOND CORRECTLY.
(3) Clean the repair area and remove old sealant residue with solvent
and a nylon abrasive pad. Remove all dirt, oil, and unwanted
material. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3. Apply primer for DC93-006
NOTE: IF PR1995 SEALANT (PRIMER NOT REQUIRED) IS USED, GO TO PARAGRAPH 5

(APPLY SEALANT, ALTERNATE).
A. Mask the repair area to protect the fan cowl from primer overspray.
Allow approximately 0.25 inch (6,35 mm) beyond both edges of each
joint.
CHEMICALS.
B. Mix the PR-1200 primer according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Apply a thin layer of PR-1200 primer to the joint. Do not put primer on
adjacent surfaces of undamaged sealant where the new sealant will
touch.
D. Allow the primer to dry at room temperature, until the finish has
reached a dull appearance (about 60-90 minutes) before you apply the
new sealant.
4. Apply Sealant
CHEMICALS.
A. Mix 10 parts-by-weight of DC93-006 sealant with 1 part-by-weight of

DC93-006-1 catalyst in a plastic container. Use a plastic spatula to
mix the sealant. Refer to Table 201 for alternate sealant.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Cover the plastic container, which contains the sealant to prevent
contamination of the mixture. Store it in a cool place until used.
NOTE: The useful life of the DC93-006-1 mixture is about 60

minutes at 77 degreesF (25 degreesC). DC93-006-6 has a
useful life of about 4 hours. Heat accelerates both the
gel time and the cure time of the adhesive mixture.
B. Apply DC93-006-1 sealant mixture to the joints in the area between the
masking tape with a plastic spatula or an injection flow gun.
(1) Use a plastic spatula to make the surface of the sealant level in
line with, but not above the adjacent surface, and not more than
0.010 inch (0,254 mm) below the adjacent surface. (See Figure 202)
(2) Remove masking material before surface skin forms on the sealant.
C. Let the sealant cure at room temperature, 72 - 82 degrees F

(22 – 28 degrees C), for 10 hours (DC93-006-6 cures for 48 hours) at a
relative humidity of 50 percent or more.
D. Heat accelerate is permitted as follows: Let the product sit for 2 hour
at ambient condition [67- 77 degreesF (19 – 25 degrees C)], then 2
hours at 190 degreesF (88 degrees C). After 2 hours check for
hardness. Minimum required hardness is 30 (DC93-006-6 has a minimum
hardness of 35). If necessary, extend time to reach minimum hardness.
This sealant is a condensation-cured silicone and requires humidity of
at least 50 percent.
5. Apply Sealant, PR1995 Alternate (Primerless)
A. Mask off the area to receive the sealant to protect the fan cowl.
CHEMICALS.
B. Mix PR1995 Class B sealant Part A: Part B, 1 part-by-weight (part A)

with 10 parts by weight (part B) in a plastic container. Use a plastic
spatula to mix the sealant.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(1) Cover the plastic container to prevent contamination of the

mixture. Store it in a cool place until used.
NOTE: The useful life of the PR-1995 Class B sealant mixture is

about 2 hours at 77 degreesF (25 degrees C).
C. Apply the PR1995 Class B sealant to a level in line with, but not above
the adjacent surface, and not more than 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) below the
adjacent surface. (See Figure 201)
(1) Use a plastic spatula to make the surface of the sealant level in
line with, but not above the adjacent surface, and not more than
0.010-inch (0,254 mm) below the adjacent surface.
(See Figure 202)
(2) Remove masking material before surface skin forms on the sealant.
D. Allow sealant to cure at room temperature, 67- 77 degrees F

(19 – 25 degrees C), for 24 hours.
E. Heat accelerate is permitted as follows: Let the product sit for 2

hours at ambient condition 67- 77 degrees F (19 – 25 degrees C), then 2
hours at 190 degrees F (88 degrees C). After 2 hours check for
hardness. Minimum required hardness is 30. If necessary, extend cure
time to meet minimum hardness. This sealant is a condensation-cured
silicone, and requires humidity of at least 50 percent.
NOTE: Equivalent alternates can be used for the items given in Table 201.

Abrasive Pad Nylon Commercially Available
Injection Flow Gun Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Sealant DC93-006 (2 part) V5D028
Sealant, Alternate DC93-006 (2 part) V5D028
Sealant, Alternate PR-1995 Class B V83574
(Primer not required) PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
(2 Part) DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
COWL DOOR
(RH)
B
B
COWL DOOR
(LH)
C1S-324-00
Application of Sealant for Aerodynamic Smoothness

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
FAN COWL
SEALANT DOOR
EDGE PROTECTOR FAN COWL DOOR

B-B
EDGE PROTECTOR
BUTT JOINT
EDGE PROTECTOR
AERODYNAMIC
SMOOTHING
BETWEEN EDGE
PROTECTOR AND
FAN COWL DOOR
AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHING
AT THE BUTT JOINT WETTED SURFACE OF
FAN COWL DOOR
C1S-325-00
Application of Sealant for Aerodynamic Smoothness

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 10
DENT REPAIR - COSMETIC - INNER AND OUTER FAN COWL SKIN
1. General
This procedure gives instructions for the cosmetic/non-structural repair

of dents in Zone D3 (Refer to the Allowable Damage section) of the inner
or outer skin of the fan cowl door.
2. Examine the Dents to Find if this Repair is Applicable
A. Do not do this repair if the dent is not smooth or has sharp edges,
gouges, or cracks.
B. Do not do this repair if you find loose or missing fasteners in the

dented area.
C. Do not do this repair if there is damage to the carbon fibers or ECS

(expanded copper screen) in the dented area.
D. Do not do this repair if the dent is closer than 3.0 in. (76,2 mm) to
hinges, latches, keepers, access doors, pressure relief doors, strake
attachment points, exhaust ports, or hold-open rod attachment points.
E. Do not do this repair if there are disbonds or delamination in the

dented area.
F. Do not do this repair if the dent in the outer skin is larger than 1.5
in. (38,1 mm). Refer to Figure 601.
G. Do not do this repair if the A/Y ratio of the dent in the outer skin is
less than 50. Refer to Figure 601.
H. Do not do this repair if the dent in the inner skin is larger than 3.0
in. (76,2 mm). Refer to Figure 601.
I. Do not do this repair if the A/Y ratio of the dent in the inner skin is
less than 50. Refer to Figure 601.
J. Do not do this repair if the dent is not separated by 3D (three times

the dent diameter) from other dents, or you are not able to put
together multiple dents into one dent and still be in the limits
described above.
K. For each fan cowl, there is no limit to the number of dents that you can
repair with this procedure.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGE THE ECS (EXPANDED COPPER SCREEN) PLY THAT IS ON
THE OUTER SKIN.
A. Use 120-150 grit abrasive paper to remove the surface finish in the
dented area and 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) all around the dented area. Do not
damage the ECS (expanded copper screen) ply that is on the outer skin.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
CHEMICALS.
C. Fill the dent with EA9394 adhesive to approximately 0.050-0.100 in.

(1,27-2,54 mm) above the adjacent surface. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
D. Cure the adhesive. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
E. Use 120-320 grit abrasive paper to make the filled area smooth with the
adjacent surface.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
G. Use Teflon tape to make a mask band that is 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) from the
edge of the filled area.
H. Install a fiberglass sanding over the repair area.
(1) Use Teflon tape to make a mask band that is 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) from
the edge of the filled area.
(2) Cut a piece of 181 fiberglass that is larger than the area that is
in the masked area.
(3) Put the 181 fiberglass on a piece of nonporous parting film.
(4) Apply EA9390 adhesive to the 181 fiberglass. Refer to the

(5) Put a piece of nonporous parting film over the 181 fiberglass.
(6) Use a roller to fully soak the 181 fiberglass with adhesive.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(7) Apply a layer of EA9390 adhesive to the repair area.
(8) Remove the top piece of nonporous parting film from the 181
fiberglass.
(9) Put the 181 fiberglass over the repair area with the remaining
nonporous parting film on top.
(10) Use a roller to remove wrinkles and trapped air.
(11) Remove the remaining nonporous parting film from the 181
fiberglass.
(12) Cure the repair (Refer to Figure 204).
(a) Make a vacuum bag around the repair area. Refer to the General
Repair section, 54-02-00, Paragraph 4, and Figure 204.
(b) Apply 20 inches-of-mercury (67.5 kPa) vacuum inside the bag.
(c) Use the heat blanket to cure the fill plies at 190-210 deg F
(88-99 deg C) for 220 minutes. The cure time does not begin
until the temperature is 190 deg F (88 deg C). Do not increase
the heat more than 2-8 deg F (1-4 deg C) per minute. Keep the
vacuum at 20 inches-of-mercury (67.5 kPa).
(d) Let the repair cool to less than 150 deg F (66 deg C) before
you remove the heat blanket and vacuum bag materials.
(e) Remove the heat blanket and vacuum bag materials.
CAUTION: DO NOT TAPER OR BREAK THE GRAPHITE FIBERS FROM THE TOP
SURFACE OF THE OUTER SKIN PLIES.
(f) Use 120-320 grit abrasive paper to make the repair area smooth
with the adjacent surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(g) Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the
I. Finish the repair surface.
(1) Apply paint primer and topcoat. Refer to Repair No. 1, Surface
Finish Restoration.

Blanket, Heat 0-250 Deg F (0-121 Deg C) V61426
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Fabric, Type 181 Commercially Available
Fiberglass
Richmond Aircraft
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Probe, 0-250 Deg F (0-121 Deg C) Commercially Available
Temperature
(0-67,5 MPa)
Gauge, Vacuum 0-20 Inches-of-Mercury Commercially Available
(0-67,5 MPa)
Roller 2 in. (50,8 mm) Diameter, Commercially Available
Steel or Plastic
Silicon Carbide
Rubber Sheet 0.062-0.125 in. Commercially Available
(1,57-3,18 mm) Thick,
Silicone
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (50,8 mm) Wide Commercially Available
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Henkel Corporation
Adhesive, Epoxy EA956 with 5% PBW V33564
(alternate for Microballoons Henkel Corporation
EA9394)
Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Y = THE DEPTH OF THE

DENT WHERE THE
WIDTH A IS MEASURED
THE CONTOUR
BEFORE THE
DENT OCCURRED
A = WIDTH OF MINOR
AXIS OF DENT
CFS-474-00
Dent Dimensions
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 11
SKIN AND CORE REPAIR - TWO-PLY AREAS - WET LAYUP PROCEDURE
(DAMAGE THAT DOES NOT GO THROUGH BOTH INNER AND OUTER SKINS)
1. General
A. This procedure gives the instructions for the repair of damage to one
skin and the core of the fan cowl door. The instructions are for damage
that does not go through the fan cowl door. Use this repair to remove
the damaged skin and replace the damaged skin with the filler and
doubler plies with the wet layup procedure. If the core is damaged,
fill the core with the potting compound or replace the core with a core
plug. In all allowable damage limits below, smaller damages that are
enveloped by the allowable damage size limits may be treated as a
single damage.
B. This repair applies only to the two-ply areas of the fan cowl with
these specifications:
(1) The damage cutout diameter can be < 6.0 in. (152,4 mm) in the two-
ply areas. Or the damage area can be < 4.0 in. (101,6 mm) by 4.0
in. (101,6 mm).
hinge, latch, or other repair.
C. This repair applies only to the two-ply areas of the fan cowl with
these specifications: FOR ZONE D6 ONLY.
(1) The damage cutout diameter can be < 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) in the two
ply areas. Or the damage area can be < 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) X < 1.0
in. (25,4 mm).
(2) The damage must be > 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) from a core pandown, hinge,
latch, or other repair.
(3) Three repairs maximum are permitted in each side of each door of
the fan cowl.
D. The manufacturer recommends that you do the repair in a maintenance

E. Refer to Goodrich Aftermarket Technical Services for disposition if the

damage is more than permitted.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
2. Repair Instructions for the Fan Cowl (Main Body, Inner or Outer Skin and
Full-Depth Core)

NECESSARY.
A. Examine the fan cowl damage. Do one of the inspections that follow:
(1) Do an ultrasonic inspection around the damaged area to find the

dimension of the damaged, disbonded, and delaminated skin. See NTM
51-40-00.
OR
dimension of the damaged, disbonded, and delaminated skin. Refer
to Section 54-01-00 of this manual. See NTM 51-10-03.
CAUTION: A CUTTING TOOL WITH SPEED SLOWER THAN 18,000-23,000 RPM, CAN
CAUSE DISBONDS AND DELAMINATIONS.
(1) Remove all loose particles, cracks, and delamination. Use a

cutting tool at 18,000-23,000 rpm. Make the cutout a geometric
shape (circle, oval, rectangle, etc.).
the external surface. See Figure 201, (Sheet 4 and 5).
paper.
C. Prepare the damaged core.
(1) If the diameter of the damaged core is < 1.0 in. (25,4 mm), remove
loose core material, and straighten the remaining damaged core
cells.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) If the diameter of the damaged core is more than 1.0 in. (25,4 mm),
remove the damaged core. See Figure 201, (Sheet 5).
(a) Use a hole saw or equivalent to cut the core to the graphite
tape back skin. Do not cause damage to the fibers of the back
skin. See Figure 201 (Sheet 5).
(b) Use the abrasive paper to remove the pieces of adhesive from
the back skin that are above the surface of the surrounding
layer of adhesive. Do not remove the adhesive that is not
above the surface of the surrounding layer of adhesive. Do not
cause damage to the fibers of the back skin.
D. Examine the fan cowl to make sure you remove all of the damaged,
disbonded, and delaminated skin. Do one of the following inspections:
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection around the damaged area. See NTM 51-40-
00.
OR
E. Verify how many plies are in the damaged skin.

thick.
(b) The 2-ply inner skin is approximately 0.020 in. (0,508 mm)
thick.
or
damaged skin.
(b) Count the plies in the skin. Outer 2-ply skin is two graphite
plies and a lightining protection mesh.
F. Protect the area around the repair area.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
FABRIC TYPE REPAIR AREA SIZE REPAIR PLY QUANTITY

5-harness 2.75 in. (69,85 mm) 3
Plain Weave 3.25 IN. (82,55 mm) 6
Table 201
(2) If a repair ply will overlap a fastener hole protect any open
fastener holes with pegs or make a template to relocate hole after
repair is complete.
G. Use the abrasive paper to remove the surface finish and ECS ply from
the repair area that is in the mask band area. The ECS ply is on the
outer skin only.
CHEMICALS.
H. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
I. Dry the repair area. Refer to Section 54-00-01 of this manual.
J. Repair the core damage.
(1) Repair the core damage that is 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) or less in
diameter.
(a) Make the potting compound.

CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

DISCARD CHEMICALS.
1 Mix the EA9321 adhesive. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of

this manual.
or
2 Mix the EA9390 adhesive with 20% by weight phenoset

micropheres. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this manual.
(b) Fill the core cavity with the potting compound. Tap lightly on
the adjacent structure to make sure the cavity is filled and
there are no open areas or voids. See Figure 201 (Sheet 7).
(c) Cure the potting compound. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this

manual.
(2) Repair the core damage that is more than 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) in
diameter.
(a) Make the core plug. See Figure 201 (Sheet 8)
1 Find the type of material and density of the core. Refer

to Structural Identification, Section 54-20-00 of this
manual.
2 Cut the core plug to the correct dimension and shape. Make
sure that the ribbon direction aligns with the core when
you install the core plug.
(b) Make the bond line corrosion barrier.
1 Cut a piece of 120 style fiberglass to agree with the

dimension and shape of the cutout.
or

CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

DISCARD CHEMICALS.
2 Mix the EA9390 adhesive and 20% by weight chopped

fiberglass fibers. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this
manual.
(c) Make the core splice adhesive.

DISCARD CHEMICALS.
1 Mix the EA9321 adhesive. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of

this manual.
or
2 Mix the EA9390 adhesive and 20% by weight phenoset

micropheres. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this manual.
(d) Apply the bond line corrosion barrier.
1 Put the piece of 120 style fiberglass fabric on the back

skin at the bottom of the cutout.
or

CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

DISCARD CHEMICALS.
2 Apply a layer of the bond line corrosion barrier to the

bottom of the core plug.
CHEMICALS.
(e) Apply a layer of the core splice adhesive to the sides of the
core plug and the sides of the cutout.
(f) Put the core plug into the cutout. Make sure the ribbon
direction aligns with the core. See Figure 201 (Sheet 8).
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(g) Fill open areas between the core and the core plug with the
core splice adhesive.
(h) Cure the repair. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this manual.
(i) Let the repair area cool to 140 deg F (60 deg C) or less.
(j) Use the abrasive paper to remove the core splice adhesive from
the skin cutout and surface of the fan cowl.
K. Cut the barrier, filler, repair, and sanding plies. See Figure 201
(Sheet 9)
NOTE: To prevent damaged edges, first cut the plies approximately 0.5
in (12,7 mm) larger than the final size shown in this step. You
can cut the plies to final size after you soak them in the
adhesive and immediately you install them.
(1) Cut the barrier ply.
NOTE: The barrier ply seals the honeycomb core area, keeps the
adhesive out of the core during the procedures that follow,
and prevents corrosion between the core and the graphite
skin.
(a) Cut a piece of fiberglass material that is sufficient to make

a cover above the core and keep the adhesive out of the core
during the procedures that follow.
(2) Cut the filler plies.
(a) Cut a sufficient quantity of filler plies until they make a

continuous surface with the adjacent skin. Make the warp
direction of the filler plies 0 degrees. Refer to Structural
Identification, Section 54-20-00 of this manual to find the
ply warp direction.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Cut the repair plies. If you use 5-harness fabric in figure 201
(Method 1), cut three repair plies. If you use the plain weave
fabric in figure 201 (Method 2), cut six repair plies.
(a) Cut the No. 1. 5-harness fabric repair ply.
1 Cut the No. 1. 5-harness repair ply until it makes a 1.0

in. (25,4 mm) overlap on all sides of the skin cutout and
filler plies. Adjust as needed near latch fitting. See
Figure 201, Sheet 9. Make the warp direction 0 degrees.
Refer to Structural Identification, Section 54-20-00 of
this manual to find the ply warp direction.
minimum radius.
(b) Cut the No. 1. plain weave fabric repair ply.
1 Cut the No. 1. plain weave repair ply until it makes a

0.50 in. (12,7 mm) overlap on all sides of the skin cutout
and filler plies. Make the warp direction 0 degrees.
Refer to Structural Identification, Section 54-20-00 of
this manual to find the ply warp direction.
minimum radius.
(c) Cut the No. 2. and subsequent 5-harness repair plies.
1 Cut the No. 2. and subsequent 5-harness repair plies

until each repair ply has a 0.75 in. (19,01 mm) overlap
from the edges of the repair ply before. Adjust as needed
near Latch Fitting. See Figure 201 Sheet 9. Make the warp
direction 0 degrees.
2 Cut the corners of the repair plies to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
minimum radius.
(d) Cut the No. 2 and subsequent plain weave fabric repair plies.
1 Cut the No. 2. and subsequent plain weave repair plies

until each repair ply has a 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) overlap
from the edges of the repair ply before. Make the warp
direction 0 degrees.
2 Cut the corners of the repair plies to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
minimum radius.
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(4) On outer Skin Only make an ECS Repair Piece, refer to SRM 54-20-00
Repair.
(5) Cut the sanding ply (for outer skin only).
(a) Cut a piece of fiberglass material until it has a 0.25 in.

(6,35 mm) overlap from the edges of the last repair ply.
(b) Cut the corners of the sanding ply to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
minimum radius.
L. Soak the barrier, filler, repair, and sanding plies with the adhesive.
(1) Mix the EA9390 adhesive. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this manual.
(2) Put the plies on isolated sheets of non-porous parting film.
(3) Apply the adhesive to one side of each ply.
(4) Put the non-porous parting film on each ply.
(5) Use a roller to soak the plies with the adhesive.
M. Install the barrier ply.
(1) Apply a thin layer of EA9390 or EA9396 adhesive to the top of the
core.
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) Remove the barrier ply from the bottom parting film. Put the
barrier ply into position in the cutout on the top of the core.
in the ply.
(4) Remove the top parting film from the barrier ply.
N. Install the filler plies in the cutout.
(1) Apply a thin layer of EA9390 adhesive to the top of the barrier ply
and the inner surfaces of the cutout.
(2) Remove the first filler ply from the bottom parting film and put
the filler ply in position in the cutout.
in the ply.
(5) Repeat steps (2) through (4) if you must install more filler plies.
O. Install the repair plies.
(1) Install the No. 1 repair ply.
the center of the skin cutout and above the filler ply. Make
sure the 5-harness fabric ply has an overlap of 1.0 in. (25,4
mm) from all edges of the cutout. Adjust as needed near Latch
Fitting. See Figure 201 Sheet 8. Make sure the plain weave
fabric repair ply has an overlap of 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) from all
edges of the cutout.
(b) Make the ply smooth with a roller. Make sure there are no
wrinkles in the ply.
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(2) Install the remaining repair plies.
the center of the No. 1 ply. Adjust as needed near Latch
Fitting. See Figure 201 Sheet 8. Make sure the No. 2., and
each subsequent 5-harness repair ply has an overlap of 0.75
in. (19,1 mm) from all edges of the ply that is before. Make
sure the No. 2., and each subsequent, plain weave repair ply
has an overlap of 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) from all edges of the ply
that is before.
(b) Make the repair ply smooth with a roller. Make sure there are
no wrinkles in the ply.
(d) Do steps (a), (b), and (c) again until you install all of the
repair plies.
P. On outer skin only make ECS repair piece, refer to SRM 54-20-00 Repair
No. 6.
Q. Install the sanding ply (outer skin only).
(1) Remove the ply from the bottom parting film and put the ply in
position on the repair plies. Make sure the ply has an overlap of
0.25 in. (6,35 mm) from all edges of the last repair ply.
in the ply.
R. Bag and cure the repair. Refer to Section 54-02-00 of this manual.
S. Use 180-320 grit Silicon Carbide abrasive paper and make the surface
and the edges of the repair smooth. Do not go into the fibers of the
sanding ply with the abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
T. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
U. Examine the repair to make sure there are no disbonds or delaminations.
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection of the repair area.
or

V. Repair the ECS ply (outer skin only). Refer to Repair No. 6, Section
W. Repair the surface finish. Refer to Repair No. 1, Section 54-20-00 of

this manual.
NOTE: You can use equivalent alternatives for the items shown in Table
201.

20x20 inch 850 South Cambridge Street
(508x508 mm) Seattle, WA 98108-4748
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
(alternate)
Probe, 0-250 Degrees F Commercially Available
Temperature (0-121 Degrees C)
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

(0-0,100 MPa)
150 Grit
320 Grit
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Catalyst Part B
(alternate)
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Core Refer to Structural Commercially Available
Identification in Section
Fabric, Graphite, Style AGP193-P V52331
Plain Weave Hexcel Corporation
11711 Dublin Blvd
Dublin, CA 94568-2832
Alt. Style AH370-5H Phone: (203) 696-0666
Fabric, Graphite, Fax: (203) 316-5139
5-Harness Dry www.hexcel.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Microballoons Phenoset Micropheres Johnson Supply Company
90 micron (5 mil) 50 South “E” Street
Pensacola, Florida 32502
Phone: 1-800-476-7103
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

TYPICAL FOR
ZONE D1
A A
ZONE D3
TYPICAL FOR
ZONE D2
ZONE D4
ZONE D5
STAY OUT
ZONE
ZONE D5
STAY OUT
INNER ZONE
SKIN ZONE D2
ZONE D5 ZONE D4
ZONE D4 VIEW WHEN YOU

LOOK OUTBOARD
OUTER ZONE D2
ZONE D5
SKIN
SECTION A-A B
TYPICAL FOR
FWD & AFT EDGES 5 INCH
ZONE D6 ZONE D5 (127 mm)
C1S-425-04
1.75 INCH
(44,5 mm)
B ZONE D1
Fan Cowl Damage Zones - Inner Skin Shown Outer Skin Opposite
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ZONE D3
ZONE D2
REINFORCED PLY
STEPDOWN
ZONE D5
ZONE D2 ZONE D2
ZONE D2
OUTER
SKIN
ZONE D6
OR
ZONE D3
ZONE D1
INNER
SKIN
9.08 INCH
(230,63 mm)
TYPICAL
SEAL REF
ONLY
ZONE D5
c1s-577-01
D4
B-B
Fan Cowl Damage Zones

CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
5 INCH (127 mm)

TYPICAL FOR ZONE D1
ZONE D1
ZONE D3
ZONE D4 ZONE D2
ZONE D4
ZONE D5
STAY OUT ZONE INNER
3 INCH SKIN
ZONE D5
(76,2 mm)
ZONE D2 ZONE
A A
ZONE D4 OUTER
SKIN
ZONE D2 SECTION A-A
TYPICAL FOR
FWD & AFT EDGES
VIEW WHEN YOU
LOOK OUTBOARD
STAY OUT ZONE
ZONE D5
5 INCH
ZONE D6 (127 mm)
EDGE OF
2 PLY ZONE
C1S-442-04
1.75 INCH
(44,5 mm) ZONE D1
Fan Cowl Damage Zones - Inner Skin Shown Outer Skin Opposite
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
PARTIAL PENETRATION
DAMAGE
ECS PLY
ON OUTER SKIN
INNER OR OUTER
SKIN
GRAPHITE
FABRIC PLY
CORE
INNER OR OUTER
SKIN
C1S-398-02
Typical Damage Not Through both Inner and Outer Skin

CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
DAMAGED SKIN
REMOVED
INNER OR OUTER SKIN

45° GRAPHITE TAPE
INNER OR OUTER SKIN CORE
C1S-399-02
Remove the Damaged Skin

CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DAMAGED CORE
REMOVED
INNER OR OUTER SKIN

ECS PLY ON OUTER SKIN
INNER OR OUTER SKIN

CORE
DO NOT REMOVE
MATERIAL FROM
GRAPHITE TAPE
C1S-578-00
The Damaged area with the Skin and Core Removed -

Damage More Than 1.0 In. (25,4 MM) in Diameter
CFM56-5B
Page 221
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
POTTING COMPOUND ECS PLY

INNER OR OUTER INJECTION ON OUTER
SKIN SKIN
INNER OR OUTER CORE

SKIN DO NOT REMOVE
MATERIAL FROM
GRAPHITE TAPE
C1S-401-02
Damaged Core Filled with Potting Compound -

Damage 1.0 In. (25,4 MM) or Less in Diameter
CFM56-5B
Page 222
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ECS PLY
INNER OR OUTER ON OUTER
CORE PLUG SKIN
SKIN
CORE ADHESIVE
INNER OR OUTER BOND LINE CORE

SKIN CORROSION
BARRIER
C1S-402-02
Install the Core Plug -

Damage More Than 1.0 In. (25,4 MM) in Diameter
CFM56-5B
Page 223
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
CORE PLUG FOR DAMAGE

GREATER THAN 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) DIA.
UNDER REPAIR PLIES
FILLER PLIES AS REQUIRED
REPAIR PLY NO. 1
REPAIR PLY NO. 2

REPAIR PLY NO. 3
A A
FIBERGLASS
SANDING PLY
0.50 in. (12,7 mm)

CORNER RADIUS
TYPICAL (Minimum)
ECS OUTER
SKIN
FIBERGLASS PLY 5-HARNESS REPAIR PLY
OVERLAP 0.25 in. (6,35 mm) NO. 1 OVERLAP: 1.0 in. (25,4 mm)
5-HARNESS REPAIR PLY NO. 2 AND NO. 4 OVERLAP: REPAIR PLY NO. 1
NO. 2 AND NO. 3 OVERLAP: 0.75 in. (19,05 mm)
0.75 in. (19,05 mm) REPAIR PLY NO. 2
5-HARNESS REPAIR PLY REPAIR PLY NO. 3
NO. 1 OVERLAP: ECS OUTER SKIN
1.0 in. (25,4 mm) FIBERGLASS SANDING
ADJUST AS NEED NEAR PLY
LATCH INNER SKIN ONLY
C1S-456-01
FIBERGLASS BARRIER PLY (If used)

REPLACEMENT CORE PLUG
GRAPHITE FILLER PLY
VIEW A-A
Install the Repair Materials (5-Harness Fabric)
Method 1
CFM56-5B
Page 224
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CORE PLUG FOR DAMAGE

GREATER THAN 1 in. (25,4 mm) DIA.
FILLER PLIES AS
REQUIRED
REPAIR PLY NO. 1

REPAIR PLY NO. 2
REPAIR PLY NO. 3
REPAIR PLY NO. 4

B B
REPAIR PLY NO. 5

REPAIR PLY NO. 6
FIBERGLASS
SANDING PLY
0.50 in. (12,7 mm)
CORNER RADIUS
TYPICAL (MINIMUM)
REPAIR PLY NO. 6

FIBERGLASS SANDING PLAIN WEAVE REPAIR PLY REPAIR PLY NO. 5
PLY OVERLAP: 0.25 in. OVERLAP: 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) TYP.
REPAIR PLY NO. 4
(6,35 mm) REPAIR PLY NO. 3
REPAIR PLY NO. 2
REPAIR PLY NO. 1
PLAIN WEAVE REPAIR PLY
OVERLAP: 0.50 in. (12,7 mm) FIBERGLASS
TYP. SANDING PLY
C1S-457-01
REPLACEMENT CORE PLUG FILLER PLY FIBERGLASS BARRIER PLY

(If used)
VIEW B-B
Install the Repair Materials (Plain Weave Fabric)
Method 2
CFM56-5B
Page 225
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
REDUCE AS SHOWN LESS THAN

2.5 INCHES (63,5 MM) FROM LATCH FITTING
ZONE D3 EDGE REFERENCE ONLY TRANSITION ZONE

SEE FIGURE 2

EXCEPT AS NOTED
EXCEPT AS NOTED
EXCEPT AS NOTED
NO. 1 PLY, 0.75 INCHES (19,1 mm) MINIMUM
IF LESS THAN 2.5 INCHES (63,5mm) ZONE D6 LOWER EDGE
FROM LATCH FITTING REFERENCE
NO. 2 PLY, 3 PLY 0.5 INCHES (12,7mm) MINIMUM EACH
REDUCE AS NEEDED IF LESS THAN 2.5 INCHES
(63,5 mm) FROM LATCH FITTING
U
P
FWD
STA
198.740
C1S-579-00
Damage Separation Requirements

CFM56-5B
Page 226
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 12
SKIN AND CORE REPAIR - PREPREG PROCEDURE
(DAMAGE THAT GOES THROUGH THE FAN COWL)
1. General
A. This procedure gives the instructions for the repair of damage to the
two skins and the core of the fan cowl door. The instructions are for
damage that goes through the fan cowl door. In this repair, you remove
the damaged skins and replace them with the filler and doubler plies
with the prepreg procedure. In this repair, you remove the damaged core
and replace the core with a core plug.
B. This repair applies only to the 2 and 4-ply areas of the fan cowl with
the specifications that follow:
(1) For 2 and 4-ply field areas that are not critical, the damage
cutout diameter must be < 8.5 in. (215,9 mm).
(2) For 2-ply field areas that are critical, the damage cutout diameter
must be < 6.0 in. (152,4 mm).
hinge, latch, or other repairs.
C. The manufacturer recommends that you do the repair in a maintenance

D. Refer to Goodrich Aftermarket Technical Services for disposition if the

damage is more than permitted.
2. Repair Instructions for Fan Cowl Door (Main Body, Full-Depth Core)

NECESSARY.
A. Examine the fan cowl damage.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection around the damaged area to find the

dimension of the damaged and delaminated skin.
or
dimension of the damaged and delaminated skin. Refer to Section
CAUTION: IF YOU DO NOT USE A CUTTING TOOL AT 18,000-23,000 RPM, YOU

CAN CAUSE DISBONDS AND DELAMINATIONS.

cutting tool at 18,000-23,000 rpm. Make the cutout a regular
geometric shape (circle, oval, rectangle, etc.).
the external surface.
paper.
C. Find how many plies are in the damaged skin.

thick.
(b) The 4-ply outer skin is approximately 0.054 in. (1,372 mm)
thick.
(c) The 2-ply inner skin is approximately 0.020 in. (0,508 mm)
thick.
(d) The 4-ply inner skin is approximately 0.049 in. (1,245 mm)
thick.
or
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
damaged skin.
(b) Count the plies in the skin.
D. Remove the damaged core and opposite skin. Use a hole saw or
equivalent.
CAUTION: IF YOU DO NOT USE A CUTTING TOOL AT 18,000-23,000 RPM, YOU

CAN CAUSE DISBONDS AND DELAMINATIONS.

cutting tool at 18,000-23,000 rpm.
CAUTION: IF YOU DO NOT USE A GRINDING TOOL AT 18,000-23,000 RPM, YOU CAN
CAUSE DISBONDS AND DELAMINATIONS.
E. Make the step sand finish on the outer skin. Use a grinder tool at
18,000-23,000 rpm. Refer to Figure 201, Sheets 4 and 5. Make the shape
of the step sanded area agree with the shape of the cutout.
F. Examine the fan cowl to make sure you remove all of the delaminated
skin.
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection around the damaged area.
or
G. Give protection to the area around the repair area.
(a) In the 2-ply areas, apply the tape so the inner edge of the
tape is 1.5 in. (38,1 mm) from the edge of the cutout.
(b) In the 4-ply areas, apply the tape so the inner edge of the
tape is 2.5 in. (63,5 mm) from the edge of the cutout.
H. Remove the surface finish and ECS ply from the repair area that is in
the mask band (outer skin only).
(1) Use the abrasive paper to remove the surface finish and ECS ply
from the repair area of the outer skin.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
I. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
J. Dry the repair area. Refer to Section 54-00-01 of this manual.
K. Make the bond tools and shims.
(1) Make the bond tools.
(a) Make two bond tools from the copper or aluminum alloy plate
that is 0.063-0.100 in (1,6-2,54 mm) thick.
1 Make the bond tools 2.0 in. (50,8 mm) larger than the
repair cutout.
2 Make the shape of the bond tools agree with the shape of
the inner skin and outer skin.
3 Make sure the bond tools fit into position on the skins
with light finger pressure.
(2) Make the shims.
(a) Make the shims from the copper or aluminum sheet that is
0.005-0.015 in. (0,127-0,381 mm) thick.
1 Make the shape and dimension of the shims agree with the
step sanded areas around the cutout.
2 Make sure the shims fit into position on the skins with
light finger pressure.
(3) Remove the sharp edges from the bond tools and shims with the
abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(4) Clean the bond tools and shims with a clean lint-free cloth and the
L. Make the core plug.
(1) Find the type of material and density of the core. Refer to
Structural Identification, Section 54-20-00 of this manual.
(2) Cut the core plug to the correct dimension and shape. Make sure
that the ribbon direction aligns with the core when you install the
core plug.
M. Cut the repair plies. Make the filler plies the same shape as the
cutout.
(1) Cut the filler plies from the M20/40%/G904 graphite prepreg
material.
(a) Cut two filler plies for each fabric ply in the skin. Cut the
corners of the ply to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius.
(b) Cut one filler ply for each tape ply in the skin. Cut the
corners of the ply to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius.
(2) Cut two doubler plies from the M20/40%/G904 graphite pre-preg
material. Make the shape of the doubler plies agree with the shape
of the cutout and step sanded area. Cut the corners of the ply to a
0.5 in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius.
(3) Cut the bond line ply from FM300-2K or -2M material. Make the shape
of the bond line ply agree with the shape of the cutout and step
sanded area. Cut the corners of the ply to a 0.5 in. (12,7 mm)
minimum radius.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(4) Cut the sanding ply from M20/39%/120 fiberglass prepreg material.
Make the shape of the sanding ply ply agree with the shape of the
cutout and step sanded area. Cut the corners of the ply to a 0.5
in. (12,7 mm) minimum radius.
N. Cut the foam adhesive for the core plug.
(1) Cut the foam adhesive from FM490A or MA-562 material.
(2) Cut the foam adhesive until it is sufficient to fit around the
perimeter of the core plug.
O. Prepare to install the repair materials.
(1) Put a non-porous parting film on the bond tool and shims so the
repair materials do not bond to the bond tools and shims.
(2) Put the shims and the bond tool into position on one side of the
fan cowl.
(3) Hold the shims and the bond tool in position with the Teflon tape.
P. Install the core plug.
(1) Put the foaming adhesive around the perimeter of the core plug.
(2) Put the core plug into the cutout.
(3) Put the shims and bond tool on the core plug.
(4) Hold the shims and bond tool in position with the Teflon tape.
(5) Cure the foam adhesive.
(a) Put the non-porous parting film on the repair area.
(b) Put three thermocouples adjacent to the repair area and hold
them in position with the Teflon tape.
(c) Put mechanical pressure or a weight on the bond tool to keep

the foam adhesive in the repair area.
(d) Apply the heat to the repair area with a heat blanket or heat
lamp.
1 Increase the temperature by 1 to 5 deg F (1 to 4 deg C)

each minute until each thermocouple shows 250+10 deg F
(121+5 deg C). Keep this temperature for 60 minutes.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(e) Remove the release film, bond tools and shims.
(f) Use the abrasive paper to remove the foam adhesive from the
step sanded areas of the skin.
CHEMICALS.
(g) Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the
Q. Install the repair plies on each side of the fan cowl.
(1) Put the FM300-2K or -2M bond line ply on the top of the core plug.
(2) Put the M20/40%/G904 graphite prepreg filler plies on the top of
the bond line ply.
(3) Put the M20/40%/G904 graphite prepreg repair plies on the top of
the filler plies.
(4) Put the M20/39%/120 fiberglass prepreg sanding ply on the top of
the repair plies.
(5) Vacuum bag the repair area on each side of the fan cowl. Refer to
Section 54-02-00 of this manual. Use the same vacuum source for the
two vacuum bags so the repair areas on each side of the fan cowl
get the same pressure.
(6) Cure the repair.
(a) Apply the heat to the repair area.
1 Increase the temperature 1 to 5 deg F (1 to 4 deg C) each

minute until the thermocouples show 250+10 deg F (121+5
deg C). Keep this temperature for 120 minutes.
(b) Let the repair area cool.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1 Let the repair area cool to approximately 140 deg F (60

deg C) at a rate of 5 deg F (3 deg C) for each minute.
(c) Remove the vacuum bag materials and equipment.
R. Examine the repair to make sure there are no delaminations or disbonds.
(1) Do a ultrasonic inspection of the repair area.
or

S. Make the repair area smooth.
(1) Use 180-320 grit abrasive paper to remove sharp edges and make the
surface of the repair smooth with the adjacent surface. Do not go
into the fiber of the sanding ply with the abrasive paper.
CHEMICALS.
T. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
U. Repair the ECS ply (outer skin only). Refer to Repair No. 6, Section
V. Repair the surface finish. Refer to Repair No. 1, Section 54-20-00 of

this manual.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

20x20 inch (508x508 mm) 850 South Cambridge Street
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
(alternate)
Probe, 0-250 Degrees F Commercially Available
Temperature (0-121 Degrees C)
(0-0,100 MPa)
150 Grit
320 Grit
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Core material Refer to Structural Commercially Available
Identification in Section
Fabric, Graphite Pre-Impregnated V52331
M20/40%/G904 Hexcel Corporation
11711 Dublin Blvd
Dublin, CA 94568-2832
Phone: (203) 696-0666
Fax: (203) 316-5139
www.hexcel.com
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

RMS167, Type 1, Style 1, V51563
Class 1 Rohr Inc.
850 Lagoon Dr
(619) 691-2006
Fabric, Pre-Impregnated V52331
Fiberglass M20/39%/120 Hexcel Corporation
RMS167, Style 2, Class 2 V51563
Rohr Inc.
Film Adhesive FM300-2M V0V7G8
0.060 psf Cytec Industries Inc.
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Film Adhesive FM300-2K V0V7G8
(alternate) 0.080 psf (490 gsm) Cytec Industries Inc.
Foam Adhesive FM490A V0V7G8
RMS 025, Type 2N, Class 2, V51563
Style A Rohr Inc.
Foam Adhesive MA-562 V33564
(alternate) Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
RMS 025, Type 2N, Class 2, V51563
Style A Rohr Inc.
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
4-PLY AREA
2-PLY
AREA
CRITICAL
AREA
2-PLY
2-PLY
AREA
R/H FAN COWL, VIEW WHEN

C1S-404-00
L/H FAN COWL, VIEW WHEN

LOOK YOU INBOARD YOU LOOK INBOARD
Fan Cowl Damage Zones - Outer Skin

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
4-PLY
AREA
2-PLY
AREA
CRITICAL
AREA
2-PLY
2-PLY
AREA
L/H FAN COWL, VIEW WHEN

C1S-405-00
R/H FAN COWL, VIEW WHEN

LOOK YOU OUTBOARD YOU LOOK OUTBOARD
Fan Cowl Damage Zones - Inner Skin

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GRAPHITE
FABRIC OUTER SKIN
FULL PENETRATION PLY
DAMAGE
ECS PLY
INNER SKIN GRAPHITE GRAPHIC

FABRIC TAPE
PLY PLY
C1S-406-00
Typical Damage Fully Through the Fan Cowl

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
1.0 IN.
(25,4 MM) DAMAGE
1.0 IN. REMOVED
(25,4 MM) 0.50 IN. GRAPHITE
OUTER (12,7 MM) FABRIC
SKIN PLY
STEP SANDED
CONFIGURATION ECS PLY
GRAPHITE
TAPE
INNER PLY GRAPHITE
SKIN FABRIC
GRAPHITE
TAPE PLY
PLY
C1S-407-00
Damaged Skin and Core Removal

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1.0 IN. (24,5 MM)

OVERLAP
0.50 IN. (12,7 MM)

OVERLAP
GRAPHITE TAPE PLY
GRAPHITE
FABRIC
PLY
0.50 IN. (12,7 MM)

CORNER RADIUS
ECS PLY C1S-408-00
Damaged Skin and Core Removal

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
BOND TOOL
SHIMS
PARTING FILM
CORE PLUG
OUTER
GRAPHITE FOAM ADHESIVE SKIN
ECS PLY FABRIC FM490A OR MA-562
PLY
GRAPHITE TAPE
PLY
GRAPHITE
TAPE
PLY
PARTING FILM
GRAPHITE
FABRIC
PLY SHIMS
INNER
SKIN 2.0 IN.
(50,8 MM)
BOND TOOL
C1S-409-00
Core Plug Installation

CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
SANDING PLY
0.25 IN. (6,35 MM) M20/39%/120
OVERLAP
DOUBLER PLIES (2)

M20/40%G904
0.50 IN. (12,7 MM) FILLER PLIES (3)
OVERLAP M20/40%/G904
FILM ADHESIVE
GRAPHITE FM300-2M OR 2K
ECS PLY FABRIC
PLY OUTER SKIN
FILM ADHESIVE
FM300-2M OR 2K
GRAPHITE
FABRIC
FILLER PLIES (3)
PLY GRAPHITE M20/40%/G904
TAPE
PLY DOUBLER PLIES (2)
M20/40%/G904
INNER SKIN
SANDING PLY
M20/39%/120
C1S-410-00
Doubler and Filler Ply Installation

CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
SANDING PLY
0.25 IN. (6,35 MM) M20/39%/120
OVERLAP
DOUBLER
PLIES (2)
M20/40%/G904
DOUBLER PLIES (2)
M20/40%/G904
DOUBLER PLIES (2)
M20/40%/G904
0.50 IN. (12,7 MM) FILLER PLIES (3)
OVERLAP M20/40%/G904
OUTER SKIN FILM ADHESIVE
FM300-2M OR 2K
1.0 IN. GRAPHITE
(25,4 MM) 0.50 IN. (12,7 MM) FABRIC PLY ECS PLY
GRAPHITE TAPE
PLY
GRAPHITE TAPE PLY

FILM ADHESIVE
FM300-2M OR 2K
INNER SKIN FILLER PLIES (3)

M20/40%/G904
DOUBLER PLIES (2)

M20/40%/G904
C1S-411-00
SANDING PLY
M20/39%/120

CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
FOAM ADHESIVE
FM490A OR MA-562
FILLER PLIES (3)

M20/40%/G904
DOUBLER
PLIES (2)
M20/40%/G904
SANDING PLY
M20/39%/120
0.50 IN (12,7 MM)

CORNER RADIUS
(MINIMUM)
C1S-412-00

CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 13
LEFT HAND FAN COWL - 6 O’CLOCK FRAME - GEARBOX INTERFERENCE
1. General
A. This repair provides instructions to trim the lower seal-land on the

left hand fan cowl to ensure clearance between the fan cowl and the
accessory gear box.
B. The maximum allowable material removal is 6.96 in (176.8 mm) length x

0.1 in (2.5 mm) depth.
C. Contact Goodrich Aftermarket Technical Services for deposition if the

required material removal is more than permitted.
A. Examine the left hand fan cowl. (See Figure 201).
WARNING: WEAR APPLICABLE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

WHEN YOU DO THIS TASK. BEFORE YOU USE PPE, READ,
UNDERSTAND AND OBEY ALL INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS USE. THESE
INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE
MANUFACTURER, YOUR EMPLOYER AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS.
YOU CAN GET INJURED IF YOU DO NOT USE PPE. GET
INSTRUCTIONS FROM YOUR EMPLOYER ON WHICH PPE IS
NECESSARY.
(1) Open the left hand fan cowl. Refer to AMM 71-13-00.
(3) Do a check for indications of contact between the fan cowl lower
seal-land and the accessory gear box. Refer to AMM 71-13-00-800.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B. Trim the lower seal-land. (See Figure 201).
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGE ADJACENT PARTS WHEN YOU TRIM THE LOWER SEAL-
LAND.
(1) Trim the lower seal-land to the dimensions specified in Figure 201.
(2) Smooth the trimmed area to a surface finish of 63 micro inches or

better.
C. Restore the surface finish.
(1) Mask the repair area to give protection to the adjacent area.
(2) Apply chemical conversion coating to the repair area. (Ref. SRM 51-
21-11).
(3) Apply green epoxy primer to the rework area. (Ref. SRM 54-02-07).
(4) Cure the primer. Refer to the manufactures instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Chemical conversion Alodine 1200 V71410

coating Henkel Corporation
Madison Heights, MI
48071
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Cloth, Lint-Free Cotton Commercially Available
Primer Green V0KXA5

Epoxy base 10P4-2 Akzo Nobel Aerospace
Converter EC-117S Coatings
Thinner East Water St.
TR-19 or TR-20
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Alternate Primer Green V33461

Primer, Epoxy 44GN060 Deft Inc.
Two Part Component A 17451 Von Karman Ave.
Component B Irvine, CA 92614
Distilled or Phone: (800) 544-3338
Thinner Demineralized Water Fax: (949) 474-7269
www.deftfinishes.com

Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or

Ketone Middletown, PA 17057-
2200
or Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
Turco 6646 V71410

Henkel Corporation
Madison Heights, MI
48071
Phone: (248) 583-9300

Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A
C1S-513-00
Left Hand Fan Cowl - 6 O’clock Frame - Gearbox Interference

CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.56 INCH
CENTER LATCH KEEPER (14.2 mm)
6.96 INCH
(176.8 mm)
C R 0.06 INCH 30°±2°

(1.5 mm) 2PL MIN 2PL
0.10 INCH
(2.5 mm)
C
FAN COWL
SEAL-LAND
B
R 0.04 INCH TYP
(1.0 mm)
SECTION C-C
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESIS
TOLERANCE ±0.03 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
DRAWING NOT TO SCALE C1S-514-00
Left Hand Fan Cowl - 6 O’clock Frame - Gearbox Interference

CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
STRUCTURE IDENTIFICATION - THRUST REVERSER
1. General
The thrust reverser is made from graphite/epoxy composite plies,

fiberglass/epoxy plies, titanium, inconel, and aluminum. The honeycomb
sandwich material is made from aluminum or polyamid fiber. Thermal
insulation blankets are made from silica felt.
The two halves of the thrust reverser are hinged to open for inspection or
repair. Each half is hinged to the pylon in three places and latch
together at the bottom in four places. The outer barrel skins are made of
graphite/epoxy composite plies with a polyamid fiber honeycomb core. The
core cowl has aluminum skins with an aluminum honeycomb core. The core
cowl is insulated with thermal blankets made from layers of silica wool
between two layers of stainless steel foil. Each pivoting door has an
inner and outer panel. The inner panels are made with aluminum skins and
aluminum honeycomb core. The outer panels are made with graphite/epoxy
composite plies with a polyamid fiber honeycomb core. Upper and lower
pivot door kicker plates are made from graphite/epoxy plies. The 3 and 9
o’clock beams are made from aluminum alloy. The 3 and 9 o’clock struts are
made from aluminum packed with Routanol R26 foam. The precooler scoop is
made from inconel with a stainless steel bracket. The turbine scoop is
anti-erosion coated aluminum.
Structures are identified in illustrations (Figures) and Tables. The

figures and tables do not identify fasteners. The structure is identified
on the figure by a number. The same number appears on the Table that
follows the Figure. The table gives the component description, gage
(thickness) and material. When a composite fabric ply is identified in the
material column, the warp direction is given. The full view of the part
has a compass rose to help find the warp direction.
CFM56-5B
Page 1
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Upper Cut Corner (Outer Panel)

Figure 1 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 2
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Upper Cut Corner (Inner Panel)

Figure 1 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 3
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 ALUMINUM PLY 0.031 (0,79) 2024/1050 A-T42 PLATED ALUMINUM
ALLOY
ALLOY
ALLOY
4 ADHESIVE FOAM
5 CORE METALLIC HONEYCOMB 5000 CLASS D,
48 KG/M3 (3 LBS./CU. FT.)
ALLOY
ALLOY
ALLOY
9 ADHESIVE FOAM
Upper Cut Corner

Table 2
CFM56-5B
Page 4
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Lower Cut Corner (Outer Panel)

Figure 2 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 5
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Lower Cut Corner (Inner Panel)

Figure 2 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 6
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
ALLOY
ALLOY
ALLOY
4 ADHESIVE FOAM
ALLOY
ALLOY
ALLOY
9 ADHESIVE FOAM
Lower Cut Corner

Table 2
CFM56-5B
Page 7
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Hinge Access Panel

Figure 3
CFM56-5B
Page 8
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
- HINGE ACCEESS PANEL 0.080 (2,032) 2024-T42 ALUMINUM ALLOY
(CONFIG 1)
- HINGE ACCEESS PANEL COMPOSITE
(CONFIG 2)
1 COMPOSITE PLY 0.009 (0,23) FIBERGLASS/EPOXY FABRIC, WARP 45°
Hinge Access Panel

Table 3
CFM56-5B
Page 9
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
A AREA 1
C
AREA 2
C
B
90°
B 45°
0°
DETAIL A
28 mm 16 mm
(1.1 INCH) (0.63 INCH)
9
8 AREA 2
7
6
5
4 5
3
6
2
7
1 B-B 8
9
AREA 1
C1S-499-00
C-C
Upper Rear Fairing (Part No. 321-080-401-0 and 321-080-451-0)

Figure 4
CFM56-5B
Page 10
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
5 COMPOSITE PLY 0.010 (0,25) KEVLAR/EPOXY FABRIC, WARP 45°
Upper Rear Fairing

Table 4
CFM56-5B
Page 11
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
ZONE 1
A D
B
ZONE 12
ZONE 10
C
A
ZONE 11
C ZONE 7
ZONE 9
D B
ZONE 6
B
ZONE 5
A ZONE 4
F E ZONE 3
ZONE 8
ZONE 2
A
E
TEFLON STRIP
G
G
C1S-492-00
F B
VIEW LOOKING AFT
Upper Rear Fairing(Part No. 321-080-600-6 and 321-080-650-6)
Figure 4A (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 12
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
E2
ZON 1 GLASS
IES +
9 PL
ZONE 10
6 PLIES
11 1
12
2
13 ZONE 8
14 3 ZONE 9
15 7 PLIES + 1 GLASS 9 PLIES
16 21 +
17 4 GLASS
A-A
11
1 12
10 9 2 13
6 5 4 14
3
15
16
21 17
18 19 20
22
5 6 7 8
4 9 10
1
C1S-493-00
Upper Rear Fairing

Figure 4A (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 13
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
E1
ZON ES
LI
4P
ZONE 12
4 PLIES
ZONE 12
ZONE 11
4 PLIES
8 PLIES
B-B
2
3 2
3
21
21
16
16
17 4 5 6 8 9 10
10 9 8 6 17
5
C1S-494-00
Upper Rear Fairing

Figure 4A (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 14
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
17 16
4
5 2 3
6 13
8 14 16
21 15 17
9
10 3
2
ZONE 12
4 PLIES
ZONE 1
4 PLIES ZONE 7
5 PLIES
2 ZONE 6
6 PLIES
4 3
ZONE 10
5 8 PLIES
21
6
13 14
7 15 16
17
8
9
10
ZONE 5
7 PLIES
1
20
19
18
ZONE 8
9 PLIES
C1S-495-00
+
4 GLASS
C-C
Upper Rear Fairing

Figure 4A (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 15
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
9 PLIES 9 PLIES
+ ZONE 4
1 GLASS 8 PLIES ZONE 5 ZONE 6
7 PLIES 6 PLIES
1 2 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 10 9 8 6 5 4
ZONE 9 ZONE 11
9 PLIES 8 PLIES
+
1 GLASS
ZONE 7
5 PLIES
ZONE 1
4 PLIES
15 16 17 3 2
2 3 10 9 8 6 5 4
ZONE 11
8 PLIES
C1S-496-00
D-D
Upper Rear Fairing
Figure 4A (Sheet 5)
CFM56-5B
Page 16
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
1 2 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E-E
F-F
C1S-497-00
Upper Rear Fairing

Figure 4A (Sheet 6)
CFM56-5B
Page 17
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
9 PLIES
+ 9 PLIES
1 GLASS ZONE 4 ZONE 5
8 PLIES 7 PLIES
ZONE 6
6 PLIES
1 2 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 11 12 13
14 15 16 17
ZONE 2 ZONE 4 ZONE 5

9 PLIES ZONE 6 ZONE 7
8 PLIES 7 PLIES 5 PLIES
+ ZONE 3 6 PLIES
1 GLASS 9 PLIES
ZONE 2
9 PLIES + 1 GLASS
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 17 18 19 20
ZONE 7
5 PLIES
ZONE 1
4 PLIES
2 3 15 16 17
2 3 16 17
C1S-498-00
G-G
Upper Rear Fairing
Figure 4A (Sheet 7)
CFM56-5B
Page 18
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 COMPOSITE PLY 0.009 (0,23) FIBERGLASS/EPOXY FABRIC, OPTIONAL
ORIENTATION
2 COMPOSITE PLY 0.011 (0,3) GRAPHITE/EPOXY FABRIC, WARP 45°
3 COMPOSITE PLY 0.011 (0,3) GRAPHITE/EPOXY FABRIC, WARP 0°/90°
ORIENTATION
ORIENTATION
ORIENTATION
21 POTTING COMPOUND N/A CARBON EPOXY COMPOUND
22 TEFLON STRIP 0.039 (1) CERAMIC CHARGED 1.5%
Upper Rear Fairing

Table 4A
CFM56-5B
Page 19
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Aft Ring Assembly

Figure 5 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 20
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Aft Ring Assembly

Figure 5 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 21
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Aft Ring Assembly

Figure 5 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 22
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Aft Ring Assembly

Figure 5 (Sheet 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 23
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Aft Ring Assembly

Figure 5 (Sheet 5)
CFM56-5B
Page 24
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 OUTER SKIN 0.030 (0,76) 4-PLY FABRIC COMPOSITE
2 INNER SKIN 0.030 (0,76) 4-PLY FABRIC COMPOSITE
3 CORE POLYAMID FIBER HONEYCOMB, 4,763
MM (3/16 INCH), CLASS A, 48,07
KG/M3 (3 LBS/CU. FT.)
4 INTUMESCENT ADHESIVE CYANAMID EPOXY FILM, FM410
FOAM
5 TRAILING EDGE 0.016 (0,41) TITANIUM, COM PURE-40 AMS4902
6 SUPPORTED ADHESIVE 0.011 (0,28) EPOXY FILM, REDUX 319A
7 COMPOSITE PLY 0.004 (0,10) FIBERGLASS/EPOXY FABRIC, WARP
45° (See NOTE 2)
(See NOTE 1)
9 COMPOSITE PLY 0.005 (0,13) GRAPHITE/EPOXY TAPE, WARP 90°
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
45° (See NOTE 2)
(See NOTE 1)
0°
NOTE 1: 914/40%/G803 or 914/

40%/G963 Carbon Fabric. 470 g/
m2 weight.
NOTE 2: Style 120, 190 g/m2
weight Fiberglass Fabric.
Aft Ring Assembly
Table 5 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 25
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
(See NOTE 1)
45° (See NOTE 2)
45° (See NOTE 2)
(See NOTE 1)
s
0° (See NOTE 2)
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
45° (See NOTE 2)
NOTE 1: 914/40%/G803 or 914/

m2 weight.
Aft Ring Assembly
Table 5 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 26
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
(See NOTE 1)
(See NOTE 1)
NOTE 1: 914/40%/G803 or 914/

m2 weight.
Aft Ring Assembly
Table 5 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 27
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Upper Pivoting Door Outer Panel PRE SPIB CFM12094RM1

Figure 6
CFM56-5B
Page 28
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
6 CORE 0.472 (11,99) 5020 POLYAMID FIBER HONEYCOMB,
3,175 MM (1/8INCH), CLASS C, 64,09
KG/M3 (4 LBS/CU. FT.)
Upper Pivoting Door Outer Panel PRE SPIB CFM12094RM1

Table 6
CFM56-5B
Page 29
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C1S-553-01
B-B
Upper pivoting Door Outer Panel (Monolithic) Post SPIB CFM12094RM1

Figure 6A
CFM56-5B
Page 30
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
Upper pivoting Door Outer Panel (Monolithic) Post SPIB CFM12094RM1

Table 6A
CFM56-5B
Page 31
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Upper Pivoting Door Inner Panel

Figure 7
CFM56-5B
Page 32
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 CORE 0.704 (17,88) 5056 AL HONEYCOMB, 9,85 MM
(0.388 INCH), 68 KG/M3
(4.3 LBS/ CU. FT.)
(0.388 INCH), 68 KG/M3
(4.3 LBS/ CU. FT.)
(0.388 INCH), 68 KG/M3
(4.3 LBS/ CU. FT.)
4 OUTER SKIN, PERFORATED 0.031 (0,79) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET
(AU4G1) AMS4037 (HEAT TREAT
T-42)
5 INNER SKIN 0.024 (0,61) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET
T-42)
FOAM
8 CLOSING MEMBER 0.031 (0,79) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET
T-42)
9 OUTER DOUBLER 0.031 (0,79) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET
T-42)
10 SPAR ATTACHMENT 0.045 (1,14) 2024-T351 AL ALLOY SHEET
EXTRUSION (AU4G1) AMS4041 (TEMP T351)
Upper Pivoting Door Inner Panel

Table 7
CFM56-5B
Page 33
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Lower Pivoting Door Outer Panel PRE SPIB CFM12094RM1

Figure 8
CFM56-5B
Page 34
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
90°
90°
17 CORE 0.472 (11,99) 5020 POLYAMID FIBER HONEYCOMB,
4,763 MM (3/16 INCH), CLASS A,
48,07 KG/M3 (3 LBS/CU. FT.)
19 INTUMESCENT ADHESIVE 0.051 (1,30) CYANAMID EPOXY FILM, FM410
FOAM
20 PROTECTIVE FILM 0.001 (0,03) TEDLAR FILM, P.V.R.
Lower Pivoting Door Outer Panel PRE SPIB CFM12094RM1

Table 8
CFM56-5B
Page 35
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C1S-554-01
B-B
Lower Pivoting Door Outer Panel (Monolithic) POST SPIB CFM12094RM1

Figure 8A
CFM56-5B
Page 36
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
Lower Pivoting Door Outer Panel (Monolithic) POST SPIB CFM12094RM1

Table 8A
CFM56-5B
Page 37
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Lower Pivoting Door Inner Panel

Figure 9
CFM56-5B
Page 38
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
(0.388 INCH), 68 KG/M3
(4.3 LBS/CU. FT.)
(0.388 INCH), 68 KG/M3
(4.3 LBS/CU. FT.)
3 OUTER SKIN, PERFORATED 0.031 (0,79) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4037 (HEAT TREAT T-42)
4 INNER SKIN 0.024 (0,61) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
FOAM
7 CLOSING MEMBER 0.024 (0,61) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
8 OUTER DOUBLER 0.031 (0,79) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
9 SPAR ATTACHMENT 0.051 (1,30) 2024-T351 AL ALLOY SHEET
EXTRUSION (AU4G1) AMS4041 (TEMP T351)
Lower Pivoting Door Inner Panel

Table 9
CFM56-5B
Page 39
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Location A
Location B
Location c
H-M56-SR-0009-02-B
Core Cowl
Figure 10 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 40
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Core Cowl
Figure 10 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 41
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 FRONT INNER SKIN 0.023 (0,58) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4037 WITH MA25S INTUMESCENT
FIREPROOF COATING
(3/8 INCH), 5.4 LBS/FT3
(86.5 KG/M3 0.004 FOIL (0.1 mm)
3 OUTER SKIN, PERFORATED 0.032 (0,81) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
Loc B Location B AMS4037
4 CORE 0.689 (17,50) 5052 AL HONEYCOMB, 0.697 “FLEX-
CORE” F80-0025 130 KG/M3
(8 LBS/CU. FT.)
5 HEAT SHIELD 0.012 (0,30) STAINLESS STEEL (S527) AMS5510 OR
0.016 (0,41) TITANIUM, COM PURE-40 AMS4902
6 INSULATION BLANKET 0.250 (6,35) SILICA FELT
7 REAR OUTER SKIN 0.032 (0,81) 2024-T42 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4035
8 STRUT DOUBLER 0.047 (1,19) 2024-T42 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4035
9 CORE 5052 AL HONEYCOMB, 4,76 MM
(3/16 INCH), 8.1 LBS/FT3
(129.8 KG/M3) FOIL 0.003 (0.1 mm)
10 FRONT CLOSURE-Z 0.047 (1,19) 2024-T42 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4035
11 FRONT CLOSURE DOUBLER 0.063 (1,60) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4037
FOAM
13 ADHESIVE MELTBOND 328 CLASS C (NARMCO)
COMPOUND ON ALL PERFORATED SHEET
14 ADHESIVE MELTBOND 328 CLASS D (NARMCO)
COMPOUND ON ALL NON-PERFORATED
SHEET
15 REAR INNER SKIN 0.032 (0,81) 2024-T42 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4035
16 REAR CLOSURE-Z 0.047 (1,19) 2024-T42 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4035
Core Cowl
Table 10 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 42
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
17 REAR CLOSURE DOUBLER 0.047 (1,19) 2024-T42 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
AMS4035
Loc A UPPER BIFURCATION 0.24 (0,6) OUTER SKIN: HS 900 183°F 7237 0,6
mm (.024”) THICK
Loc A CORE 3/16 91KG/M3 ANODIZED HONEYCOMB 3/16 - 91KG/M3
1/4 127KG/M3 REFER TO BLGG500601, ANODIZED
HONEYCOMB BLGG500601 CELL 1/4
127KG/M3
Loc C LOWER BIFURCATION 0.24 (0,6) OUTER SKIN: HS 900 183°F 7237 0,6
mm (.024”) THICK
Loc C CORE 3/16 91KG/M3 ANODIZED HONEYCOMB 3/16 - 91KG/M3
1/4 127KG/M3 REFER TO BLGG500601, ANODIZED
HONEYCOMB BLGG500601 CELL 1/4
127KG/M3
Core Cowl
Table 10 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 43
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3 and 9 O’Clock Beams

Figure 11
CFM56-5B
Page 44
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
degrees
3 and 9 O’Clock Beams

Table 11
CFM56-5B
Page 45
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3 and 9 O’Clock Struts

Figure 12
CFM56-5B
Page 46
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 OUTER SKIN 0.051 (1,30) 5356 ALUMINUM ALLOY SHEET (AG5MC)
ALTERNATE MATERIAL: 5089 ALUMINUM
ALLOY SHEET (AG4MC)
2 SHIM 0.051 (1,30) 5356 ALUMINUM ALLOY SHEET (AG5MC)
ALLOY SHEET (AG4MC)
3 BULKHEAD 0.051 (1,30) 5356 ALUMINUM ALLOY SHEET (AG5MC)
ALLOY SHEET (AG4MC)
4 STRUT PACKING WITH FOAM 0.006 (0,15) “ROUTANOL R26” OF 5.93 LBS/ CU.
FT. (95 KG/M3)
3 and 9 O’Clock Struts

Table 12
CFM56-5B
Page 47
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Upper and Lower Ramp Fairings

Figure 13
CFM56-5B
Page 48
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 METAL SHEET RAMP FAIRINGS 0.010 (0,25) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
2 SHIM 0.472 (11,99) 2024-T351 AL ALLOY SHEET
(AU4G1) AMS4041 TEMP T351
3 ANGLE 0.031 (0,79) 2024-T3 AL ALLOY SHEET (AU4G1)
Upper and Lower Ramp Fairings

Table 13
CFM56-5B
Page 49
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Upper Pivoting Door Kicker Plates

Figure 14 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 50
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Figure 14 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 51
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
GAGE
AREA: A B C
9 COMPOSITE PLY 0.011 (0,28) GRAPHITE/EPOXY FABRIC AT:
45° 50° 45°
5° 15° 10°
5° 15° 10°
45° 50° 45°
5° 15° 10°
5° 15° 10°
45° 50° 45°
5° 15° 10°
5° 15° 10°
45° 50° 45°

Table 14
CFM56-5B
Page 52
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Lower Pivoting Door Kicker Plates

Figure 15 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 53
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Figure 15 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 54
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE

Table 15
CFM56-5B
Page 55
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Pivoting Door Seals

Figure 16
CFM56-5B
Page 56
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 UPPER PIVOTING DOOR COMPOSITE AND METALLIC SHEET
2 LOWER PIVOTING DOOR COMPOSITE AND METALLIC SHEET
3 PIVOTING DOOR SEAL 0.709 (18,01) B452 SILICONE RUBBER REINFORCED
WITH TERYLENE
4 SEAL RETAINER 0.024 (0,61) 5086 AL ALLOY SHEET (AG4MC)
Pivoting Door Seals

Table 16
CFM56-5B
Page 57
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Precooler Scoop
Figure 17
CFM56-5B
Page 58
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
GAGE
1 PRECOOLER SCOOP ASSY 0.071 (1,80) INCONEL 625 METAL SHEET
(NC22DNb) AMS5599
2 ANGLE JOINT BRACKET 0.032 (0,81) Z10CNT18 STAINLESS STEEL
AMS5512 (S527)
3 PRECOOLER SEAL 0.040 (1,02) PTFE CERAMIC CHARGED AMS5033
Precooler Scoop
Table 17
CFM56-5B
Page 59
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 60
Mar 15/19
ROHR, INC.
ALLOWABLE DAMAGE - THRUST REVERSER
1. Allowable Damage Limits - Thrust Reverser
A. Damage zones for the outer panels and non-monolithic pivoting doors
(Effectivity T/R Serial No, All: are
T1 - Full depth honeycomb section.

T2 - Monolithic section.
T3 - Riveted joint laminated section, including attached transition
honeycomb section, Kicker Plate Angle and edges of the blocker
doors and the aft ring.
T4 - Honeycomb section areas 100,0 mm (3.94 inches) or less from the
aft ring fitting at 3, 6, 9 and 12 o’clock attachments.
T5 - Aft edge of the aft ring (monolithic section).
T6 - Bonded or riveted metal sheet.
B. Damage zones for the upper and lower monolithic pivoting door
(effectivity T/R Serial No. 11206001 and on): are
T1M - Outer Monolithic panel (monolithic section)

T2M - Outer Monolithic panel (monolithic section)
T3M - Outer Monolithic panel (Riveted jointed laminated section
including edges of the blocker doors and the aft ring).
C. Damage zones for heat shields and intumescent fireproof coating are:
TA1 - Intumescent fireproof coating up to 3,0 mm (0.12 inch) thick.

TA2 - Thermal Blankets.
TA3 - Heat shields.
D. Damage zones for the inner panels are:
TAA1 - Perforated aluminum inner face sheet.

TAA2 - Nonperforated aluminum inner/outer face sheet.
TAA2/A - One and Eleven O’clock Strut Outer Structure End or
Angle Fitting.
TAA2/S - Six o’clock Sidewall/Lower Bifurcation.
TAA2/T - One and Eleven O’clock Strut Inner Structure End.
TAA3 - Riveted aluminum joint and seal retainers.
TAA4 - Bonded aluminum (nonriveted) joint.
TCA1 - Perforated composite inner face sheet.
CFM56-5B
Page 101
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
marking on this document. title page section of the manual.
ROHR, INC.
TCA2 - Nonperforated composite outer face sheet.

TCA3 - Riveted composite joint.
TCA4 - Bonded composite (nonriveted) joint.
E. Damage zones for the Adapter Ring:
TAR1 - Thickness of the Adapter Ring flange common to the Engine

Acoustic Panel, forward of the bolt circle.
TAR2 - Thickness of the Adapter Ring flange common to the Engine
Acoustic Panel, at the center of the bolt circle.
TAR3A - Thickness of the Adapter Ring flange forward side of the
V-Groove from 17° to 23°.
TAR3B - Thickness of the Adapter Ring flange forward side of the
V-Groove 23°deg and higher.
TAR4 - Diameter of the Bolt hole common to the Engine Acoustic Panel.
TAR5 - Thickness of the Adapter Ring flange common to Engine flange.
F. Damage zones for the keel beams are:
Refer to Repair No. 29 THRUST REVERSER 3/9 KEEL BEAM CRACK/CORROSION

ALLOWABLE DAMAGE REPAIR.
G. Allowable damage zones for the thrust reverser are shown in Figures 101
thru 115.
CFM56-5B
Page 102
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
3.4 INCH
(87 mm) 2.9 INCH
(73 mm)
A
3.8 INCH
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
(76 mm) AREA T2
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
1.4 INCH
AREA T3 (35 mm)
B B
4.1 INCH
(105 mm)
5.0 INCH
(126 mm) 5.5 INCH
(140 mm)
2.4 INCH
3.8 INCH AREA T3
(62 mm)
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
C (76 mm) C
AREA T1
D D
2.9 INCH
2.8 INCH (73 mm)
C1S-5B-032-00
(70 mm) A
Allowable Damage Zones - Upper and Lower Pivoting Door Outer Panels
PRE SPIB CFM12094RM1
CFM56-5B
Page 103
Mar 15/19
supersedes any otherofU.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
1.4 in.
(35 mm)
5.0 in. 5.5 in.

(126 mm) 4.1 in.
(105 mm) (140 mm)
AREA T3
AREA T3 AREA T3 AREA T3

AREA T1 AREA T2
B-B
1.4 in.
(35 mm)
3.0 in. 5.5 in.

(76 mm) (140 mm)
3.8 in.
(96 mm)
AREA T3
AREA T2
AREA T3
AREA T3 AREA T1
C-C
C1S-280-00
CFM56-5B
Page 104
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
Blocker Door Outer Skin
Blocker Door Outer Skin
E
Kicker Plate Angle (Zone T3)
Existing Frame
C1S-5B-022-00
D-D
CFM56-5B
Page 105
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Angle
Crack #1 Crack #2
Crack #3
Total crack length to

be considered
E-E
C1S-5B-023-00
Allowable Damage - Typical Kicker Plate Angle Crack Damage Definition
Pre SPIB CFM12094RM1
CFM56-5B
Page 106
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
3.4 INCH
(87 mm) 2.9 INCH
(73 mm)
A
3.8 INCH
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
AREA T2M
(76 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
1.4 INCH
AREA T3M (35 mm)
B B
4.1 INCH
(105 mm)
5.0 INCH
(126 mm) 5.5 INCH
(140 mm)
2.4 INCH
3.8 INCH AREA T3M
(62 mm)
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
C (76 mm) C
AREA T1M C1S-551-01
2.9 INCH
2.8 INCH (73 mm)
(70 mm) A
Allowable Damage Zones - Upper and Lower Pivoting Door Monolithic Outer Panels
POST SPIB CFM12094RM1
CFM56-5B
Page 107
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
1.4 in.
(35 mm)
5.0 in. 5.5 in.

(126 mm) 4.1 in.
(105 mm) (140 mm)
AREA T3M
AREA T3 M AREA T3M AREA T3M

AREA T1M AREA T2M
B-B
1.4 in.
(35 mm)
3.0 in. 5.5 in.

(76 mm) (140 mm)
3.8 in.
(96 mm)
AREA T3M
AREA T2M
AREA T3M
AREA T3M AREA T1M
C-C
C1S-552-00
Allowable Damage Zones - Upper and Lower Pivoting Door Monolithic Outer Panels
POST SPIB CFM12094RM1
CFM56-5B
Page 108
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
A
AREA T4
3.94 in.
(100 mm)
FROM UPPER
JUNCTION
JUNCTION WITH AREA T5

MIDDLE BEAM
3.94 in. B
(100 mm)
AREA T1
AREA T4
B
AREA T3 3.94 in.
(100 mm)
AREA T6/T
JUNCTION WITH
REAR LATCH
FITTING
LOWER JUNCTION
RIVETED SECTION
AREA T3/T
C1S-281-00
A
Allowable Damage Zones - Aft Ring Outer Panels
CFM56-5B
Page 109
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
3.15 in.
AREA T1 (80 mm)
AREA T6
2.3 in.
(58 mm) 1.6 in. (40 mm)
AREA T3
B-B AREA T5
AREA T1
3.94 in. (100 mm)

D AREA T4
7.8 in. AREA T3

(197 mm)
AREA T3 C
D
5.9 in. 3.94 in.
(150 mm) AREA T1
(100 mm)
AREA T3 AREA T4
C1S-282-01
0.94 in. 3.94 in.

(24 mm) (100 mm)
AREA T3 AREA T4
D-D
Allowable Damage Zones - Aft Ring Outer Panels

CFM56-5B
Page 110
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
AREA T1
A
2.72 in.
(69 mm)
AREA T3
A
AREA T2
AREA T3
1.4 in.
(35 mm)
4.5 in. 4.5 in. 4.9 in.

C1S-283-00
(115 mm) (115 mm) (125 mm)
Allowable Damage Zones

3 and 9 O’Clock Beam and Upper Cut Corner Outer Panels
Figure 103
CFM56-5B
Page 111
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
2.6 in.
(66 mm)
AREA T1 8.62 in.

(219 mm)
2.4 in.
(61 mm)
3.42 in.
(87 mm)
AREA T3
C1S-284-00
Allowable Damage Zones - Lower Cut Corner Outer Panels

Figure 104
CFM56-5B
Page 112
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
UPPER REAR FAIRING
AREA T2
UPPER REAR FAIRING
ABRASION AREA T2/T
X 6374 X 6500
(STA.251) (STA.256)
C1S-285-01
Allowable Damage Zones - Upper Rear Fairing Outer Panel

Figure 105
CFM56-5B
Page 113
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
2. Outer Panel Allowable Damage Limits and Non-Monolithic Pivot Doors -

(Effectivity T/R Serial No. All) – Time Limited

Delamination/ T1, T2 Maximum length - 38 mm (1.5 inches)
Disbond
Delaminations must be separated from other
delaminations, holes, and cracks by a minimum
of 188 mm (7.4 inches).
A maximum of five delaminations is allowed

per half door.
Record location and inspect on or before 750

Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 Calender
Months (Whichever is earliest).
Repair delaminations that have exceeded

maximum size.
It is recommended that all delaminations be

repaired no later than 7500 Flight Hours /
5000 Flight Cycles / 24 Calendar Months
CFM56-5B
Page 114
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
3. Outer Monolithic Pivoting Door Allowable Damage Limits - (Effectivity T/R

Serial No. 11206001 and on) - Time Limited
Type of Damage Zone Requirements and disposition

Delamination T1M, T2M Maximum 38 mm (1.5 in.) diameter.
Maximum of 5 damages per half door

(cracks, delaminations, holes).
5D minimum between other damages (cracks,

delaminations, holes) with “D” maximum
damages diameter. See Figure 105A.
Record delamination location and inspect

on or before 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight
Cycles / 4 Calender Months
Repair delaminations that has exceeded

maximum delamination size.
It is recommended to repair delaminations

on or before 7500 Flight Hours /5000
Flight Cycles / 24 Calendar Months (which-
ever is earliest). Refer to Repair No. 25.
CFM56-5B
Page 115
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Cracks T1M, T2M Maximum 38 mm (1.5) in) length


Protect damage from entrance of moisture

by application of appropriate sealing
tape.
Record location and inspect on or before

750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4
Calender Months (whichever is earliest).
Repair cracks on or before 7500 Flight

hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 Calendar
Months (whichever is earliest).
Refer to Repair No. 26.
CFM56-5B
Page 116
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Holes T1M,T2M, Maximum 38 mm (1.5 inches) diameter



tape.

Repair cracks on or before 7500 Flight

Gouges T1M, T2M, Maximum 0.25 mm (0.01 inch) depth, maximum

T3M 203,2 mm (8.0 inches) in length.

tape.

Replace tape if peeled or damaged.
Repair gouges on or before 7500 Flight

CFM56-5B
Page 117
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Nick, Scratch T1M, T2M, Maximum 0.25 mm (0.01 inch) depth, maximum
T3M 203,2 mm (8.0 inches) in length.

tape.

Repair nicks on or before 7500 Flight

Repair scratches on or before 7500 Flight

CFM56-5B
Page 118
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
4. Outer Panel Allowable Damage Limits and Non-monolithic Pivoting Doors -

(Effectivity T/R Serial No. All) - Unlimited Usage

Abrasion T1, T2, No carbon fiber damage allowed.
T3, T4,
T5 Seal surface damage (paint and surface
resin only) with aerodynamic tape.

Replace tape if peeled.
Abrasion, Upper T2/T Do Repair No. 8.

Rear Fairing
Interference
Crack T1, T2 Maximum allowable crack length is 25,4 mm (1.0

inch) in any direction.
Cracks must be separated from other cracks,

holes, and delaminations by a minimum of 187,5
mm (7.4 inches).
A maximum of five cracks is allowed per half

door.
Protect damaged area from entrance of moisture

by application of appropriate sealing tape.
Record location and inspect at 750 Flight

Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 Calendar Months
CFM56-5B
Page 119
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Gouge, T1, T2 Maximum allowable depth is 0,2 mm (0.008
Corrosion, T3, T4 inch), over a 203,2 mm (8.0 inches) length.
Nick, Scratch T5 Damage less or equal to 0,20 mm (0.008 inches)
in depth and 203,2 mm (8.00 inches) in
length, record location and inspect for damage
propagation on or before 750 Flight Hours /
750 Flight Cycles / 4 Calender Months
(whichever is earliest), and permanently
repair per SRM 54-01-01 or SRM Repair No.2 on
or before 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight
Cycles / 24 Calendar Months (whichever is
earliest).
Protect all un-repaired damage from entrance

of moisture by application of appropriate
sealing speed tape.
Damage greater than 0,20 mm (0.008 inches) in

depth and 203,2 mm (8.00 inches) in length,
Contact UTC Aerospace Systems for repair prior
to next flight.
Hole T1, T2 Maximum diameter is 25,4 mm (1.0 inch).
Holes must be separated from other holes,

cracks, and delaminations by a minimum of
188 mm (7.4 inches).
Maximum of five holes is allowed per half

door.
Protect damage area from entrance of moisture

with sealing tape.

CFM56-5B
Page 120
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Lightning Strike T6 If the damage is less than 50,8 mm (2.0
inches) in width, and less than 152,4 mm (6.0
inches) in length, clean the area thoroughly,
apply speed tape. Perform tap test every 300
flight hours. Do 54-30-00 Repair No. 13 on or
before 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles
/ 24 Calendar Months (whichever is earliest).
If the damage is in repair No. 13 6 o'clock no
damage allowed zone and less than or equal to
6,00 mm (0.236 inches) in width and less than
or equal to 132 mm (5.2 inches) in length
clean the area thoroughly, apply speed tape,
and do Repair No. 36 within 50 flight hours.
If the damage is greater than 50,8 mm (2.0

inches) in width, and greater than 152,4 mm
(6.0 inches) in length, clean the area, apply
speed tape, and do repair No. 13 within 50
flight hours.
Lightning Strike T6/T5 If the damage is less than 12,7 mm (0.5

inches) in width and 50,8 mm (2.0 inches) in
length, refer to 54-30-00 Repair No. 13 for
limitations and potting procedures. If the
damage is in Repair No. 13 6 o'clock no damage
zone and less than or equal to 27,0 mm (1.06
inches) in width and less than or equal to
46,0 mm (1.81 inches) in length do Repair No.
37.
Hole, crack, T6 Do Repair No. 13.

disbond, buckle
CFM56-5B
Page 121
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Crack T3 Effects: Kicker Plate Angle 1 and Kicker Plate
Angle 2 (Kicker Angle 1 and 2 = P/N 321-311-
400 and P/N 321-311-450).
Total combined crack length up to 5.20-inch

(132,1 mm) in any direction or at ends of
part. Stop drill crack with No. 30
(0.1285-inch, 3,264 mm) diameter. Refer to
Airbus A320 CFM56-5B, SRM 51-73-00, Chapter 6.
Stop drill Kicker Angle cracks only and do not
damage underlying structure. Restore Surface
Treatment Protection per A320 CFM56-5B SRM 54-
02-07.
Perform FPI and record length and location and
monitor at each 750 Flight Cycles or A-Check
whichever occurs first.
Limitation: 6000 FC
Replace Angle per CMM 78-32-36, Repair No. 47
At 6000 Flight Cycles or next “C” Check
whichever occurs first.
T3 Effects: Kicker Plate Angle 1 and Kicker Plate

Angle 2.
Total combined crack length greater than 5.20

inch (132,1 mm) to 7.00 inch (177,8 mm) in any
direction or at ends of part. Stop drill crack
with No. 30 (0.1285 inch, 3,264 mm) diameter.
Refer to Airbus A320 CFM56-5B, SRM 51-73-00,
Chapter 6. Stop drill Kicker Angle crack(s)
only and do not damage underlying structure.
Restore Surface Treatment Protection per A320
CFM56-5B SRM 54-02-07.
Perform FPI Inspection at every 50 Flight
Cycles. Limitation: 750 FC. Replace Angle per
CMM 78-32-36, Repair No.47 at 750 Flight
Cycles or “A” Check which ever occurs First.
T3 Effects: Kicker Plate Angle 1 and Kicker Plate

Angle 2.
Total combined crack length Greater than 7.00-

inch (177,8 mm).
Replace Angle per CMM 78-32-36, Repair No. 47.
Prior to next flight
CFM56-5B
Page 122
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D1) DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D2)
5D MINIMUM
WITH D = MAX (D1, D2)

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO DAMAGES
DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D1) FASTENER
(DIAMETER D3)
5D MINIMUM

MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN DAMAGE AND A FASTENER
DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D) FREE EDGE
2.5D MINIMUM
C1S-555-00
MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN DAMAGE AND A FREE EDGE
Allowable Distance between other Damages, Fasteners and Edges

Figure 105A
CFM56-5B
Page 123
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
X6062 X5690
X6705,6 (STA 238.66) (STA 224.01) X5268
(STA 264) X5842 (STA 207.4)
(STA 230)
Z890 (WL35) Z912 (WL35.9)

Z790 (WL31.1)
Z760 (WL30)
CONFIGURATION 1
X5143,5
AREA TA1 (STA 202.5)
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOF
COATING 0.118 in. (3 mm) THICKNESS
AREA TA2 X5435
THERMAL BLANKET (STA 213.98)
C1S-286-02
AREA TA3 X5168,5 X5155

HEAT SHIELDS (STA 203,48) (STA 202.95)

Left Heat Shields and Intumescent Fireproof Coating
CFM56-5B
Page 124
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
X6062 X5690
X6705,6 (STA 238.66) (STA 224.01) X5268
(STA 264) X5842 (STA 207.4)
(STA 230)
Z890 (WL35) Z912 (WL35.9)

Z790 (WL31.1)
Z760 (WL30)
CONFIGURATION 2 X5143,5
(STA 202.5)
AREA TA2
THERMAL BLANKET X5435
(STA 213.98)
C1S-353-01
AREA TA3 X5155

HEAT SHIELDS X5168,5 (STA 202.95)
(STA 203,48)

Left Heat Shields and Intumescent Fireproof Coating
CFM56-5B
Page 125
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
X5268 X5690 X5842 X6062

(STA 207.4) (STA 224.01) (STA 230) (STA 238.66) X6705,6
(STA 264)
Z912 (WL35.9) Z890 (WL35)
Z760 (WL30) Z790 (WL31.1)
CONFIGURATION 1
AREA TA1
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOF
X5143,5 COATING 0.118 in. (3 mm) THICKNESS
(STA 202.5)
AREA TA2
X5435 THERMAL BLANKET
C1S-287-02
(STA 213.98)
X5155 X5168,5 AREA TA3

(STA 202.95) (STA 203.48) HEAT SHIELDS
Right Heatshields and Intumescent Fireproof Coating
CFM56-5B
Page 126
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
X5268 X5690 X5842

(STA 207.4) (STA 224.01) (STA 230) X6062
(STA 238.66) X6705,6
(STA 264)
Z912 (WL35.9) Z890 (WL35)
Z760 (WL30) Z790 (WL31.1)
CONFIGURATION 2
X5143,5 AREA TA2

(STA 202.5) X5435 THERMAL BLANKET
C1S-354-01
(STA 213.98)
AREA TA3
X5168,5 HEAT SHIELDS
X5155 (STA 203.48)
(STA 202.95)
Right Heat Shields and Intumescent Fireproof Coating
CFM56-5B
Page 127
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
5. Heat Shields and Intumescent Fireproof Coating - Time Limited

Abrasion TA1 No damage allowed.
Repair intumescent fireproof coating before

next flight per CMM 78-32-36 Repair No.063.
Record location of repairs and inspect on or

before 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles /
4 Calender Months (whichever is earliest).
Scratch TA1 Maximum allowable depth is 1,5 mm (0.060

inch) for TA1 area, 2,0 mm (0.080 inch) for
TA2 area.

Months (whichever is earliest)
Crack, Hole TA3 No cracks or holes allowed. Repair or replace

heat shields that are cracked or have holes
before next flight.

CFM56-5B
Page 128
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
Hole, Peeling TA1 No damage allowed.
Repair intumescent fireproof coating before

next flight per CMM 78-32-36 Repair No.063.
NOTE: If the intumescent coating pink color

appears, recover it with RTV560 with a
brush.

NOTE: For one thrust reverser half 15

repairs are allowed and 3 repairs for
an area of 900 sq cm (139.5 sq in.)
for TA1, TA2.
CFM56-5B
Page 129
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
6. Heat Shields and Intumescent Fireproof Coating - Unlimited Usage

Gouge, Scratch TA3 Blend damage carefully to minimize material
Nick removal and to smooth nicked/scratched/gouged
edges. Blended area shall be within the
maximum ADL dimensions:
If the width of each damage is less than 2,0

mm (0.080 in), the maximum length of all
damages combined is 203,2 mm (8.0 in), and the
maximum depth of each damage is 0,2 mm (0.008
in), maintain minimum remaining thickness at
0,2 mm (0.008 in).
If at least one damage is greater than 2,0 mm

(0.080 in.) wide, the maximum area removal is
28 sq. mm (0.043 sq. in), and the maximum
depth of each damage is 0,2 mm (0.008 in),
maintain minimum remaining thickness at 0,2
mm (0.008 in.).
Missing or TA3 Maximum ten percent missing or uncrimped per

uncrimped rivets row of rivets. Missing or uncrimped rivets
must be separated by four good rivets.
Missing or uncrimped end rivets not allowed.
Record location and inspect at 750 Flight

Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 Calendar Months
CFM56-5B
Page 130
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Bulging, Gaps TA3 Allowable if there is no crack or hole. If
bulges or gaps in the exit heat shield
trailing edge are more than 0.157 in.(4,0 mm),
monitor on or before 750 Flight Hours / 750
Flight Cycles / 4 Calender Months (whichever
is earliest) or repair (Ref. SRM
54-30-00 Repair No. 12).
Heat Coloration TA3 Allowable if there is no other damage.

Months (whichever is earliest)
CFM56-5B
Page 131
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
7. Thermal Blankets - Time Limited

Any/All TA2 No damage allowed. Perform temporary repair
per SRM 54-30-00 Repair No. 19.
8. Thermal Blankets - Unlimited Usage

Any/All TA2 No damage allowed. Perform permanent repair
per CMM 78-32-36 Repair No. 58.
CFM56-5B
Page 132
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
INNER BARREL
AREA TAA2
AREA TAA3 1 in. (25,4 mm)
AREA TAA1 31.7 in. (942 mm) AREA TAA4

4.5 in. (115 mm)
AREA TAA2
AREA TAA1 AREA TAA3
1 in. (25,4 mm)
B
AFT RING
BLOCKER DOOR
AREA TAA3
1 in. (25,4 mm) A-A
AREA TCA1
AREA TCA4 1.1 in. (28,3 mm)
1 in. (25,4 mm)
AREA TCA3
0.8 in. (20 mm)
AREA TCA4
AREA TCA1
AREA TCA2
AREA TCA3
AREA TCA2
C1S-288-00
B AREA TCA4

Pivoting Door, Core Cowl and Ramp Fairing Inner Panels
Figure 108
CFM56-5B
Page 133
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
0.039 in.
(1 mm)
MAXIMUM
ACCEPTABLE GAP
SEAL
A
SEAL
3.4 in. RETAINER
2.9 in. (87 mm)
(73 mm)
B-B
3.8 in.
(96 mm)
3 in.
(76 mm)
2.4 in.
(62 mm) AREA TAA2
1.4 in.
(35 mm)
4.1 in.
(105 mm)
5.5 in.
5 in.
(140 mm)
(126 mm)
2.4 in.
(62 mm)
3.0 in.
AREA TAA2 (76 mm)
B B
C1S-289-00
2.9 in.
2.8 in. AREA TAA3
(73 mm) A (70 mm)
Allowable Damage Zones - Upper and Lower Pivoting Door Inner Panels
Figure 109
CFM56-5B
Page 134
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
PRECOOLER
SCOOP
AREA TAA2 AREA TAA3
7.87 in. AREA TAA4

(200 mm)
3.93 in.
(100 mm)
3.93 in. 3.93 in. 3.93 in.
(100 mm) (100 mm) (100 mm)
AREA TAA1
7.87 in.
C1S-290-01
(200 mm)
AREA TAA2 AREA TAA3

Allowable Damage Zones - Core Cowl Bifurcation Wall Inner Panels
Figure 110
CFM56-5B
Page 135
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
AREA TAA2/S
SIX O'CLOCK
SIDEWALL
C1S-291-00
A
Allowable Damage Zones - Six O’Clock Sidewall
Figure 111
CFM56-5B
Page 136
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
B
A
AREA TCA3
AREA TCA3
1.1 in.
(28 mm) AREA TCA2
3.2 in. C C
(82 mm)
1.1 in.
(28 mm)
AREA TCA3
0.8 in.
(20 mm) AREA TCA2
5.1 in. AREA TCA2
(131 mm)
AREA TCA3
0.8 in.
(20 mm)
A
B
AREA TCA2 AREA TCA2

6.2 in. 0.4 in.
(158 mm) (10 mm)
AREA TCA3 AREA TCA2

0.8 in. 2 in.
(20 mm) (49 mm) AREA TCA3
2.8 in. AREA TCA2
AREA TCA3 AREA TCA3 (70 mm)
1.3 in.
C1S-292-00
1.3 in.
(33 mm) (33 mm) C-C
B-B
Allowable Damage Zones - Upper Cut Corner Inner Panels
Figure 112
CFM56-5B
Page 137
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
B
1.22 in.
(31 mm)
C C 1.14 in.
0.98 in.
(29 mm)
(25 mm)
A
AREA TCA2
1.57 in. AREA TCA3

(40 mm) 1.3 in.
AREA TCA2 (33 mm)
2 in.
B (51 mm)
1.3 in.
(33 mm)
1.14 in. AREA TCA3
(29 mm) 0.8 in.
AREA TCA3 (20 mm)
A
AREA TCA2 AREA TCA3
0.51 in. 0.8 in.
(13 mm) (20 mm)
AREA TCA2
2.67 in.
(68 mm)
AREA TCA3
1.3 in.
AREA TCA3 (33 mm)
AREA TCA3 AREA TCA2 AREA TCA2
2.2 in.
1.3 in.
C1S-293-00
(56 mm) 1.06 in.

(33 mm) (27 mm)
C-C B-B
Allowable Damage Zones - Lower Cut Corner Inner Panels

Figure 113
CFM56-5B
Page 138
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
AREA TAA2/A
ONE OR
ELEVEN O'CLOCK
STRUT
AREA TAA2/T
C1S-294-00
Allowable Damage Zones - One or Eleven O’clock Strut

Figure 114
CFM56-5B
Page 139
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
9. Inner Panel Allowable Damage Limits - Time Limited

Delamination/ TAA1, TAA2 Maximum Diameter 37,5 mm (1.5 inches)
Disbond TCA1, TCA2
Delaminations must be separated from other
delaminations, holes, and cracks by a
minimum of 188 mm (7.4 inches).
A maximum of five delaminations is allowed

per half door.

Repair delaminations that have exceeded

maximum size.
It is recommended that all delaminations be

repaired no later than airplane 7500 Flight
Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 Calendar
Months (Whichever is earliest).
CFM56-5B
Page 140
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
10. Inner Panel Allowable Damage Limits - Unlimited Usage

Abrasion TCA1, TCA2 No carbon fiber damage allowed.
Seal surface damage with aerodynamic tape

(paint and surface resin only).
Replace tape if peeled.
Crack TAA1, TAA2, Maximum allowable crack length is 25,4 mm

TCA1, TCA2 (1.0 inch) in any direction.
Cracks must be separated from other cracks,

holes, and delaminations by a minimum of
187,5 mm (7.4 inches).
A maximum of five cracks is allowed per

half door.
Protect damaged area from entrance of

moisture by application of appropriate
sealing tape.

Crack on Six TAA2/S Do Repair No. 14.

O’Clock Sidewall
CFM56-5B
Page 141
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Dent - Six TAA2/S Maximum diameter is 50,8 mm (2.00 inch).
O’clock Sidewall, Maximum depth is 0,76 mm (0.030 inch).
Outer Skin
(Acoustic and Dents muust be smooth without sharp
Plain Skin creases, gouges, or cracks. Pulled or loose
Configurations) fasteners are not permitted.
(Gage: 1,02 mm
(0.040 inch) Maximum dents allowed per T/R Sidewall half
is 5.
Refer to Figures 119 to 121 for damage

spacing and distance from fasteners to
other damage. Refer to figures 116 and 118
for Allowable Damage Zone B size and loca-
tion.
Perform NDT Inspection for signs of cracks.
If cracks are found or damage exceeds

Allowable Damage Limits herein, contact
U.T.C. Aerospace Systems for repair prior
to next flight.
Unlimited use.
CFM56-5B
Page 142
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Dent - Six TAA2/S Maximum diameter is 27,2 mm (1.07 inch).
O’clock Sidewall, Maximum depth is 0,51 mm (0.020 inch).
Inner Skin
(Acoustic and Dents must be smooth without sharp creases,
Plain Skin gouges, or cracks. Pulled or loose fasten-
Configurations) ers are not permitted.
(Gage: 0,61 mm
(0.024 inch) Maximum dents allowed per T/R Sidewall half
is 5.
Refer to Figures 119 to 121 for damage

spacing and distance from fasteners to
other damage. Refer to figures 115 and 117
for Allowable Damage Zones A and B size and
location.
Perform NDT Inspection for signs of cracks.
If cracks are found or damage exceeds

Allowable Damage Limits herein, contact
U.T.C. Aerospace Systems for repair prior
to next flight.
Unlimited use.
Gouge, corrosion, TAA1, TAA3, Damage less than or equal to 0,20 mm (0.008
Nick, Scratch TAA4, TCA1, inches) in depth and 203,2 mm (8.00 inches)
TCA2 TCA3, in length, record location and inspect for
TCA4 damage propagation on or before 750 Flight
Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4 Calender
Months (Whichever is earliest), and
permanently repair per SRM Repair 54-01-01
or SRM Repair No. 2, on or before 7500
Calendar Months (Whichever is earliest).
Damage greater than 0,20 mm (0.008 inches)
in depth and 203,2 mm (8.00 inches) in
length, Contact U.T.C. Aerospace Systems
for repair prior to next flight.
CFM56-5B
Page 143
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Hole TAA1, TAA2, Maximum diameter is 25,4 mm (1 inch).
TCA1, TCA2
Holes must be separated from other holes,
cracks, and delaminations by a minimum of
187,05 mm (7.4 inches).
A maximum of five holes is allowed per half

door.
Protect damage area from entrance of mois-

ture by application of appropriate sealing
tape.

Buckle TAA3 Maximum allowable gap is 1.0 mm (0.039

inch)
for pivoting door seal retainer.
Repair gaps that exceed limit per Repair
No.7.
Record location of repair and inspect on or
/ 4 Calender Months (whichever is earli-
est).
CFM56-5B
Page 144
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.

Disbond, Door TAA3 Bond seal in its recess per Repair No. 7.
Seals Record location of repair and inspect on or
/ 4 Calender Months (whichever is
earliest).
Wear, One or TAA2/T Repair per Repair No. 30, or remove and
Eleven O’clock replace (Refer to CMM 78-32-36 Repair No.
Strut 39).
Crack, One or TAA2/A Remove and replace (Refer to CMM 78-32-36

Eleven O’Clock Repair No. 39).
Strut or Angle
Fitting
CFM56-5B
Page 145
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
2.1 SIX O'CLOCK LOWER BIFURCATION LHS - INNER SKIN
136,398 mm
(5.37 in.)
END OF HONEYCOMB
80 mmm
(3.15 in.)
137,922 mm
(5.43 in.) 80 mm
(3.15 in.)
AFT 57
84 FWD
EDGE (2.24 in.)
(3.3 in) EDGE
512 mm
(2.24 in.)
A DETAIL A
LOWER BIFURCATION AREA (FOR 6 OC SIDEWALL ACOUSTIC SKIN)
FWD
136,398 mm
(5.37 in.)
LIMIT OF HONEYCOMB
80 mm
137,922 mm (3.15 in.)
(5.43 in.)
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
AFT
EDGE 57 mm FWD
57 mm (2.24 in)
(2.24 in.) EDGE
ZONE A (ACOUSTIC SKIN CONFIGURATION)

C1S-583-00
ZONE B (SOLID/PLAIN SKIN CONFIGURATION) DETAIL A

LOWER BIFURCATION AREA (FOR 6 OC SIDEWALL PLAIN SKIN)
EXCLUDED ZONE (STAY-OUT AREA)
Six O’Clock Lower Bifurcation LHS - Inner Skin

Damage Zone Size and Locations (Acoustic and Plain Skin)
(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 115
CFM56-5B
Page 146
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
2.2 SIX O'CLOCK LOWER BIFURCATION LHS - OUTER SKIN
136,398 mm
(5.37 in) END OF HONEYCOMB
137,922 mm
(5.43 in)
EXCLUDED ZONE
(STAY-OUT AREA)
FWD AFT
EDGE EDGE
A DETAIL A
FWD 6 OC SIDEWALL AREA (ACOUSTIC SKIN)
136,398 mm
END OF HONEYCOMB
(5.37 in.)
80 mm
(3.15 in)
80 mm 137,922 mm
(3.15 in) (5.43 in.)
FWD 57 mm AFT
EDGE (2.24 in.) 57 mm EDGE
(2.24 in.)
DETAIL A
6 OC SIDEWALL AREA (PLAIN SKIN)
ZONE B (SOLID/PLAIN SKIN CONFIGURATION)
C1S-584-00
Six O’Clock Lower Bifurcation LHS - Outer Skin

(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 116
CFM56-5B
Page 147
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
2.3 LOWER BIFURCATION RHS-INNER SKIN
135,67 mm
(5.34 in.)
END OF HONEYCOMB
80 mm 257,763mm
(3.15 in.) (10.15 in.)
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
57 mm AFT
FWD 84 mm
(2.24 in.) EDGE
EDGE (3.3 in.)
DETAIL A
LOWER BIFURCATION AREA (FOR 6 OC SIDEWALL ACOUSTIC SKIN)
A
135,67 mm
(5.34 in.)
END OF HONEYCOMB
80 mm
(3.15 in.) 257,763 mm
(10.15 in.)
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
FWD 57 mm AFT
EDGE (2.24 in.) 57 mm EDGE
(2.24 in.)
DETAIL A
ZONE A (ACOUSTIC SKIN CONFIGURATION) LOWER BIFURCATION AREA (FOR 6 OC SIDEWALL PLAIN SKIN)
ZONE B (SOLID/PLAIN SKIN CONFIGURATION)

C1S-585-00
EXCLUDED ZONE (STAY - OUT AREA)
Lower Bifurcation RHS - Inner Skin

(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 117
CFM56-5B
Page 148
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
2.4 SIX O'CLOCK SIDEWALL RHS - OUTER SKIN 135,67 mm

(5.34 in)
END OF HONEYCOMB
257,763 mm
(10.15 in.)
EXCLUDED ZONE
(STAY-OUT AREA)
AFT
EDGE FWD
EDGE
A DETAIL A
6 OC SIDEWALL AREA (ACOUSTIC SKIN)
135,67 mm
(5.34 in.)
257,763 mm
(10.15 in.)
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
80 mm
(3.15 in.)
AFT 57 mm
FWD
EDGE 57 mm (2.24 in.)
EDGE
(2.24 in.)
DETAIL A
6 OC SIDEWALL AREA (PLAIN SKIN)
C1S-586-00
ZONE B (SOLID /PLAIN SKIN CONFIGURATION)
Six O’Clock RHS - Outer Skin

(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 118
CFM56-5B
Page 149
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3.1 DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO DAMAGED AREAS
X
S1 S2
D1 D2
NOTE:
X = DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO DAMAGE AREAS, X=4 MAX (D1,D2)
S1 AND S2 ARE DAMAGED AREAS
D1 IS THE MAXIMIUM DIAMETER OF THE CIRCLE AROUND S1
IF X < X MINIMUM, DO THE REPAIR FOR ONE LARGE DAMAGED AREA THAT
INCLUDES TWO SMALLER DAMAGED AREAS AND AND THAT HAS A DIAMETER
D WITH D = D1+D2+X
C1S-587-00
Distance Between two Damage Areas

(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 119
CFM56-5B
Page 150
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
3.2 DISTANCE BETWEEN DAMAGED AREA AND FASTENER ROW
FASTENER
S1 D1
D2
NOTE:
S1 IS THE DAMAGED AREA
E = MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN THE DAMAGED AREA AND THE FASTENER ROW, E = 2 x (D1 + D2) C1S-588-00
Distance Between Damage Area and Fastener Row

(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 120
CFM56-5B
Page 151
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3.3 DISTANCE BETWEEN DAMAGED AREA AND FREE EDGE
S1
FREE EDGE
D1
NOTE:
B = DISTANCE TO THE FREE EDGE, B = 2 D1
S1 IS THE DAMAGED AREA
D1 IS THE MAXIMUM DIAMETER OF THE CIRCLE AROUND S1
C1S-589-00
Distance Between Damage Area and Free Edge

(ADL Zone TAA2/S)
Figure 121
CFM56-5B
Page 152
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
11. Adapter Ring Allowable Damage Limits - Unlimited Usage

Crack TAR1, TAR2, No Cracks allowed, contact UTAS
TAR3A,TAR3B,
TAR4, TAR5A,
TAR5B, TAR5C
Corrosion TAR1, TAR2, Minimum Allowable thickness after damage

removal 5,9 mm (0.23 inches)
TAR3A, Minimum Allowable thickness after damage

TAR3B, Minimum Allowable thickness after damage

TAR4 Minimum Allowable thickness after damage

For the above, remove corrosion per SRM

54-01-01 Damage Cleanup. Protect per SRM
54-02-00 General Repair Procedures,
Protective Treatment off Metals.
If beyond any of the above limits contact

UTAS.
CFM56-5B
Page 153
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
12. Adapter Ring Allowable Damage Limits - Time Limited

Corrosion TAR5A, Minimum Allowable thickness after damage
removal 6,3 mm (0.25 inches). After repair
replace Ring Segment at 7500 Flight Hours
/ 5000 FC / 24 Calendar Months (whichever
is earliest).
TAR5B, Minimum Allowable thickness after damage

removal 6,15 mm (0.242 inches). After
repair replace Ring Segment at 7500 Flight
Hours / 5000 FC / 24 Calendar Months
Corrosion TAR5C, Minimum Allowable thickness after damage
(continued) removal 5,7 mm (0.22 inches). After repair
replace Ring Segment at 7500 Flight Hours
/ 5000 FC / 24 Calendar Months (whichever
is earliest).
For the above: Corrosion that crosses zones

use the thickest minimum remaining value.
Remove corrosion per SRM 54-01-01 Damage
Cleanup. Blend per 51-73-00, for Ring
Segments 3 & 4 surface finish 0,8 μm to 0,2
μm (32 μinch to 8 μinch) must be attained.
For all other segments surface finish of
3,2 μm to 0,4 μm (125 μinch to 16 μinch) is
acceptable. Perform an HFEC per A320 NTM
51-10-08 HFEC Inspection for Surface
Breaking Cracks in Aluminum or Titanium
Alloy Materials at hole locations near
corrosion removal. Protect per SRM 54-02-00
General Repair Procedures, Protective
Treatment of Metals. Shim Adapter Ring at
damage removal locations per SRM 51-70-20
General Repair Requirements paragraph 1.A.
Figure 006.
CFM56-5B
Page 154
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
ADAPTER RINGS
A
RH ADAPTER RINGS
LH ADAPTER RINGS
(2 THRU 10)
(1 THRU 9)
ALL458-001-0
ALL458-901-0
321-458-101-0
321-458-801-0
1
321-458-201-0 2 321-458-701-0
3
4
5 6
8
7
321-458-601-0
321-458-301-0 10
9
321-458-501-0
321-458-400-0
C1S-580-00
VIEW A LH VIEW A RH
Adapter Rings
CFM56-5B
Page 155
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ENGINE TYPICAL SECTION

FAN
FLANGE
ADAPTER
RING ADAPTER
RING
TAR3A 12 O'CLOCK
TAR3B ENGINE ACOUSTIC PANEL
0 = 17°
0 = 23°
TAR5
SEE SHEET 3
1
3 TAR4 OUTER
FLANGE
IMPACTED AREA
(UPPER SEGMENTS)
5
TAR3
7
IMPACTED
AREA TAR1
9 (LOWER
SEGMENTS) TAR2
BULB SEAL
C1S-581-00
TAR3B 6 O'CLOCK
LEFT HAND SHOWN RIGHT HAND OPPOSITE
LOOKING FORWARD
Allowable Damage Zones - Adapter Rings
CFM56-5B
Page 156
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
TAR5A
3.5 IN.
TAR5B (90 mm)
6.5 IN. ARC
(165 mm)
ARC
12 O'CLOCK
TAR5C
TO END OF 1
TAR5B
ALL OF 3
1
TAR5C
8.9IN.
(226 mm)
3
ARC
TAR5B 5
TO END OF 5
7
TAR5B
4 IN.
(102 mm)
ARC 9
TAR5C
TO END OF 7
6 O'CLOCK
TAR5B
ALL OF 9
C1S-582-00
LEFT HAND SHOWN RIGHT HAND OPPOSITE

LOOKING FORWARD
Allowable Damage Zones - Adapter Rings

CFM56-5B
Page 157
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 158
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
THRUST REVERSER REPAIR INDEX

Repair No. 1 Small Area Panel Delamination . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 2 Nick, Gouge and Small Hole Repair . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 3 Scratch Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 5 Corrosion Inspection, Removal Limits & Rework
1 or 11 O’Clock Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3 or 9 O’Clock Struts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12 O’Clock Hinge Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Forward Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3 and 9 O’Clock Beam Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 10 Corrosion Inspection, Removal Limits &
Painting 6 and 12 O’Clock Cut Corner Cavities . . . 201
Repair No. 11 Repair the R/H Thrust Reverser Lower Box Seal
Carrier Angle/Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 12 Repair the Thrust Reverser Exit Heat Shield . . . . . 201
Repair No. 13 Thrust Reverser Aft Edge
Damage Doubler Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 14 Installation of a Doubler to Repair Damage
to the Side Wall at the 6 O'clock position . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 15 Lower Bifurcation Perforated Skin External
Patch Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 16 Upper Bifurcation Solid Skin External Patch Repair . . 201
Repair No. 17 Thrust Reverser Upper & Lower Pivot Door Latch
Fitting Worn Hole Bushing Repair . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 18 Temporary Repair Using Doublers to Repair Cracks in
Upper Fan Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 19 Thrust Reverser Temporary Thermal Blanket Bonded
Patch Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 20 Thrust Reverser 3/9 O’Clock Keel Beam Crack
Permanent Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Repair No. 21 Cleaning and Lubricating of the Latch Fitting Pin
and Roller on the Upper and Lower Pivoting Door . . 201
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Repair No. 22 Thrust Reverser Upper and lower Pivot Door Latch Fitting 201
Worn Area Weld Repair.
Repair No. 23 THRUST REVERSER 6 O’Clock Outer Cut Corner Cutout 201
Panel Damaged Hole Repair
Repair No. 24 THRUST REVERSER 3/9 O’Clock Beam Outer Panel Dam- 201
aged Hole Repair
Repair No. 25 Small Area Delaminatio Repair on the left and Right 201
Monolithic Outer Panel of the upper and lower
Pivoting Doors
Repair No. 26 Composite Skin Damage (Nicks, Gouges And Small 201
Holes) Repair On The Left And Right Monolithic
Outer Panel of The Upper And Lower Pivoting Doors
Repair No. 27 Hole Damage Repair On The Left And Right Monolithic 201
Outer Panel of The Upper And Lower Pivoting Doors
Repair No. 28 Thrust Reverser Lower 6 O’Clock Lightning Strike 201
Damage Blend Repair
Repair No. 29 Thrust Reverser 3/9 Keel Beam Crack/Corrsion 201
Allowable Damage Repair
Repair No. 30 Thrust Reverser 1 or 11 O’clock Strut Splice 201
Installation Repair
Repair No. 31 Thrust Reverser - 12 O’clock Hinge Beam And Clamping- 201
plate - Blend Repair
Repair No. 32 Thrust Reverser - 12 O’Clock Hinge Beam - Doubler 201
Repair
Repair No. 33 Thrust Reverser - 12 O’Clock Clamping Plate - Doubler 201
With Filler Repair
Repair No. 34 Thrust Reverser IFS - Aft Edge - Blend And Doubler 201
Repair
Repair No. 35 Thrust Reverser - 6 O’Clock Latch Fitting Aft Edge - 201
Blend Repair
Repair No. 36 Thrust Reverser - 6 O’Clock Aft Ring Aft Edge - Light- 201
ning Strike Repair
Repair No. 37 Thrust Reverser - 6 O’Clock Aft Ring Aft Edge - Light- 201
ing Strike Repair Including Fasteners
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Repair No. 1
Small Area Panel Delamination Repair
1. General
A. This procedure may be used to repair a bond separation between outer/

inner skin and core on the upper and lower pivoting door outer panels
non-perforated region of core cowl panel, upper and lower cut corners,
and aft ring. This type of damage is repaired by the injection of
adhesive to bond the skin to the core.
B. The repair is limited to disbonds up to 4.0 inches (101,6 mm) in

diameter, except the aft ring which is limited to 3.0 inches (76,2 mm)
in diameter. The repair is limited in location and must be a minimum of
2.0 inches (50,8 mm) from edge closures, doublers, pandowns, and
splices. The repair must be a minimum of 4.0 inches (101,6 mm) from
other reinforced areas (Hinge Fittings, Latch Fittings, etc.).
A. Use tap test method to find area of delamination.
B. Use a size No. 30 drill and drill a series of three 0.1285 inch (3,26
mm) injection holes on one side of the delaminated area and a series of
vent holes on the opposite side. Vacuum up any drill debris. (See
Figure 201)
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
D. Mix required amount of adhesive per manufacturer instructions.
E. Pour adhesive into an injecting syringe.
F. Inject adhesive into holes until delaminated area is completely filled

and adhesive exits through vent holes.
G. Remove unwanted adhesive.
H. Put a piece of nonporous parting film over delaminated area and tape in
position. Apply mechanical pressure to the area. Use adequate pressure
to ensure positive contact between skin and core.
I. Put a heat blanket over delaminated area and cure at 82 to 93 degrees C

(180 to 200 degrees F) for 60 minutes or 24 hours at room temperature.
J. Remove heat blanket and parting film.
K. Remove any unwanted adhesive and smooth to a feather-edge with 150- to

320-grit abrasive paper as necessary to give a smooth surface.
CHEMICALS.
L. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
M. Check repair area for correct bonding. Use tap test method.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
N. Apply surface finish over the repair area. (See Repair No. 4, Surface
Finish Restoration.)

Adhesive System, Epoxy EA9394 V33564
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Blanket, Heat -18 to 121 degrees C V61426
(0 to 250 degrees F) Atacs Products, Inc.
10W/In.2 850 South Cambridge Street
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Silicon Carbide
Probe, Temperature -18 to 121 degrees C Commercially Available
(0 to 250 degrees F)
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Syringe, Injection Plastic Nozzle Commercially Available
Tape, Teflon 50,8 mm (2.0 Inches) Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Panel Delamination Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 2
NICK, GOUGE, SCRATCH, CORROSION, AND SMALL HOLE REPAIR
1. General
A. This procedure may be used to repair a nick, gouge, scratch, corrosion,

or small hole on the:
(1) Outer and inner skins of the upper and lower pivoting door outer
panels
(2) Outer and inner skins of the core cowl panel.
B. The damage is repaired by blending or removing the damaged skin and

filling the area with adhesive.
C. Repair Limits:
(1) Damage size:
(a) Upper pivot door outer panel, maximum 0.40 inches (10,2 mm) in
diameter.
(b) All other areas maximum 1 inch (25,4 mm) diameter.
(2) Location:
(a) Minimum of 2.0 inches (50,8 mm) from edge closures, doublers,
pandowns and splices.
(b) Minimum of 4.0 inches (101,6 mm) from other reinforced areas
(Hinge Fittings, Latch Fittings etc.).
(3) Separation of repairs:
(a) Minimum 7.4 inches (188 mm) must be maintained.
(b) For cut corner panels, one repair allowed per corner panels.
A. Drill or cut out damage using smallest diameter and depth possible to
remove all damage. (See Figure 201.)
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
C. Mark out repair area with Teflon tape.
D. Mix necessary amount of adhesive as instructed in Repair General.
(1) Add 5 percent-by-weight of microballoons and mix fully to get a

paste consistency.
E. Fill repair cutout with adhesive/microballoon mixture with a spatula.
F. Put a piece of nonporous parting film over repair and tape in position.
G. Put a heat blanket over the parting film and cure at 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C) for 60 minutes or 24 hours at room temperature.
H. Remove heat blanket, parting film, and mask tape.
I. Sand to a feather-edge with 150-grit to 320-grit abrasive paper as

necessary to get a smooth surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
J. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
K. Apply surface finish over the repair area. (See Repair No. 4, Surface
Finish Restoration.)

Adhesive System, Epoxy EA9394/EA934NA V33564
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Blanket, Heat -17.8°C-121°C V61426
(0°F-250°F) Atacs Products, Inc.
10W/In. 2 850 South Cambridge Street
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
13503 Pulmice St
Phone: (562) 404-2440
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.

Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Silicon Carbide
Probe, Temperature -17.8°C-121°C Commercially Available
(0°F-250°F)
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
Wide
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
Nick, Gouge, and Small Hole Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 3
SCRATCH REPAIR
1. General
A. This procedure gives instructions to repair a scratch to the outer

composite skin up to 0.010 inches (0,25 mm) deep on all left and right
thrust reverser upper and lower pivot doors and aft ring honeycomb
panel sections. The depth of the damage does not include the thickness
of the primer and paint layers. The damaged area is filled with
adhesive and made smooth with abrasive paper. No carbon fabric is used
for this repair.
B. Scratch must be at least 1.5 inches (38,1 mm) away from defects,
fasteners, or edges. For scratches deeper than 0.010 inches (0,25 mm),
treat as a crack.
Use 150 grit or finer abrasive paper.

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: DO NOT BREAK MOR MAKE CARBON FIBERS THIN IN THE AREA TO BE
REPAIRED. IF THE FIBERS ARE DAMAGED THEN THE PART CAN BE MADE
WEAK.
B. If applicable, remove paint layers around the damage with 150 grit
abrasive paper. Do not damage or remove additional carbon fibers.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
D. Mark out repair area with Teflon tape. (See Figure 201.)
E. Mix required amount of adhesive. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions

for mixing.
CHEMICALS.
(1) Add 5 percent-by-weight of microballoons and mix fully to get a

paste aspect.
F. Fill repair area with adhesive/microballoon mixture using a spatula.

Add enough adhesive to fill the repair area and be above the skin
surface.
G. Put a piece of nonporous parting film over repair and tape in position.
H. Put a heat blanket over the parting film and cure at 180°F to 200°F)
(82°C to 93°C) for 60 minutes or 24 hours at room temperature.
I. Remove the heat blanket, parting film and mask tape.
J. Sand to a feather-edge with 150 grit to 320-grit abrasive paper as

necessary to get a smooth surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
K. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
L. Apply surface finish over the repair area. (See Repair No. 4, Surface
Finish Restoration).
3. Repair Materials and equipment
DESCRIPTION DESIGNATION MANUFACTURING

Adhesive System EA934NA V33564
P.O. Box 312
Epoxy Paste Adhesive EA9394
Base Part A
Catalyst Part B Phone: (800) 257-7522
Blanket, Heat -17.8°C - 121°C V61426

(0°F - 250°F), 10W/in.2 Atacs Products, Inc.
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Microballoons Phenolic, 135 Micron Malayan Adhesives and
Chemicals
No. 9 Jalan Utas 15/7
40200 Shah Alam Selangor
Danul
Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Paper, Abrasive Silicone Carbide 80, 50,280, Commercially Available
320 Grit
Probe, Temperature -17.8°C - 121°C Commercially Available
(0°F - 250°F)
Solvent Isopropyl Alcohol, 99% pure Commercially Available
or
MIBK/MEK Blend (60% Methyl V5E821
Isobutyl Ketone/40% Methyl Univar U.S.A., Inc.
Ethyl Ketone 532 E. Emaus Street
Middletown, PA 17057-2200
or Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Spatula Metal or plastic Commercially Available
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (51 mm) Wide Commercially Available
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
SCRATCHES OUTER SKIN
MARK OUT AREA

WITH TEFLON TAPE
CORE
INNER SKIN
(NON PERFORATED)
FILL WITH
ADHESIVE AND CURE
REMOVE MASK TAPE AND

ABRASIVE SAND REPAIR AREA
FOR AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHNESS
C1S-143-00
Scratch Repair - Honeycomb Outer Panels
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
SCRATCHES OUTER SKIN
MARK OUT AREA

WITH TEFLON TAPE
FILL WITH
ADHESIVE AND CURE
REMOVE MASK TAPE AND

ABRASIVE SAND REPAIR AREA
FOR AERODYNAMIC SMOOTHNESS
C1S-563-00
Scratch Repair - Monolithic Outer Panel

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 4
1. General
section.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary U.S. export control
Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation con-


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 5
CORROSION INSPECTION, REMOVAL LIMITS & REWORK
1 OR 11 O’CLOCK STRUTS
1. General
This repair provides instructions to inspect for corrosion and rework the
corroded areas of the 1 or 11 O’clock struts. A surface finish is then
applied to inhibit corrosion in this area. The allowable corrosion removal
limits are provided in Table 201 and Figures 201 and 202. Section 4
provides the instructions to blend out the damage and apply surface
treatment. This repair is applicable to struts which are removed from the
thrust reverser.
2. Inspection
A. Gain access to the 1 and 11 O’clock struts.
(1) Open fan cowls. Refer to AMM, chapter 71-13-00.
(2) Make thrust reverser unserviceable. Refer to AMM, chapter

78-30-00.
(3) Open thrust reverser. Refer to AMM, chapter 78-36-00.
B. Remove the 1 and 11 O’clock struts from the thrust reverser.
(1) Refer to CMM 783236 Repair No. 39 for strut removal procedure.
C. Inspect the struts.
(1) Clean the struts with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(2) Perform visual inspection of the strut under sufficient lighting

and 10 power magnification.
(3) Identify type of corrosion, i.e. light pitting, surface corrosion

or intergranular/exfoliation corrosion.
3. Allowable Limits
A. See Table 201 and Figures 201 and 202 for limits.
Zone Allowable Limits Repair

Zone A 2 inch by 2 inch (50,8 x 50,8 mm) if the Repair per section 4
corrosion depth is less than 0.1 inch
(2,54 mm) with a minimum remaining
metal thickness. See Figure 201.
Several corrosion areas can be allowed
if they are separated by a 1 inch (25,4
mm) wide safe material area.
Zone B
Zone B1 (This No damage allowed Repair per SRM
zone is the Repair No. 15.
interior side Comply with section
of Zone B) 4
Zone B2 (This Corroded surface amount must be less Repair per section 4
zone is the than 0.01 inch (0,254 mm) deep in this
exterior side area
of Zone B)
Zone C No damage allowed Discard strut
1/11 O’clock Strut Allowable Limits
Table 201
4. Repair Instruction
After performing the inspection of section 2, you find no corrosion, go to

paragraph 4B. If corrosion is found on Zone A or Zone B2, repair, refer to
the following instructions of paragraph 4A.
A. Removal of severe pitting/exfoliation corrosion.
Follow SRM, chapter 51-74-00, paragraphs 5 and 6 for corrosion removal

techniques. Do not use chemicals for corrosion removal.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Remove the corrosion with aluminum oxide or an abrasive cloth. Use
180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide paper. Maintain a blend ratio of 10
to 1.
ALTERNATE PROCEDURE: Corrosion may be removed by abrasive blasting per

CFMI Standard Practices Manual, chapter 70-22-13. After all corrosion
has been removed, smooth the surface by fine abrasive blasting per CFMI
Standard Practices Manual, chapter 70-22-21.
becomes dry.
(3) Perform a visual inspection of the area using 10 power

magnification to verify that all corrosion has been removed. If any
defect remains, repeat step (1) until no corrosion remains.
(4) Measure the maximum depth of material removed using a dial

indicator. If the corrosion removal exceeds the limits of Table
201, discard the strut.
(5) Perform a dye penetrant inspection of the complete strut. Refer to

CFMI Standard Practices Manual, chapter 70-32-13. If any cracks
are found, discard the strut.
B. Apply chemical conversion coating.
(1) Fully abrade the complete strut with 180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide
paper. This step is not necessary if the strut surface has been
blasted.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(3) Apply chemical conversion coating (Alodine 1200) to all surfaces

of the strut. Refer to CFMI Standard Practices Manual, chapter
70-62-12. Rinse with clear water.
C. Apply 10-4P-2 epoxy primer.
NOTE: Epoxy primer should be applied within 10 hours of alodine.
(1) Mix the primer and the curing agent in a metal or glass container
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(2) Mix fully and let stand for 30 minutes.
(3) Apply primer to all surfaces of strut with brush or spray.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(4) Let primer dry, refer to manufacturer’s instruction.
D. Apply AERODUR C21/100UVR polyurethane topcoat. Refer to CFMI Standard

Practices Manual, chapter 70-64-15.
(1) Prepare the paint, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Each paint layer thickness must be between 0.001 inch to

0.002 inch (0,025-0,050 mm).
(2) Apply 3 layers of paint on the surfaces of 1 or 11 O’clock struts.
(3) Let the paint air dry, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction.
E. Install the strut.
(1) Refer to Repair No. 10 for installation procedure.
F. Close the reverser.
(1) Close thrust reverser. Refer to AMM, chapter 78-36-00.
(2) Make thrust reverser serviceable. Refer to AMM, chapter 78-30-00.
(3) Close fan cowl doors. Refer to AMM, chapter 71-13-00.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.

Cloth, Cotton Commercially Available
Tape, Adhesive Commercially Available
Abrasive Paper 180-240 Grit Commercially Available
Aluminum oxide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Abrasive Cloth Scotch Brite V76381
3M301D 3M Corporate Headquarters
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Henkel Corporation
Primer, Epoxy 10-P4-2 V0KXA5
Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Top Coat AERODUR V0KXA5
Polyurethane C21/100UVR Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Dial Indicator Commercially Available
Table 202
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
1 or 11 O’clock Zone Identification

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
1 or 11 O’clock Minimum Remaining Thickness

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 6
3 OR 9 O’CLOCK STRUTS
1. General
This repair provides instructions to inspect for corrosion and rework the
corroded areas of the 3 or 9 O’clock struts. A surface finish is applied
to inhibit corrosion in this area. The allowable corrosion removal limits
are provided in Table 201 and Figures 201 and 202. Section 4 provides the
instructions to blend out corrosion and apply surface treatment.
2. Inspection
A. Gain access to the 3 and 9 o’clock struts.
(1) Open fan cowls. Refer to AMM, Chapter 71-13-00.
(2) Make thrust reverser unserviceable. Refer to AMM, Chapter

78-30-00.
(3) Open thrust reverser. Refer to AMM, Chapter 78-36-00.
B. Inspect the struts.
becomes dry.
(2) Perform visual inspection of the strut under sufficient lighting

and 10 power magnification.

CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3. Allowable Limits, See Figures 201 & 202 and Table 201.
A. This section provides the allowable corrosion removal limits for each
zone of the 3 or 9 O’clock strut.
(1) These limits are applicable in case severe pitting and/or

exfoliation corrosion has been identified.
(2) These fly on limits were developed considering all zones to be at

their minimum value. The limits can be enlarged on a case by case
basis, after evaluation of an operators actual thickness
measurement report.
(3) If the allowed limits are exceeded or if corrosion is found in the

areas other than as defined in this section, a specific operator
report is necessary for disposition of the damage on a case by case
basis.
ZONE DAMAGE/SIZE MIN. THICKNESS REPAIR

All Any corrosion within the allowed Refer to Figure 202 Repair Per
limits. No Corrosion allowed in section 4
the shaded area
All Any corrosion exceeding the Beyond limits of Report to Rohr
allowed limits or corrosion in the Figure 202 on Appendix
shaded area Form 1
All Corrosion through the thickness Hole Report to Rohr.
of struts Replace strut
3 or 9 O’clock Strut Allowable Limits

Table 201
After performing the inspection of section 2, you find no corrosion, go to

paragraph 4. B. If corrosion is found on Zone A or Zone B2, repair, refer
to the following instructions of paragraph 4. A.
Follow SRM, chapter 51-74-00, paragraphs 5 and 6 for corrosion removal

techniques. Do not use chemicals for corrosion removal.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(1) Remove the corrosion with aluminum oxide or an abrasive cloth. Use
180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide paper. See Figure 203, (sheets 1
thru 4).
becomes dry.
(3) Perform a visual inspection of the area using 10 power

(4) Smooth all reworked areas to a surface finish of 63 micro inches.
(5) Measure the minimum remaining thickness after rework using the
ultrasonic measuring equipment. Follow vendors instructions for
use of the equipment. The right techniques and probes should be
used to obtain accurate results. See Table 202 for recommended
equipment and probes.
(6) If the remaining thickness is within limits provided in Figure 202

and Table 201, proceed with this repair. If the remaining thickness
is less than what is provided for that zone, prepare a detailed
damage report on appendix Form 1 and contact Rohr, Inc. for further
advice.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Apply chemical conversion coating (Alodine 1200) to all surfaces

of the strut. Refer to CFMI Standard Practices Manual, chapter
70-62-12.
(2) Rinse area fully with clear water.
(3) Apply primer to all surfaces with brush or spray.
D. Apply AERODUR C21/100UVR polyurethane topcoat. Refer to CFMI Standard

Practices Manual, chapter 70-64-15.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(1) Prepare the paint, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Each paint layer thickness must be between 0.001 inch to

0.002 inch (0,025-0,050 mm).
(2) Apply 3 layers of paint on the surfaces of the 3 or 9 O’clock

strut.
(3) Let the paint air dry, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction.
E. Close the reverser.
(1) Close thrust reverser. Refer to AMM, Chapter 78-36-00.
(2) Make thrust reverser serviceable. Refer to AMM, Chapter 78-30-00.
(3) Close fan cowl doors. Refer to AMM, chapter 71-13-00.

Aluminum oxide
99 percent pure
or
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Chemical coating Alodine 1200 V71410
Henkel Corporation
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Ultrasonic Panametrics SOFRANEL
Thickness Gage Model 25DL Societe Francaise
d’Electronique
59 Rue PARMENTIER
78500 SARTROUVILLE, FRANCE
Sensor, 3mm Panametrics SOFRANCE
Microdot
M208RM
Pen sensor Panametrics SOFRANCE
Microdot
V260SM
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
3 or 9 O’clock Zone Identification

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
3 or 9 O’clock Minimum Remaining Thickness

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Removal of Severe Pitting

Figure 203 (sheet 1 of 4)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
1
THE CORROSION IS CLEANED UP TO THE
EXTENT THAT ALL LOOSE CORROSION
PRODUCTS HAVE BEEN REMOVED.
2
ROUGH EDGES ARE SMOOTHED AND
ALL CORROSION HAS BEEN REMOVED.
HOWEVER, DEPRESSION HAS NOT
BEEN SHAPED.
3
PROFILE AFTER BLENDING
L
NA
U DI
IT
NG
LO
C1S-156-00
Removal of Exfoliation Corrosion

CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 7
12 O’CLOCK HINGE BEAM
1. General
This repair gives the instructions to inspect for corrosion, to rework the
corroded areas and to apply corrosion prevention compound (CPC) to inhibit
further corrosion for the 12 O’Clock hinge beam. The beam is divided into
different zones (Figure 201) and the corrosion removal limits for each
zone of the beam is provided in Table 201 and Figure 202. Section 4 covers
the instructions to blend out damage and apply surface treatment.
2. Inspection
The hinge beam is made from 2024 aluminum alloy forging, heat treated and
naturally aged. Early stages of corrosion may appear as pitting. More
severe corrosion will appear as white powdery deposits and in advanced
cases as exfoliation (lifting of layers)
A. Gain access to the hinge beam
(1) Open the fan cowls. Refer to AMM, Chapter 71-13-00.
(2) Make the thrust reverser unserviceable. Refer to AMM, Chapter 78-
30-00.
(3) Remove the hinge access panel Fairing Brackets and hardware. Refer
to AMM, Chapter 78-32-41.
NOTE: The following step requires that the thrust reverser be

removed from the engine. Therefore the inspection and CPC
application for the cavities under the heatshield should be
performed at the next shop visit.
(4) Remove the pop rivets, TLPD419BS (7 positions) which attach the
upper heatshield 321-164-802-6 to the 12 O’Clock beam. Lightly
bend the heatshield to gain access, see Figure 203.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
B. Inspect the hinge beam for signs of corrosion.
(1) Clean all exposed cavities of the beam with a clean lint-free cloth
(2) Perform visual inspection of the hinge beam under sufficient

lighting and 10x power magnification. Pay special attention to
areas where water can accumulate.

(4) Refer to Figure 201 for identification of different zones for the
hinge beam. Section 3 has the allowable corrosion removal depths
for each zone.
zone of the hinge beam.
(1) These limits are applicable in areas where severe pitting and/or

measurement report.
(3) If the limits are exceeded or if corrosion is found in areas other

than those defined, (including hinge lugs and pivot zone), a
specific operator report is necessary to define flyable limits or
to provide repairs.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

A thru Y Light pitting less than or NA Apply CPC per
equal to 0.001 in. (0,025 section 4
mm) depth
A thru Y Severe pitting more than Minimum remaining Blend repair per
0.001 in. (0,025 mm) depth thickness within section 4
and/or exfoliation within limits of Figure
allowed limits 202
A thru Y Exfoliation corrosion Exceeds limits of Report to UTAS on
exceeding allowed limits Figure 202 appendix 1 form
Hinge Beam Allowable Limits

Table 201
NOTE: Beams may be unpainted or painted and the following applies to

either configuration.
If after performing the inspection in section 2, you find no corrosion or

if you find light to moderate pitting corrosion less than or equal to
0.001 inch (0.025 mm) deep, comply with paragraph 4.E through 4.G. For
severe pitting, or exfoliation corrosion, repair with the following
instructions of paragraph 4.A through 4.G.
Follow the A319/A320/A321 SRM, chapter 51-74-00, paragraphs 5 and 6 for

corrosion removal techniques. Do not use chemicals for corrosion
removal, use only mechanical means.
NOTE: This may require the removal of paint, primer and chemical
conversion coating. This step will accomplish that.
(1) Remove the corrosion by abrading with aluminum oxide or non

metallic abrasives. Use 180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide paper. See
Figure 204, (sheets 1 thru 4).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(3) Perform a visual inspection of the area using 10x power

equipment and probe.

is less than what is provided for that zone, contact UTAS for
further advice.
(1) Apply chemical conversion coating (Bonderite M-CR 1200S) to all

reworked surfaces of the beam. Refer to CFMI Standard Practices
Manual, Chapter 70-62-12.
(2) Rinse area thoroughly with clear water.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C. Apply 10-4P-2 epoxy primer to treated surfaces.
NOTE: This is a preventative measure and shall be applied. Removal of

paint is not required.
in accordance with the manufacturer‚Äôs instructions.
(2) Stir mixture thoroughly and let stand for 30 minutes.
(3) Apply primer to all reworked surfaces with brush or spray.
(4) Let primer dry, refer to the manufacturer‚Äôs instruction.
D. Apply AERODUR C21/100UVR polyurethane topcoat.
(1) Prepare the paint, refer to the manufacturer‚Äôs instructions.
NOTE: The paint layer thickness must be between 0.001 inch to

0.002 inch (0,025-0,050 mm).
(2) Apply a layer of paint on all treated surfaces.
(3) Let the paint dry in the air, refer to the manufacturer‚Äôs
instruction.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Apply CPC to the hinge beam, refer to next paragraph.
E. Apply corrosion prevention compound, (CPC).
(1) Apply CPC (see Table 202) to arrest existing corrosion or to

prevent onset of new corrosion.
(2) Spray CPC on all exposed areas of the hinge beam. Allow 18 hours to
cure before return to service.
F. Re-install the heatshield and the hinge access panel.
(1) Attach the upper heatshield 321-164-802-6 with TLPD419BS or

CR3523-4-() rivets (7 positions).
(2) Install the hinge access panel Fairing Brackets and hardware.
Refer to the Aircraft Maintenance Manual, Chapter 78-32-41.
(3) Make the thrust reverser serviceable. Refer to the Aircraft

Maintenance Manual, Chapter 78-30-00.
(4) Close the fan cowl panel. Refer to the Aircraft Maintenance Manual,
Chapter 71-13-00.
G. Record corrosion removal data.
(1) Record all removal dimensions for each zone.
NOTE: In order to improve the corrosion protection of the hinge

beam, the operators are advised to comply with service
bulletin 78-96, part 3. The Maintenance Planning Document
(MPD) will also require monitoring and application of CPC
to the corrosion prone areas of the thrust reverser.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Rivets TLPD419BS Commercially Available
Alt.: CR3523-4-()
Aluminum oxide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Chemical Conversion Bonderite M-CR 1200S V71410
coating Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Polyamide Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Brush, paint Commercially Available
d‚ÄôElectronique
59, Rue PARMENTIER
Sensor, 3 mm Panametrics SOFRANEL
(0.118 in) Dia Microdot
M208RM
Pen sensor Panametrics SOFRANEL
Microdot
V260SM
Corrosion Prevention AMLGUARD per V0FTT5
Compound (CPC) MIL-C-85054 LHB Industries
8833 Fleischer Place
St. Louis, MO 63134-1000
Phone: (800) 542-3697
OR
Corrosion Prevention ARDROX 3302 per V23373
Compound (CPC) MIL-C-16173 Brent America, Inc.
16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA 90638
(714) 739-2821
www.aerospace.chemetall.com
OR
Corrosion Prevention Ardox AV-30 per V23373
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
A A
HEATSHIELD
C D E F G L N P R T U W Y
A B I J H K M O Q S V X
C D E F G L N P R T U W Y
C1S-196-01
12 O’Clock Beam Zone Identification

CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., otherof Goodrich
ROHR, INC.
R1 ATTACHMENT
R2 ATTACHMENT
PIVOT ATTACHMENT
12 O'CLOCK HINGE BEAM
R3 ATTACHMENT
NOTE: NO CORROSION IS PERMITTED IN THE ATTACHMENT AREAS

(R1, R2, R3 AND PIVOT ATTACHMENTS) EXCEPT IN THE ZONES
WHICH ARE DEFINED IN FIGURE 202
C1S-197-01
12 O’Clock Beam Zone Identification

CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
NOTE: REDUCTION THICKNESS IS NOT NOTE: 0.0YY (X,X) IS REMAINING FLY ON LIMIT
PERMITTED AROUND HOLES WITHIN THICKNESS IN INCHES WITH MILLIMETERS
A 5 (127) DIA. AREA. SEND A REPORT IN PARENTHESES
TO ROHR INC. CASE BY CASE.
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES WITH
NOTE: 0.157 (4,0) CORNER RADIUS MUST BE MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
KEPT EVERYWHERE AFTER GRINDING.
0.079 (2,0)
0.071 (1,8)
1.30 (33)
0.40 (10) A 0.079 (2,0)

TYPICAL
0.031 (0,8)
0.040 (1,0) B 0.025 (0,65)
0.028 (0,7) E
D
F
0.059 (1,5)
C
0.067 (1,7)
0.59 (15)
0.079 (2,0)
NO FURTHER LIMIT PERMITTED C1S-198-01
Hinge Beam Minimum Allowable Thickness

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
ROHR, INC.
0.079 (2,0) 1.30 (33)

TYPICAL
0.079 (2,0)
0.51 (13)
0.40 (10)
J
0.071 (1,8)
F 0.063 (1,6)
0.071 (1,8)
G
0.59 (15)
NO THICKNESS REDUCTION ALLOWED
C1S-199-01

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
H1
0.086 (2,2)
0.111 (2,8)
0.079 (2,0)
H H2 0.138 (3,5)
C1S-200-01

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
ROHR, INC.
L M Y
0.079 (2,0)
TYPICAL VIEW FROM M TO Y
0.079 (2,0)
0.079 (2,0)
C1S-201-01

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
A A
REMOVE THE RIVETS

TLPD419BS
(7 OR 8 POSITIONS)
PARTIALLY BEND THE

HEATSHIELD
321-164-802-6
C1S-202-01
Heatshield Removal
Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
1
THE CORROSION IS CLEANED UP TO THE
EXTENT THAT ALL LOOSE CORROSION
PRODUCTS HAVE BEEN REMOVED.
2
ROUGH EDGES ARE SMOOTHED AND
ALL CORROSION HAS BEEN REMOVED.
HOWEVER, DEPRESSION HAS NOT
BEEN SHAPED.
3
PROFILE AFTER BLENDING
L
I NA
IT UD
NG
LO
C1S-156-00

CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Prepared By:
Date:
Subject: A320/CFM56-5B-Thrust Reverser-12 O’Clock Hinge Beam
YOUR REFERENCE(SHEET 1 OF 13)
OPERATOR
AIRCRAFT MODEL
MSN
AIRCRAFT
HRS/CYCLES
ENGINE POSITION
PART ASSEMBLY NUMBER
UTAS SERIAL NUMBER
HISPANO-SUIZA SERIAL NUMBER
PART ASSEMBLY CYCLE/HRS
NOTE:SEND A COPY OF THIS REPORT TO THE ADDRESS BELOW:

UTAS Aerospace, Aerostructures Group
Customer Support
850 Lagoon Drive
Chula Vista, California 91910-2098
Fax Number 1-619-498-7218
Appendix Form 1 (Sheet 1 of 13)
CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
C A C
D D
E B E
F F
I
J
G G
H
K
L L
M
N N
O
P P
Q
R R
S
T T
U U
V
W W
X
Y Y
C1S-204-01
Identification of 12 O’Clock Beam Areas/Left and Right Hand

CFM56-5B
Page 221
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
ROHR, INC.
NOMINAL REMAINING X Y d1 X d 2mm

PANEL
THICKNESS THICKNESS DIMENSION DIMENSION DIMENSION
B1 2 mm 1,2 mm 10 mm 20 mm 30 mm X 35 mm
B2 2 mm 1,2 mm 0 mm 5 mm 8 mm X 10 mm
A
X B1
d1
d2
d1 d2
C
Y
PLE Y
D
XAM B2
R E
FO E
C1S-205-00
Example for Left Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 222
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Left 12 O’Clock Beam

CFM56-5B
Page 223
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 224
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 225
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 226
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 227
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 228
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 229
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Right 12 O’Clock Beam

CFM56-5B
Page 230
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 231
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 232
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 8
FORWARD FRAME
1. General
corroded areas and apply corrosion prevention compound (CPC) to inhibit
further corrosion for the forward frame. This repair is applicable to the
areas of the forward frame (aft side) which are visible through the pivot
door openings. For the 6 and 12 O’Clock areas of forward frame, refer to
repair 10.
2. Inspection
The forward frame is made from 2024 aluminum alloy forging, heat treated
and naturally aged. Early stages of corrosion may appear as pitting. More
cases as exfoliation (lifting of layers).
A. Gain access to the forward frame.
(2) Make the thrust reverser unserviceable. Refer to AMM, Chapter

78-30-00.
(3) Manually open the pivoting doors. Refer to AMM, Chapter 78-32-41.
(4) Gain access to the aft side of the forward frame.
B. Inspect the forward frame.
(1) Clean cavities of the frame with a clean lint-free cloth and the
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) Perform visual inspection of the frame under sufficient lighting

and 10x power magnification.

(4) Refer to Figure 201 for identification of different zones for the
forward frame. Section 3 has the allowable corrosion removal
depths for each zone. Section 4 covers the blend out and surface
finish instructions.
(5) The upper and lower segments of the frame (cut corner cavities)
will not be accessible. The instruction to gain access to these
areas along with inspection, repair and paint requirements will be
covered in SRM Repair No. 10.
A. This section gives the allowable corrosion removal limits for aft side
of the forward frame.


measurement report.

report is necessary to disposition the damage on a case by case
basis. Prepare a detailed damage report on the attached Appendix 1
form and submit to UTAS for further advice.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

D thru Light pitting Less than or NA Apply CPC per
Q3 equal to 0.001 in.(0,025 mm) section 4
depth
D thru Severe pitting more than 0.001 Minimum remaining Blend repair per
Q3 in. (0,025 mm) depth and/or thickness within section 4
exfoliation within allowed limits of Figure
limits 0.157 in. (4 mm) radius 202
on all blended corners
Reduction of thickness is not
allowed within 5 x dia of holes
except where indicated No
scratches are allowed
D thru Exfoliation corrosion Less than the Report to UTAS
Q3 exceeding allowed limits minimum allowed per on Appendix 1
Figure 202 Form
Forward Frame Allowable Limits
Table 201
NOTE: Frames may be unpainted or painted and the following applies to

After performing the inspection in section 2, you find no corrosion or if

you find light to moderate pitting corrosion less than or equal to 0.001
inch (0,025 mm) deep, apply corrosion prevention compound (CPC) to the
frame per paragraphs 4.E. through 4.G. For severe pitting, or exfoliation
corrosion, repair with the following instructions of paragraphs 4.A.
through 4.G.

removal.
NOTE: This may require the removal of paint, primer, and chemical
conversion coating, This step will accomplish that.
(1) Remove the corrosion by abrading with aluminum oxide or non

metallic abrasives. Use 180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide paper. See
Figure 203, (sheets 1 thru 4).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.

defect remains, repeat step (1) until no corrosion remains. Do not
remove more material than is necessary to remove corrosion.

damage report, (Appendix 1) and contact UTAS for further advice.
(1) Apply chemical conversion coating (Bonderite M-CR 1200S) to all

reworked surfaces of the frame. Refer to CFMI Standard Practices
Manual, Chapter 70-62-12.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) Rinse area thoroughly with clear water.
C. Apply 10-4P-2 epoxy primer to treated surfaces.
(2) Stir mixture thoroughly and let stand for 30 minutes.
(3) Apply primer to all reworked surfaces with brush or spray.
(4) Let primer dry, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction.
(1) Prepare the paint per manufacturer’s instructions.

0.002 inch (0,025-0,050 mm).
(2) Apply a layer of paint on all treated surfaces.
(3) Let the paint dry in the air, refer to the manufacturer’s
instruction.
E. Apply corrosion prevention compound (CPC).
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
NOTE: This is a preventative measure and shall be applied. removal of

(1) Apply 2 coats of CPC (see Table 202) to arrest existing corrosion
or to prevent onset of new corrosion. Allow 4 hours to cure before
application of the second coat. Allow 18 hours to cure before
return to service.
(2) Spray CPC to all exposed areas of the forward frame.
F. Close the pivoting doors.
(1) Manually close the pivoting doors. Refer to the Aircraft


Chapter 71-13-00.
G. Record corrosion removal data.
(1) Record all removal dimensions for each zone on the appropriate
appendix form and also in aircraft’s records.
NOTE: In order to improve the corrosion protection of the forward

frame, the operators are advised to comply with service
bulletin 78-96, part 3. The Maintenance Planning Document
(MPD) will also require monitoring and CPC application to
the corrosion prone areas of the thrust reverser.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Aluminum Oxide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Adhesive EA934NA V33564
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Sensor, 3mm Panametrics d’Electronique
Microdot 59, Rue PARMENTIER
M208RM 78500 SARTROUVILLE, FRANCE
Pen, Sensor Panametrics SOFRANEL

Microdot
V260SM
St. Louis, MO 63134-1000
Phone: (800) 542-3697
OR
16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA 90638
(714) 739-2821
OR
Corrosion Prevention ARDROX 3140 V01PQ6
Compound (CPC) Chemetall US, Inc.
675 Central Avenue
New Providence, NJ 07974
Phone: (908) 464-5571
FAX: (908) 464 9250
www.chemetallna.com
OR
Corrosion Prevention ARDROX AV-30 per V23373
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Forward Frame Zone Identification

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
NOTE: 0.157 (4,0) CORNER RADIUS NOTE: 0.0YY (X,X) IS REMAINING THICKNESS IN
MUST BE KEPT EVERYWHERE INCHES WITH MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES
AFTER GRINDING.
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
WITH MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
AFT
LOOKING
FORWARD
0.050 (1,27)
(EVEN AROUND THE HOLE)
G1
0.161 (4,10)
0.191 (4,85)
D
A 0.051 (1,30)
A = =
A-A
0.12 (3,05)
TYPICAL VIEW AROUND HOLE
0.071 (1,80) AROUND HOLE
WITHIN 6 TIMES X DIAMETER D
EXCEPT WHEN INDICATED
D
C1S-222-02
Forward Frame Minimum Remaining Thickness

CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
NOTE: 0.157 (4,0) CORNER RADIUS MUST NOTE: 0.0YY (X,X) IS REMAINING THICKNESS IN
BE KEPT EVERYWHERE AFTER GRINDING. INCHES WITH MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
0.211 (5,35) NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES WITH

MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
0.033 (0,85) 0.230 (5,85)
0.161 (4,10)
0.052 (1,32)
AROUND HOLE 0.191 (4.85)
WITHIN 0.050 (1,27)
6 TIMES
HOLE DIA.
= = G1 AFT
B-B LOOKING
0.435 (11,05) FORWARD = =
3.579 (90,90) E1 C-C
MAXIMUM DIA.
E1
0.13 (3,30)
(EVEN AROUND HOLES)
B
0.189 (4,80) E 0.142 (3,60)
SPOT FACE
B ACTUATOR ATTACHMENT
0.6 (15)
0.189 (4,80)
0.669 (17)
0.063 (1,60) F C
1.00 (25) C
G
0.6 (15) TYPICAL VIEW AROUND HOLE
G2 EXCEPT WHEN INDICATED
0.787 (20) D
0.179 (4,55)
1.00 (25)
0.071 (1,80)
0.033 (0,85) (EVEN AROUND THE HOLE)
C1S-223-02

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
NOTE: 0.157 (4,0) CORNER RADIUS NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES WITH
MUST BE KEPT EVERYWHERE MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
AFTER GRINDING.
NOTE: 0.0YY (X,X) IS REMAINING THICKNESS IN
INCHES WITH MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
G2
0.051 (1,30)
H
0.051 (1,30)
I1 I
0.033 (0,85) 0.061 (1,55)

0.050 (1,27) J
AROUND HOLE
WITHIN 6 TIMES
HOLE DIA.)

EXCEPT ZONE I1
AFT D
LOOKING
FORWARD
C1S-224-02

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
NOTE: 0.157 (4,0) CORNER RADIUS MUST NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES WITH
BE KEPT EVERYWHERE AFTER GRINDING. MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
0.122 (3,10)
0.152 (3,85)
0.132 (3,35) 0.13 (3,35)

= =
AROUND HOLE 0.152 (3,85)
WITHIN A 2.0 (50) DIA. D-D
0.051 (1,30)
= =
AFT E-E
D
LOOKING
D FORWARD
0.142 (3,6)
K 0.041 (1,05) 0.171 (4,35) AROUND HOLE
WITHIN 6 TIMES HOLE DIAMETER
L 0.051 (1,30)
L2
E F
E F F-F
M
N1
L1 0.071 (1,80) AROUND HOLE
D
0.051 (1,30)
(EVEN AROUND HOLES)
0.051 (1,30)
C1S-225-02

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
0.161 (4,10) INCHES WITH MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.

WITHIN 6 TIMES HOLE DIAMETER

0.191 (4,85)
D
= =
G-G
AFT
L2
LOOKING
FORWARD
0.179 (4,55)
L1
M
0.669 (17)
0.051 (1,30)
N1
G
0.787 (20)
0.043 (1,10)
0.057 (1,46) AROUND HOLE O1 G
WITHIN 6 TIMES HOLE DIAMETER 0.142 (3,60)
N2 SPOT FACE
ACTUATOR ATTACHMENT
0.061 (1,55)
N3 0.189 (4,80)
0.189 (4,80)
P3
(EVEN AROUND HOLES)
C1S-226-02

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
0.201 (5,10) NOTE: 0.0YY (X,X) IS REMAINING THICKNESS IN
0.230 (5,85)
0.161 (4,10)
= 0.191 (4,85)
0.112 (2,85)
=
= 0.112 (2,85)
=
0.063 (1,60) 0.051 (1,30)
H-H
0.435 (11,05) 0.063 (1,60) 0.041 (1,05)
3.579 (90,90) J-J
0.12 (3,05)
MAXIMUM DIA.
(EVEN AROUND HOLE) 0.161 (4,10)
0.13 (3,30)
0.13 (3,30) 0.191 (4,85) AROUND HOLE
(EVEN AROUND HOLE)
(EVEN AROUND HOLE) WITHIN 6 TIMES HOLE DIAMETER
P3
P3 0.191 (4,85)
H
O2 P1 K
0.051 (1,30)
N3
P2 H Q1 K
= =
H 0.041 (1,05) K-K
P4 J
0.051 (1,30) Q3 0.071 (1,80) AROUND HOLE
D EXCEPT WHEN INDICATED
0.051 (1,30)
H Q2
0.051 (1,30) J 0.041 (1,05)

AFT LOOKING FORWARD
C1S-227-02
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Identification of Forward Frame Areas/Left and Right Hand

Repair Number 8 Appendix Form 1 (Sheet 2 of 15)
CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Example for Left Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 221
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
NOMINAL REMAINING X Y
PANEL
THICKNESS THICKNESS DIMENSION DIMENSION
D
C1S-240-01
Left Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 222
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER MAXIMUM

BORE #2 #3 #4 DIAMETER
#1
E
PANEL SURFACE
E
F
G
G
C1S-239-01
Left Forward Frame
CFM56-5B
Page 223
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Left Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 224
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Left Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 225
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Left Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 226
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
DAIMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER DIAMETER MAXIMUM

BORE #2 DIAMETER
#1 #3 #4
P1
PANEL SURFACE
O2
P1
P2
P3
P4
Q1
Q2
Q3
P1
P3
Q
O2
Q2
P2
P4
Q3
C1S-235-00
Left Forward Frame
CFM56-5B
Page 227
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
PANEL SURFACE
C1S-234-01
Right Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 228
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

#1
E
PANEL SURFACE
E
F
G
G
C1S-239-01
Right Forward Frame
CFM56-5B
Page 229
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Right Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 230
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Right Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 231
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Right Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 232
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

#3
P1
PANEL SURFACE
O2
P1
P2
P3
P4
Q1
Q2
Q3
P1
P3
Q1
O2
Q2 P2
P4
Q3 C1S-229-01
Right Forward Frame

CFM56-5B
Page 233
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 234
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 9
3 AND 9 O’CLOCK BEAM FITTINGS
1. General
This repair gives instructions to inspect for corrosion, rework the

corroded areas and apply protective coatings to the accessible areas of
the 3 and 9 O’clock beam fitting. A corrosion prevention compound (CPC) is
also applied to inhibit further corrosion. The allowable corrosion removal
limits are provided in Table 201 and Figure 201. Section 4 covers the
instructions to blend out the damage and apply surface treatment.
2. Inspection
A. Gain access to the 3 and 9 O’clock fittings.
(2) Make the thrust reverser unserviceable. Refer to AMM, Chapter

78-30-00.
(3) Remove the deploy switch access door. Refer to AMM, Chapter
78-31-17.
(4) Remove the deploy switch. Refer to AMM, chapter 78-31-17.
B. Inspect the beam fittings.
(1) Clean the beam fittings with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(2) Perform visual inspection of the fittings under sufficient

lighting and 10 power magnification.

CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
3. Allowable Limits, See Figure 201 and Table 201.
zone of the 3 or 9 O’clock beam fittings.

(2) These fly on limits were developed at the minimum value. The limits
can be enlarged on a case by case basis, after evaluation of an
operators actual thickness measurement report.

basis.

All Light pitting corrosion less NA Apply CPC per
than 0.001 in. (0,025 mm) deep section 4. E at
every “4A” check
A Severe pitting more than 0.001 0.078 in (2 mm) Blend repair and
in. (0,025 mm) deep and/or minimum thickness treat per section
exfoliation within limits 4
A Exfoliation Corrosion exceeding Remaining Report to Rohr
allowed limits Thickness less than
0.078 in (2 mm)
3 or 9 O’clock Beam fittings Allowable Limits

Table 201
After the inspection of section 2 is completed and no corrosion is found,

go to paragraph 4.B. If corrosion is found, repair with the subsequent
instructions of paragraph 4.A.

removal.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(1) Remove the corrosion with aluminum oxide or non metallic

abrasives. Use 180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide paper. See Figure 203
(sheets 1 thru 4).
becomes dry.
(3) Perform a visual inspection of the area with a 10 power

defect remains, repeat step (1) until no corrosion remains. Do not
remove more material than necessary to remove corrosion.
(5) Measure the minimum remaining thickness after rework with the
(6) If the remaining thickness is the within the limits provided in

Figure 201 and Table 201, proceed with this repair. If the
remaining thickness is less than what is provided for that zone,
prepare a detailed damage report and contact Rohr, Inc. for further
advice.
B. Apply chemical conversion coating. See Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(2) Apply chemical conversion coating (Alodine 1200) to all the areas
of the beam fitting shown in Figure 202. Refer to CFMI Standard
Practices Manual, Chapter 70-62-12.
(3) Flush area thoroughly with clear water.
NOTE: Epoxy primer should be applied in less than 10 hours of alodine.
(1) Mix primer and curing agent in a metal or glass container in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply primer to surfaces shown in Figure 202 with brush or spray.
(1) Prepare the paint, refer to manufacturer’s instructions.

0.002 inch (0,025-0,050 mm).
(2) Apply a layer of paint to the primed surfaces of 3 or 9 O’clock

beam fitting.
(3) Let the paint dry in the air, refer to manufacturer’s instruction.
E. Apply Corrosion Prevention Compound (CPC).
(1) Apply CPC (see Table 202) to stop the corrosion that exists or to
prevent the start of new corrosion.
(2) Spray CPC to all exposed areas of the beam fittings. Allow 18 hours
to cure before return to service.
(3) Install the deploy switch. Refer to AMM, chapter 78-31-17.
(4) Install the deploy switch access door. Refer to AMM, chapter
78-31-17.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Chapter 71-13-00.
F. Close the reverser.

Aluminum oxide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Henkel Corporation
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Ultrasonic Thickness Panametrics SOFRANEL
Gage Model 25DL Societe Francaise
Sensor, 3mm Panametrics d’Electronique
Microdot 59, Rue PARMENTIER
M208RM 78500 SARTROUVILLE, FRANCE
Pen Sensor Panametrics SOFRANEL

Microdot
V260SM
St. Louis, MO 63134-1000
Phone: (800) 542-3697
OR
16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA 90638
(714) 739-2821
OR
Corrosion Prevention Dinitrol AV-30 per V23373
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3 or 9 O’clock beam Zone Identification

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
Areas To Be Painted
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 10
CORROSION INSPECTION, REMOVAL LIMITS & PAINTING
6 AND 12 O’CLOCK CUT CORNER CAVITIES
1. General
corroded areas and apply paint for the forward frame’s 6 and 12 O’clock
cut corner cavities. To get access to the frame, remove the upper and
lower cut corner panels. This procedure is applicable to thrust reversers
that are removed and are in the shop. For the 6 and 12 o’clock bolt
inspection see CMM 78-32-36 Repair 2.
2. Inspection
The forward frame is made from 2024 aluminum alloy forging, heat treated
and naturally aged. Early stages of corrosion may appear as pitting. More
cases as exfoliation (lifting of layers).
A. Option 1: To get access to the 6 and 12 O’clock cut corner areas to

perform an inspection of the frames.
(1) Remove the outer 12 O’clock cut corner panel. Refer to the
Component Maintenance Manual, Chapter 78-32-36, repair No. 12 for
instructions. Proceed to 2.A.(2). or 2.C.
(2) Remove the outer 6 O’clock cut corner panel. Refer to the Component
Maintenance Manual, Chapter 78-32-36, repair No. 13 for
instructions. Proceed to 2.C.
B. Option 2: To get access to the outer 6 & 12 O’Clock cut corner areas to
perform an inspection of the frames.
(1) 12 O’Clock cut the corner area.
(a) Remove the screws (IPL 7-695,700).
(b) Remove the access door (IPL 7-690).
(c) Retain access door and screws for installation.
(d) Perform a bore scope inspection of the forward frame AFT face
upper and middle cavities for evidence of corrosion.
(e) If there is evidence of corrosion, proceed to 2.A.(1), else

proceed to (f).
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(f) If no signs of corrosion is found, apply a layer of CPC on the

AFT face of the fwd frame.
(g) Install the access door (IPL 7-690).
(h) Install the screws (IPL 7-695,700).
(2) 6 O’clock cut corner areas.
(a) Drill a 0.275 inch (7,0 mm) hole on the 6 O'clock cut corner
panel (sidewall) per Figure 201 Sheet 2. Permissible to use
existing inspection hole on sidewall frame if available.
(b) Perform a bore scope inspection of the forward frame AFT face
lower cavity areas for evidence of corrosion.
(c) If there is evidence of corrosion, proceed to 2.A.(2), else

proceed to (d).
CHEMICALS.
(d) If no signs of corrosion is found, gain access through the

hole in the sidewall and spray a layer of CPC on the AFT face
of the fwd frame.
C. Inspect the forward frame.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(1) Remove unwanted material from the cavities with filtered

compressed air.
(2) Clean cavities of the frame with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(3) Perform visual inspection of the frame under sufficient lighting

and 10x power magnification.

(5) Refer to Figure 201 for identification of zones for the forward
frame upper and lower segments. Section 3 has the allowable
corrosion removal depths for each zone. Section 4 covers the blend
out and surface finish instructions.
A. This section gives the allowable corrosion removal limits for the cut
corner cavities of the forward frame.

(2) These fly on limits were developed considering all zones to be

simultaneously at the minimum thickness value shown in Figure 202.
The limits of individual zones may be enlarged on a case by case
basis, after evaluation of an actual thickness measurement report
submitted by the operator.
(3) If the allowed limits are exceeded or if corrosion is found in

basis.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

All Light pitting less than or NA Apply finish per
equal to 0,025 mm (0.001 in) section 4
depth
All Severe pitting more than Minimum remaining Blend repair and
0,025 mm (0.001 in) depth thickness within surface treatment
and/or exfoliation within limits of Figure 202 per section 4
allowed limits 4 mm (0.157
in) radius on all blended
corners Reduction of
thickness is not allowed
within 6 x dia of holes
except where indicated No
scratches are allowed
All Exfoliation corrosion Less than the Report to UTAS
exceeding allowed limits minimum allowed per
Figure 202
Forward Frame Allowable Limits
Table 201
NOTE: Frames may be unpainted or painted and the following applies to

After performing the inspection in section 2, no corrosion is found or if

light to moderate pitting corrosion less than or equal to 0.001 inch
(0,025 mm) deep is found, apply surface finish to the 6 and 12 O’clock
areas of forward frame, refer to paragraph 4.E. and 4.F. For severe
pitting or exfoliation corrosion, repair with the following instructions
of paragraphs 4.A. through 4.F.

removal.
NOTE: This may require the removal of paint, primer, and chemical
conversion coating. This step will accomplish that.
(1) Remove the corrosion with aluminum oxide or non-metallic

abrasives. Use 180 to 240 grit aluminum oxide paper. See Figure
203, (sheets 1 thru 4).
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.

(6) If the remaining thickness is in the limits provided in Figure 202

damage report and contact UTAS. for further advice.
(1) Use Scotch Brite to clean the surface or to remove minor pittings.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply chemical conversion coating, (Bonderite M-CR 1200S) to all

the exposed frame surfaces in the 6 and 12 O’clock cavities. Refer
to CFMI Standard Practices Manual, Chapter 70-62-12.
(4) Flush area thoroughly with clear water.
NOTE: Epoxy primer should be applied within 10 hours of Bonderite M-CR

1200S.
(2) Mix thoroughly and let stand for 30 minutes.
(3) Apply primer to the forward frame in the 6 and 12 O’clock cavities
with brush or spray.
(4) Let primer dry, refer to the manufacturer’s instruction.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(1) Prepare the paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

0.002 inch (0,025-0,050 mm).
(2) Apply a layer of paint into all surfaces of the forward frame in
the 6 and 12 O’clock cut corner cavities.
(3) Let the paint dry in the air in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instruction.
E. Apply corrosion prevention compound (CPC).
NOTE: This is a preventative measure and shall be applied. Removal of

(1) Apply 2 coats of CPC (see Table 202) to prevent onset of new
corrosion. Allow 4 hours to cure before the application of the
second coat.
(2) Spray CPC to all exposed areas of the forward frame in the upper
and lower cavities.
F. Install the cut corner panels.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Install the outer 12 O’clock cut corner panel. Refer to the
instructions.
(2) Install the outer 6 O’clock cut corner panel. Refer to the
instructions.

Aluminum oxide
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Brush, paint Commercially Available
d’Electronique
59, Rue PARMENTIER
Sensor, 3mm Panametrics SOFRANEL
Microdot
M208RM
Pen, Sensor Panametrics SOFRANEL
Microdot
V260SM
St. Louis, MO 63134-1000
Phone: (800) 542-3697
OR
16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA 90638
(714) 739-2821
OR
Corrosion Prevention ARDROX 3140 V01PQ
Compound (CPC Chemetall US, Inc.
675 Central Avenue
New Providence, NJ 07974
Phone: (908) 464-5571
FAX: (908) 464-9250
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Forward Frame Zone Identification

CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
VALID FOR SIDEWALL P/N 321-031-205/206-0
A
A
PAN DOWN
HOLE DIA. 7 (0.27)

IN THE CENTER OF THE PAN DOWN
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS

WITH INCHES IN PARENTHESES.
C1S-228-00
12 O’clock Cut Corner Minimum Remaining Thickness

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.


MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
0.081 (2,06)
0.090 (2,29)
AROUND HOLE
A1 WITHIN 6 TIMES
0.042 (1,07) DIAMETER
A 0.042 (1,07)
AFT
LOOKING
FORWARD
B3
B2
B1
0.051 (1,30)

D
C1S-217-02
6 O’clock Cut Corner Minimum Remaining Thickness

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES WITH NOTE: 0.0YY (X,X) IS REMAINING THICKNESS IN
MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES. INCHES WITH MILLIMETERS IN PARENTHESES.
R 0.037 (0,94)
0.042 (1,07)
0.042 (1,07)
U1
0.061 (1,55)

D
C1S-218-02

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 11
REPAIR THE R/H THRUST REVERSER LOWER BOX SEAL CARRIER ANGLE/RETAINER
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to trim the edge and cutout of a R/H
thrust reverser lower box seal retainer that has been found chafing with a
engine fuel manifold. The trimming of this seal retainer should give the
needed clearance to prevent chafing of the engine fuel manifold. The seal
retainer is made from 0,81 mm (0.032 inch) thick stainless steel.
NOTE: THIS REPAIR CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED at 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight
Cycles / 4 calendar months (whichever the earliest) OR at 7500
Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever
the earliest).
A. Open the Right Hand Thrust Reverser Cowl. (Refer to AMM 78-36-00)
B. Locate the 321-166-051-6 seal retainer. (Refer to figure 201)
C. Locate the cutout on the flange of the seal retainer. (Refer to figure
201.)
CAUTION: USE CARE TO NOT DAMAGE THE BOX SEAL WHEN TRIMMING THE RETAINER.
D. Enlarge the depth of cutout past the bend radius of the retainer to
0.125 inch (3,175 mm). Maintain the corner radius, 2 places, of 0.119
inch (3,022 mm). (Refer to figure 201)
E. Prepare the cutout edges and seal.
(1) Use abrasive paper 180 grit or finer or equivalent to remove sharp
edges of cutout.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(2) Clean the edges of cutout with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(3) Apply RTV106 or equivalent to the edges of the cutout. Let cure per
the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: If primer is required for alternate sealant, refer to

manufacturer’s instructions prior to sealant application.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Paper, Abrasive 180 or finer Grit Commercially Available
Silicone Carbide
Sealant RTV 106 V01139
Alternate DC93-006 Momentive Performance Material Inc.
Primer PR-1200 260 Hudson River Rd.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Seal Retainer Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 12
REPAIR THE THRUST REVERSER EXIT HEAT SHIELD
1. General
This procedure gives instructions to bond the trailing edge of a thrust

reverser cowl exit heat shield that has been found with bulging or
waviness. Bulging or waviness more than the allowable limits, is allowed
if there are no cracks or holes, and the heat shield is monitored at A-
check. Refer to (SRM 54-30-00 Allowable Damage-Thrust Reverser).
This repair removes the A-check inspection interval by restoring the
contour of the exit heat shield.
CAUTION: THE HEAT SHIELD IS THIN 0.012 INCH (0,30 MM) STAINLESS STEEL AND
CAN BEND EASILY. DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO DO THIS PROCEDURE.
DAMAGE CAN OCCUR TO THE HEAT SHIELD IF TOO MUCH FORCE IS USED.
A. Remove and reform the heat shield. (Refer to Figure 201)
(1) Remove the TLPD419BS rivets that attach the exit heat shield to the
thrust reverser cowl. Use care not to damage the heat shield.
(2) Remove the exit heat shield from the thrust reverser cowl.
(3) Put the heat shield on a suitable work station to maintain proper
contour and to avoid damage during this procedure.
(4) Form the waviness or bulging of heat shield to the proper contour.
Use care to make area smooth.
B. Clean the faying surfaces of the exit heat shield and the thrust
reverser cowl.
(1) Use abrasive paper 80-120 grit to remove any contaminants from the
exit heat shield and the thrust reverser cowl.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(2) Clean the faying surfaces of the exit fire shield and the thrust
reverser cowl with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove
dry.
C. Etch bond area. (Refer to Figure 202.)
(1) Do a water-break test on the bond area of the heat shield and the
thrust reverser cowl, see SRM section 54-02-02, Water Break Test.

the preparation.
CHEMICALS.
(2) Apply Pasa Jell 105 to the bonding surfaces of the heat shield and
the thrust reverser cowl and let stand for 8-10 minutes.
show a neutral reading (pH 7).
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Dry at room temperature.
D. Apply sealant. (Refer to Figure 202.)
NOTE: If primer is required for alternate sealant, refer to

manufacturer’s instructions prior to sealant application.
(1) Apply RTV106 sealant, or equivalent, to the bond area on the thrust
reverser cowl and the heat shield as specified in Figure 202.
(2) Install the heat shield with the TLPD419BS rivets or CR3523-4
rivets.
E. Install clamps. (Refer to Figure 203.)
(1) Manufacture forming blocks to protect the heat shield during the
clamping procedure.
(2) Manufacture support blocks to protect the thrust reverser cowl

during the clamping procedure.
(3) Start at the center of the aft edge of the heat shield and thrust
reverser and install the clamps, support blocks and forming
blocks. The maximum inside allowable gap between the aft thrust
reverser cowl and the heat shield is 0.078 in. (2,0 mm).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Clean off excess RTV with with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(5) Allow the RTV106 to cure, refer to manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Remove the clamps, support blocks and forming blocks.
G. Inspect the repair area.
(1) Inspect for loose rivets. No loose rivets are allowed. Replace any
loose rivets.
(2) Inspect for proper bonding of the exit heat shield edge. No
delamination allowed. If delamination is found, repeat the repair.

Litmus Paper Commercially Available
Paper Abrasive 80-120 Grit Commercially Available
Silicone Carbide
Pasa Jell 105 V4E208
2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com
Repairs Materials and Equipment
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Rivet, Blind TLPD419BS Intertechnique (L’) S.A.
Les Gatines
78370 Plaisir
France
(ALT: CR3523-4-3) V05693
Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Alternate Sealants RTV-88 Sealant V01139
RTV-9811 Catalyst Momentive Performance Material Inc.
SS 4004 Primer
Dapcocast 18-4 V58093
Dapco 1-100 Primer D Aircraft Products Co.
1191 Hawk Circle
Anaheim, CA 92708
Phone: (713) 632-8444
www.cytec.com
DC90-006 Sealant V5D028
PR-1200 Primer Dow Corning Corporation
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Removal of the Thrust Reverser Exit Heat Shield

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Preparation of Bond Area

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Installation of Thrust Reverser Exit

Heat Shield and Clamps
Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 13
THRUST REVERSER AFT EDGE
LIGHTNING STRIKE DAMAGE DOUBLER REPAIR
1. General
A. The outer titanium band on the aft-ring is typically damaged due to

lightning strike. This procedure gives the instructions to install a
permanent doubler repair on the thrust reverser trailing-edge aft-ring.
B. This repair removes the damaged segment of the outer titanium band, and
outer composite skin. External and internal doublers are bonded with
adhesive and fastened with double-flush, solid rivets. This repair is
limited to damage less than or equal to 20.0 inches (508,0 mm)in
circumferential length.
C. Minor burn damage to the composite skin and titanium band can be
repaired permanently without doubler installation. The minor repair
consists of damage removal and the restoration of surface protection.
Minor damage must measure less than 2.0 in x 0.5 in (50,8 mm x 12,7 mm).
A. When damage is found on the aft ring composite panel and titanium band
that is less than 2.0 inch x 0.5 inch in width (50,8 mm)(50,8 mm x 12,7
mm), perform the fill repair procedures in step E. Refer to Figure 202.
B. The fill repair is not allowed between top of nacelle and 42 degree
radial, 110 degree and 120 degree radial, or 172 degree radial at the
bottom of nacelle.
C. No more than 4 fill repairs are allowed per thrust reverser half. Fill
repairs must be separated from other damage by a minimum of
10.0 inches (254 mm).
D. When damage on the titanium band and underlying composite skin measures
less than or equal to 20.0 inches (508,0 mm) in length (in the hoop
direction), go to step F.
E. Fill repair Procedure
(1) Remove the burned composite material and remove the paint from the
adjacent area. Hand sand the damaged area with abrasive paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(2) Clean the repair area with a clean, lint-free cloth made moist with
(3) Do a tap test of the surrounding area to ensure no disbond is

present. Refer to SRM 54-01-00 Damage Investigation Procedures.
(4) Fill the reworked area of the trailing edge with adhesive. Refer to
manufactures instructions for adhesive preparation and cure
information.
(5) Use Teflon tape and caul plates as necessary to retain the adhesive
until it begins to harden.
(6) Hand sand adhesive flush with abrasive paper. Match contour of
initial surface.
(8) Restore primer and top-coat. Refer to SRM 51-21-00.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
F. Doubler Repair Procedure
CAUTION: NO MORE THAN TWO DOUBLER REPAIRS ARE PERMITTED PER THRUST
REVERSER HALF. THE REPAIRS MUST BE SEPARATED FROM OTHER
DAMAGE BY A MINIMUM OF 10.0 INCHES (254 MM).

ALL INSTRUCTIONS FOR IT’S USE. THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE
INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER, YOUR EMPLOYER, AND
NECESSARY.
(1) Remove paint and surface finish.
(a) Use abrasive paper to remove paint from the inner and outer
surfaces of the trailing edge aft-ring.
(2) Remove the melted or damaged segment of the aft-ring titanium band.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL TO NOT DAMAGE THE HONEYCOMB CORE UNDERNEATH

THE GR/EP COMPOSITE SKIN.
(a) Cut or blend and trim the damaged titanium band. Radius the
corners to 0.25 inch (6,35 mm) minimum. Refer to figure 203.
(b) Use abrasive paper to remove all the damaged Gr/Ep fibers up
to the depth of the core. The width of Gr/Ep material removed
shall not exceed the width of the titanium band.
(c) Make the edges of the cutout area smooth with abrasive paper.
Maintain a 125 RMS minimum surface finish.
(d) Clean the repair area with a clean, lint-free cloth made moist
with solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT ALL UNWANTED MATERIAL HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM
THE REPAIR AREA.
(3) Make the inner and outer doubler.
(a) Measure the size of the repair area for the inner and outer
doublers.
NOTE: Make sure you permit enough area to meet the proper edge
distance and rivet spacing requirements.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(b) Make an inner and outer doubler from 0.050 inch (1,27 mm)
6AL-4V titanium sheet annealed or 301 cres 1/2 hard.
1 For 1 inch (25,4 mm) or less of damage width, install a

minimum of 2 fasteners each side of damage and in-line
with damage. Refer to Figure 203.
2 For up to 2 inches (50,8 mm) of damage width, install 4

fasteners each side of damage and in-line with damage.
3 For up to 3 inches (76,2 mm) of drainage width, install 6

fasteners each side of damage and in-line with damage.
4 For damage the width of existing titanium band, install 8

fasteners each side of damage and in-line with damage
width. Make sure that the repair doubler size is large
enough for 2 rows of fasteners beyond damage width all
around. Refer to Figure 207.
(c) Form the doublers to match the contour of the inner and outer
surfaces. Make sure that the doublers are aligned correctly on
the inner and outer surfaces. Chamfer the forward edge and
sides of the doublers at 45 degrees.Clamp in place.
NOTE: For damage located near the 6 o’clock position it is not

necessary to make an internal doubler. The internal latch
fitting doubler can be used in place of the inner titanium
doubler.
NOTE: For damage near the internal latch fitting it may be

necessary to make an internal doubler adjacent to the latch
fitting. Refer to Figure 205.
(4) Make the inner and outer doubler.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE DOUBLERS ARE OPPOSITE MATCHES OF EACH
OTHER AND CLAMPED IN PLACE.
(a) Mark the rivet pattern on the inner doubler, maintaining the
required edge margin for the rivets. Use applicable figures as
a guide. Make sure that the outer doubler is large enough to
have the same rivet pattern after drilling.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(b) Match drill pilot holes PERPENDICULARLY to the interior

surface for the rivets in the doublers. Drill through the aft
ring section into the outer doubler: Refer to the applicable
figures. Increase the diameter of the hole to final diameter
at each location for the solid rivets. Refer to SRM 51-44-11.
(c) Countersink holes in exterior surface of interior and exterior

doublers for the applicable solid rivet SRM 51-46-11. Take
clamps off and remove doublers. Debur the area.
(5) Pot rivet holes in aft ring structure.
CAUTION: IF RIVET HOLES ARE NOT PROPERLY POTTED, THE INSTALLATION

OF SOLID RIVETS WILL CRUSH THE CORE.
WARNING: WEAR APPLICABLE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) WHEN

YOU DO THIS TASK. BEFORE YOU USE PPE, READ, UNDERSTAND
AND OBEY ALL INSTRUCTIONS FOR IT’S USE. THESE
YOUR EMPLOYER, AND GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS. YOU CAN GET
INJURED IF YOU DO NOT USE PPE. GET INSTRUCTIONS FROM
YOUR EMPLOYER ON WHICH PPE IS NECESSARY.
(a) Use a de-core tool or an allen wrench to enlarge the honeycomb

core to 0.50 inch (12,7 mm) diameter. Use care not to damage
or enlarge the rivet holes in the inner and outer composite
skins.
CHEMICALS.
(b) Pot each hole with adhesive. Cover inner and outer hole of
potted core with Teflon tape to retain the adhesive.
(c) Fill all gaps in the trailing edge cavity areas and smooth
with adhesive.
(d) Use a clean cloth and isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to wipe

faying surfaces clean of excess adhesive residue before
solvent evaporates.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(e) Cure the adhesive per the manufacturers instructions.
(6) Fit check repair parts.
(a) Align the inner and outer doublers in place. Reform doublers
as necessary to match original contour.
(7) Attach repair parts.
CAUTION: VISUALLY INSPECT FOR CRACKED ADHESIVE AT THE AFT END

DURING RIVET INSTALLATION. IF POTTING CRACKS, REMOVE AND
REPLACE PER INSTRUCTIONS OF THIS REPAIR.
(a) Use inner doubler as a guide and drill holes through potting
in aft ring. The holes in the potting must be drilled
perpendicularly to the inner surface/doubler to make sure that
the alignment of the rivet holes is correct.
(b) Use a grip guage to determine the grip length of each of the
rivets located in the doublers. Refer to SRM 51-42-00. Record
the location.
(c) Apply adhesive to the faying surdaces of the inner and outer
doublers.
CAUTION: USE A RIVET SQUEEZER TO INSTALL SOLID RIVETS. DO NOT

BUCK RIVETS.
(d) Use the proper grip length rivet for each rivet hole and
attach the inner and outer doublers to the aft ring with solid
rivets, double flush. Make sure you install the rivets wet
with EA9394 or equivalent.
(e) Use a clean cloth to wipe the surfaces clean of excess

adhesive residue.
(f) Cure adhesive sccording to manufacturers recommendations.
(g) Restore primer and top-coat. Refer to SRM 51-21-00.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Abrasive Paper 280, 320 Grit Commercially available
Adhesive, Epoxy Paste EA934NA/EA9394 V33564
Dexter Hysol Aerospace Ink
P.O. Box 312
Pittsburg, CA 94565-0031
Phone: (925) 458-8000
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Doubler-Titanium 6AL-4V Ti (AMS 4911) 0.050 Commercially Available
Sheet inch (1,27 mm) thick
Doubler Alternate- 301 Cres ½ Hard (AMS 5518) Commercially Available
Stainless Steel sheet 0.050 inch (1,27 mm) thick
Rivet, Solid MS20427M4 Commercially Available

NAS1200M4

Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
OUTER
SKIN
B B
90°
45°
0°
LENGTH
TYPICAL DAMAGED GR/EP
DAMAGE SKIN UNDER
INNER TITANIUM BAND
AREA
SKIN
DAMAGED AREA
WIDTH TITANIUM BAND
C1S-313-00
A B-B
General Location of Lightning Strike Damage
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
BIFURCATION
DUCT
INTERNAL
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
COMPOSITE
PANEL
TYPICAL LIGHTNING TITANIUM
STRIKE DAMAGE
B AFT RING
TYPICAL LIGHTNING STRIKE DAMAGE

AT THE 6 O'CLOCK POSITION
C1S-533-00
Typical Lightning Strike Damage at the 6 o’clock position

CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
AFT EDGE OF
MONOLITHIC SECTION
TITANIUM RING
C
2.0 INCH
INNER SKIN
ADHESIVE
FILLER
0.50 INCH
OUTER SKIN
TITANIUM
AFT RING
C-C
C1S-534-00
Typical Lightning Strike Damage.

CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
650 mm 650 mm
42° RADIAL
110°
RADIAL
155 mm 155 mm
120°
RADIAL
928 mm 928 mm
172° RADIAL
132 mm
132 mm
VIEW OF AFT RING FROM AFT LOOKING FORWARD
C1S-535-00
NO DAMAGE ALLOWED
Typical Lightning Strike Damage

CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
OUTER 0.25 in.

SKIN CHAMFER 45° (6,35 mm)
RADIUS
0.75 in. (MIN. TYP.)
(19,05 mm)
0.35 in. (TYP.) A
(8,89 mm)
(E.D. TYP.)
1.0 in.
(25,4 mm)
MAXIMUM WIDTH
MS20427M4-()
OR NAS1200M4-()
DOUBLE FLUSH A
FILL THE GAP 20.0 in. 2 RIVET ROWS
WITH EA934NA (508 mm) BEYOND DAMAGE
AND SMOOTH OUT MAXIMUM LENGTH
OUTER DOUBLER EA934NA

POTTING
PRODUCTION
METAL
FILLER
(REF)
C1S-315-02
INNER DOUBLER
A-A
Doubler Repair for Damage Up To 1 Inch (25,4 mm) maximum in width.

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
0.25 in.
OUTER (6,35 mm)
SKIN RADIUS
CHAMFER 45° (MIN. TYP.)
0.25 in.
B (6,35 mm)
0.35 in.
A RADIUS
(8,89 mm) 0.75 IN. (MIN. TYP.)
E.D. TYP. (19,05 mm)
TYP.
2.0 in.
(50,8 mm)
MAX
B A
MS20427M4-() 20.0 in.
OR NAS1200M4-() (508 mm) 2 RIVET ROWS
DOUBLE FLUSH MAXIMUM LENGTH BEYOND DAMAGE
OUTER EA934NA
DOUBLER POTTING
PRODUCTION
METAL
FILLER
(REF)
A-A INNER
DOUBLER
OUTER
EA934NA
DOUBLER
POTTING C1S-314-02
B-B INNER
DOUBLER
Doubler Repair for Damage less than 2 Inches (50,8 mm) maximum in width.
Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
BIFURCATION
DUCT
AFT RING
PANEL INTERNAL
LATCH INNER REPAIR
FITTING DOUBLER
TITANIUM
A OUTER REPAIR AFT RING
DOUBLER
TYPICAL REPAIR FOR

LIGHTNING STRIKE DAMAGE C1S-536-00
Typical Repair for Lightning Strike Damage at the 6 o’clock position

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
INTERNAL
LATCH
FITTING
INBD
TATANIUM DAMAGE
AFT RING REMOVED
E
D C
OUTER
DOUBLER E D C
FASTENERS:
20 INCH
MS20427M4 - () (508 mm) INTERNAL
REPAIR FASTENERS DOUBLER
MAXIMUM LENGTH
MS20427M4 - ()
ORIGINAL FASTENERS
A
C1S-537-00
VIEW LOOKING RADIALY OUTWARD
Thrust Reverser Aft Ring 6 o’clock position

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
INNER
SKIN
POTTING INNER
DOUBLER
OUTER
SKIN OUTER TITANIUM
C-C DOUBLER AFT RING
INNER
SKIN
INNER
DOUBLER
OUTER
SKIN OUTER TITANIUM
DOUBLER AFT RING
D-D
INNER
SKIN INTERNAL
LATCH FITTING
OUTER
E-E
C1S-538-00
SKIN OUTER TITANIUM

DOUBLER AFT RING
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
0.35 in.
(8,89 mm) 0.75 in.
E.D. TYP. 0.25 in. (19,05 mm)
0.25 in. (6,35 mm) TYP.
(6,35 mm) RADIUS CHAMFER 45°
RADIUS (MIN. TYP.) OUTER
(MIN. TYP.) SKIN
B A
CONT. ON
NEXT FIGURE
0.35 in.
(8,89 mm) END OF
(E.D. TYP.) TITANIUM
BAND
MS20427M4-()
OR NAS1200M4-() 2 RIVET
B A ROWS
DOUBLE FLUSH
BURN MARK 20.0 in. BEYOND
AND MELTING (508 mm) DAMAGE
(TYP) MAXIMUM LENGTH ALL AROUND
(FILL THE GAP WITH WIDTH UP TO
EA934NA AFTER SMOOTH OUT) END OF
EA934NA TITANIUM BAND
OUTER POTTING
DOUBLER
PRODUCTION
METAL
FILLER
(REF)
A-A INNER
OUTER DOUBLER
DOUBLER EA934NA
POTTING
C1S-316-02
INNER
B-B DOUBLER
External Double Repair for Damage the Width of Titanium Band

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.35 in.
(8,89 mm) 0.75 in.
(E.D. TYP.) (19,05 mm) 0.25 in.
0.25 in. (TYP.) (6,35 mm)
(6,35 mm)
CHAMFER 45° RADIUS
RADIUS
(MIN. TYP.)
(MIN. TYP.)
A OUTER
C SKIN
END OF
TITANIUM
BAND
MS20427M4-()
OR NAS1200M4-()
DOUBLE FLUSH END OF
TITANIUM
BAND
CONT. FROM
20.0 in. C A 2 RIVET ROWS
PREVIOUS FIGURE
(508 mm) BEYOND DAMAGE
BURN MARK MAXIMUM LENGTH ALL AROUND
AND MELTING
(TYP) WIDTH UP TO
(FILL THE GAP WITH END OF TITANIUM
EA934NA AFTER SMOOTH OUT) BAND
EA934NA
OUTER POTTING PRODUCTION
DOUBLER METAL
FILLER
(REF)
A-A INNER
OUTER DOUBLER
EA934NA
DOUBLER POTTING C1S-317-01
INNER
C-C DOUBLER
External Doubler Repair for Damage the Width of Titanium Band

Figure 207
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 14
INSTALLATION OF A DOUBLER TO REPAIR DAMAGE
TO THE SIDE WALL AT THE SIX O'CLOCK POSITION
1. General
This repair provides a procedure or the installation of doubler(s) on the

six o’clock Sidewall for an A320/CFM56-5B Thrust Reversers. This covers
both the 238-1105/1106 series with the MA25 intumescent fireproof coating,
and the 642-3801/3802 series with the stainless steel fire wall.
This repair gives instructions to install a doubler(s) on the six o’clock

sidewall(s) to repair damage to the internal and external skins. A rivet
located near the crack and/or edge of part, can not be less than 2D.
Rivets adjacent to other fasteners can not be less than 4D. Rivet
locations are to be adjusted to comply with this requirement.
A. Prepare the Damaged Area for Repair
(1) Examine the damaged area. Determine the length and location of the
crack, hole or gouge. If the damage is detected in the external
(air wetted) skin, remove the MA25 fireproof coating (238-1105/
1106 series), or the stainless steel fire wall covering the
internal skin (642-3801/3802 series), and check for cracks and
damage. When removing the fire wall, care must be taken to not
enlarge the rivet holes in the fire wall and the sidewall (the fire
wall will be re-installed after the doubler(s) or shim is
installed).
NOTE: A doubler will be attached with spacers, rivets and a shim

(crack in one skin only). If both internal and external
skins are damaged, or if the damage on the external skin
extends into the honeycomb section, a doubler must be
installed covering the internal surface and a doubler
installed covering the external (air wetted) surface. These
doublers are to be installed using spacers and rivets in
the honeycomb area, and, rivets only in the flat leading
edge area.
(2) Remove the surface finish from the damaged area, and the MA25
fireproof coating (red color)(238-1105 series) in all areas that
will receive a doubler and/or shim. Use 150 to 180-grit aluminum
oxide paper or equivalent, to sand this entire area.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
becomes dry.
(4) Stop drill hole(s), using a No. 47 (0.0785 inch [2,0 mm]) drill
bit, at each end of the crack or cut.
B. Prepare Doubler(s)
(1) For 238-1105/1106 series T/R, make a -1 doubler for the external
sidewall from a 0.050 inch (1,2 mm) thick 2024-T3
(AMS 4037) (or -T4) aluminum sheet. See Figure 202 for rivet
pattern layout. Abrade the faying surface using 150 to 180-grit
aluminum oxide paper (or equivalent). Size of doubler will follow
the leading edge, lay between the upper support angle and lower end
of the sidewall and the aft end will be to a point that will allow
a minimum edge distance for the rivets attaching the doubler to the
full height honeycomb area.
CAUTION: BEFORE DRILLING ANY RIVET HOLE, VERIFY THE PLACEMENT OF

THE RIVETS AS SPECIFIED ON LAYOUT DOES NOT CREATE A
"LESS THAN 2D" BETWEEN EDGE OF PART OR CRACK, OR "LESS
THAN 4D BETWEEN FASTENERS FOR THE INSTALLATION. ADJUST
IF NECESSARY TO AFFECT THE MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE
REQUIREMENT.
(2) For 642-3801/3802 series T/R, make a -13 doubler for the external
sidewall from a 0.050 inch (1,2 mm) thick 2024-T3
(AMS 4037) (or -T4) aluminum sheet. See Figure 203 for rivet
pattern layout. Abrade the faying surface using 150 to 180-grit
aluminum oxide paper (or equivalent). Size of doubler will follow
the leading edge, lay between the upper support angle and lower end
of the sidewall and the aft end will be to a point that will allow
a minimum edge distance for the rivets attaching the doubler to the
full height honeycomb area.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: MATCH DRILL HOLES FROM EXISTING FASTENER RIVET HOLES IN THE
SIX 0'CLOCK SIDEWALL (THESE HOLES ARE FROM RIVETS THAT WERE
REMOVED IN 2.A.(1) ABOVE TO REMOVE THE FIRE SHIELD). BEFORE
DRILLING ANY RIVET HOLES, VERIFY THE PLACEMENT OF THE RIVETS
AS SPECIFIED ON LAYOUT DOES NOT CREATE A "LESS THAN 2D"
BETWEEN EDGE OF PART OR CRACK, OR "LESS THAN 4D" BETWEEN
FASTENERS FOR THE INSTALLATION. ADJUST IF NECESSARY TO
AFFECT THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENT.
(3) Form the doubler to the external sidewall contour.
(4) For 238-1105/1106 series T/R make a -3 and a -5 doubler for the
internal sidewall (if crack is in both inner and outer sidewalls)
from a 0.06 inch (1,5 mm) thick 2024-T3 (AMS 4037) (or -T4)
aluminum sheet. See Figure 204 for layout of rivet pattern. Abrade
the faying surface using 150 to 180-grit aluminum oxide paper (or
equivalent).
CAUTION: RIVET PATTERN SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. PATTERN LAYOUT IS

DETERMINED BY THE OUTER (WETTED) SURFACE DOUBLER MADE BY
ITEM 2.B.(1).
(5) For 642-3801/3802 series T/R make a -9 and a -11 doubler for the
internal sidewall (if crack is in both inner and outer sidewalls)
from a 1,5 mm (0.06 inch) thick 2024-T3 (AMS 4037) (or -T4)
aluminum sheet. See Figure 205 for layout of rivet pattern. Abrade
the faying surface using 150 to 180-grit aluminum oxide paper (or
equivalent).
CAUTION: RIVET PATTERN SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. PATTERN LAYOUT IS

DETERMINED BY THE OUTER (WETTED) SURFACE DOUBLER MADE BY
ITEM 2.B.(1) ABOVE.
(6) Form the doublers to the inner sidewall contour.
(7) If the crack is only on the outer sidewall, make a -7 shim strip
from a 0.06 inch (1,5 mm) thick by 1.65 inches (42,67 mm) wide.
Abrade the faying surface using 150 to 180-grit aluminum oxide
paper or equivalent. This -7 shim, when required, will be installed
on the internal side where the intumescent fireproof coating (red
color [238-1105 series]), or the 321-475-002-6 fire shield
(removed by step 2.A.[1]).
NOTE: Spacers must be installed in the honeycomb core between the

shim and the doubler or between the internal and external
doublers.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(8) When internal doublers or a shim is necessary, make NAS42DD5 type

spacers from a 2024-T3 or -T4 aluminum alloy tube, wire or rod (or
purchase an NAS42DD-50 rivet spacer). The outer diameter of the
spacers must be between 0.30 and 0.32 inch (7,67 and 8,18 mm). (See
Figure 206, Detail F.)
C. Install the Doubler(s)
(1) Use clamps to install the -1 doubler (238-1105/1106 series) or -13

doubler (642-3801/3802 series) on the external six o’clock
sidewall. Put the -7 shim or internal doublers (-3 & -5 for
238- series, -9 & -11 for 642- series), if necessary, on the
internal side. Check to verify the crack stop drill holes have been
drilled on each end of the crack. (See Figure 201.)
NOTE: Before drilling holes for fasteners, verify the edge

distance requirement is satisfied.
(2) Position doubler on sidewall and drill the holes through the
external doubler and the external and internal sidewalls. Holes to
be the diameter of the rivets. See Figures 202 and 203 for
reference lay out.
(3) When spacers (type NAS42DD5-50) are necessary, remove the doubler
(or shim) and de-core the diameter of the external honeycomb core
holes to between 0.30 and 0.32 inch (7,65 and 8,19 mm).
NOTE: Do not increase the diameter of the internal sidewall

holes. The spacers will be installed against the
inside surface of the internal sidewall.
(4) When spacers (type NAS42DD5) are necessary, prepare EA9394

adhesive (see Repair General). Install the spacers with EA9394
adhesive in the honeycomb holes.
(5) Apply EA9394 adhesive on the faying surfaces of the external

doubler and on the six o'clock sidewall (external surface crack or
damage only).
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(6) Apply EA9394 adhesive on the faying surfaces on the external

doubler, the internal doubler or the shim, and on the six o'clock
sidewall (both internal and external surfaces damaged).
(7) On 238-1105/1106 series, install the external doubler (-1) and (if
necessary) the internal doubler (-3 and -5) or the shim strip (-7)
with rivets. (See Figure 201.)
(8) On 642-3801/3802 series, install the external doubler (-13) and

(if necessary) the internal doublers (-9 and -11) or the shim strip
(-7) with rivets. When installing doublers on this series, leave
the holes open in which the fire shield rivets are placed.
(9) On 642-3801/3802 series, install the fire shield that was removed
in paragraph 2.A.(1). Install one (1) AN960C4 washer between the
six o'clock internal sidewall and the heat shield at all locations
except where the new internal doublers
(-9,-11) have been installed. Attach the fire wall with the same
type of rivet originally installed except where the doublers are
installed (use rivets noted on this repair document.
NOTE: Rivets installed through the honeycomb core section and

doublers/shim must have a minimum length of 1.02 inch
(26,0 mm).
(10) After the doublers are installed, cure the adhesive for 1 hour at
82-93°C (180-200°F).
(11) Apply the intumescent fireproof coating MA25 (red color) again
where removed to affect this repair (238- series only). See
CFM56-5B CMM Repair 63.
NOTE: You can use alternative equipment with the same precision to
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Adhesive EA934NA V33564
(Alt) Henkel Corporation
Doubler 2024-T3/T4 Commercially Available
Outer Doubler.
0.05 Inch (1,2 mm)
Aluminum Sheet
2024-T3/T4 Commercially Available
Inner Doubler
0.062 Inch (1,5 mm)
Aluminum Sheet
Bit, Drill No. 47, 0.0785 Inch Commercially Available
(2,0 mm)
Filler 2024-T3/T4 0.01 Inch (0,25 Commercially Available
mm)
Aluminum Sheet
Filler 2024-T3/T4 Commercially Available
0.01 Inch (0,25 mm)
Aluminum Sheet
Paper, Abrasive 150 to 180-grit Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
Rivet, Solid,100 degree NAS1097U Commercially Available
Flush Shear Head
Rivet, Solid, 100 deg CR 3524-4 V05693
Flush Shear Head Cherry Textron Inc
1224 E. Warner St.
Phone: (714) 545-5511
99 percent pure
or
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Spacer 2024-T3 or -T4 Commercially Available
7,67 - 8,18 mm
(0.302 - 0.322 Inch)
Diameter Aluminum Tube,
Wire or Rod.
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
X5120
(STA 201.574)
G (FIGURE 208)
ANGLE
H A
(FIGURE H SKIN STRAP
208) LEGEND
G NAS1097U4 RIVET
DOUBLE FLUSH
CR3524-4 RIVET
NAS1097U5 RIVET
STOP HOLE
#47 DRILL BIT
238 SERIES
CRACK B FIGURE 202
HONEYCOMB C 642 SERIES

AREA FIGURE 203
DOUBLER
END OF SKIN STRAP

HONEYCOMB
RAMP
ANGLE U
NOTE: P
ALIGN THIS ROW OF RIVETS
WITH CENTER LINE OF SKIN BEGINNING OF
STRAP. END RIVET MAY BE HONEYCOMB RAMP
OMITTED IF 2D EDGE DISTANCE
C1S-304-01
IS NOT ATTAINABLE ON THE VIEW LOOKING OUTBOARD

OPPOSITE SIDE ON INSTALLATION. AT THE WETTED SIDE OF THE
A 6 O'CLOCK SIDEWALL
Installation of a Doubler on the Six O’clock Sidewall

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
238-1105/6 4.12 inch

(104,65 mm) NOTE:
SERIES 2.94 inch
(74,68 mm) Align this row of rivets
0.45 inch 0.75 inch with center line of skin
(11,43 mm) (19,05 mm) 1.28 inch strap. End rivet may be
TYP (32,51 mm) omitted if 2D edge distance
REF is not attainable on the
opposite side on installation.
1.18 inch 0.45 inch
0.90 inch (29,97 mm)
0.90 inch (11,43 mm)
(22,86 mm) All radii = 0.50 inch
(22,86 mm) 0.49 inch
TYP minimum
(12,45 mm)
BEGINNING
OF HONEYCOMB
0.45 inch RAMP
(11,43 mm) 0.90 inch
TYP (22,86 mm)
0.45 inch
(11,43 mm) TYP
7.20 inch TYP -1 DOUBLER 8.80 inch
(182,88 mm) (223,52 mm)
REF
(FIGURE 206)
0.50 inch 130°
40° (12,70 mm)
0.90 inch
0.82 inch
(22,86 mm)
(20,83 mm)
1.16 inch TYP
(29,46 mm) 1.00 inch
(25,4 mm) SEE NOTE
0.64 inch BEGINNING OF
0.35 inch
(16,28 mm) HONEYCOMB RAMP
10° (8,89 mm)
1.17 inch 0.45 inch
(29,72 mm) (11,43 mm)
1.25 inch END OF

(31,75 mm) 0.90 inch HONEYCOMB
(22,86 mm) 0.86 inch
LEGEND: RAMP (21,84 mm)
TYP
NAS1097U4 RIVET 7.00 inch
DOUBLE FLUSH (177,80 mm)
C1S-305-01
CR3524-4 RIVET RIVET HOLE PATTERN FOR -1 DOUBLER

NAS1097U5 RIVET USED ON T/R WITH MA-25 FIRE PROOFING
External Doubler Detail for 238-1101/2 Series Thrust Reverser
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
1.18 inch 4.12 inch

(29,97 mm) All radii = 0.50 inch
(104,65 mm) 2.94 inch minimum
(74,68 mm)
1.67 inch 0.75 inch
0.90 inch (42,42 mm) (19,05 mm)
(22,86 mm) REF 1.28 inch
TYP (32,51 mm) HOLE PATTERN
(FIGURE REF OF EXISTING
209)
7.20 inch 0.44 inch FASTENERS FOR
0.45 inch
(182,88 mm) (11,18 mm) MOUNTING
(11,43 mm)
THE FIRE SHIELD.
3.27 inch MATCH DRILL TO
(83,06 mm) PATTERN ON
REF 6 O'CLOCK SIDEWALL
0.90 inch
(22,86 mm) 0.49 inch
1.25 inch (12,45 mm) 0.90 inch
(31,75 mm) (FIG. TYP
0.77 inch 209) (22,86 mm)
3.13 inch (19,56 mm) TYP
(79,50 mm)
(FIGURE 206)
REF
0.63 inch 8.80 inch
(16,00 mm) (223,52 mm)
0.47 inch 0.90 inch
2.17 inch (11,94 mm)
(55,12 mm) (22,86 mm)
REF 0.90 inch
40° (22,86 mm)
1.16 inch
(29,46 mm) 0.90 inch
(22,86 mm)
0.95 inch
TYP
(24,13 mm) 0.64 inch
0.47 inch (16,26 mm) 0.90 inch 130° THIS RIVET MAY
(11,94 mm) (22,86 mm) BE OMITTED
1.00 inch TYP 0.86 inch IF 2D EDGE IS
(25,4 mm) 10°
2.75 inch (21,84 mm) NOT ATTAINABLE
(69,85 mm) -13 DOUBLER
REF 2.14 inch
(54,36 mm)
7.00 inch 0.47 inch
(177,80 mm) (11,94 mm)
LEGEND: ALIGN THIS ROW OF RIVETS
BEGINNING OF
NAS1097U4 RIVET WITH CENTER LINE OF SKIN HONEYCOMB RAMP
DOUBLE FLUSH STRAP
C1S-307-01
RIVET HOLE PATTERN END OF

CR3524-4 RIVET
FOR -13 DOUBLER HONEYCOMB RAMP
NAS1097U5 RIVET
External Doubler Detail for 642-3801/2 Series Thrust Reverser

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
THIS RIVET WILL BE 0.45 in.

OMITTED IF 2D EDGE BEGINNING
(11,43 mm) OF HONEYCOMB
DISTANCE IS NOT
ATTAINABLE RAMP
END OF
0.90 in. HONEYCOMB
(22,86 mm) RAMP
TYP 0.45 in.
1.17 in. (11,43 mm)
(29,72 mm)
-5 DOUBLER
1.00 in.
(25,4 mm) 0.90 in.
(22,86 mm)
TYP
40°
0.82 in.
(20,83 mm) 0.07 in.
(1,78 mm)
0.50 in. 130° GAP
(12,70 mm) MAX
BEGINNING
THIS EDGE BUTTS HONEYCOMB
TO THE INNER RAMP
FACIAL SEAL
-3 DOUBLER All radii = 0.50 inch

minimum
0.45 in.
0.45 in. (11,43 mm) 0.90 in.
(11,43 mm) TYP (22,86 mm)
TYP TYP
END OF
HONEYCOMB RAMP
0.45 in.
TRIM LOCALLY (11,43 mm)
TO CLEAR
PROTRUDENT 1.28 in.
0.75 in.
(19,05 mm) (32,51 mm) NOTE:
(REF) Rivet hole pattern for
1.18 in. reference only.
LEGEND: (29,97 mm) Rivet locations are
C1S-306-01
NAS1097U5 RIVET 4.12 in. determined by -1 doubler

CR3524-4 RIVET (104,65 mm)
Internal Doubler Detail for 238-1101/2 Series Thrust Reverser

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
0.90 in.
U (22,86 mm)
P 1.70 in. TYP THIS RIVET MAY BE OMITTED
1.00 in. (43,18 mm) IF 2D EDGE IS NOT ATTAINABLE
(25,4 mm) 0.45 in. ON THE WET SIDE
(11,43 mm)
0.07 in.
(1,78 mm) 0.45 in.
GAP -11 DOUBLER (11,43 mm)
MAX TYP
THIS EDGE BUTTS

TO THE INNER BEGINNING OF
FACIAL SEAL END OF HONEYCOMB RAMP
-9 DOUBLER HONEYCOMB RAMP
0.47 in.
(11,94 mm) 0.90 in.
(22,86 mm)
0.95 in. TYP
2.22 in. (24,13 mm)
(56,39 mm) 130° THESE DOUBLERS MOUNT ON
40° THE INTERNAL SURFACE
OF THE 6 O'CLOCK SIDEWALL
0.63 in. UNDER THE FIRE WALL
(16,00 mm) 0.90 in.
3.10 in. (22,86 mm)
(78,74 mm) TYP
REF RIVET HOLE PATTERN FOR
1.25 in. -9 AND -11 DOUBLER
(31,75 mm)
0.77 in. END OF
3.19 in. (19,56 mm) 0.90 in. HONEYCOMB RAMP
(81,03 mm) (22,86 mm)
REF TYP BEGINNING OF
HONEYCOMB RAMP
TRIM LOCALLY TO
CLEAR PROTRUDENT
1.25 in. 0.38 in.
(31,75 mm) (9,65 mm) NOTE:
DIMENSIONS ARE FOR
1.18 in. 0.45 in. REFERERNCE ONLY. RIVET
(29,97 mm) (11,43 mm) LOCATIONS ARE DETERMINED
0.77 in. 1.28 in. BY -13 DOUBLER.
(19.56 mm) (32,51 mm)
LEGEND
C1S-308-00
REF
CR3524-4 RIVET ALL RADII = 0.50 in.
0.75 in.
NAS1097U5 RIVET MINIMUM
(19,05 mm)
Internal Doubler Detail for 642-3801/2 Series Thrust Reverser
Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
321-475-002-6
DOUBLER INSTALLATION FOR
CR3524-4 RIVET FIRE WALL
DAMAGE ON EXTERNAL SURFACE ONLY
AND DOES NOT EXTEND INTO
DOUBLER THE HONEYCOMB AREA
NAS42DD-50 TYPE
SKIN RIVET SPACER
NAS1097U5
1.68 in. SEE DETAIL F
RIVET
(42,67 mm)
DOUBLER
321-475-002-6 0.047 in.
LOWER FIRE WALL -7 SHIM (1,19 mm)
NAS1097U4 STRUT REF
RIVET SEAL
DOUBLE FLUSH
CHAMFER 1.67 in.

(42,4 mm) 0.024 in.
REF -1 DOUBLER EA9394 E
0.050 in. (0,60 mm)
CR3524-4 ADHESIVE
X5120 (1,27 mm) (SEE FIG. REF
RIVET
(STA 201.574) HONEYCOMB 206)
D-D CORE
CR3524-4 RIVET FROM FIGURE 204
NAS1097U5
RIVET
-3 OR -9 NAS42DD-50 TYPE
INTUMESCENT FIREPROOF DOUBLER
COATING MA25 RIVET SPACER
0.060 in. SEE DETAIL F
THICKNESS: 0.118 in. (1,52 mm)
(3.00 mm) 0.047 in.
(1,19 mm)
LOWER HONEYCOMB
REF
STRUT CORE
SEAL
CHAMFER 1.67 in.

(42,4 mm) 0.024 in.
REF -1 DOUBLER EA9394 (0,60 mm)
X5120
(STA 201.574)
CR3524-4 -13 DOUBLER J ADHESIVE REF
RIVET 0.050 in.
(1,27 mm) (SEE FIG.
C1S-310-00
DOUBLER INSTALLATION WHEN 206)

BOTH INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL
SURFACES ARE DAMAGED
K-K
FROM FIGURE 203
Section Cuts Showing Installation of Rivets on Doublers

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
EA934NA EXTERNAL
INTERNAL -1 DOUBLER
SKIN
SKIN -13 DOUBLER
0.05 in.
(1,27 mm)
321-475-002-6
HEAT SHIELD
NAS1097U5
RIVET OUTER DIA.
0.302-0.322 in.
-7 SHIM OR (7,67-8,18 mm)
DOUBLER
0.06 in.
(1,52 mm) 0.776-0.785 in.
CHAMFER BOTH (19,71-19,94 mm)
NAS42DD EA934NA ENDS 0.015 in.
RIVET E (0,381 mm)
SPACER FROM FIGURE 207 x 45°
ROTATED 90° CCW
DETAIL SHOWING RIVET AND SPACER
THROUGH THE HONEYCOMB AREA OF THE
6 O'CLOCK SIDEWALL WITH A
321-475-002-6 HEAT SHIELD INNER DIA.
(642 SERIES) 0.160-0.166 in.
(4,06-4,22 mm)
EA934NA
F
EXTERNAL
INTERNAL SKIN NAS42DD5-50
SKIN TYPE SPACER
-1 DOUBLER MATL: 2024-T3
-13 DOUBLER OR -T4 ALUMINUM ALLOY
MA25 0.05 in. TUBE, WIRE OR ROD
(1,27 mm)
NAS1097U5
RIVET
J
SHIM OR FROM FIGURE 207
DOUBLER
DETAIL SHOWING RIVET AND SPACER
NAS42DD EA934NA THROUGH THE HONEYCOMB AREA OF THE
C1S-309-00
RIVET 6 O'CLOCK SIDEWALL WITH

SPACER MA25 FIREPROOF COATING
ROTATED 90° CCW (238 SERIES)
Details Defining the Rivet Spacer Installation Through the Honeycomb

Figure 207
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
EXISTING
SKIN STRAP ANGLE
-3 OR -9
DOUBLER
CR3524-4 RIVET
JOGGLE
-1 OR -13
DOUBLER
NAS1097U4 RIVET
SKINS
321-100-501-0 G-G
LOWER STRUT SEAL FROM FIGURE 201
-3 OR -9
SKINS DOUBLER
MA25
SKIN STRAP
NAS1097U4 RIVET
DOUBLE FLUSH EXISTING
C1S-311-00
-1 OR -13 ANGLE
DOUBLER H-H CR3524-4
FROM FIGURE 201 RIVET
Section Cuts Showing Rivet Installation for

Series 238-1105/6 T/R
Figure 208
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
EXISTING
ANGLE
SKIN STRAP
-3 OR -9
DOUBLER
CR3524-4
RIVET
FIRE WALL
JOGGLE
-1 OR -13
DOUBLER
NAS1097U4
RIVET
SKINS
L-L
FROM FIGURE 203
321-100-501-0
LOWER STRUT SEAL -3 OR -9
DOUBLER
FIRE WALL
SKINS SKIN STRAP
NAS1097U4
RIVET
DOUBLE FLUSH
-1 OR -13 EXISTING
DOUBLER CR3524-4 ANGLE
C1S-312-01
RIVET
M-M
FROM FIGURE 203
Section Cuts Showing Rivet Installation for

Series 642-3801/2 T/R
Figure 209
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 15
LOWER BIFURCATION PERFORATED SKIN EXTERNAL PATCH REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair procedure gives the instructions to repair a hole or crack

in the outer perforated skin on the thrust reverser assembly, lower
bifurcation. The damage can consist of a cracked or otherwise damaged
perforated skin or a hole in the perforated skin and the core. (See
Figures 201 thru 204.)
B. The repair installs an external patch in the damaged area.
C. This repair is not applicable if the opposite (solid)skin is damaged,

or if the edge of the damage is less than 1.5 inches (38,0 mm) from
fittings or other existing attachments, or if a crack is more than 6.0
inches (152,4 mm) long, or a hole, or damaged area is larger than 3
inches (76.2 mm) across.
2. Repair Instructions (See Figures 201 thru 204.)
A. Examine the damage area.
becomes dry.
(2) Do a tap test to examine for disbonds. Mark off any disbonded area.
Do a visual inspection of the area to find any cracks. Use a
magnifying glass with minimum 10X magnification. Mark the crack
ends.
(3) Mark the area to be cut out. The cutout must have the smallest size
possible that includes the disbonded or damaged skin and damaged
core.
NOTE: The cutout can be circular or rectangular. If rectangular, use a

minimum radius of 0.5 inch (12,7 mm) at the corners.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

other of U.S. export control
Rohr, Inc., Goodrich Corporation, operating as Goodrich Aerostructures; Goodrich proprietary information subject to the limitation

ROHR, INC.
B. Prepare the damage area for repair.

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU DRILL THE HOLES THROUGH THE SKIN, DO NOT DRILL
THROUGH THE PANEL.
(1) Drill 0.25 inch (6,35 mm) diameter holes at the crack ends. Do not
drill through the entire panel. Remove the burrs.
(2) Do a visual inspection to make sure the cracks have been stop
drilled. Use a magnifying glass with minimum 10X magnification.
Repeat the applicable steps if necessary.
(3) If the damage is a crack, route the crack along its length to a
maximum width of 0.10 inch. (2,5 mm). Do not damage the structure
below the surface. Remove the burrs.
NOTE: If the crack is inside a damage area that will be cut out,
it is not necessary to route the crack.
(4) If damage is other than a crack, cut and remove the damaged skin as
marked. If the core is damaged, straighten the damaged cell walls.
Remove the burrs.
(5) Remove the sharp edges. Use 150-400 grit aluminum oxide abrasive
paper.
(6) Mark the outline of the doubler on the solid skin. This is the area
that will be covered by the doubler. The doubler must be large
enough to install a minimum of two rows of rivets beyond the edge
of damage or cutout all around. (See Figures 201 thru 204 for
dimensional information.)
NOTE: The doubler can be circular or rectangular. If rectangular,

use a minimum radius of 0.5 inch
(12,7 mm) at the corners.
(7) Apply Teflon tape to the skin to mask off the repair area as
marked.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(8) Lightly sand the surface in the area between the pieces of tape. If
you removed a piece of the skin or skin and core, you must also
lightly sand the edges of the honeycomb cells and the skin inside
the cutout. Remove the sharp edges. Use 150-400 grit aluminum oxide
abrasive paper.
(9) Use dry air blast to remove the routing and sanding particles.
becomes dry.
C. Make the doubler.

NECESSARY.
(1) Make a repair doubler as marked. Make from 0.050-inch

(1,27 mm) thick minimum 2024-T3 or 2024-T4 aluminum alloy sheet.
Chamfer the edges. Remove the burrs. (See Figures 201 and 203)
(2) Form the doubler as necessary to match the contour of the skin in
the damage area. The doubler must fit in place with light finger
pressure.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
THROUGH THE ENTIRE PANEL.
(3) Mark the location of the rivet holes on the doubler. Drill pilot
holes in the doubler as marked. Put the doubler into position in
the repair area. Drill the pilot holes through the doubler and the
skin. Do not drill through the outer panel. Use temporary fasteners
to keep the holes aligned. Drill the final size holes through the
doubler and the skin. Do not damage the holes. Remove the burrs.
(See Figures 201 thru 204 for dimensional information.)
NOTE: Final hole size is 0.129 to 0.132 inch (3,28 to

3,35 mm) for the CR3224-4 (recommended) or CR3214-4 rivets.
If a hole is damaged, it is acceptable to install a CR3252-
4 first oversize rivet. The hole size is 0.143 to 0.146
inch (3,63 to 3,71 mm) for the first oversize -4 rivets.
(4) Countersink the hole on the air-wetted surface of the doubler to

accept the CR3224-4 flush shear head rivet. Remove the burrs.
(5) Lightly sand the faying surface of the doubler. Remove the sharp
edges. Use 150-400 grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper.
D. Prepare all repair surfaces for repair.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(3) Use the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare a solution of Turco

WO-1 diluted with demineralized water. Use 20 to 25% Turco WO-1 by
volume. Equivalent etching solution is acceptable. (See Table
201.)
CAUTION: DAB THE TURCO WO-1 SOLUTION ON THE SKIN WHERE THE DOUBLER
WILL BE INSTALLED. DO NOT RUB IT ACROSS THE SKIN.
CAUTION: TURCO WO-1 SOLUTION CAUSES CORROSION TO THE BOND SURFACES.

WHEN YOU APPLY THE SOLUTION, OR RINSE THE SURFACE, DO NOT LET
THE SOLUTION GET THROUGH THE PERFORATIONS.
CAUTION: USE LINT FREE GLOVES WHEN YOU TOUCH THE CLEANED OR PREPARED
SURFACES. THIS PREVENTS CONTAMINATION.
(4) Apply the Turco WO-1 solution (or equivalent) to all bare aluminum
surfaces. Dab the solution on, do not rub. Wait for 8 to 10
minutes.
NOTE: Do not let the solution get into the core.
(5) Dab the treated surfaces thoroughly with clean, lint free cloth
made moist with demineralized water. Use litmus paper to make sure
the etching solution is completely removed. Litmus paper will show
a neutral reading of pH7 when finished. Apply again as necessary.
NOTE: Do not let the water get into the core.
(6) All repair surfaces must be water break free surfaces. Do a water
break free test of these surfaces.(See 54-02-02)
NOTE: A surface is water break free if a thin, unbroken film of

water can stay on it for at least 30 seconds. If the water
breaks, repeat the sanding and cleaning steps.
(7) Dry the repair area at 190-210oF (88-99oC) for 30 minutes. Use an
explosion proof heat lamp.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(8) Let the area cool down to room temperature before you apply the
primer.
(9) Use the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare the BR-127 (or

equivalent) adhesive primer. Apply the primer to the edges and
surfaces that were treated with the etching solution. The primer
must have a dry film thickness of 0.0001 to 0.0004 inch (0,003 to
0,010 mm).
(10) Air-dry the primer for 30 minutes. Then cure for one hour at
230 - 250oF (110-121oC). Use an explosion proof heat lamp.
E. Install the doubler.
(1) Use the manufacturer’s instructions to mix the EA9394 adhesive.
(2) Fill the hole, if applicable.
NOTE: If you removed a piece of the skin or skin and core, you
must fill the resulting hole with adhesive.
(a) Apply enough of the EA9394 adhesive mixture to fill the

cutout. Remove the unwanted adhesive. The surface of the
adhesive must be level with the adjacent surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply a thin layer of the EA9394 adhesive mixture to the mating
surfaces of the doubler and the skin.
(4) Put the doubler into position. Align the rivet holes. Use temporary
fasteners, if necessary, to keep the holes aligned.
(5) Wet install the rivets with the RTV 157 sealant, or equivalent.
(6) Remove the excess adhesive and/or sealant from the repair area
before it cures with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
(7) Put a minimum of two thermocouples around the perimeter of the

repair area. Hold in place with Teflon tape.
(8) Cure the adhesive. Use explosion proof heat lamps (or equivalent).
Apply the heat until the repair area reaches a temperature of 150o-
170oF (66o-77oC). Cure the adhesive for 60 minutes at this
temperature.
(9) Let the repair area cool down to room temperature. Remove the
curing materials.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

NECESSARY.
(10) Remove the sharp edges of the cured adhesive. Use 150-400 grit
aluminum oxide abrasive paper.
becomes dry.
F. Examine the repair.
(1) Visually examine the repair area to make sure all the requirements
of this repair are done. Do a tap test to examine for disbonds.
Repeat the applicable steps, if necessary.
G. Paint Doubler.
(1) Apply paint to doubler as specified in Repair No. 4.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

Adhesive Primer BR-127 V0V7G8
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Aluminum alloy 0.050 inch thick min. Commercially Available
sheet 2024-T3 or T4
Blanket, Heat 0o to 250o F, 10W/Sq.in. Commercially Available
(Alternative to
(-18o to 121oC)
the Heat Lamp)
10W/645 Sq.mm.
Brush Nylon Commercially Available
Cloth, Wiper Cotton, lint free Commercially Available
Etching Turco WO-1 V71410
Solution Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Etching Pasa-Jell 105 V4E208
solution (Alternative for Turco Bergdahl Associates, Inc
WO-1) 2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com
Lamp, Heat 150o to 200oF (66o to Commercially Available
Explosion proof
93oC)
Paper, Abrasive 150-400 Grit, Commercially Available
Aluminum oxide
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Probe, o o Commercially Available
0 to 250 degrees F,
Temperature
(-18o to 121o C)
Tape Teflon, 2 inch Commercially Available
(51 mm) wide
Rivet, Blind, CR3224-4-2 Commercially Available or
Flush shear (Alternatives: Cherrymax
head, Nominal NAS9303E4-2, and Santa Ana, CA
Diameter CR3214-4-2)
Rivet, Blind, CR3252-4-2 V05693
Flush head, (Alternatives: Cherry Textron Inc
oversize NAS9304E4-2), and 1224 E. Warner St.
Diameter CR3243-4-2) Santa Ana, CA 92705-5484
Phone: (714) 545-5511
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
0.5 in. (12,7 mm)

THRUST REVERSER ASSY RADIUS
LEFT HAND SHOWN, (Typical)
RIGHT HAND SIMILAR
DOUBLER
RECTANGULAR
SHOWN
FOR CIRCULAR
SEE FIG 203
PERFORATED
SKIN
TYPICAL
DAMAGE CRACK,
STOP-DRILLED
AND ROUTED
CORE
CRACK SHOWN,
SOLID HOLE SIMILAR
SKIN
TYPICAL CRACK REPAIR

C1S-349-00
Perforated Skin Crack Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
6D RIVET SPACING
BETWEEN ROWS
(Typical in all
2D directions)
MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE 2D
(Typical at all edges) MINIMUM EDGE DISTANCE
RIVET (Typical at all edges)
(Typical)
DOUBLER
SKIN
CORE
SKIN
ADHESIVE
0.030 in.
(0,76 mm) 0.08 in.
DOUBLER MAXIMUM DEPTH (2,0 mm)
OF COUNTERSINK
SKIN
DOUBLER
ADHESIVE 0.02 in.

(0,5 mm)
ADHESIVE
TYPICAL FOR TYPICAL CHAMFER

COUNTERSUNK HOLES
C1S-350-00
Detail of Doubler Installation for a Perforated Skin Crack Repair

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
6D REF
2D REF
2D REF
PERFORATED
SKIN
TYPICAL
DAMAGE
CORE
SOLID
SKIN
C1S-351-00
TYPICAL "HOLE" DAMAGE REPAIR
“Hole” Damaged Perforated Skin Repair

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CR3224-4-2 2D MINIMUM
RIVET 6D RIVET SPACING EDGE DISTANCE
(Typical) BETWEEN ROWS
DOUBLER 2D MINIMUM
EDGE DISTANCE
CORE
POTTED CORE
ADHESIVE
"HOLE" DAMAGE REPAIR
CR3224-4-2
RIVET 0.08 in.
DOUBLER (2,0 mm)
SKIN
DOUBLER
0.03 in. 0.02 in.

(0,76 mm) (0,5 mm)
MAX DEPTH SKIN
OF COUNTERSINK
TYPICAL FOR TYPICAL CHAMFER

COUNTERSUNK HOLES
C1S-352-00
Detail of Doubler Installation for A “Hole” Damaged Perforated Skin

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 16
UPPER BIFURCATION SOLID SKIN EXTERNAL PATCH REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair procedure gives the instructions to repair a hole in the

outer solid skin on the thrust reverser assembly, upper bifurcation.
The damage can consist of a hole in the solid skin and the core. The
allowable distance between the edges of the existing defect and the
potential defect near the center of the panel is 13.7 inches (347,98
mm)(See Figure 201).
B. The repair installs an external patch in the damaged area.
C. This repair is not applicable to the inner skin or cracks in the solid
skin. The repair edge of the damage must be at least 1.0 inch (25,4 mm)
from fittings, pan downs, and other existing attachments. The repair is
not applicable to holes and other damage larger than 6 inches (152,4
mm) across. Core damage is limited to 3.0 inches (76,2 mm) across.
2. Repair Instructions (See Figures 201 thru 202).
becomes dry.
(2) Do a tap test to examine for disbonds. Mark off any disbonded area.
Do a visual inspection of the area to find any cracks. Use a
magnifying glass with minimum 10X magnification. Mark the crack
ends.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Mark the area to be cut out. The cutout must have the smallest size
possible that includes the disbonded or damaged skin and damaged
core.
NOTE: The cutout can be circular or rectangular. If rectangular, use a

minimum radius of 0.5 inch (12,7 mm) at the corners.
B. Prepare the damage area for repair.

NECESSARY.
THROUGH THE PANEL.
(1) Remove the burrs.
(2) Do a visual inspection using a magnifying glass with minimum 10X

magnification. Repeat the applicable steps if necessary.
(3) If damage is other than a crack, cut and remove the damaged skin as
marked. If the core is damaged, straighten the damaged cell walls.
Remove the burrs.
paper.
(5) Mark the outline of the repair doubler on the solid skin. This is
the area that will be covered by the repair doubler. The repair
doubler must be large enough to install a minimum of two rows of
rivets beyond the edge of damage or cutout all around. (See Figures
201 and 202 for dimensional information).
NOTE: The doubler can be circular or rectangular. If rectangular,

use a minimum radius of 0.5 inch
(12,7 mm) at the corners.
(6) Apply Teflon tape to the skin to mask off the repair area as
marked.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(7) Lightly sand the surface in the area between the pieces of tape. If
you removed a piece of the skin or skin and core, you must also
lightly sand the edges of the honeycomb cells and the skin inside
the cutout. Remove the sharp edges. Use 150-400 grit aluminum oxide
abrasive paper.
becomes dry.
C. Make the repair doubler.

NECESSARY.
(1) Make a repair doubler as marked. Make from 0.056-inch (1,42 mm)
thick minimum 2024-T3 or 2024-T4 aluminum alloy sheet. Chamfer the
edges. Remove the burrs. (See Figures 201 and 202).
(2) Form the repair doubler as necessary to match the contour of the
skin in the damage area. The doubler must fit in place with light
finger pressure.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
THROUGH THE ENTIRE PANEL.
(3) Mark the location of the rivet holes on the repair doubler. Drill
pilot holes in the repair doubler as marked. Put the repair doubler
into position in the repair area. Drill the pilot holes through the
repair doubler and the skin. Do not drill through the outer panel.
Use temporary fasteners to keep the holes aligned. Drill the final
size holes through the repair doubler and the skin. Do not damage
the holes. Remove the burrs. (See Figures 201 and 202 for
dimensional information).
NOTE: Final hole size is 0.160 to 0.164 inch (4,06 to 4,16 mm)
for the CR3524-5 rivets.
(4) Countersink the hole on the air-wetted surface of the doubler to

accept the CR3524-5 flush rivet. Remove the burrs.
(5) Lightly sand the faying surface of the repair doubler. Remove the
sharp edges. Use 150-400 grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper.
D. Prepare all repair surfaces for repair.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Prepare a solution of Turco WO-1 cleaner diluted with

demineralized water according to the instructions of the
manufacturer. Use 20 to 25% Turco WO-1 by volume. Equivalent
etching solution is acceptable. (See Table 201.)
CAUTION: DAB THE TURCO WO-1 SOLUTION ON THE SKIN WHERE THE DOUBLER
WILL BE INSTALLED. DO NOT RUB IT ACROSS THE SKIN.
CAUTION: TURCO WO-1 SOLUTION CAUSES CORROSION TO THE BOND SURFACES.

WHEN YOU APPLY THE SOLUTION, OR RINSE THE SURFACE, DO NOT LET
THE SOLUTION GET THROUGH THE PERFORATIONS.
(4) Apply the Turco WO-1 cleaning solution to all bare aluminum
surfaces according to the instructions of the manufacturer. Dab
the solution on, do not rub.
NOTE: Do not let the solution get into the core.
(5) Dab the treated surfaces thoroughly with clean, lint free cloth
made moist with demineralized water. Use litmus paper to make sure
the etching solution is completely removed. Litmus paper will show
a neutral reading of pH7 when finished. Apply again as necessary.
NOTE: Do not let the water get into the core.
(6) All repair surfaces must be water break free surfaces. Do a water
break free test of these surfaces.(See 54-02-02)
NOTE: A surface is water break free if a thin, unbroken film of

water can stay on it for at least 30 seconds. If the water
breaks, repeat the sanding and cleaning steps.
(7) Dry the repair area according to the instructions of the

manufacturer.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(8) Let the area cool down to room temperature before you apply the
primer.
(9) Prepare the BR-127 adhesive primer according to the instructions

of the manufacturer. Apply the primer to the edges and surfaces
that were treated with the etching solution. The primer must have a
dry film thickness of 0.0001 to 0.0004 inch (0,003 to 0,010 mm).
(10) Air-dry the primer according to the instructions of the

manufacturer.
E. Install the repair doubler.
(1) Use the manufacturer’s instructions to mix the EA9394 adhesive.
(2) Fill the hole, if applicable.
NOTE: If you removed a piece of the skin or skin and core, you
must fill the resulting hole with adhesive.
(a) Apply enough of the EA9394 adhesive mixture to fill the

cutout. Remove the unwanted adhesive. The surface of the
adhesive must be level with the adjacent surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply a thin layer of the EA9394 adhesive mixture to the mating
surfaces of the doubler and the skin.
(4) Put the repair doubler into position. Align the rivet holes. Use
temporary fasteners, if necessary, to keep the holes aligned.
(5) Wet install the rivets with the RTV 106 sealant, or equivalent.
(6) Remove the unwanted adhesive and/or sealant from the repair area
before it cures with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
(7) Put a minimum of two thermocouples around the perimeter of the

repair area. Hold in place with Teflon tape.
(8) Cure the adhesive according to the instructions of the

manufacturer.
(9) Let the repair area cool down to room temperature. Remove the
curing materials.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

NECESSARY.
(10) Remove the sharp edges of the cured adhesive. Use 150-400 grit
aluminum oxide abrasive paper.
becomes dry.
F. Examine the repair.
(1) Visually examine the repair area to make sure all the requirements
of this repair are done. Do a tap test to examine for disbonds.
Repeat the applicable steps, if necessary.
G. Paint repair Doubler.
(1) Apply paint to repair doubler as specified in Repair No. 4.
(2) Apply aerodynamic sealant around periphery of repair doubler.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Adhesive Primer BR-127 V0V7G8
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Aluminum alloy 0.050 inch thick min. Commercially Available
sheet 2024-T3 or T4
Blanket, Heat 250oF minimum, Commercially Available
(Alternative to
10W/Sq.in. (121oC min.)
the Heat Lamp)
10W/645 Sq.mm.
Brush Nylon Commercially Available
Cloth, Wiper Cotton, lint free Commercially Available
Container Metal or plastic Commercially Available
Etching Solution Turco WO-1 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Etching solution Pasa-Jell 105 V4E208
(Alternative for Turco Bergdahl Associates, Inc
WO-1) 2990 Sutro Street
Reno, NV 89512
www.bergdahl.com
Knife Putty Commercially Available
Knife Utility Commercially Available
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Lamp, Heat o o o Commercially Available
150 to 250 F (66 to
Explosion proof
121oC)
Aluminum oxide
Probe, 0o to 250oF, (-18o to Commercially Available
Temperature
121oC)
Tape Teflon, 2 inch (51 mm) Commercially Available
wide
Rivet, Blind CR3524-5-2 Commercially Available
Rivet, Blind, CR3555-5-2 V05693
Flush head, (Alternatives: Cherry Textron Inc
oversize NAS9312M5-2, and
Diameter CR3553-5-2, and
NAS9310M5-2)
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com

99 percent pure
or
Solvent MIBK/MEK Blend V5E821
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Solvent Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
TYPICAL 3.9D REF

DAMAGE 4D REF
A REPAIR DOUBLER,
0.056" THICK
2D MINIMUM
REF
2D MINIMUM
REF
SOLID
SKIN
CORE
SOLID
SKIN
C1S-328-01
A
TYPICAL "HOLE" DAMAGE REPAIR
“Hole” Damaged Solid Skin Repair

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
BLIND 2D MINIMUM
RIVET 4D RIVET SPACING EDGE DISTANCE
(TYPICAL) BETWEEN ROWS
C
DOUBLER 2D MINIMUM D
EDGE DISTANCE
CORE
POTTED CORE
ADHESIVE
B-B
"HOLE" DAMAGE REPAIR
0.08 in. AERODYNAMIC

BLIND SEALANT ALL
(2,0 mm)
DOUBLER RIVET AROUND
SKIN
DOUBLER
0.037 in. 0.02 in.

(0,94 mm) (0,5 mm)
MAX DEPTH SKIN
OF COUNTERSINK
C D
TYPICAL TYPICAL CHAMFER
FOR COUNTERSUNK HOLES
CFS-403-01
Detail of repair Doubler Installation for A “Hole” Damaged Solid Skin

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 17
THRUST REVERSER UPPER & LOWER PIVOT DOOR LATCH FITTING
WORN HOLE BUSHING REPAIR
1. General
This repair is for a worn pivot hole in the upper & (lower) LH, pivoting-
door latch fitting, part number 321-360-202-0, CMM 78-32-36, Figure 12,
item 220, and Figure 13, item 240, or the RH upper & (lower) pivoting door
latch fitting, part number 321-360-252-0, CMM 78-32-36, Figure 12, item
230, and Figure 13, item 250. The hole may be reamed to 0.4354 to 0.4390
inches (11,06 to 11,15 mm) diameter and an interference bushing may be
installed. The pivot housing is made from an investment casting 17-
4PH(Z5CNU17) or 6AL-4V(TA6V). The latch fitting needs to be removed from
the thrust reverser for this repair. If the wear damage is more than
0.4390 inches (11,15 mm) diameter, replace the part with the assembly
number 321-360-151-0 (321-360-154-0) item 12-120 (13-140) for RH side and
321-360-101-0 (321-360-104-0) item 12-110 (item 13-130) for LH side.
A. Ream the worn holes: Refer to Figures 201 and 202.
(1) Set up the latch fitting in a drill press to make sure the
2 holes are reamed in-line. Measure the hole elongation. Choose a
reamer that will clean up the hole as described in Figure 202A. The
maximum diameter allowed is 0.439 inch (11,15 mm). Make sure the
hole locations are within dimensions in Figure 202.
(2) Clean the latch fitting area with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(3) Ream the pivot holes in-line to a maximum diameter of 0.439 inch
(11,15 mm). Maintain 125 RMS surface finish or better on the reamed
holes. A smaller hole diameter of 0.4354 inch
(11,06 mm) minimum is allowed to accommodate a minimum bushing wall
thickness of 0.030 inch (0,762 mm) for the repair bushing.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
B. Inspect the bushing holes.
(1) Perform Dye Penetrant Inspection (FPI) of the worn area for cracks.
No Cracks allowed.
C. Fabricate the repair bushings.
(1) Machine two bushings from 17-4PH AMS 5643 Cres bar, heat treat H900
(180 KSI min. UTS). The bushing shall have an outside diameter
interference fit of 0.0003 to 0.0008 inch (0,0076 to 0,0203 mm)
with the reamed hole. See Figure 202 for dimensional requirements.
NOTE: Type 15-5 PH Cres per AMS5659 may be used as an alternate

material for the bushing.
(2) Machine bushing to dimensions of figure 202. Surface finish is 125

RMS or better. Bushing wall thickness shall be 0.030 inch (0,762
mm) minimum.
(3) Passivate per QQ-P-35 or equivalent.
D. Install the repair bushing.
(1) Clean the repair bushings and the reamed holes with a clean lint-
free cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-
free cloth before the solvent becomes dry.
WARNING: THE TEMPERATURE OF LIQUID NITROGEN IS -320 DEGREES F

(-196 DEGREES C). ACCIDENTAL CONTACT OF LIQUID OR COLD GAS
WITH EYES OR SKIN MAY CAUSE SEVERE FROSTBITE. PRIOR TO USE OF
THIS PRODUCT, CAREFULLY READ THE APPLICABLE “MATERIAL AND
SAFETY DATA SHEETS” AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY AND HEALTH
PRECAUTIONS.
(2) Shrink fit bushings in place. Bushings should be put fully in

liquid nitrogen before installation. Keep bushings in the coolant
for a time of 10 minutes so it is small enough to fit into mating
hole.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(3) Wet install bushings using the interposition paste Blindexite RT

342/2. Install the frozen bushings into the holes. Ensure that the
bushings are flush or below flush with the surface of the pivot
housing. Allow the bushings to reach ambient temperature before
handling latch fitting.
E. Examine repair.
(1) Inspect the inside diameter of the bushing. If the bushing ID does
not meet dimension or in-line requirements then ream the inside
diameter of the bushings. The final bushing inner diameter is
0.3748 to 0.3754 inch (9,520 to 9,535 mm). Inspect the hole
centerline locations per dimensions A and B in Figure 202.
(2) Identify the repair number adjacent to the assembly part number
using a permanent marker or stencil or equivalent.

Bushing Material 17-4PH Per AMS5643 Commercially Available
Alternate Material:
15-5PH Per AMS5659
Anti-Corrosion Paste PR1422A V83574
or PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
Blindexite RT342/2 DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Coolant Nitrogen Commercially Available

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Cloth Cotton Commercially Available
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
Thrust Reverser Latch Fitting Location

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Bushing Details and Installation

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 18
TEMPORARY REPAIR USING DOUBLERS TO REPAIR CRACKS IN THE
UPPER FAN ANGLE
1. General
This temporary repair provides a procedure for the installation of

doubler(s) to reinforce the Upper Fan Angle that has developed a crack(s).
This covers both the Left (321-206-204-6) and Right (321-206-254-6) Upper
Fan Angle. Refer to Fig 201.
This temporary repair can be used to delay the replacement of the fan
angle until the next 7500 Flight Hours / 5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar
months (whichever the earliest). This temporary repair is for cracks in
the foot of the Upper Fan Angle. If a crack is in the radius of the aft
section of the Upper Fan Angle, do not do this repair. Remove and replace
the Upper Fan Angle.
This repair is for cracks in two locations:
A. A crack, which follows the fastener line, into and through the fastener
holes.
B. A crack which follows along the angle radius. This type of crack can
follow along the origin of the radius, or into the radius area
following the length of the Upper Fan Angle.
This repair is temporary. The repair allows safe operation of the

thrust reverser until the next 750 Flight Hours / 750 Flight Cycles / 4
calendar months (whichever the earliest), or at 7500 Flight Hours /
5000 Flight Cycles / 24 calendar months (whichever the earliest)
inspection interval.
The maximum length of the crack for this repair is: 1.50 inches (31.8
mm) from the forward end of the angle, and/or 2.00 inches
(50.8 mm) from the aft end.
A. Inspect the damage area.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
becomes dry.
(2) Examine the Upper Fan Angle for any cracks. Use a magnifying glass
with minimum 10X magnification. Put marks on the crack ends.
(3) The stop drill hole(s) can be the fastener hole(s) if the crack
does not continue beyond the fastener hole(s). This applies to
cracks at the forward end and the aft end of the Upper Fan Angle.
(a) If the crack stops short of a fastener hole, drill a stop hole
using a No. 21, 0.1590 in. (4,04 mm) diameter drill bit at the
end of the crack. Make sure there is 2D edge distance.
(b) If the crack goes toward the fastener hole, and 2D edge
distance, 0.318 in. (8,07 mm), is not possible, do not drill a
stop hole. The fastener hole will suffice.
(4) If the crack is at the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle:
(a) If the crack passes through a fastener hole and extends into
the Upper Fan Angle radius area, or if the crack bypasses the
fastener hole and goes into the radius area of the Upper Fan
Angle, you can do this repair. The maximum length of the crack
can not be more than 3.25 in. (82,55 mm).
(5) If the crack is in the aft end of the Upper Fan Angle:
(a) If a crack goes through a fastener hole and the crack extends
into the Upper Fan Angle radius, or if the crack bypasses the
fastener hole and goes into the radius area of the of the
Upper Fan Angle, the repair is not premitted. Replace the
Angle. (A stop hole will impact the Angle radius.)
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B. Prepare the damaged area.

NECESSARY.
CAUTION: WHEN YOU DRILL OUT THE RIVETS, CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO
INCREASE THE DIAMETER OF THE RIVET HOLES.
(1) If the crack is on the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle and the
crack goes into and/or through the fastener holes, do the
following:
(a) Drill a stop hole at end of crack, if necessary.

See 2.A.(3).
(b) Drill out the two flush head rivets. See Figure 202. (The
rivets will be replaced with universal head design.)
(c) Drill out the NAS1921M04S06W blind rivet.
(d) Remove the NAS1153-20 bolt and the NAS1726-3 nut.
(e) Remove the NAS1153-19 bolt and the NAS1726-3 nut.
(2) If the crack is in the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle and the
crack goes into and/or through a fastener hole and extends into the
angle radius, or if the crack bypasses a fastener hole and goes
into and/or along the angle radius, remove and trim the Upper Fan
Angle. See Figure 203 and 208.
(a) Drill out the two flush head rivets. See Figure 202.
(b) Drill out the NAS1921M04S06W blind rivet.
(c) Remove the NAS1153-20 bolt and the NAS1726-3 nut.
(d) Remove the NAS1153-19 bolt and the NAS1726-3 nut. Remove the
four NAS1153-22 bolts and NAS1726-3 nuts.
(e) Remove the four NAS1153-22 bolts and NAS1726-3 nuts.
(f) Remove the three NAS1154-22 bolts and NAS1726-4 nuts.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(g) Drill out the 16 rivets in the vertical leg of the Upper Fan
angle. See Figure 203.
(3) If the crack is in the aft end of the Upper Fan Angle:
(a) Remove the three NAS 1154-22 screws and NAS1726-4 nuts on the
aft end of the Upper Fan Angle. See Figure 202.
(4) Remove the adhesive from the Upper Fan Angle radius. Scrap and rub
off the adhesive with a non-metallic scraper and lint-free cotton
cloth.
(5) Remove the remaining adhesive with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(6) Fully rub the area where the doubler will touch with a Scotch Brite
abrasive pad.
(7) Clean the metal surfaces with a clean lint-free cloth and the
(8) Flush the surface with de-mineralized water.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(9) Apply Alodine 1200 (or equivalent) to the surface that will touch
the doubler.
C. Make the parts as necessary.
(1) If the crack is in the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle and the
crack goes into and/or through the fastener holes, or if the crack
goes aft more than the fastener hole(s), do the following:
(a) Stop drill the crack. See step 2.A.(3).
(2) If the crack ends in a fastener hole, add the –1 (or –2) doubler as
follows:
(a) Make the –1 and/or –2 doubler according to the location of the

damage. Make the doubler from 0.16 in. (3.81 mm) thick, 2024-
T3 or 2024-T4 aluminum alloy sheet. The –1 doubler is for the
repair of a crack on the forward end of LH Upper Fan Angle
with the crack into and through the fastener holes. The –2
doubler is for the forward RH Upper Fan Angle. See Figure 204.
(3) If the crack was in the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle and the
crack goes into and/or through the fastener hole(s) and extends
into the angle radius, or the crack bypasses the fastener hole(s)
and goes into and/or along the angle radius, do the following:
NOTE: The angle was trimmed in accordance with 2.B.(2).
(a) Machine the –7 and/or –8 angle doubler according to the

location of the damage and the trim length. Make the angle
doubler from 1x2x6 in. (25,4x50,8x152,4 mm) 7075-T6 Aluminum
alloy QQ-A-200/15 Bar. See Figure 205.
NOTE: The –7 and/or –8 Angle Doubler must be machined. It cannot

not be made from sheet stock and bent to the configuration.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(b) Make the –5 and/or –6 doubler. Make the doubler from

0.12 in. (2,54 mm) thick 2024-T3 or 2024-T4 aluminum alloy
sheet. The -5 doubler is for the repair of a crack on the
forward end of LH Upper Fan Angle. The –6 doubler is for the
forward RH Upper Fan Angle. See Figure 206.
(c) Make the –9 flat filler. Find the length of the –9 filler by
using the length of the crack, 2.00 in. (50,8mm) to
3.25 in. (82,55 mm). Make the –9 filler from 0.10 in. (2,54
mm) thick 2024-T3 or 2024-T4 aluminum alloy sheet. The –9
filler is used on both the Left and Right Upper Fan Angle. See
Figure 206.
(4) If the crack is on the aft end of the Upper Fan Angle and the crack
goes into and/or through the fastener holes, do the following:
(a) Make the –3 doubler for repair. The doubler is used on the LH
and RH Upper Fan Angle. Make the -3 doubler from
2024-T3 or 2024-T4 Aluminum Alloy, 0.16 in. (4,06 mm) thick.
See Figure 204.
CAUTION: IF THE CRACK IS IN THE RADIUS AT THE AFT END, THEN THE UPPER
FAN ANGLE MUST BE REPLACED.
(5) Shape the –1 LH Forward Doubler Plate and/or the -2 RH Forward

Doubler Plate (opposite –1) to fit the contour of the forward end
of the Upper Fan Angle. See Figure 204.
CAUTION: YOU MUST MATCH DRILL THE HOLES FROM THE FASTENER RIVET AND/OR
SCREW HOLES IN THE 321-206-204-0 AND/OR 321-206-254-0 ANGLE.
(6) Clamp the doubler(s) into place on the Upper Fan Angle and match
drill. See Figure 202.
(7) Remove the burrs.
(8) Apply Alodine 1200 (or equivalent) to the doubler(s) according to

the manufacturer’s instruction.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
D. Install the doubler(s).
(1) Clean the area where the doubler is to be installed with a clean
(2) Apply a thin layer of EA 9394 adhesive on the faying surfaces of

the Doubler plate and the Upper Fan Angle. The optimum thickness of
the adhesive is 0.004 – 0.012 in. (0,10 – 0,30 mm).
(3) Position the doubler(s) and install the fasteners as follows:
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(a) On the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle (with a crack not in
the radius), install the –1 doubler. Attach the doubler with
one NASM20615-5M12 rivet, two NASM20615-5M12 rivets, three
NAS1133-25 screws, three Aluminum Conical Fillers and three
NAS1726-3 nuts. Wet install the rivets with PR1422A or
equivalent. Torque the screws to 37 to 42 lbf. in.
(4,2 to 4,8 Nm). See Figures 207 and 208.
(b) On the forward end of the Upper Fan Angle (with a crack in
radius), install a –5 doubler, a -7 angle doubler and a –9
filler. Attach them with one AIA/NAS1768M5-8 rivet, five
NASM20615-5M15 rivets, two NASM20615-5M12 rivets, three
NAS1133-25 screws and three NAS1726-3 nuts. See Figures 208
and 209.
1 Torque the NAS1133-25 screws to 37 to 42 lbf. in.

(4,2 to 4,8 Nm).
2 Install the ten NASM20615-5M15 rivets that you removed to

take the Upper Fan Angle out to cut the “radius” crack
from the Angle.
3 Install the four NAS1153-22 screws, four NAS1726-3 nuts,

three NAS1154-22 screws and three NAS1726-4 nuts. See
Figure 207 and 208.

(8,9 to 9,9 Nm).

(4,2 to 4,8 Nm).
(c) On the aft end of the Upper Fan Angle, install a –3 or –4

doubler. Attach the doubler with three NAS1134-24 screws,
three Aluminum Conical Fillers and three NAS1726-4 nuts.
Torque the screws to 80 to 88 lbf. in. (8,9 to 9,9 Nm). See
Figure 207 and 208.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) After you install the Doubler(s), cure the adhesive for 1 hour at
91 degrees C (195 degrees F).
E. Examine the repair.
(1) Do a visual inspection of the repair.
F. Identify the repair.
(1) Put “CFMRS272” adjacent to the assembly number with a marking pen
of a contrasting color.

Abrasive Cloth Scotch Brite Type S V76381
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
EA934NA 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Angle Doubler 7075-T6 Aluminum Bar per Commercially Available
QQ-A-200/15
Anti-Corrosion Paste PR1422A V83574
or PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
Blindexite RT342/2 DBA PPG Aerospace Div
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Bit, Drill No. 21, 4,04 mm Commercially Available
(0.1590 inch) diameter
Table 201 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Bit, Drill No. 10, 4,91 mm Commercially Available
Bit, Drill “F”, 6,53 mm Commercially Available
Chemical Protection Alodine 1200 V71410
Alodine 1500 32100 Stephenson Hwy.
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Doubler Plate 2024-T4/T3 FWD & AFT Commercially Available
Doubler Plate 0.15-in
(3,81 mm) Aluminum Sheet
Filler, Aluminum Conical washer, Commercially Available
Aluminum, to fill
countersink cavity
Filler, Flat 2024-T4/T3 Flat Filler Commercially Available
0.10-in (2,54 mm)
Aluminum Sheet
Nut, Self-Locking NAS1726-3 Commercially Available
NAS1726-4
Paper, Abrasive 150-180-grit Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
Rivet, Solid, NASM20615-4M12 Commercially available
Universal Head, Monel
Rivet, Blind, AIA/NAS1768M5-8 Commercially Available
Protruding Head,
Monel
Rivet, Solid, NASM20615-5M12 Commercially Available
Universal Head, Monel NASM20615-5M15
Screw, Close NAS1133-24 Commercially Available
Tolerance Pan Head NAS1133-25
Screw, Close NAS1134-24 Commercially Available
Tolerance Pan Head
99 percent pure
or
Table 201 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Table 201 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
LEFT
THRUST
RIGHT REVERSER
THRUST
REVERSER
RH UPPER
FAN ANGLE
321-206-253-6
OR
321-206-254-6
LH UPPER
FAN ANGLE
321-206-203-6
OR
321-206-204-6
CFS-412-00
Location of the Upper Fan Angle

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REMOVE REMOVE
SP71-506 NAS1154-22
FLUSH HEAD RIVET SCREW
MATCH DRILL NAS1726-4
DOUBLER PLATE(S) NUT
WITH #21 DRILL BIT MATCH DRILL
0.1590 in. (4,04 mm) DOUBLER PLATE
UPPER WITH #F DRILL BIT
NAS1153-19 FAN 0.2570 IN. (6,53 mm)
ANGLE
NAS1153-20 FIG 204 (321-206-203-6)
AFT
DOUBLER
NAS1921M04S06W FIG 204
PLATE
RIVET NAS1153-22 SCREW
MOUNTS HERE
FORWARD NAS1726-3 NUT
DOUBLER TO BE REMOVED
PLATE AND REPLACED IF
REMOVE ANGLE IS REMOVED
MOUNTS HERE
NAS1153-( ) AND TRIMMED
SCREW LH SHOWN
NAS1726-3 RH OPPOSITE
NUT
MATCH DRILL
DOUBLER PLATE(S)
WITH #10 DRILL BIT
0.1935 IN. (4,91 mm)
FIG 201
CFS-413-00
Removal of the Fasteners for the Installation

of the Doublers on the Upper Fan Angle
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
ADJUST TRIM
LENGTH TO REMOVE
CRACK REMOVE RIVETS
2.00 IN. (16 PLACES)
(50,8 mm)
3.25 IN.
(82,55 mm)
(MAXIMUM) J
J K
FIG 203 TRIM THE FAN FIG 209
UPPER ANGLE
FOOT AS SHOWN
TO REMOVE CRACK REPAIR SCHEME FOR
IN RADIUS G CRACK ALONG FORWARD
SECTION OF FAN UPPER
FIG 207 ANGLE RADIUS
321-203-204-6
LH UPPER FAN ANGLE
CUT BACK
FOOT EVEN WITH
THIS STRUCTURE
LH SHOWN
RH OPPOSITE
CFS-418-00
FIG 203 REMOVE THIS

SECTION OF ANGLE
J J FOOT TO CLEAR CRACK
Trim Foot to Remove a Crack in the Radius of the Upper Fan Angle
Forward Portion of Angle Only
Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
32.375 IN. (822,32 mm)

RADIUS
FORM TO NEST IN
UPPER FAN ANGLE
5.50 IN.
(139,70 mm)
1.15 IN. 0.59 IN.
7° (29,21 mm) 0.25 IN. (14,99 mm)
0.32 IN. 0.24 IN.
(8,13 mm) 0.43 IN. (6,35 mm) 0.56 IN. (6,09 mm)
(10,92 mm) RADIUS (14,22 mm) RADIUS
0.08 IN.
0.81 IN. (2,03 mm)
0.38 IN. 0.38 IN. (20,57 mm)
(9,65 mm) (9,65 mm) -1 LH FORWARD 0.16 IN.
RADIUS RADIUS DOUBLER (4,06 mm)
PLATE
0.66 IN. (-2 RH OPPOSITE)
(16,76 mm)
RADIUS
FIG 202
4.75 IN.
(120,65)
0.25 IN. 0.24 IN.
0.25 IN. (6,09 mm)
(6,35 mm) 0.81 IN.
(6,35 mm) RADIUS
RADIUS (20,57 mm)
RADIUS
0.58 IN.
(14,73 mm)
-3 AFT 0.08 IN.
DOUBLER (2,03 mm)
PLATE
CFS-414-00
0.16 IN.
(4,06 mm)
Detail of the -1, -2, and -3 Doublers

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
32.475 IN. (824,86 mm)

7° RADIUS
FORM TO NEST IN
UPPER FAN ANGLE
2.00 IN. (50,8 mm) TO

3.25 IN. (82,55 mm)
ADJUST AS REQUIRED TO
REMOVE CRACK ALONG
1.15 IN. ANGLE RADIUS 0.81 IN.
(29,21 mm) (20,57 mm)
AREA FOR .21
OUTSIDE RADIUS 1.29 IN.
(32,77 mm)
7° 5.50 IN.
(139,7 mm) 0.25 IN. 0.81 IN.
0.32 IN. (6,35 mm) (20,57 mm)
(8.13 mm) RADIUS
0.12 IN.
(3,05 mm)
0.38 IN. 0.38 IN. 0.43 IN. RADIUS
(9,65 mm) (9,65 mm) (10,92 mm)
RADIUS RADIUS 0.08 IN.
0.66 IN. 0.56 IN. (2,03 mm)
-7 ANGLE (14,22 mm)
(16,76 mm)
DOUBLER
RADIUS
(-8 OPPOSITE)
H
CFS-417-00
FIG 208
Detail of the -7 and -8 Angle Doubler for the

Forward End of a Cracked Doubler
Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
2.00 IN. (50,8 mm) TO

3.25 IN. (82,55 mm).
ADJUST AS REQUIRED TO
REMOVE CRACK ALONG THE
7° RADIUS OF THE UPPER
1.15 IN. FAN ANGLE
0.32 IN. (29,21 mm)
(8,13 mm)
0.10 IN.
(2,54 mm)
0.81 IN.
(20,57 mm)
0.38 IN.
(9,65 mm) 0.38 IN.
RADIUS 0.66 IN. (9,65 mm) -9 FLAT FILLER
(16,76 mm) RADIUS (LH/RH)
RADIUS
M
FIG 208 0.10 IN.
(2,54 mm)
32.375 IN. (822,32 mm) RADIUS

REF. FORM TO NEST ON
THE DOUBLER ANGLE
1.15 IN.
(29,21 mm)
5.50 IN.
7° 0.38 IN. (139,7 mm) 0.12 IN.
(9,65 mm) 0.25 IN. (3,05 mm)
0.32 IN.
RADIUS (6,35 mm)
(8,13 mm)
RADIUS
0.12 IN.
(3,05 mm) 0.12 IN.
0.38 IN. RADIUS (3,05 mm)
(9,65 mm) 0.35 IN. -5 DOUBLER
RADIUS 0.66 IN. (10,92 mm) -6 DOUBLER
(16,76 mm) 0.73 IN.
(18,54 mm)
CFS-420-00
RADIUS LH SHOWN
N RH OPPOSITE
FIG 208
Detail for the -5 and -6 Doubler, and the -9 Filler

Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
321-206-203-6
OR -3 AFT
321-206-204-6 DOUBLER
-1 FORWARD
UPPER FAN PLATE
DOUBLER
NASM20615-5M12 PLATE ANGLE
RIVET
FIG 208
F
E G
F
FIG 208 NAS1134-24
SCREW
E NAS1726-4
NAS1133-24 NUT
FIG 208 SCREW
NAS1726-3
NUT
LH SHOWN
RH OPPOSITE
CFS-415-00
Installation for the -1, -2, and -3 Doubler Plates

Figure 207
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.50 IN.
321-206-204-6/321-206-254-6 (12,7 mm)
UPPER FAN ANGLE REF
CENTERLINE OF
FASTENER HOLE
NAS1133-25
SCREW
NAS1726-3
-1 DOUBLER NUT
PLATE
ALUMINUM
CONICAL
FILLER
E E 0.50 IN.
FIG 207 321-206-204-6/321-206-254-6 (12,7 mm)
UPPER FAN ANGLE REF
LOCATION OF
FASTENER HOLE
TRIM UPPER FAN
ANGLE HERE TO NAS1134-25
REMOVE CRACK AND SCREW NAS1726-4
PROVIDE CLEARANCE NUT
FOR ANGLE DOUBLER -3 DOUBLER
0.50 IN. PLATE ALUMINUM
321-206-204-6/321-206-254-6 (12,7 mm) CONICAL
UPPER FAN ANGLE REF
F F FILLER
FIG 207
LOCATION OF
FASTENER HOLE
-7 ANGLE
DOUBLER H M
FIG 205
N
SEE K FIG 206 FIG 206
FOR FASTENERS
-5 DOUBLER
CFS-416-00
-9 FLAT
PLATE
P P FILLER
FIG 209
Section Cut of the Doubler Installation

Figure 208
CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
NASM20615-5M15
RIVET
NASM204615M5-12 (15 PLACES)
FIG 209
RIVET
321-203-204-6
LH UPPER FAN ANGLE
FIG 208 NAS1133-25 SCREW
AIA/NAS1768M5-8 NAS1726-3 NUT
RIVET 321-203-204-6
-9 FLAT FILLER LH UPPER FAN ANGLE
TRIM LINE OF
UPPER FAN ANGLE
FOOT LH SHOWN
RH OPPOSITE
FIG 203
NASM20615-5M15
RIVET 0.50 IN.
321-206-204-6/321-206-254-6
(12,7 mm)
UPPER FAN ANGLE
LOCATION OF
FASTENER HOLE
-7 ANGLE DOUBLER
NAS1133-25 SCREW
-5 DOUBLER NAS1726-3 NUT
CONFIGURATION SHOWING THE

INSTALLATION OF THE -7 ANGLE
DOUBLER, -5 DOUBLER WITH A
NAS1133-25 SCREW AND
NAS1726-3 NUT
CFS-419-00
FIG 209
Installation of the Doublers and the Filler to Repair

the Forward Upper Fan Angle Radius Crack
Figure 209
CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 19
THRUST REVERSER TEMPORARY THERMAL BLANKET BONDED PATCH REPAIR
1. General
A. This procedure gives instructions to repair the thrust reverser thermal

blanket outer foil damage that is less than 3.0 inch (76,2 mm) in
diameter when the filler is not missing or wet.
B. This repair installs a CRES patch over the damaged area with sealant.
C. The thermal blanket outer foil is 0.003 inch (0,076 mm) thick stainless
steel.
A. Prepare the damaged foil.
(1) Remove any sharp edges from the foil.
(2) Stop drill cracks or tears with a #40 drill bit. Do not damage the
structure below the surface of the thermal blanket.
B. Make the repair patch.
(1) Make a repair patch from 0.003 to 0.005 inch thick CRES 321 foil.
Make the repair patch large enough to make a 0.5 inch (12,7 mm)
overlap in all directions. Make the radius of all corners 0.5 inch
(12,7 mm) minimum. Make the patch a shape to agree with the contour
of the thermal blanket. When you put the patch in position, it must
fit with light finger pressure.
NOTE: The patch can be circular or rectangular, and you can use
one patch to cover damage in two or more adjacent areas.
(2) Use 150 to 400 grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper to remove the
sharp edges.
C. Clean the repair area and the repair patch.
(1) Clean the repair patch and repair area up to 1.0-inch (25,4 mm)
beyond the damage with a stainless wire brush.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: USE CLEAN COTTON GLOVES THAT ARE FREE OF LINT TO MOVE OR
TOUCH CLEANED PIECES OR CONTAMINATION WILL OCCUR.
becomes dry.
CHEMICALS.
D. Apply SS4004 primer to the mating surfaces of the repair patch and the
thermal blanket. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
CHEMICALS.
E. Apply RTV 106 to the primed mating surface of the thermal blanket. Make
sure the sealant is 1/8-inch (3.2 mm) thick, smooth and makes a 0.5-
inch (12.7 mm) minimum overlap all around the damage area.
F. Put the repair patch in position over the damage area immediately after
you apply the sealant.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
G. Apply enough pressure to make sure the patch bonds to the sealant and
thermal blanket. Do not push the sealant out of the bond area.
H. Remove unwanted sealant from the area with a clean lint-free cotton
cloth.
I. Allow the sealant to cure. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
J. Do the permanent weld patch repair no later than 750 flight hours or
750 flight cycles after you do this repair, whichever comes first.
Refer to CMM 78-32-36, Repair No. 58, Thrust Reverser Thermal Blanket
Weld Patch Repair.

Abrasive Paper 150-400 grit Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
Gloves Lint-free, Cotton Commercially Available
Cloth Lint-free, Cotton Commercially Available
CRES 321 Foil Stainless Steel 321 Commercially Available
0.003 – 0.005 inches
thick
Wire Brush Stainless Steel Commercially Available
or Momentive Performance Material Inc.
RTV736 260 Hudson River Rd.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone:877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Primer SS4004 V01139
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
d e le t e a ll '+ ' s y m b o ls
t h e s e a r e fo r t h e s p o t w e ld s n o t u s e d in t h is r e p a ir
RADIUS
0.5 in. (13,00 mm)
(Typical)
0.5 in.
(13,00 mm) min. STOP DRILL
(Typical) OR CUT THE
CRACK END TO
REMOVE THE
SHARP EDGE
TYPICAL CRACK
THERMAL
BLANKET
PATCH
EDGE OF PART
EDGE OF CUTOUT
PATCH
0.5 in.
(13,00 mm) min. THERMAL
(Typical) BLANKET
CFS-450-00
TYPICAL PATCHES
Thermal Blanket Bonded Patch

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 20
THRUST REVERSER 3/9 O’CLOCK KEEL BEAM CRACK PERMANENT REPAIR
1. General
This repair procedure gives the instructions to repair damage on the 3 and
9 o’clock Keel Beams on the thrust reverser assembly. (See Figure 201).
Typical damage consists of cracks near the forward attach holes. Cracks
that extend to one of the forward attach holes (that do not extend more
than 0.20-inch (5,08 mm) past the attach hole) may be repaired by removing
the damage, making and installing a repair filler and strap doubler.
For damage that is more than the above limits, refer to Goodrich for
analysis or remove and replace the Keel Beam.
2. Crack Repair Instructions (Flange Repair)
This repair is applicable to cracks in the hoop direction that extend up

to 0.20-inch (5,08 mm) beyond the forward attach hole of the Keel Beam.
See Figure 201 (Sheet 1, detail A-A and B-B).
If cracks exist on both sides of the Keel Beam remove and replace the Keel
Beam.
A. Examine the damaged area.
(1) Remove the fastener in the damaged area and the additional fastener
as shown in Figure 201 (Sheet 1).
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT GET THE PENETRANT INSPECTION MATERIALS ON THE AREAS OF

THE COMPONENTS THAT YOU CAN NOT CLEAN. CLEAN ALL PENETRANT
INSPECTION MATERIALS FROM THE COMPONENTS AFTER THE
INSPECTION. DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS CAN OCCUR IF YOU DO NOT
DO THIS.
(3) Do a Type 1, Method A, Level 3 fluorescent penetrant inspection of

the cross beam for cracks (Refer to ASTM E 1417 or AMS2647). Do not
get the penetrant materials on the areas of the cross beam that you
can not clean.
(4) Mark the cracked area to be cut out or routed. See Figure 201
(Sheets 1 and 2).
NOTE: The cutout or routing must have the smallest size possible
that includes the damaged skin and must be large enough to
install at least one fastener.

NECESSARY.
(1) Cut and remove the damaged beam area as marked. Remove the burrs.
See Figure 201 (Sheet 2).
paper.
becomes dry.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
C. Make the repair parts.

NECESSARY.
(1) Make a filler from 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet to match the cutout
area in the keel beam. Make sure the filler is the same thickness
as the keel beam. Remove the burrs. Maximum filler gaps not to
exceed 0.030 inches (0,762 mm).
(2) Make a repair doubler as marked. Make the doubler from 0.070-inch
(1,8 mm) thick minimum 2024-T3 aluminum alloy sheet with 0.25 inch
(6,35 mm) to 0.50 inch (12,7 mm) radius corners. Remove the burrs.
See Figure 201 (Sheet 3).
NOTE: You can make the repair filler and doubler from
2024-0 COND sheet and heat treated to -T42 Per AMS-H-6088
or equivalent.
(3) Form the repair doubler as necessary to match the contour of the
damaged area. Make the corner radius of the doubler. Repair doubler
lower edge (that interfaces with the existing keel beam fillet
radius) shall be chamfered or have a radius as required to prevent
hard spots or stress risers on the keel beam flange. The parts must
fit in place with light finger pressure.
D. Drill the repair rivet holes.
(1) Mark the two rivet holes on the repair doubler to get the proper
edge distance. See figure 201 (Sheet 3 and 4) for dimensional
information).
(2) Drill pilot holes in the repair doubler as marked. Put the repair
doubler into position in the repair area. Drill the pilot holes
through the repair doubler and the Keel Beam. Use temporary
fasteners (Clecos) to get proper alignment.
(3) Drill the final size 0.129-0.132 inch (3,276-3,352 mm) holes
through the repair doubler and the Keel Beam. Countersink the final
size holes on the inboard side of the keel beam to 0.222-.228 inch
(5.638 to 5,791 mm) x 100 degrees. Remove the burrs. See Figure 201
(Sheet 3 and 4).
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(4) Backdrill the existing screw hole in the ramp fairing through the
filler and repair doubler to 0.190-0.194
(4,826-4,927 mm). Remove the burrs.
(5) Backdrill the existing screw hole the in the deflector, keel beam,
and repair doubler to 0.190-0.194 (4,826-4,927 mm). Remove the
burrs.
(6) Lightly sand the mating surfaces of the repair parts. Remove the
sharp edges. Use 150-400 grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper.
E. Prepare all repair surfaces for repair.
CHEMICALS.
(1) Clean the repair doubler and the repair area with a clean lint-free
cloth and the solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free
CHEMICALS.
(2) Apply BONDRRITE M-CR 1200S Aero to the repair parts and bare edges
of the Keel Beam. Refer to the manufacturers instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(3) Apply Epoxy Polyamide Primer 10P4-2 or equivalent to the repair

parts and bare edges of the keel beam. Refer to the manufacturers
instructions.
F. Install the repair doubler on the keel beam.
CHEMICALS.
CAUTION: USE LINT FREE GLOVES WHEN YOU TOUCH THE CLEANED OR
PREPARED SURFACES. THIS PREVENTS CONTAMINATION.
(1) Apply a thin layer of Proseal 870B sealant to the mating surfaces
of the repair doubler and the Keel Beam. Refer to the manufacturers
instructions.
(2) Put the repair doubler into position and Align the fastener holes.
(3) Wet install the rivets with the Proseal 870B sealant, or equivalent
alternate.
G. Check the clearance between the fish plate and the keel beam. See
Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Clean all parts with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
becomes dry.
(2) Measure the clearance between the fish plate and keel beam. See
Table 201.
MEASURES ACTIONS
0.004 inch (0+/-0.1 mm) No action
Between 0.004 inch (0.1 mm)and Adjust the peelable shim
0.063 inch (1.6 mm)
More than 0.063 (1.6 mm) Contact Goodrich representative
Table 201
(3) If the gap is between 0.004 inch (0.1 mm) and 0.063 inch (1.6 mm),
install a peelable shim as follows:
(a) Remove the fish plate fasteners NAS1154-16 (2 positions) and

NAS1726-4 (2 positions).
CHEMICALS.
(b) Clean all parts with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent.
Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(c) Apply BONDERITE M-CR 1200S Aero on the peelable shim. Refer to
the manufacturers instructions.
CHEMICALS.
(d) Apply a primer PAC33 or S15/76 on the peelable shim. Refer to

the manufacturers instructions.
CHEMICALS.
(e) Apply a thin layer of interposition paste PR1436G B2 or B4 on

the peelable shim. Refer to the manufacturers instructions.
(f) Put the peelable shim in position between the fish plate and
the forward frame.
H. Install the screws that attach the repair doubler and keel beam to the
deflector, filler, and ramp fairing.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Put the ramp fairing and deflector into position. Make sure that
the screw holes are aligned with the keel beam, doubler, and
filler.
CHEMICALS.
(2) Wet install the screws and nuts with Proseal 870B. Refer to the
manufacturers instructions.
I. Install the fish plate fasteners.
CHEMICALS.
(a) Wet install the fasteners (NAS1154-16) (2 positions) and

NAS1726-4 (2 positions) with interposition paste PR1436G B2 or
B4. Refer to the manufacturers instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CHEMICALS.
(b) Remove the excess sealant from the repair area before it cures
with a clean lint-free cloth and the solvent. Remove the
solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent
becomes dry.
J. Apply a surface finish to the repair area.
(1) Apply 10P4-2 epoxy primer to all exposed surfaces where no primer
was applied in the previous steps. Refer to the manufacturers
instructions.
(2) Apply topcoat Aerodur C21/100UVR to all exposed surfaces of the

Keel Beam and the repair area. Refer to the manufacturers
instructions.
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(3) Apply Corrosion Protection Compound AV-30 to all exposed surfaces

of the repair area. Refer to manufacturers instructions.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Corrosion Protection AV-30 or AV-40 V23373
Coating Brent America, Inc.
16961 Knott Avenue
La Mirada, CA 90638
(714) 739-2821
Screw NAS2803-4 Commercially Available
Blind Rivet NAS1921M04-03W Commercially Available

Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Aluminum repair doubler 0.70 in. (1,8 mm) Commercially Available
thick 2024-0, -T3 or
-T42 per AMS QQ-A-
250/4
Epoxy Polyamide Primer 10P4-2 V0KXA5
Polyurethane top coat Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
or East Water St.
Epoxy Polyamide Primer Aerodur C21/100UVR Waukegan, IL 60085-5563
Polyurethane top coat Phone: (847) 625-4200
or Fax: (847) 625-3200
Epoxy Polyamide Primer PAC33 www.anac.com
Polyurethane top coat PU66
S15/76
Aviox Finnish
Sealant Proseal 870B V83574
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Sealant (ALT) RTV88/9910 OR V5D028
RTV88/9950 OR Dow Corning Corporation
RTV88/0.5% 3901 South Saginaw Road
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Aluminum Filler 0.063 in. (1.6 mm) Commercially Available
thick 2024-T3 or
-T42 per
AMS QQ-A-250/4
Aluminum Oxide
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Chemical conversion BONDERITE M-CR 1200S V71410
coating Aero Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Interposition Paste Thiokol two-part V5HCF1
elastomer sealant PR PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
1436 G B2/B4 12780 San Fernando Road
Sylmar, CA 91342
Telephone (818) 240-2060
Toll Free (800) 237-6649
Shim Peelable, 0.063 INCH Commercially Available
Laminated (1,600mm) 0.003
INCH (0,076mm)
peelable increments
per MIL-S022499,
COMP.1, TYPE 1,
CLASS 2
Table 202 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A B
KEEL BEAM
DEFLECTOR
ORIGINAL SCREW ORIGINAL

NAS2803-3 NUT
RAMP
FAIRING
A, B
CRACK
A, B A
C1S-437-00
Keel Beam Flange Crack Repair

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CRACK
RAMP FAIRING DEFLECTOR
CRACKING AREA
(For dimensions see Figure 201
Sheet 2)
RAMP FAIRING
KEEL BEAM
A A
0.20 in.
(5 mm)
CUT OUT DAMAGED AREA
0.20 in.
(5 mm)
0.20 in.
(5 mm)
B B
C1S-438-00
Maximum acceptable area for the crack
Keel Beam Flange Crack Repair, Maximum Material Removed

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
KEEL BEAM
SCREW
BLIND RIVET DEFLECTOR
NAS2803-3 (Before repair)
NAS1921M04-03W
NAS2803-4 (After repair)
RAMP
FAIRING
C
ORIGINAL
FILLER NUT
REPAIR
DOUBLER
B
FILLER
0.190-0.194 in. REPAIR
(4,826-4,927 mm) DOUBLER
0.31 in. 0.31 in.

(8 mm) (8 mm)
D D
RIVET HOLES
0.129-0.132 in.
C1S-439-00
(3,276-3,352 mm)
C C
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
SCREW
NAS2803-3 (Before repair)
NAS2803-4 (After repair)
ORIGINAL NUT
RAMP FAIRING DEFLECTOR
KEEL BEAM
0.31 in.
(8 mm) PR1436G B2 OR B4 SEALANT
BETWEEN REPAIR PLATE AND
KEEL
NAS1921M04-03W
RIVET
0.47 in.
(12 mm)
REPAIR
DOUBLER
D D
C1S-440-00

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A
KEEL BEAM
FISH PLATE
NAS1154-16
NAS1726-4
KEEL BEAM
GAP TO BE
MEASURED
C1S-441-00
B
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 21
CLEANING AND LUBRICATING OF THE LATCH FITTING PIN AND ROLLER ON
UPPER AND LOWER PIVOTING DOOR
1. General
A. This repair procedure provides the instructions for the cleaning and
the lubricating of the latch fitting pin and roller in case of seizing
on the upper and lower pivoting door of the Thrust Reverser. All CFM56-
5A/-5B Thrust Reversers are affected. Refer to Figure 201
(Sheets 1 and 2).
B. Interval
Inspect, clean and lubricate the latch fitting pin and roller at 20 month
intervals per the requirements of this repair.
A. Cleaning and lubricating procedures for the latch fitting pin and
roller in case of seizing.
(1) Remove the latch fitting pin and roller.
(a) Remove the cotter pin, the washer, and nut from the latch
fitting pin on the latch fitting.
(b) Remove the latch fitting pin and remove the roller from
between the lugs of the latch fitting.
(2) Clean the latch fitting pin and roller with a Scotch-Brite hand pad
and solvent. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(3) Clean the latch fitting pin and roller with a clean lint-free cloth
(4) Check of the pin and roller for wear. Refer to Figure 203.
(a) Pin diameter: 0.367-inch (9.322 mm) minimum. If the diameter

is less than 0.367-inch (9.322 mm) discard pin.
(b) Roller inner diameter: 0.383-inches (9.718 mm) maximum. If the

diameter is more than 0.383-inches (9.718 mm) discard roller.
(5) Lubrication of the pin and roller. Refer to Figure 202 and Table
202.
CHEMICALS.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE NOT TO APPLY LUBRICANT ON THREADS OF BOLT OR

TORQUE WILL BE CHANGED. SEIZING OF ROLLER COULD OCCUR
AND DAMAGE OF BLOCKER DOOR LATCH COULD RESULT.
(a) Apply a thin coat of Molykote 3402C Dry Film Lubricant on the
pin and on the internal diameter of the roller. An acceptable
alternate is Molykote D321.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(b) Let the Molykote 3402C or D321 dry. Refer to Table 201.
Recommended dry
Product Use Temp Range film thickness Curing Time
Molykote 3402C -388° F to +572° F 0.000196 to 2 hours at 68 F°(20°C)
(-198° C to 0.000787 inch -or-
+300°C) (0.004978 to 10 minutes at 122°F (50°C)
0.019999 mm)
Molykote D321 -288° F to +842° F 0.000196 to 5 minutes at ambient temp
(-178° C to 0.000787 inch
+450°C) (0.004978 to
0.019999 mm)
Table 201
(6) Install the latch fitting pin and roller. Refer to Figure 201
(Sheet 1 and 2).
(a) Install the roller on the latch fitting between the lugs.
(b) Install the latch fitting pin, the washer and the nut.
(c) Torque the nut to between 130 and 173 lbf.in (14,68 and 19,54
N.m). Install a new cotter pin.
replace the items shown in table 202.

99 percent pure
or
Phone: (717) 944-7471
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Lubricant Molykote 3402C V5D028
Midland, MI 48686
Phone: (989) 496-4400
www.dowcorning.com
Lubricant, Alternate Molykote D321 V5D028
Abrasive Pad Scotch-Brite V76381
3M Center
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
Phone: (800) 362-3550
Cloth Cotton Lint-Free Commercially Available
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Upper Pivoting Door

CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Pin and Roller Location

CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Pin and Roller Lubrication

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
Pin and Roller Dimensions

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 22
THRUST REVERSER UPPER & LOWER PIVOT DOOR LATCH FITTING
WORN AREA WELD REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair is for a worn anti-rotation land and worn contact area on
the Upper & (Lower) LH Pivoting Door latch fitting 321-360-200-0, 321-
360-201-0, 321-360-202-0, 321-360-203-0, or the RH Upper & (Lower)
pivoting Door latch fitting 321-360-250-0, 321-360-251-0,
321-360-252-0, 321-360-253-0 (ref. CMM 78-32-36).
(1) The maximum pad wear acceptable limit is 0,5 mm (0.020 inches) deep
If wear exceeds this limit perform the weld repair.
(2) A maximum of two weld repairs can be completed before the fitting
must be replaced.
(3) The maximum anti-rotation land wear is 0,47 mm (0.018 inches). If

wear exceeds this limit perform weld repair.
NOTE: Damage to the anti-rotation land is cause by roller and pin

seizing. Wear can be reduced by completing CMM cleaning and
lubrication process CMM 78-32-35 #81 / CMM 78-32-36 #60
B. These procedures are used to replace material to repair the initial

surface flushness. A Heat Treatment is applied to replace the strength.
To do these procedures the welders must be approved to MIL-STD-1595 or
equivalent. The pivot housing is made from 6AL-4V(TA6V) (p/n’s 321-360-
201-9 & 321-360-251-9) or is made from an Investment Casting 17-
4PH(Z5CNU17) (p/n’s 321-360-202-9 & 321-360-252-9). This weld repair
ONLY applies to the Titanium 6AL-4V fittings. You must remove the latch
fitting from the Thrust Reverser for this repair.
C. If the part is made from an investment casting 17-4PH (Z5CNU17) then it

must be replaced with the applicable assembly numbers: 321-360-151-0
(321-360-154-0) item 12-220 (13-140) for RH side, and 321-360-101-0
(321-360-104-0) item 12-110 (item 13-130) for LH side.
A. Inspect wear area and fitting material, see figures 201 and 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Examine the latch fitting to make sure the material is 6AL-4V
(TA6V) (p/n’s 321-360-201-9 & 321-360-251-9). If the fitting is
17-4PH (Z5CNU17) (p/n’s 321-360-202-9 & 321-360-252-9) then do not
continue and replace the part. Measure the wear area and make sure
the weld repair can be done correctly. Make sure the pad wear area
does not extend more than 0.020” (0,5mm) from the surface of the
part.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
LATCH
FITTING
C1S-515-00
Thrust Reverser Latch Fitting Location

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
ROLLER
0.5 mm
WEAR
(0.020 INCH)
AREA
MAX. DEPTH
A
WEAR
AREA
BOLT HAS BEEN ROTATING AND
WORN SUFFICIENT MATERIAL OUT
0.47 mm OF LAND TO ALLOW A FULL 360°
B (0.018 INCH)
MAX DEPTH
ROTATION.
ANTI-ROTATION LAND
C1S-516-00
Wear Details and Wear Location

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) Clean the latch fitting area with a cloth moist with methyl ethyl
ketone (MEK) or equivalent. Dry before solvent becomes gas.
B. Inspect the worn area.
(1) Do fluorescent penetrant inspection refer to AMS2647, or

equivalent specification. No cracks permitted.
C. Prepare area for welding.
(1) Use a stainless steel wire brush to remove oxides and

contaminates from the weld area.
(2) Clean all weld surfaces and the edges to remove all oil, grease,
dirt or other contamination. Use a clean lint free cloth moist with
MEK or equivalent. Dry the surface before solvent becomes gas.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
D. Perform weld repair.
(1) Position a weld bead in worn area, use the gas tungsten arc welding
(GTAW) procedure with the filler wire refer to AMS4954. It is
recommended to extend the weld bead above the initial surface of
the fitting a minimum 0.050 inches (1,27 mm). Use the copper chill
bars around the weld area to decrease the distortion. Let the
fitting go to ambient temperature before handling.
NOTE: Type AMS4956 ELI may be used as an alternate material for

the welding filler rod.
E. Perform post-weld inspection.
(1) Inspect surface discoloration. Perform visual inspection of

weld area to determine if the weld repair is acceptable.
Titanium surface color or the degree of oxidation is related to the

atmospheric contamination. When examined before wire brushing, re-
welding or cleaning, the weld surface shall be from a silvery-
bright appearance (indicating the most effective gas shielding) to
a gold or metallic light blue color (indicating acceptable gas
shielding). Weld metal exhibiting dark blue, violet or gray color
shall be rejected. Material adjacent to the weld bead exhibiting
dark blue or violet is acceptable provided the color can be wire
brushed away. Any area exhibiting gray color shall be rejected.
(2) Inspect weld for porosity or other defects (ref: AWS D17.1).
F. Do a post-weld stress relief.
(1) Stress relief the fitting to 1100°F +/-25°F (593°C +/-4°C)

for 2 hours minimum, 5 hours maximum in a vacuum furnace.
G. Repair initial dimensions. Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Machine the welded areas to obtain the initial dimensions.

Allow 0.0002-0.0005 inches (0.00508-0.0127 mm) of metal for
each surface to be removed by etching process.
(2) Maintain 125 RMS surface finish or better finish. Use

caution to not machine into parent material. Prevent change
of color of the part by not overheating.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.510 ± 0.015 INCH

(13 ± 0.4 mm)
0.010(0.2) B C
A
B B C
A
B-B
R 0.005(0.1)
0.295 ± 0.005 INCH 0.118 + 0/ - 0.005 INCH

(7.5 ± 0.1 mm) (5 + 0/ - 0.1 mm)
TYP 2 PLACES
0.120 ± 0.005 INCH
(3 ± 0.1 mm) 0.787 ± 0.015 INCH
(20 ± 0.4 mm)
C1S-517-01
63 RMS (1.6)
A-A
Fitting Details and Inspection Requirements

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
H. Etch the repaired areas
(1) Etch surface.
NOTE: This etching procedure will remove approximately

0.0002-0.0005 inches (0.00508-0.0127 mm) of metal per
surface.
(a) Mask the areas not to be etched.
(b) Process parts as following:
1 Alkaline Clean 10-20 minutes.
Solution:
Turco HTC (6-8 oz/gal)

Water (Balance)
Temperature 180-200 deg F (82-93 deg C)
or
GMC 528B-NSC (22-27% by volume)

Water (Balance)
Temperature (Ambient)
2 Water Rinse.
3 Titanium Etch 2-10 minutes.
Solution:
Nitric Acid (30-35% by volume)
Hydrofluoric Acid (1.7-2.4% by volume) or Ammonium

Biflouride (2.4-3.4% by volume).
Wetting Agent (as required to maintain surface

tension of 35-45 dynes/cm at 67-73 deg F)(Calsoft
LAS 99 Wetting Agent, McKesson Chemical Corp or
Surfactant Activol 1357, Harry Miller Corporation)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Water (Balance)
Temperature 120-140 deg F (49-60 deg C)
Control: Iron (Fe) content 15 g/l max; Titanium

(Ti) content 30 g/l max;
Nickel (Ni) content 3 oz/gal max;
Maintain etch rate at 0.0025-0.005 inch/surface/

hour. Determine etch rate daily using a specimen
of Ti6Al-4V annealed (Condition I)
4 Water Rinse.
5 De-smut 1-3 minutes.
Solution:
Nitric Acid (20-25% by volume)

Water (Balance)
Temperature (135-145 deg F, 57-63 deg C)
6 Spray and/or Immersion Rinse.
Demineralized water
7 Immersion Rinse.
Demineralized water
Temperature (Hot to facilitate drying)
8 Dry
I. Inspect.
(1) Inspect the repaired areas. Refer to Figure 203.
(2) Perform fluorescent penetrant inspection per AMS2647, or

equivalent specification. No cracks allowed.
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
J. Identify repair.
(1) Identify the repair number adjacent to the assembly part

number using a permanent marker or stencil or equivalent.
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Solvent Methyl Ethyl Commercially Available
Ketone
Alternate Solvent Isopropyl Alcohol Commercially Available
99% pure
Acetone Commercially Available
Alkaline Cleaner Turco HTC Turco Products Inc.
Henkel Surface Technologies
Alkaline Cleaner GMC 528B-NSC Commercially Available
Alternate
Acid Nitric Acid Commercially Available
Acid Hydrofluoric Acid Commercially Available
Acid, Alternate Ammonium Biflou- Commercially Available
ride
Wetting Agent Calsoft LAS 99 McKesson Chemical Corp
Wetting Agent Surfactant Harry Miller Corp
Alternate Activol 1357
Chill bars Copper Commercially Available
Fluorescent Pene- Commercially Available
trant Inspection
Equipment
GTAW Equipment Commercially Available
Stainless Steel Commercially Available
Wire Brush
Weld Filler Rod 6AL-4V Commercially Available
Material Per AMS4954
Material 6AL-4V Commercially Available
Alternate Per AMS4956 ELI
Vacuum Furnace Commercially Available
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 23
THRUST REVERSER 6 O’Clock Outer Cut Corner Cutout Panel Damaged Hole
Repair
1. General
A. This repair provides instructions to repair damaged fastener holes on

the 6 ‘O Clock outer cut corner panel. Damage typically consists of
oversized or elongated holes at the fastener locations. See Figure 201
for the hole locations.
B. This repair is only applicable to outer cut corner panels made from
aluminum.
C. The maximum allowable number of repairs on a single panel is 6.
D. The maximum repairable hole size is 0.262 in (6.65 mm).
E. This repair consists of locally manufacturing repair bushings for

elongation damage.
2. Effectivity
A. All aluminum 6 O’Clock outer cut corner panels.
A. Examine the outer cut corner panel. See Figure 201.
(1) Remove the outer cut corner panels: Refer to CMM 78-32-36,
Repair 13.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Perform a visual inspection of the outer cut corner panel, mark
worn, elongated, or damaged fastener holes.
B. Rework the 6 ‘o clock cut corner panel and underlying latch fitting.
(1) Enlarge the damaged fastener holes in the cut corner panel to
remove any damaged material. Ensure the holes are round and
concentric with the original holes in the cut corner panel and the
mating latch fitting holes. Refer to Figure 201 for hole locations.
(2) Drill/ream hole in cut corner panel to a diameter of 0.262 inches

(6.65 mm) plus or minus 0.003 inches (0.07 mm). A minimum of 1.5 X
the diameter of the hole edge margin, as measured from center of
fastener hole to edge of panel, must be maintained.
(3) Drill/ream mating hole in underlying latch fitting to a diameter of

0.262 inches (6.65 mm) plus or minus 0.003 inches (0.07 mm). Ensure
the newly sized holes are concentric with the original holes in the
fitting and the mating panel holes. Break the edges of the holes
0.015 (0.381 mm) to 0.025 (0.635 mm) with a 100 degree cutter.
(4) Deburr and clean the holes. Measure and record the final diameter
of the reworked holes.
C. Make the repair washer-bushing for cut corner panel.
(1) Make a washer bushing with the dimensions as specified in Figure

202.
NOTE: Shoulder bushing wall thickness must be a minimum thickness

of 0.030 inches (0.76 mm).
(2) Make the repair washer bushing the same diameter of the hole
diameter recorded in step 3.B.(4). Refer to Figure 202.
(3) Make the repair washer bushing from 7075-T651 plate per AMS 4045 or
7075-T6 bar/rod per AMS-QQ-A-200/11.
D. Make the shoulder bushing for latch fitting.
(1) Make shoulder bushing with the dimensions as specified in Figure

203. Shoulder bushing wall thickness must be a minimum thickness of
0.030 inches (0.76 mm).
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) Make a shoulder bushing the same diameter as the hole diameter
recorded in step 3.B.(4). Refer to Figure 203.
(3) Make the shoulder bushing from 7075-T6 sheet or 7075-T651 plate per
AMS 4045 or 7075-T6 bar/rod per AMS-QQ-A-200/11.
E. Install the repair washer bushing in cut corner panel.
(1) Clean the repair surfaces and repair parts. Use a clean lint-free
cloth moistened with the solvent. Wipe the surface clean and dry
(2) Install a repair washer-bushing into the reworked hole of the cut
corner panel using adhesive. See Figure 204.
(a) Cure adhesive according to the instructions of the

manufacturer. Refer to SRM 51-72-12 Paragraph D. for General
guidelines regarding installation of standard bushings.
F. Install the shoulder bushing in latch fitting.
(1) Clean the repair surfaces and repair parts. Use a clean lint-free
cloth moistened with the solvent. Wipe the surface clean and dry
(2) Install the shoulder bushing into the reworked hole of the latch
fitting using adhesive. See Figure 204.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(a) Maintain a minimum clearance of 0.004 inches (0.10 mm) between

the washer bushing in cut corner panel and shoulder bushing in
latch fitting. Cure adhesive per manufacturers instructions.
Refer to SRM 51-72-12 Paragraph D. for general guidelines
regarding installation of standard bushings.
G. Restore surface protection.
(1) Apply external surface protection. Refer to A320 SRM section

54-02-00.
H. Install the beam outer panel.
(1) Use MBF2122-6-XXX fasteners to install the cut corner panels.

Install the cut corner panels according to CMM 78-32-36 Repair 13.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
4. Repair Materials and Equipment.
DESCRIPTION DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Solvent Acetone Commercially Available
Adhesive EA9394 Hysol
West Paterson, NJ
072423317
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
32100 Stevenson Hwy.
Madison Heights, MI
48071
Phone: (248) 583-9300

Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
SIX (6) AFFECTED

HOLES
6 O'CLOCK OUTER
CUT CORNER
PANEL
C1S-539-00
Thrust reverser Outer Cut Corner Panel, Left Hand shown, Right hand opposite.
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A A
0.61 INCH
0.37 INCH
100°
23°
DIM A
DIM B
0.083 0.018 INCH R 0.032
INCH
INCH
0.030 INCH
0.079 INCH DIM C
VIEW A-A
C1S-540-01
DIM A DIM B DIM C

0.077 0.199/0.197 DIM OF PANEL HOLE +0.000/ -.0.001
Repair Washer Bushing, Outer Cut Corner Panel

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
0.005 INCH - 0.015 INCH R
0.433 INCH
DIM D DIM E
-0.445 INCH
0.083
0.8 INCH*
INCH
* FINAL LENGTH CAN BE

ADJUSTED AFTER
INSTALLATION
C1S-541-00
DIM D DIM E
0.199/0.197 DIM OF LATCH FITTING HOLE +0.000/ -.0.001
Shoulder Bushing, Latch Fitting

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
WASHER- BOND THE

6 O'CLOCK CUT BUSHING WASHER/BUSHING
CORNER OUTER WITH HYSOLEA9394
PANEL (CP2526)
LATCH FITTING GAP BETWEEN BOND THE

BUSHINGS: SHOULDER BUSHING
.004 INCH BUSHING WITH HYSOLEA9394
+.002 INCH/-.000INCH (CP2526)
GAP BETWEEN BUSHINGS:

0.004 INCH +0.002 INCH/-0.000 INCH
C1S-542-00
NGS SHALL NOT EXTEND

D MATERIAL INTERFACE
Bushing Installation
Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 24
THRUST REVERSER 3/9 O’Clock Beam Outer Panel Damaged Hole Repair
1. General
A. This repair provides instructions to repair damaged fastener holes on

the 3 ‘O Clock and 9 ‘O Clock outer Beam panels. Damage typically
consists of oversized or elongated holes at the fastener locations. See
Figure 201 for the hole locations.
B. This repair is only applicable to outer Beam panels made from aluminum.
C. The maximum repairable hole size is 0.295 in. (7.5 mm).
D. A minimum of 1.3 X the diameter of the hole, as measured from center of

fastener hole to edge of panel, must be maintained for the edge margin.
E. a maximum of 5 damaged holes can be repaired for each panel.
F. This repair consists of removing all damaged material then locally

manufacturing repair washer bushings for hole elongation damage.
2. Referenced Documents
DOCUMENT TITLE
SRM 54-02-00 General Repair Procedures, Adhesive
Preparation.
CMM 78-32-36, Repair 19 Replacement of the Beam Outer Panel
3. Effectivity
A. All 3 O’clock and 9 O’clock outer beam panels made from aluminum.
A. Examine the beam outer panels.
(1) Remove the beam outer panels. Refer to Figure 201 and CMM 78-32-36
Repair 19.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Perform a visual inspection of the outer panel. Mark worn,

elongated, or damaged fastener holes.
B. Rework of the 3/9 O’clock Beam Outer Panel.
(1) Enlarge the fastener holes to remove any damaged material. Ensure
the hole is round. The maximum diameter must not exceed 0.295 in.
(7.5 mm).
(2) Deburr and clean the holes. Measure and record the final diameter
of the reworked hole.
(3) Measure the distance between the center of the enlarged fastener
hole and the edge of the panel. A minimum edge margin of 1.3 X the
diameter of the hole must be maintained.
C. Make the repair washer-bushing.
(1) Make a washer-bushing with the dimensions as specified in Figure

202.
CAUTION: THERE ARE TWO TYPES OF FASTENERS THAT ATTACH THE OUTER PANELS
TO THE NACELLE. BE SURE TO CORRECTLY IDENTIFY THE FASTENER
AND MANUFACTURE THE CORRECT WASHER BUSHING. REFER TO FIGURES
201 AND 202.
(2) Make the repair washer bushing the same diameter as the hole
diameter recorded in step B,(2). For the tolerance of the washer-
bushing, refer to Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Make the repair washer bushing from 7075-T6 sheet or 7075-T651
plate per AMS 4045 or 7075-T6 bar/rod per QQ-A-200/11.
D. Install the repair washer bushing.
(1) Pre test fit the repair washer-bushing in the reworked fastener
holes. Maintain a gap clearance between the repair washer-bushing
and the lower beam structure. Refer to Figure 203.
(2) Mask off the reworked area.
(3) Apply chemical conversion coating to the repair washer-bushing and

reworked panel. Refer to the manufacturers instructions.
(4) Apply primer to the repair washer-bushing and reworked panel.

(5) Cure the primer per manufacturer’s instructions.
(6) Mix the adhesive. Refer to A320 SRM section 54-02-00.
(7) Apply adhesive to the repair washer-bushing and install in panel.
(8) Remove exess adhesive with a clean cloth and the solvent.
(9) Put mechanical pressure or a weight on the repair-washer bushing to

keep the repair part in place.
(10) Cure the adhesive per the manufacturer’s instructions.
E. Restore surface protection.
(1) Apply external surface protection. Refer to A320 SRM section

54-02-00.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
F. Install the beam outer panel.
(1) Install the panel. Refer to CMM 78-32-36 Repair 19.
5. Repair Materials and Equipment.
DESCRIPTION DESIGNATION MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER

Solvent MEK/MIBK Commercially Available
Adhesive EA9394 Hysol
West Paterson, NJ
072423317
Phone: (973) 357-3100
www.cytec.com
Madison Heights, MI
48071
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Washer-bushing Al.7075-T6 Sheet, AMS4045 Commercially Available
(ALT) Al. 7075-T651 Commercially Available
Pl., AMS4045
(ALT) Al.7075-T6 Commercially Available
Bar/Rod, QQ-A-200/11
Fastener MBF2122-05 Commercially Available
Fastener CR3522-5 Commercially Available
Fastener NAS1670-8L Commercially Available
Fastener NAS1921MO5S*W Commercially Available
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3 O'CLOCK OUTER BEAM PANEL 9 O'CLOCK OUTER BEAM PANEL
3 O'CLOCK OUTER
BEAM PANEL 9 O'CLOCK OUTER
BEAM PANEL
C1S-543-00
Thrust reverser - Outer Panel, Washer Repair

Left Hand shown, Right hand opposite.
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
0.610 IN.
(15.5 mm)
A A
100°
23°
0.055 IN. (1.4 mm)
R 0.018 IN. 0.160 - 0.164 IN.

0.083 IN. (0.45 mm) (4.06 - 4.16 mm) 0.032 IN.
(2.1 mm)
(0.8 mm)
*DIA
SECTION A-A 0.078 IN.

(2 mm)
C1S-544-00
- WASHER-BUSHING DIMENSIONS FOR CR3522-5

- *DIA - FABRICATE BUSHING O.D. TO MATCH HOLE IN PANEL -0.001 IN./+0.000 IN. (+0.000 mm/-0.025 mm)
- MIN 0.264 IN. (6.71 mm)
- MAX 0.295 IN. (7.5 mm)
Repair Washer Dimensions, for CR3522

CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.610 IN.
(15.5 mm)
A A
0.070 IN. (1.78 mm)
0.165 IN. - 0.168 IN.

(4.19 mm - 4.27 mm)
*DIA
SECTION A-A
- WASHER-BUSHING DIMENSIONS FOR MBF2122-5
C1S-545-00
- DIMENSIONS ARE THE SAME EXCEPT AS NOTED

- *DIA - FABRICATE BUSHING O.D. TO MATCH HOLE IN PANEL -0.001 IN./+0.000 IN. (+0.000 mm/-0.025 mm)
- MIN 0.268 IN. (6.81 mm)
- MAX 0.295 IN. (7.5 mm)
Repair Washer Dimensions - for MBF2122

CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR
WASHER-
BUSHING BOND REPAIR
OUTER WASHER WITH
PANEL ADHESIVE
BEAM STRUCTURE GAP BETWEEN

BUSHINGS AND
BEAM STRUCTURE
GAP BETWEEN BUSHING/BEAM:

0.004 INCH +0.002 INCH/-0.000 INCH
(0.10mm +0.05/-0.02mm) C1S-546-00
BUSHINGS SHALL NOT EXTEND

BEYOND MATERIAL INTERFACE
Repair Washer Installation
Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 25
SMALL AREA DELAMINATION REPAIR ON THE LEFT AND RIGHT MONOLITHIC OUTER
PANEL OF THE UPPER AND LOWER PIVOTING DOORS
1. General
A. The procedure in this repair gives instruction to repair delamination

between plies of the outer panel of the lower or upper pivoting doors.
B. Voids left by delaminations are filled with adhesive and applied

mechanical pressure.
C. The adhesive is cured and the repair is made smooth by application of

finish layers.
D. Delamination repairs are acceptable in zones T1M and T2M only. These
zones are defined in SRM 54-30-00. See Figure 201.
E. This repair is limited to delamination up to 38.1 mm (1.5 in.) maximum

diameter. A minimum of one intact ply must remain in order to allow
resin injection without leaking. If no intact ply is remaining, treat
the damage as a hole. See SRM 54-30-00 Repair No. 27.
F. A maximum of 5 repairs is allowed per each pivoting door.
G. A minimum distance of 5D from defect to fastener or other defects and

minimum distance of 2.5D to free edges. See Figure 202.
2. EFFECTIVITY
Part Numbers Nomenclature

321-360-019 and up LH Lower Pivoting Door
321-360-069 and up RH Lower Pivoting Door
321-310-017 and up LH Upper Pivoting Door
321-310-067 and up RH Upper Pivoting Door
3. REPAIR PARTS AND REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Part Numbers

N/A
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 201
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
B. Repair Materials and Consumable

P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Blanket, Heat 32º-250ºF (0º-120ºC), V61426
10W/Sq.in. Atacs Products, Inc.
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Film. Parting Non-Porous Commercially Available
Paper, Abrasive Silicone Carbide 150, Commercially Available
280, 320 Grit
Solvent Isopropyl Alcohol, 99% Commercially Available
pure
or
MIBK/MEK Blend (60% V5E821
Methyl Isobutyl Keytone/ Univar U.S.A., Inc.
40% Methyl Ethyl Keytone) 532 E. Emaus Street
Middletown,PA 17057-2200
Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
or
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Commercially Available
Syringe, Plastic Nozzle Commercially Available
Injection
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 202
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
A. .Do a tap test to find the area of delamination.
B. Use a No. 30 drill to drill holes on one side of the delaminated area.
Drill a vent hole on the opposite side of the delamination area. Use a
vacuum to remove all the unwanted materials. See Figure 203.
becomes dry.
D. Mix a sufficient quantity of EA934NA adhesive. Refer to manufacturer’s

instructions for mixing.
E. Put mixed adhesive into the syringe.
F. Apply adhesive in holes until it flows out of the vent (adjacent)

holes.
G. Remove the unwanted adhesive.
H. Put a piece of non-porous parting film on the delamination area with

Teflon tape.
I. Put mechanical pressure on the delamination area.
J. Put a heat blanket on the repair area and cure the adhesive at 200ºF
(93ºC) for 60 minutes.
K. Remove the heat blanket and the parting film.
L. Use 150-320 grit abrasive paper to remove all unwanted adhesive and
make the surface smooth with the outer most ply.
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
M. Clean the unwanted material from the repair area with a clean lint-free
cloth and the solvent.
N. Examine the repair area for a correct bond. Do a tap test on the repair
and the area around the repair. No void allowed.
O. Apply paint primer and top layers. Refer to CFM56-5B SRM 54-02-07,
Surface Finish Repair.
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 204
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
3.4 INCH
(87 mm) 2.9 INCH
(73 mm)
A
3.8 INCH
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
AREA T2M
(76 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
AREA T3M
1.4 INCH
(35 mm)
4.1 INCH
(105 mm)
5.0 INCH
(126 mm) 5.5 INCH
(140 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
3.8 INCH
(96 mm) 3.0 INCH
(76 mm)
AREA T3M
AREA T1M
C1S-557-00
2.9 INCH
2.8 INCH (73 mm)
(70 mm) A
Zone Designation, Monolithic Pivot Doors
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D2)
5D MINIMUM

DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D3)
5D MINIMUM

DAMAGE
2.5D MINIMUM
C1S-555-00
allowable Distance Between other Defects, Fasteners and Edges

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 206
Mar 15/19
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
TYPICAL DELAMINATION
AREAS
A OUTER
PANEL
DRILL VENT AND

DRAWING INJECTION HOLES
INDICATIVE
ONLY
INJECT A-A VENT

ADHESIVE HOLE
A-A
APPLY
MECHANICAL PRESSURE C1S-556-00
A-A
Panel Delamination Repair
Figure 203
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 25
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes
Rohr, Inc.,any other
of Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 26
COMPOSITE SKIN DAMAGE (NICKS, GOUGES AND SMALL HOLES) REPAIR ON THE LEFT
AND RIGHT MONOLITHIC OUTER PANEL OF THE UPPER AND LOWER PIVOTING DOORS
1. General
A. The procedure in this repair gives instructions to repair nicks, gouges

and small holes damages on the monolithic outer panel of the lower or
upper pivoting doors.
B. The repairable size for the nicks and gouges that are deeper than 0.010
in. (0,25 mm) maximum depth and 8.0 in. (203 mm) maximum length. The
depth does not include the thickness of the primer and the paint on the
panel. The damage is filled with the adhesive and made smooth with
abrasive paper. No fabric is used for this repair.
C. The repairable size for small hole damage that are deeper than 0.010
in. (0,025 mm) and is limited to 1.5 in. (38 mm) maximum diameter. The
depth does not include the thickness of the primer and paint on the
panel. The damage is filled with adhesive. Wet lay-up carbon faberic
repair plies are put on the damaged area.
D. Damages deeper than 0.010 in. (0,25 mm) maximum and 1.5 in. (38 mm)
maximum diameter are allowed in zone T1M and 2TM only. These zones are
defined in SRM 54-30-00. Refer to Figure 201. A minimum of one intact
ply must remain in order to allow resin injection without leaking. If
no intact plies are remaining, treat the damage as a hole. Refer to SRM
54-30-00 Repair No. 27.
E. A maximum of 5 repairs is allowed for each pivoting door.
F. A minimum distance of 5D from defect to fastener or other defects and

CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 26
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
2. EFFECTIVITY

321-360-019 and UP LH Lower Pivoting Door
321-360-069 and UP RH Lower Pivoting Door
321-310-017 and UP LH Upper Pivoting Door
321-310-067 and UP RH Upper Pivoting Door

N/A
B. Repair Materials and Consumables
Repair materials and consumables are listed in A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-
12 Paragraph 1.J.
A. For damage to composite skins that is less than 0,010 in. (0,25mm)
deep: Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Remove the surface protection from the repair area.
(2) Abrade the repair to a smooth contour with silcon abrasive paper.
Start with 280 grit and finnish with 400 grit.
(3) Clean the repair area with cleaning solvent. Refer to A320 SRM 51-
77-11, Paragraph 4.E.
(4) Rinse but do not flood the area with clean water. Dry the area with
a clean lint free cloth.
(5) Protect the area adjacent to the repair with flashbreaker tape.
(6) do a waterbreak test. Refer to A320 Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph

4.F.
(7) Dry the structure. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-71-11, Paragraph
4.G.
(8) Prepare the adhesive paste. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11,
Paragraph 6.B.(1) and 4.A.(3).
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 26
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(9) Fill the damaged area with the prepared adhesive paste. Used non-
porous parting film as necessary.
(10) Let the paste adhesive cure at room temperature (RT). The cure time
can be accelerated by use of heat for the required time (lamps or
heating blanket), but without vacuum pressure. When heat is to be
applied, let the adhesive jell first to avoid unwanted paste flow.
(11) If applied, remove parting film.
(12) abrade the repaair area with abrasive cloth until the original
surface contours have been achieved. Start with 280 grit and
finnish with 400 grit.
(13) Clean the repair area with solvent. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter
51-77-11, Paragraph 4.E.
(14) If required, restore the surface protection. Refer to A320 SRM

Chapter 51-75-12.
B. For damage to composite skin more than 0.010 in. deep: Refer to Figure
204.
(1) Remove the surface protection in the repair area..
(2) Abrade the repair to a smooth contour with silicon abrasive paper.
Start with 280 grit and finish with 400 grit.
(3) Clean the repair area with cleaning solvent. Refer to A320 SRM
Chapter 51-77-11,
(4) Rinse but do not flood the area with clean water. Dry the area with
clean lint free cloth.
(5) Protect the area adjacent to the repair with flashbreaker tape.
(6) Do a water break test. Refer to A320 Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph

4.F.
(7) Dry the structure. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph
4.G.
(8) Prepare the adhesive paste. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11,
Paragraph 6.B.(1) and 4.A.(3).
(9) Fill the damaged area with the prepared adhesive paste. Used non-
porous parting film as necessary.
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No.26
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(10) Let the paste adhesive cure at room temperature (RT). The cure time
can be accelerated by use of heat for the required time (lamps or
heating blanket), but without vacuum pressure. When the heat is to
be applied, let the adhesive gel first to avoid unwanted paste
flow.
(11) If applied, remove parting film..
(12) Abrade the repaired area with abrasive cloth, until the original
surface contours have been achieved. Start with 280 grit and finish
with 400 grit.
(13) Clean the repair area with solvent. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-
77-11, Paragraph 4.E.

Chapter 51-75-12.
(15) Prepare laminating resin. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11,

paragraph 6.B.(2) and 4.A.
(16) Prepare the repair plies. Item 4 or 5, Repair Materials List and
refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 4.H.
(17) Apply the repair plies. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11,
Paragraph 5.A.
(18) Install the vacuum bag. If the repair cure is to be accelerated

with the application of heat, Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-11,
Paragraph 5.D
(19) Let the repair cure under vacuum pressure. Refer to A320 SRM
Chapter 51-77-11, Paragraph 5.E. If the repair cure is to be
accelerated with the application of heat, let the repair cure at
the required temperature and time. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-
11, Paragraph 6.B.(2) and Paragraph 5.E.
(20) Remove the vacuum bag and heating equipment (if used).
(21) Inspect the repair. Refer to A320 SRM Chapter 51-77-10, Paragraph
5.

Chapter 51-75-12.
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 26
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
3.4 INCH
(87 mm) 2.9 INCH
(73 mm)
A
3.8 INCH
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
AREA T2M
(76 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
AREA T3M
1.4 INCH
(35 mm)
4.1 INCH
(105 mm)
5.0 INCH
(126 mm) 5.5 INCH
(140 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
3.8 INCH
(96 mm) 3.0 INCH
(76 mm)
AREA T3M
AREA T1M
C1S-557-00
2.9 INCH
2.8 INCH (73 mm)
(70 mm) A
Zone Designation, Monolithic Pivoting Doors
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No.26
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D2)
5D MINIMUM

DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D3)
5D MINIMUM

DAMAGE
2.5D MINIMUM
C1S-555-00
allowable Distance Between other Defects, Fasteners and Edges

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 26
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C1S-558-00
1 ADHESIVE PASTE
2 REFER TO PARAGRAPH 1 FOR MAXIMUM REPAIRABLE DAMAGE SIZE
Nicks and Gouges Damage Repair

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No.26
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
±45°
1 REPAIR PLIES ±90°
±45°
15 mm
FILL WITH ADHESIVE (0.59 INCH)
12 mm
(0.47 INCH)
1 REPAIR PLIES
1 FOR GLASS OR ARAMID STRUCTORE USE 181 STYLE GLASS FABRIC

MATERIAL NUMBER 05-007.
FOR CFRP STRUCTURE USE PLAIN WEAVE CARBON FABRIC 190g/m²
MATERIAL NUMBER 05-088 OR 05-117.
C1S-559-00
2 MARGIN FROM EDGE OF FIRST REPAIR PLY TO EDGE OF DAMAGE 15mm (0.59 INCH).
3 RADIUS ALL CORNERS
Small Hole Damage Repair

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 26
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 27
HOLE DAMAGE REPAIR ON THE LEFT AND RIGHT MONOLITHIC OUTER PANEL OF THE
UPPER AND LOWER PIVOTING DOORS
1. General
A. The procedure in this repair gives instructions to repair a hole that

goes fully through the composite skin on the monolithic outer panel of
the lower or upper pivoting doors.
B. A fiberglass backup plate is prepared and installed. Wet lay-up carbon

fabric fill plies and repair plies are installed.
C. The repair is limited to hole damage up to 1.5 in. (38 mm)

maximum diameter. Hole damage must have at least 1.0 in. (25 mm)
surface beyond the repair cut-out to allow application of repair plies.
D. Hole damage repair is allowed in zone T1M and T2M only. These zones are
defined in SRM 54-30-00. See Figure 201.
E. A maximum of 5 repairs is allowed per each pivoting door.
F. A minimum distance of 5D from defect to fastener or other defects and

2. EFFECTIVITY

321-360-019 and UP LH Lower Pivoting Door
321-360-069 and UP RH Lower Pivoting Door
321-310-017 and UP LH Upper Pivoting Door
321-310-067 and UP RH Upper Pivoting Door

N/A
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B. Repair Materials and Consumable

Base Part A 2850 Willow Pass Rd.
Catalyst Part B P.O. Box 312
Epoxy Paste Adhesive EA9394
Base Part A Phone: (800) 257-7522
Catalyst Part B www.aerospace.henkel.com
Blanket, Heat 32° - 250°F (0° - 120°C), V61426

10W/Sq. in. Atacs Products, Inc.
Phone: (206) 433-9000
www.atacs.com
Fabric, Carbon Style AH370-5H, V2B975
Construction 11x11 Hexcel Corp
1913 N King St
Seguin, TX 78155-2197
Phone: (830) 379-1580
Fax: (830) 379-9544
Cloth, Peel Ply Porous Parting Film Commercially Available
Lamp, Heat 830 – 930 C (1800 – 2000F) Commercially Available
Microballoons Phenolic, 135 Micron Malayan Adhesives and
Chemicals
No. 9 Jalan Utas 15/7
40200 Shah Alam Selangor
Danul
Ehsan Malaysia
Phone: 60 3 5566 1188
www.mac-resins.com
Paper, Abrasive Silicone Carbide 80, 50,280, Commercially Available
320 Grit
Roller 2 in. (51 mm) Diameter Steel Commercially Available
or Plastic
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Solvent Isopropyl Alcohol, 99% pure Commercially Available
or
MIBK/MEK Blend (60% Methyl V5E821
Isobutyl Ketone/40% Methyl Univar U.S.A., Inc.
Ethyl Ketone 532 E. Emaus Street
Middletown, PA 17057-2200
or Phone: (717) 944-7471
www.univarusa.com
Turco 6646 V71410
Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Tape, Teflon 2 in. (51 mm) Wide Commercially Available
A. Clean the damaged area.
WARNING: WARNING WEAR APPLICABLE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT WHEN

YOU DO THIS TASK. BEFORE YOU USE PPE,READ, UNDERSTAND AND
OBEY ALL INSTRUCTIONS FOR ITS USE.THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE
INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER,YOUR EMPLOYER AND
GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS.YOU CAN GET INJURED IF YOU DO NOT USE
NECESSARY.
(1) Cut out the damaged skin. Remove all of the loose particles, cracks
and delaminations.
(2) Cut an oval or rectangle shaped hole in the skin. This will permit
a backup plate to go through. Make sure the cutout has rounded
corners with a 0.50 in. (38 mm) diameter. radius. Make sure that
there is at least 1 in. (25 mm) surface beyond repair cutout to
allow application of repair plies.
NOTE: A round hole is not correct for this repair. An oval or

rectangular hole will permit the correct sized backup plate to
go through.
(3) Make the edges of the cutout smooth with 80 grit or finer abrasive
paper.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
B. Prepare the skin around the cut-out. Refer to Figure 204.
(1) Put Teflon tape around the edge of the repair area on the outer
surface of the skin. Measure 0.50 in. (13 mm) from the cut-out and
apply 2.0 in. (51 mm) wide Teflon tape band around the edge of the
repair area.
(2) Lightly sand the area around the repair. Remove the paint with 150
grit abrasive paper. Do not damage or remove carbon fibers.
(3) Lightly sand the inner surface of the skin. Get access to the inner
surface through the cutout. Sand an area 1.0 in. (25 mm) wide
around the edge of the cutout where the backup plate will touch.
Use 150 grit abrasive paper.
INSTRUCTIONS NCLUDE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE MANUFACTURER,
CHEMICALS.
(5) Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the solvent
becomes dry.
C. Prepare the fiberglass backup plate.
(1) Cut a piece of fiberglass fabric of sufficient size to make three

backing plies.
piece of fiberglass fabric.
(3) Mix a sufficient quantity of EA934NA adhesive to soak the

fiberglass fabric. Refer to manufacturer’s mixing instructions.
NOTE: The weight of the adhesive must be the approximate weight

of the dry fiberglass fabric.
(4) Put the fiberglass fabric above the non-porous parting film on a
flat surface.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(5) Soak the fiberglass fabric with adhesive. Put a piece of non-porous
parting film above the fabric. Make sure the adhesive is equally
applied to the piece of fabric with a roller.
(6) Cut three pieces of fiberglass fabric 1.5 in (38 mm) larger on all
sides than the damage cutout.
(7) Cut one piece of peel ply (porous parting film) 1.5 in (38 mm)
larger on all sides than the cutout.
(8) Lay-up the backing plate.
(a) Put a piece of non-porous parting film that is larger than the
backing ply on a flat surface. Make sure that the flat
surface is resistant to temperatures more than 210°F
(99°C).
(b) Put the peel ply above the non-porous parting film.
(c) Put a fiberglass fabric ply with the warp parallel to the
longest dimension of the cutout above the peel ply.
(d) Put the ply with the warp 900 to the longest dimension of the
cutout on the first ply.
(e) Put the remaining ply above the second ply.
(f) Bag and cure the backup plate. Refer to CFM56-5B SRM Chapter
54-02-00, paragraph 10.
(g) Cut the backup plate so that it makes an overlap of 1 in. (25
mm) of the cutout.
(h) Drill holes in pairs as necessary near the centerline of the

backup plate. Use a 0.07 in (1,8 mm) drill bit. Refer to
Figure 203.
D. Install the backup plate on the inner surface of the skin. Refer to
Figure 203.
(1) Mix EA934NA adhesive with 5 percent by weight of phenolic

microballoons. Refer to CFM56-5B SRM Chapter 54-10-00,
Paragraph 2.D.
NOTE: Microballoons are used only in the adhesive mixture which

attaches the backup plate to the inner skin.
(2) Remove the peel ply from the backup plate.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(3) Put a loop of lockwire through the holes in the backup plate.
Loosely twist each loop of lockwire one turn. Refer to Figure 203.
(4) Clean the side of the backup plate that will touch the inner
surface of the skin and the inner faying surface of the skin with a
(5) Apply adhesive to the peel ply side of the backup plate only where
it will touch the skin.
(6) Apply adhesive to the inside area of the skin where the backup
plate will touch. The area is a 1.0 in. (25 mm) wide band around
the outside of the cutout.
(7) Put the backup plate through the cutout. Adjust the backup plate so
that the edges are 1.0 in. (25,4 mm) more than the edges of the
cutout.
(8) Put a small metal rod through the lockwire loops across the repair
cutout.
CAUTION: DO NOT MAKE THE LOCKWIRE TOO TIGHT, IT WILL WARP THE
BACKUP PLATE.
(9) Twist the lockwire around the rod so that the backup plate tightly
touches the inner side of the skin. Do not pull the backup plate
into the cutout at all.
(10) Apply adhesive to the holes for the lockwire in the backup plate.
(11) Cure the adhesive at 88° - 99°C (190° - 210°F) for 220 minutes with
a heat lamp.
(12) Remove the unwanted material with a clean lint-free cloth and
E. Fill the cut out with paste adhesive.
(1) Mix EA934NA paste adhesive parts A and B in accordance with

(2) Fill the damaged area with EA934NA paste adhesive with a non
metallic spatula until it is flush with the external skin.
(3) Cover the repair area with parting film.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Let cure under pressure at room temperature. The curing time can be
reduced by use of a heat lamp for 1 hour at 66°C (151°F). Use
either mechanical means (spring clamps or elastic straps) or
vacuum bagging to hold the metal plate in position.
(5) Remove equipment and parting film.
(6) Lightly abrade the filled area with abrasive paper (start with 280
grit and finish with 400 grit) to get a smooth surface and to
restore the exact original profile of the part. If further adhesive
is to be installed, repeat steps E.1 to E.5 again.
(7) 7. Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth and the
solvent.
(8) 8. Remove the solvent with a clean lint-free cloth before the
F. Prepare the repair and sanding plies.
(1) 1. Cut a piece of carbon fabric of sufficient size to make the

repair plies. Refer to Figure 204.
(2) 2. Cut a piece of fiberglass fabric of sufficient size to make the

sanding ply.
(3) 3. Cut a piece of non-porous parting film that is larger than the
piece of carbon fabric. Put the non-porous parting film on a flat
surface and the carbon fabric above it.
(4) 4. Mix a sufficient quantity of EA934NA adhesive to soak the carbon

and fiberglass fabric.
(5) 5. Soak the carbon and fiberglass fabric with adhesive. Put a piece
of non-porous parting film above each piece of fabric. Make sure
the adhesive is equally applied to the fabric with a roller.

weight as the dry carbon and fiberglass fabric.
G. Cut the repair plies with a sharp knife and templates. Refer to Figure
204.
(1) 1. Cut the repair ply to be 0.50 in. (13 mm) more on all sides than
the repair cutout. Cut the corners of the ply at 450 to length of
1.0 in. (25 mm).
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
(2) Cut the fiberglass sanding ply 0.50 in. (13 mm) more on all sides
than the last repair ply. Cut the corners of the ply at 450 to a
length of 1.0 in. (25 mm).
H. Install the repair ply and fiberglass sanding ply. Refer to figure 204.
(1) Remove the non-porous parting film from the surface of the repair
ply that will touch the repair.
(2) Install the repair ply so that the repair cutout is in the center.
(3) Make the repair ply smooth with a roller.
SIDES OF THE FILL PLIES. THE REPAIR WILL BE WEAK IF THE
NONPOROUS PARTING FILM STAYS WITH A FABRIC PLY AND BECOMES
PART OF THE REPAIR.
(5) Do steps H.1 through H.4 for the fiberglass sanding ply. Make sure
that the fiberglass sanding ply makes an overlap of 0.50 in. (13
mm) on the repair ply below it.
I. Bag and cure the repair. Refer to CFM56-5B SRM Chapter 54-02-00,
Paragraph 10.
skin. Use 150 or 320 grit abrasive paper. Do not damage the carbon
K. Remove the unwanted material with a clean lint-free cloth and solvent.
becomes dry.
L. Apply primer and top layers. Refer to CFM56-5B SRM 54-02-07, Surface
Finish Repair.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3.4 INCH
(87 mm) 2.9 INCH
(73 mm)
A
3.8 INCH
(96 mm)
3.0 INCH
AREA T2M
(76 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
AREA T3M
1.4 INCH
(35 mm)
4.1 INCH
(105 mm)
5.0 INCH
(126 mm) 5.5 INCH
(140 mm)
2.4 INCH
(62 mm)
3.8 INCH
(96 mm) 3.0 INCH
(76 mm)
AREA T3M
AREA T1M
C1S-557-00
2.9 INCH
2.8 INCH (73 mm)
(70 mm) A
Zone Designation, Monolithic Pivot Doors
Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D2)
5D MINIMUM

DAMAGE
(DIAMETER D3)
5D MINIMUM

DAMAGE
2.5D MINIMUM
C1S-555-00
Allowable Distance Between other Defects, Fasteners and Edges

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
LOCKWIRE
BACKUP PLATE
ROD
LOCKWIRE
(2 PLACES)
1.0 INCH
(24.5 mm)
TYPICAL
C1S-560-00
BACKUP PLATE
(INSTALLED)
Backup Plate and cut-out on composite skin

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CUTOUT FIBERGLASS PLY
REPAIR PLY
A A
12.7 mm
(0.5 INCH)
TEFLON
TAPE
BACKUP
PLATE C1S-561-00
Composite Skin Repair on Monolithic Pivot Door

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
12.7 mm FIBERGLASS PLY

(0.5 INCH)
REPAIR PLY
12.7 mm
(0.5 INCH)
TEFLON TAPE
CUTOUT
ADHESIVE PASTE BACKUP
PLATE
SECTION A-A
C1S-562-00
Composite Skin Repair on Monolithic Pivot Door

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Goodrich control
Corporation,
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 028

THRUST REVERSER LOWER 6 O’CLOCK
LIGHTNING STRIKE DAMAGE BLEND REPAIR
1. General
A. This blend repair may be used to repair edge damage on the 6 O’clock
lower bifurcation. Figure 201.
B. The repair is limited to a post damage blend up to 0.79 inch (20 mm)
depth only. Figure 202.
(1) Before you repair the damaged structure you must do a damage
evaluation. Refer to Airbus chapter 51-77-10.
B. Blend the damage; see Figure 202 and Figure 204.
(1) Blend out the damaged edge. Blend the damage to a 10 to 1 blend
ratio. Refer to Airbus chapter 51-73-00 para 4A. Damage area is
defined as any darkening or visible evidence of lighting strike
damage, see Figure 202. Ensure blend area is greater than 2D away
from all fastener locations (Figure 203) and no blend radius is
below 0.16in (4 mm) (Figure 204).
(2) Use 150 to 400 grit aluminum oxide abrasive paper.
(3) Clean the area with a clean cotton cloth made moist with solvent.
Wipe the area with a clean lint free cotton cloth before the
solvent evaporates.
(4) Measure final blended Repair Depth. If Repair Depth is greater than
0.79 inch (20 mm) contact UTC Aerospace Systems.
C. Check for remaining damages in the area. If cracks found, contact UTC
Aerospace Systems.
D. Restore the surface protection.
(1) Restore the surface protection, Refer to chapter 51-23-00.
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 28
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CHEMICALS.THESE INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDE
CHEMICALS.
(2) Apply Alodine 1200S (CP2640) Follow manufacturer’s instructions

for application and rinse and Primer PAC33 and top coat PU66. or
(Alternative) primer S15/76 and top coat Aviox Finish. or
(Alternative) primer 10 P4-2 and top coat AERODUR C21 /100UVR.
E. Identify performed repair by recording of subject document number.
3. Repair Materials and equipment

Abrasive Paper 150-400 grit Commercially Available
Aluminum Oxide
Chemical Coating Alodine 1200S V71410
Epoxy Polyamide 10P4-2 V0KXA5
Primer Akzo Nobel Aerospace
Polyurethane top Coatings, East Water St.
coat Waukegan,IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Or Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Epoxy Polyamide Aerodur Akzo Nobel Aerospace
Primer C21/100UVR
Polyurethane top
coat
Or
Epoxy Polyamide PAC33 Akzo Nobel Aerospace
Primer PU66
Polyurethane top S15/76
coat Aviox Finnish
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 28
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
Edge Damage Zone

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 28
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Typical Damage Location and Damage Description

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 28
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
Minimum Distance from Fasteners

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 28
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
Repair Area after Blend

Figure 204
CFM56-5B
54-30-00 Repair No. 28
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
U.S. export control
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 29
THRUST REVERSER 3/9 KEEL BEAM CRACK/CORROSION ALLOWABLE DAMAGE REPAIR
1. General
A. This procedure gives the instructions to inspect the 3 and 9 o’clock

Keel Beams for crack and corrosion damage, provides allowable damage
limits and repair recommendations.
B. Parts included/applicable to this procedure by part number is as

follows:
Reference Part No. Designation

642-3801-507 LH Thrust Reverser (-5B)
642-3802-507 RH Thrust Reverser (-5B)
C. Spare Part Numbers.
None.
D. Reference Documents
DOCUMENT TITLE
SRM 54-30-00 THRUST REVERSER ALLOWABLE DAMAGE
AMM 78-30-00 THRUST REVERSER UNSERVICEABLE
REQUIREMENTS
A320 MMEL MASTER MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
CMM 78-32-36, Repair No. 61 REPLACE 3 OR 9 O’CLOCK KEEL BEAM
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DOCUMENT TITLE
A318/A319/A320/A321 NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING MANUAL (NTM)
SPM 70-41-00 (TASK 70-41-00- BLENDING
350-008 THROUGH -011)
SPM 70-32-00 (TASK 70-32-00- FLOURESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTION
230-001) (FPI)
SRM 51-21-00 PROTECTIVE TREATMENT
SRM 51-22-00 CORROSION PREVENTION
SRM 51-23-11 PAINT COATINGS
SRM 51-74-00 REPAIR OF CORRODED AREAS
SRM 54-30-00, Repair No. 20 THRUST REVERSER 3/9 O’CLOCK KEEL
BEAM CRACK PERMANENT REPAIR
SRM 51-30-00 MATERIALS
SRM 51-35-00 CFM56 CONSUMABLE MATERIALS AND
(CML)
ASTM E 1417 STANDARD PROCEDURE FOR LIQUID
PENETRANT INSPECTION EXAMINATION
AMS2647 FLOURESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTION
AND ENGINE COMPONENT
SPM 70-62-14 STANDARD PRACTICE MANUAL
SRM 51-11-00 MEASUREMENT OF REMAINING THICKNESS
FOR SMALL BLENDED AREA PROCEDURE
SRM 51-42-11 FASTENER INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
FOR METALLIC STRUCTURE
SRM 51-70-00 SHIMMING
Table 201
2. EFFECTIVITY
This repair is applicable to A320 CFM56-5B Thrust Reversers prior to

serial number 8974001.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
3. REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS

NECESSARY.
WARNING: WHEN YOU DRILL, MACHINE OR GRIND PARTS, IT MAKES DUST AND FLYING
PARTICLES WHICH CAN BE DANGEROUS FOR HEATH. WEAR PROTECTIVE
CLOTHING, GLOVES, DUST MASK AND SAFETY GLASSES. DO NOT BREATHE
DUST OR LET IT TOUCH YOU SKIN.
CAUTION: DURING EACH OPERATION, CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO DAMAGE THE
SURROUNDING STRUCTURE.
A. Gain Access.
(1) Open Thrust Reverser. Refer to A320 CFM56-5B AMM Section 78.
(2) Open Pivoting Doors. Refer to A320 CFM56-5B AMM Section 78.
(3) Remove 3 or 9 o’clock Deflectors. Refer to CFM56-5B CMM 78-32-36,

Repair No. 61.
(4) Remove Ramp Fairing Assembly. Refer to Figure 202/203 and A320
CFM56-5B CMM 78-32-36, Repair No. 61.
CAUTION: CARE SHALL BE TAKEN NOT TO DAMAGE OR OVERSIZE FASTENER HOLES

IN EXISTING STRUCTURE DURING FASTENER REMOVAL PROCESS.
NOTE: RETAIN ALL HARDWARE FOR REINSTALLATION. DAMAGED PARTS OR

ATTACH FASTENERS MUST BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED PRIOR TO
REINSTALLATION.
B. Crack inspection of the Keel Beam. Refer to Figure 209.
(1) Clean the Keel Beam area with a clean cotton cloth moistened with
Diestone (CP2687). Refer to Table 203.
(2) Dry the rework area(s) with a clean cotton cloth before the solvent
becomes gas.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: DO NOT GET THE PENETRANT INSPECTION MATERIALS ON THE AREAS OF

THE COMPONENTS THAT YOU CAN NOT CLEAN. CLEAN ALL PENETRANT
INSPECTION MATERIALS FROM THE COMPONENTS AFTER THE
INSPECTION. DAMAGE TO THE COMPONENTS CAN OCCUR IF YOU DO NOT
DO THIS.
(3) Do a Type 1, Method A, Level 3 Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection of

the Keel Beam for cracks in the zone indicated in Figures 204 and
209.
NOTE: IF NO CRACK(S) IS FOUND, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3.C. IF

CRACK(S) IS FOUND, REFER TO PARAGRAPH 3.B.(3)(a) and
3.B.(3)(b) for recommended repair. REFER TO FIGURE 209 FOR
CRACK DAMAGE ZONE.
(a) If the crack area is less than 5 mm (0.20 inch) around the
hole, repair the crack. Refer to A320 CFM56-5B Structural
Repair Manual, Repair No. 20.
(b) If the crack(s) area is more than 5 mm (0.20 inch) around the
hole, replace the Keel Beam. Refer to A320 CFM56-5B Component
Maintenance Manual 78-32-36, Repair No. 61.
C. Corrosion inspection of Keel Beam. Refer to Figures 205 and 206.
(1) Clean the Keel Beam area with a clean cotton cloth moistened with
Diestone (CP2687).
(2) Dry the work area with a clean cotton cloth before the solvent
becomes gas.
(3) Do a visual corrosion inspection of the Keel Beam.
NOTE: If you find corrosion, refer to paragraph 3.D. If no

corrosion is found refer to paragraph 3.F.
D. Corrosion Removal.
(1) Verify extent of damage in allowable blend areas prior to blending.
(2) Remove the corrosion by abrading the surface(s) with aluminum

oxide or non-metallic abrasives. Use 80 or 120 grit aluminum oxide
paper or equivalent.
(3) Smooth all reworked areas to achieve a surface finish of 1.6 m

(6.3*10e-5 in).
(4) Measure the remaining material thickness after rework.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(a) On the vertical and horizontal surfaces of the Keel Beam in

Figures 205 and 206, (Zone A and B), if the remaining material
thickness is less than 1.37 mm (0.054 inch) after corrosion
removal, replace the Keel Beam per A320 CFM56-5B Component
Maintenance Manual 78-32-36, Repair No. 61. Refer to Figure
210 for allowable blend areas in Zone B.
(b) If the remaining thickness after two (2) types of inspections

are found to be within the allowable limits, refer to
instructions in paragraph 3.E.
E. Application of anti-corrosion treatment on reworked surfaces. Refer to

Figure 206 and Table 203.
(1) Blow reworked area clean with compressed air.
(2) Clean all surfaces with a clean cotton cloth moistened with
Diestone (CP2687).
(3) Dry all surfaces with a clean cotton cloth before solvent becomes
gas.
(4) Apply Alodine 1200S (CP2640). Refer to Standard Practice Manual

70-62-14.
(5) Apply Primer PAC 33 or S15/76 Primer or 10-P4-2 Primer. Refer to

manufacturer’s instructions for application details.
(6) Apply Top Coat PU66 or Aviox Finish or AERODUR C21/100UVR. Refer to
F. Check Keel Beam to Fish Plate alignment. Refer to Figure 207.
(1) Measure the clearance between the Fish Plate and Keel Beam. Refer
to Table 202.
MEASUREMENTS ACTION
0.10 mm (0.004 inch) or less No action required
Negative clearance between Adjust gap with Peelable Shim(s)
0.10 mm (0.004 inch) and 1.60
mm (0.063 inch)
ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENTS
TABLE 202 (SEE FIGURE 207)
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
MEASUREMENTS ACTION
Negative clearance more than Contact UTAS
1.60 mm (0.063 inch)
Positive clearance between Re-adjust the gap between Fish
0.10 mm (0.004 inch) and 1.60 Plate and Forward Frame
mm (0.063 inch)
Positive clearance more than Contact UTAS
1.60 mm (0.063 inch)
ALIGNMENT MEASUREMENTS
TABLE 202 (SEE FIGURE 207)
(2) If negative clearance between -0.10 mm (-0.004 inch) and -1.60 mm

(-0.063 inch), install Peelable Shim as follows:
(a) Remove the existing Fish Plate fasteners NAS1154-16 (2 places)

and NAS1726-2 (2 places) and retain for reinstallation. All
damaged fasteners shall be replaced.
(b) Clean Fish Plate with lint free cloth moistened with Diestone
(CP2687). Dry with a clean cotton cloth before solvent becomes
gas.
(c) Apply Alodine 1200S (CP2640) on Peelable Shim. Refer to

(d) Apply Primer PAC33 or S15/76 on Peelable Shim. Refer to

(e) Apply a thin layer of Interposition Position Paste PR1436 G B2

or B4 (CP2664) or PR 1771 on the Peelable Shim. Refer to
(f) Place Peelable Shim into position between the Fish Plate and
Forward Frame.
(g) Install the NAS1154-16 fasteners and the NAS1726-4 fasteners

in (2 places for each).
(h) Torque fasteners between 7 and 8 N.m (61.95 and 70.80 lbf.
in).
(3) If positive clearance between 0.10 mm (0.004 inch) and 1.60 mm

(0.063 inch), re-adjust the Fish Plate as follows:
(a) Remove the existing Fish Plate fasteners NAS1154-16 (2 places)

and NAS1726-2 (2 places) and retain for reinstallation. All
damaged fasteners shall be replaced.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(b) Clean Fish Plate with lint free cloth moistened with Diestone
(CP2687). Dry with a clean cotton cloth before solvent becomes
gas.
(c) Re-adjust Fish Plate.
(d) Apply Primer PAC33 or S15/76 on rework area. Refer to

(e) Apply a thin layer of Interposition Position Paste PR1436 G B2

or B4 (CP2664) or PR 1771 on the Fish Plate. Refer to
(f) Locate Fish Plate relative to the Forward Frame.
(g) Install the NAS1154-16 fasteners and the NAS1726-4 fasteners

in (2 places for each).
(h) Torque fasteners between 7 and 8 N.m (61.95 and 70.80 lbf.
in).
G. Keel Beam Painting Inspection. Refer to Figure 208.
NOTE: These instructions are applicable to Thrust Reversers with

serial numbers prior to S/N 2046001.
(1) Clean Keel Beam with clean cotton cloth moistened with Diestone
(CP2687).
(2) Dry with a clean cotton cloth before solvent becomes gas.
(3) Do a visual inspection to check if the Keel Beam is painted in the

area described in Figure 208.
NOTE: If the area is not painted, refer to paragraph 3.H. If the area
is painted, refer to paragraph 3.I.
H. Application of painting on all visible surfaces of the Keel Beam in

assembled position. Refer to Figure 208.
(1) Blow reworked area clean with compressed air.
Diestone (CP2687).
gas.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
(4) Lightly sand surfaces to be painted with abrasive Durite G 422

(CP2189).
Diestone (CP2687).
gas.
(7) Apply Alodine 1200S (CP2640). Refer to Standard Practice Manual

70-62-14.
(8) Apply Primer PAC33 or S15/76 on the reworked area. Refer to

(9) Apply Top Coat PU66 or Aviox Finish or AERODUR C21/100UVR. Refer to
I. Close Thrust Reverser Access.
(1) Re-install Ramp Fairing Kit. Refer to Figure 202/203 and A320
CFM56-5B Component Maintenance Manual 78-32-36.
(2) Re-install 3 and 9 o’clock Deflectors. Refer to Figure 202/203 and

A320 CFM56-5B Component Maintenance Manual 78-32-36.
(3) Close Thrust Reverser Pivot Doors. Refer to CFM56-5B AMM Task 78.
(4) Close Thrust Reverser Cowl Doors. Refer to CFM56-5B AMM Task 78.

Cloth, Abrasive 80 to 120 Grit Commercially Available
(CP2239)
Chemical Conversion Alodine 1200S V71410
Coating (CP2640) Henkel Corporation
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Solvent (CP2687) Diestone Commercially Available
Table 203 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Cloth, Abrasive Durite G 422 Commercially Available
(CP2189)
Sleeve, Safety Pivot Door Actuator Commercially Available
(HIX3005)
Ultrasonic Thickness Panametrics Model Sofranel, Societe Francaise
Gauge 25DL
Sensor, 3MM Panametrics Microdot D’Electronique 59
M208RM Rue Parmentier 78500
Sartrouville, France
Pen Sensor Panametrics Microdot Sofranel
V260SM
Polyurethane Top Coat AERODUR C21/100UVR V0KXA5
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Primer, Epoxy Polyamide 10-P4-2 V0KXA5

Primer, Epoxy Polyamide PAC33 Commercially Available
Polyurethane Top Coat PU66 Commercially Available
Primer, Epoxy Polyamide S15/76 Commercially Available
Polyurethane Top Coat Aviox Finish Commercially Available
Paste, Inter Position PR1436 G B2/B4 V83574
(CP2664) PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
ASC-Los Angeles
P O Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Sealant, Corrosion PR1771, Class B V83574
Inhibitive PRC-DeSoto International, Inc.
Table 203 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.

Shim, Peelable, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm) Commercially Available
Laminated 0.003 in (0.076 mm)
peelable plies per
MIL-S022499, COMP.
1, TYPE 1, CLASS 2
Bolt NAS1154-16 (QTY. AR) Commercially Available
Screw NAS2803-2 (QTY. AR) Commercially Available
Washer 649-602-660-0 (QTY. Commercially Available
AR)
Nut NAS1726-3 (QTY. AR) Commercially Available
Nut NAS1726-4 (QTY. AR) Commercially Available
Table 203 (Sheet 3)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
FORWARD FRAME
KEEL BEAM
A C1S-521-00
NOTE: RIGHT SIDE SHOWN; LEFT SIDE IS SYMETRICAL
Keel Beam Location

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
NUT
NAS1726-3
NUT NAS1726-4
(3 POSITIONS)
SCREW
NAS2803-2
SCREW NUT NAS1726-3

NAS2804-12
(3 POSITIONS)
SCREW
NAS2803-2
AND
WASHER
640-602-660-0
SCREW
NAS2803-2
(2 POSITIONS)
C1M-522-01
Removal/Installation of Deflector and Upper Ramp Fairing

Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
NUT NAS1726-3
(12 POSITIONS)
DEFLECTOR
SCREW NAS2803-3
AND WASHER
649-602-660-0
(4 POSITIONS)
NUT NAS1726-3
SCREW NAS2803-3
AND WASHER
649-602-660-0
(8 POSITIONS)
SCREW NAS2803-2
SCREW NAS2803-2
(2 POSITIONS)
SCREW NAS2804-12 NUT NAS1726-4

(3 POSITIONS) (3 POSITIONS)
SCREW LOWER RAMP FAIRING

NAS2803-2
SCREW NAS2803-2
(3 POSITIONS)
NUT NAS1726-3
C1S-523-00
Removal/Installation of Deflector and Lower Ramp Fairing

Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
169 (6,65)
VIEW A
169 (6,65)
VIEW B
C1S-524-00
AREA TO BE CHECKED FOR CRACKS

NOTE 1: DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS WITH INCHES IN PARENTHESES
Crack Damage Inspection Zone
Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ZONE A
169 (6,65)
VIEW A
C1S-525-00
AREA TO BE CHECKED FOR CORROSION
Corrosion Damage Inspection Zone

Figure 205
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
B A
B ZONE B A
AREA TO BE CHECKED 169 (6.65)
FOR CORROSION VIEW B
4.0 (0.157)
3.6 (0.14)
R6.0 (0.24)
0.74 (0.029)
1.37 (0.054)
SECTION B-B
17.66 (0.695)
29.6 (1.165)
LIMIT OF CORROSION
LIMIT OF KEEL BEAM
1.37 (0.054)
6.0 (0.24)
48.0 (1.89)
SECTION A-A
NOTE: PRIMER PAC33 AND PU66 TOP COAT (OVER REWORKED AREA).
C1S-531-00
OR S15/76 PRIMER AND AVIOX FINISH TOP COAT (OVER REWORKED AREA).
OR 10P4-2 PRIMER AND AERODUR C21/100UVR (OVER REWORKED AREA).
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS WITH INCHES IN PARENTHESES
Corrosion Inspection Zones
Figure 206
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A) NEGATIVE OR POSITIVE CLEARANCE
FORWARD
FRAME
FISH PLATE
KEEL BEAM 0.000 INCH TO
0.004 INCH (0,10 MM)
NO ACTION
B) NEGATIVE CLEARANCE
FORWARD
FRAME
FISH PLATE
AREA TO BE
KEEL BEAM SHIMED BETWEEN 0.004 INCH (0,10 MM)
ADD 0.063 INCH (1,60 MM)
ADJUST WITH THE PEELABLE SHIM.
FISH PLATE
C) POSITIVE CLEARANCE FORWARD

FRAME
KEEL BEAM AREA TO BE BETWEEN 0.004 INCH (0,10 MM)

REWORKED ADD 0.063 INCH (1,60 MM) FISH PLATE
READJUST THE FACE BETWEEN
THE FISH PLATE AND THE
C1S-527-00
FORWARD FRAME.
FISH PLATE
Alignment Between Keel Beam and Fish Plate
Figure 207
CFM56-5B
Page 217
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
KEEL BEAM
A
VIEW A 169 (6,65)
KEEL BEAM
VIEW B 169 (6,65)

AREA TO BE FORWARD
SHADED AREA
PAINTED FRAME
TO BE PAINTED
A
KEEL BEAM
A
AREA TO BE CHECKED FOR PAINTING
C1S-528-00
NOTE 1: DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN MILLIMETERS WITH INCHES IN PARENTHESES.

NOTE 2: THIS INSPECTION IS APPLICABLE FOR THRUST REVERSERS PRIOR TO S/N 7036.
NOTE 3: ZONE TO BE PAINTED (ALL VISIBLE SURFACE OF THE KEEL BEAM ASSEMBLED).
Painting Inspection
Figure 208
CFM56-5B
Page 218
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
FORWARD
FRAME
A
KEEL BEAM
A
5 MM
KEEL BEAM (0.20 IN)
5 MM
(0.20 IN)
5 MM
(0.20 IN)
CRACK AREA
C1S-529-00
SECTION A-A
Crack Inspection Zone

Figure 209
CFM56-5B
Page 219
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
FORWARD
FRAME
C
KEEL BEAM
C (SEE FIGURE 206)
KEEL BEAM 169 MM (6.65 IN)
D E F
G G
D E F
1.5 D TYP
STAY OUT ZONE
SECTION C-C
C1S-530-02
ALLOWABLE BLENDING AREAS
NO DAMAGE BLENDING ALLOWED
Allowable Blend Area in Zone B

CFM56-5B
Page 220
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
ZONE A
BLEND OUT DAMAGE
STRESS RISERS ALLOWED
ZONE B INTO EXISTING
1.37 (0.054) MIN. RADIUS TYP
AFTER BLENDING
SECTION D-D
(SEE SECTION E-E FOR DETAILS)
EXISTING
TANGENT
ZONE A 0.74 3.6 POINT OF
DAMAGE (0.029) (0.142) RADIUS
ALLOWED
EXISTING
1.20
TANGENT
(0.047)
POINT OF 1.37 (0.054)
RADIUS MINIMUM 17.66 (0.70) 29.6 (1.165)
6.0 (0.236)
SECTION E-E ZONE B

NO BLENDING
ALLOWED
C1S-547-00
1.6 (0.063)
NOTE:
DIMENSIOINS ARE IN MILLIMETERS WITH INCHES IN PARENTHESES.
CFM56-5B
Page 221
Mar 15/19
supersedes
ROHR, INC.
ZONE C
NO BLENDING
ALLOWED
ZONE A
DAMAGE
ALLOWED
SEE SECTION
D-D & E-E
ZONE B
DAMAGE
ALLOWED ZONE A
SEE DAMAGE
SECTION G-G ALLOWED
SEE SECTION
D-D & E-E
SECTION F-F
EXISTING FASTENER
HOLE TYP ZONE C
1.6 NO BLENDING
(0.063) ZONE B ALLOWED
ZONE B BLEND NO
TYP NO BLENDING RADIUS BLENDING
ALLOWED TYP ALLOWED
ZONE B
1.37 (0.054)
MINIMUM TYP
AFTER BLENDING
2 PLACES
169 (6.65)
(ZONE B DAMAGE AREA)
SECTION G-G
C1S-548-01
SEE FIGURE 205 FOR ZONE A

NOTE:
DIMENSIOINS ARE IN MILLIMETERS WITH INCHES IN PARENTHESES.
CFM56-5B
Page 222
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 30
THRUST REVERSER 1 OR 11 O’CLOCK STRUT SPLICE INSTALLATION REPAIR
1. General
A. This procedure is for the repair of a One or Eleven O’clock strut that
is damaged in Damage Zone TAA2/T. See section 54-30-00, Allowable
Damage, Figure 114.
B. The procedure gives instructions to install a splice when the pin slot
is worn. The splice restores the slot to its original dimensions and
provides a new bearing surface for the pin and bushing assembly.
A. Removal of the One or Eleven O’clock strut. (See Figure 201).
(1) Remove the access door from the higher cut corner pit sidewall.
CAUTION: BE CAREFUL NOT TO DAMAGE THE ATTACHED PARTS IF YOU USE A

CUTTING BLADE.
(2) Remove the bead of sealant around the one or eleven O’clock strut
and its angle fittings.
(3) Remove and keep the four screws NAS2803-4, the four screws NAS2803-
14, the two screws NAS2803-16, the ten nuts NAS1726C-3, and the pin
assembly.
(4) Remove the one or eleven O’clock strut.
B. Install a splice on the One or Eleven O’clock strut (See Figure 202).
(1) Place the strut on a work surface with the damaged side up.
(2) On the base of the strut, mark a machining limit line 1,4-1,5 mm
(0.055-0.059 inch) up from the edge of the slot.
(3) Machine a recessed flat surface on the damaged side of the strut
for the repair splice. Make the recessed area 25 by 65 mm (1.00 by
2.56 inches), at a 90 degree angle with the base of the strut, and
centered around the slot.
NOTE: Keep a minimum thickness of 1,4-1,5 mm (0.055-0.059 inch),

as marked, to allow the splice adjustment.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Put the splice ACR31200 in place. Mark the outline of the splice to
be sure that the worn area is covered. If the worn area will not be
replaced by the splice, replace the strut per CMM 78-32-36 Repair
No. 39.
(5) Remove an area 14,0-14,1 mm (0.551-0.555 inches) wide by 15,2-15,7

mm (0.60-0.62 inches) deep from the center of the machined flat
surface. (See Figure 202).
(6) Put the splice in place. Make sure it will put the slot surface
back to the original dimension. The width of the slot must be
between 8,50 and 8,53 mm (0.334 and 0.335 inch).
(7) With the splice in place on the strut, drill the holes for the
screws NAS2803-16 or NAS1153-16. Do a spotface on the far side of
the strut for the nuts NAS1726C-3. (See Figure 202, Sheet 2).
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CHEMICALS.THESE INSTRUCTIONS
(8) Apply a chemical protection layer of Alodine 1200 on the machined

area of the strut. (See Table 201).
(9) Put a protective layer of polyester film (See Table 201) around the
pin assembly and around the splice. Put the pin assembly in the
slot. Put the splice in place on the strut. Use EA934NA liquid shim
as necessary to get the correct slot dimension. The width of the
slot must be between 8,50 and 8,53 mm (0.334 and 0.335 inch). (See
Figure 202).
(10) When the liquid shim is dry, remove the splice and the pin assembly
from the strut and remove the polyester film from around them.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(11) Install the splice on the strut with two screws NAS2806-16 or
NAS1153E-16 and two nuts NAS1726C-3. Put PR1750 Class B2 sealant on
the screws and nuts.
(12) Torque the nuts to 0,35-0,45 m.daN (31-41 in. lbs).
(13) Apply a bead of sealant PR1750 Class B2 around the splice and on
the nuts recess. Let cure for 30 to 48 hours at 20-25 degrees C
(68-76 degrees F).
(14) Apply a grey epoxy polyamide paint on the splice.
C. Installation of the One or Eleven O’clock Strut. (See Figure 201).
(1) Apply a thin layer of sealant PR1750 Class B2 on the area of the
strut that touches the outer cowl.
(2) Install the strut and attach it to the outer cowl with four screws
NAS2803-4, four screws NAS2803-14, and eight nuts NAS1726C-3. (See
Figure 201). Tighten the nuts by hand.
(3) Install the pin assembly with two screws NAS2803-16 and two nuts
NAS1726C-3.
(4) Torque the ten nuts to 0,35-0,45 m.daN (31-40 in. lbs).
(5) Apply a layer of silicon rubber sealant RTV106 on the pin and the
nuts to make the joint with the MA25S fireproof layer.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(6) Make the sealant smooth with the aerodynamic surfaces. Let cure for
two hours at 20-25 degrees C (68-76 degrees F).
(7) Make a bead of sealant PR1750 Class B2 around the edges of the
strut.
(8) Install the access door on the higher cut corner pit sidewall with
ten screws NAS2803-4.

Chemical Conversion Alodine 1200S V71410
Phone: (248) 583-9300
Nut NAS1726C-3 Commercially Available
Protective Polyester Terphane Polyester www.terphane.com
Film Film 0,05 mm (0.002
inch) thick
Screw NAS2803-16 or Commercially Available
NAS1153E-16
Sealant PR1750 Class B2 V83574
DBA PPG Aerospace Div.
ASC-Los Angeles
24811 Avenue Rockerfeller
P.O. Box 1800
Phone: (661) 678-4209
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Shim, Liquid EA934NA V33564
Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
Silicon Rubber Sealant RTV106 V01139
Momentive Performance
Material Inc.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone: (877) 943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Splice ACR31200 V51563
Rohr Inc.
850 Lagoon Dr.
Phone: (619) 691-2006
Table 201
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REMOVE AND
REMOVE AND INSTALL SCREW
INSTALL NUT NAS2803-4
NAS1726C-3 (10 LOCATIONS)
(8 LOCATIONS)
REMOVE AND
INSTALL
REMOVE AND ACCESS DOOR
INSTALL SCREW
NAS2803-4
(2 LOCATIONS)
REMOVE AND
INSTALL STRUT
REMOVE AND INSTALL

SCREW NAS2803-4
(2 LOCATIONS)
REMOVE AND INSTALL

SCREW NAS2803-14
(4 LOCATIONS)
REMOVE AND INSTALL

SCREW NAS2803-16
REMOVE AND (2 LOCATIONS)
INSTALL PIN AND
NUT NAS1726C-3
(2 LOCATIONS) c1s-569-00
Removal/Installation of the One or Eleven O’Clock Strut

Figure 201
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
AREA TO BE MACHINED FLAT 90 DEGREES

TO BOTTOM SURFACE AND PARALLEL WITH
SLOT SURFACE
NOTE:
DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS
WITH INCHES IN
PARENTHESES.
WORN AREA
1, 4-1,5
(0.055-0.059) 6, 35 (0.25) RADII
14-14, 1
(0.551-0.555)
15, 2-15,7
(0.600-0.620)
1,5(0.60) RADII
SCREW
NAS2803-16 OR
STRUT MATERIAL: 2024 (AU4G1) (CHROMIC ANODIZING)
NAS1153E-16
SPLICE
ACR31200 SPLICE LIQUID SHIM
ACR31200 EA934NA
AS REQUIRED
NUT
NAS1726C3 8,5 - 8,53
(0.334 - 0.335)
C1S-570-00
Installation of a Splice on the One or Eleven O’Clock Strut

CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
BB
NOTE: FOR SCREW HOLE DRILLING
DIMENSIONS ARE
IN MILLIMETERS
WITH INCHES IN SPLICE
PARENTHESES. ACR31200
5 (0, 20) MAX

STRUT
4,, 79 - 4, 84 (0.188 - 0.190)

DO A FACE 16 (0.629)
DIAMETER DIMPLE
WITH A 2 (0.08)
RADIUS FOR THE
NUTS 1726-3
C1S-571-00
Installation of a Splice on the One or Eleven O’Clock Strut

CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 31
THRUST REVERSER - 12 O’CLOCK HINGE BEAM AND CLAMPING PLATE - BLEND REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair instruction describes the procedure to perform a repair of

a nick, scratch or gouge less than 1.00 in. (25,4 mm) long on Hinge
Beam and/or Clamping Plate, with a damage removal by blending at the
location shown in Figure 201.
B. This repair is for damage at Zone A on the Hinge Beam (Zone A1) less
than 0.177 in. (4,5 mm) deep and/or on the Clamping Plate (Zone A2)
less than 0.059 in. (1,5 mm) deep and for damage at Zone B on the Hinge
beam (Zone B1) and/or Clamping Plate (Zone B2) less than 0.098 in. (2,5
mm) deep and the edge of the damage must be a minimum of 0.355 in. (8,5
mm) from the nearest beam stiffener. All Zones may be repaired at the
same time.
C. For Damage in Zone A that does not meet the above requirements see
Repair 32 or Repair 33. For Damage in Zone B that does not meet the
above requirements contact Goodrich.
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-41-00 BLENDING
CFMI SPM 70-32-00 FLUORESCENT PENETRANT INSPECTION
CFMI SPM 70-21-11 SOLVENT DEGREASING OF ALL MATERIALS
CFMI SPM 70-62-14 SPOT TOUCH-UP OF OXIDE FILM COATING
ON ALUMINUM ALLOYS FOR PROTECTION
A. Prepare the repair area. Refer to Figure 202.
(1) Remove all unwanted material, using non metallic spatula and/or
vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION: DO NOT DEEPEN THE DAMAGE.
(2) Blend the damage. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-41-00.
(3) Smooth all reworked areas with abrasive material grade 400.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Perform FPI to make sure there are no cracks on the edges of
flange. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-32-00. No cracks allowed. If cracks
are found, contact Goodrich.
MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP AND DISCARD CHEMICALS.
(5) Clean the repaired area with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674)
moistened with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE with a clean
lint-free cloth before the DIESTONE becomes dry. Refer to CFMI SPM
70-21-11.
(6) Apply chemical conversion coating Alodine 1200S (CP2640) to all

reworked surfaces of the beam. Refer to CFMI SPM, 70-62-14.
(7) Apply primer PAC 33 and top-coat PU66 to all reworked surfaces.
Primer must be applied within 2 hours after Alodine application.
Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for primer and top-coat
preparation and drying time.
(8) Identify performed repair by recording of subject document number.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B. Verify correct position of Overpressure Valve Attachment Clamps Screws.
(1) Verify the Overpressure Valve Attach Clamps are installed per AMM
TASK 36-11-53-400-001.

Chemical Conversion Alodine 1200S V0KXA5
Coating (CP2640) Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Paper, Abrasive 280 and 400 Grit Commercially Available
Cloth, Lint-Free Commercially Available
(CP2674)
Non-Metallic Spatula Commercially Available
Polyurethane Top Coat, PU66 Commercially Available
use with PAC33
Alternate, Aviox Finish Commercially Available
Polyurethane Top Coat,
use with S15/76
Alternate, AERODUR C21/100UVR V0KXA5
Polyurethane Top Coat, Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
use with 10-P4-2
use with PU66
Alternate, 10-P4-2 V0KXA5
Primer, Epoxy Akzo Nobel Aerospace Coatings
Polyamide, use with
Aviox Finish
Alternate, S15/76 Commercially Available
Primer, Epoxy
Polyamide, use with
Aerodur
Vacuum Cleaner Commercially Available
Table 203
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
Clamping plate
Beam
Hole No. 10
Hole No. 5
ZONE A
C1S-5AB-001-00
ZONE B
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.335 Beam edge

(8.5)
Stiffener
radius Plate edge
No. 5 No. 6 No. 7 No. 8 No. 9
Beam stiffeners
Zone A
0.335
(8.5)
0.098
(2.5) 0.55
(14)
0.43
No. 10 No. 11 No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 (11)
Beam stiffeners
Zone B
C1S-5AB-002-00
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
20 x t t
C1S-5AB-004-00
Removal of Damage
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 32
THRUST REVERSER - 12 O’CLOCK HINGE BEAM - DOUBLER REPAIR
1. General

a gouge less than 1.00 in. (25,4 mm) long on the 12 o’clock Hinge Beam
at the location shown in Figure 201.
B. This repair is for damage to the Hinge Beam greater than or equal to
0.177 in (4,5 mm) deep and less than 0.425 in (10,8 mm) deep and the
edge of the damage must be a minimum of 0.355 in. (8,5 mm) from the beam
stiffener.
C. If the Clamping Plate is also damaged it must meet the requirements of

Repair 31, if it is beyond those requirements contact Goodrich.
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-61-31 CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING
CFMI SPM 70-65-14 APPLICATION OF TWO PART EPOXY
ADHESIVE
CFMI SPM 70-66-00 APPLICATION OF ELASTOMERE SEALANT
A. Prepare the repair area. Refer to Figures 201 and 202.
Note: The following items shall be removed prior to perform the below
instructions:
The Upper Heat Shield (item 305 Figure 11, 78-32-36).
(1) Remove all unwanted material with a nonmetallic spatula and/or

vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION: TAKE ALL THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS WHEN GRINDING THE DAMAGED
AREA TO CAUSE NO DAMAGE TO THE SURROUNDING PARTS.
(2) Cut out damage on the Hinge Beam. Refer to Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Smooth corners to obtain a 0.16 in. (4,1 mm) radius.
(4) Trim off the Seal Support Stiffener and Seal Support Foot to clear
enough space for the Repair Fitting. Refer to Figure 202.
(5) Trim the Rear Radial so that the Repair Fitting will sit flush
against the Clamping Plate. Refer to Figure 202.
(6) Perform FPI on Hinge Beam cutout, Seal Support and Rear Radial
trims to make sure there are no cracks. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-32-00.
No cracks allowed.
NOTE: If cracks are found, contact Goodrich.
70-21-11.

reworked surfaces of the Hinge Beam. Refer to CFMI SPM, 70-62-14.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(9) Apply primer PAC 33 and top-coat PU66 to all reworked surfaces of
the Hinge Beam. Primer must be applied within 2 hours after Alodine
application. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for primer
and top-coat preparation and drying time. The paint layer
thickness must be between 0.001 and 0.002 in. (0,025 and 0,050 mm).
Note: Alternative S15/76 Primer and Aviox Finish Top Coat or

10P4-2 Primer and Aerodur C21/100UVR Top-Coat can also be
used.
B. Locally fabricate the Repair Fitting. Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Cut out a repair fitting in a 0.18 to 0.20 in. (4,6 to 5,1 mm)
thick aluminium clad sheet metal (2024 T351). Make the repair
fitting to fit the Rear Radial cutout and match the existing
contour.
(2) Smooth the Repair Fitting edges to obtain a 0.16 in. (4,1 mm)
radius.
(3) Clean the Repair Fitting with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674)
70-21-11.
C. Locally fabricate the Corner Radial. Refer to Figure 203.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(1) Cut out the Corner Radial in a 0.03 in. (0,8 mm) thick stainless
steel Z10CNT18 sheet.
(2) Form the Corner Radial onto Seal Support Stiffener, 15.5°.
(3) Clean the Corner Radial with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674)
70-21-11.
D. Drill the Repair Fitting, Corner Radial and Seal Support Stiffener.
(1) Place and clamp the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial on the
Clamping Plate and Seal Support Stiffener.
(2) Counter drill five holes from the Clamping Plate existing holes.
(3) Mark location of holes to be drilled through the Seal Support

Stiffener and Corner Radial.
(4) Drill holes from the Corner Radial through the Seal Support
Stiffener.
(5) Remove the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial and deburr the holes.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(6) Clean the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial with a clean lint-free
cloth (CP2674) moistened with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the
DIESTONE with a clean lint-free cloth before the DIESTONE becomes
dry. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-21-11.
(7) Apply chemical conversion coating Alodine 1200S (CP2640) to the

Repair Fitting including the holes. Refer to CFMI SPM, 70-62-14.
(8) Apply primer PAC 33 and top-coat PU66 to all surfaces of Repair
Fitting excluding the holes. Primer must be applied within 2 hours
after Alodine application. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions
for primer and top-coat preparation and drying time. The paint
layer thickness must be between 0.001 and 0.002 in. (0,025 and
0,051 mm).
Note: Alternate S15/76 Primer and Aviox Finish Top Coat or 10P42
Primer adn Aerodur C21/100UVR Top-Coat can also be used.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
E. Attach the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial. Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Clean the Hinge Beam, Clamping Plate and Seal Support Stiffener
with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674) moistened with DIESTONE
(CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE with a clean lint-free cloth before
the DIESTONE becomes dry. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-21-11.
(2) Mix and apply the two-component epoxy adhesive EA 934NA (CP2288) or
Alt EA 9394 (CP2526) to make a liquid shim to all contact surface
of the Repair Fitting. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-65-24.
(3) Install the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial into position on the
Clamping Plate and Seal Support Stiffener using clecos.
(4) Attach the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial to the flange area
using the fasteners. Make sure you install the fasteners wet with
PR1436 G B2/B4 (CP2664) interposition paste. Refer to Figure 203.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(a) Install the pin HL19PB-8-XX and Collar HL70-8 (1 position).
(b) Install the pin LGPL4SP-DT08-XX and collar 3SLC-C08 (2

positions).
(c) Install the screw NAS1154-XX and nut NAS1726-4 (2 positions).
(d) Install the blind rivet NAS1919M04S01U (6 positions)
(5) Wipe off all excess liquid shim residue in area before it dries
with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE with a clean lint-free
cloth (CP2674) before the DIESTONE becomes dry. Refer to CFMI SPM
70-21-11.
(6) Apply a bead of Silicone Rubber Sealant RTV106 (CP2267) around (the
Repair Fitting and in the Hinge Beam cutout.
F. Verify correct position of Overpressure Valve Attachment Clamps Screws.
TASK 36-11-53-400-001.
G. Close-Up
(1) Reinstall the Upper Heat Shield (item 305 Fig 11, CMM 78-32-36).
Note: The Upper Heat Shield may need to be cut and reformed to fit in
the area of the Repair Fitting.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Adhesive, Epoxy Paste EA934NA V33564
(CP2288) Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
www.aeropace.henkel.com
Alternate EA9394 V33564
Adhesive, Epoxy Paste Henkel Corporation
(CP2526)
Blind Rivet NAS1919M04S01U Commercially Available
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
(CP2674)
Collar 3SLC-C08 Commercially Available
Corner Radial Z10CNT18 0.03 in. Commercially Available
(0,8 mm) thick
stainless steel
sheet.
Hi-Lok HL19PB-8-XX Commercially Available
Hi-Lok Collar HL70-8 Commercially Available
Nut NAS1726-4 Commercially Available
Nonmetallic Spatula Commercially Available
PIN LGPL4SP-DT08-XX Commercially Available
use with PAC33
Table 203 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

use with S15/76
use with 10-P4-2
use with PU66
Polyamide, use with
Aviox Finish
Primer, Epoxy
Polyamide, use with
Aerodur
Repair Fitting 2024-T351 0.180 to Commercially Available
0.200 in. (4,6 to
5,0 mm) thick Alumi-
num Sheet
Screw NAS1154-XX Commercially Available
Sealant, Elastomer PR1436 G B2/B4 V83574
ASC-Los Angles
Alternate MC780B Commercially Available
Rubber (CP2267) Momentive Performance Material
Inc.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone: 877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Table 203 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE
LOCTION
HINGE BEAM
CLAMPING PLATE
HOLE NO. 5
ZONE A
DAMAGE LOCATION
C1S-5AB-005-01
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
HINGE BEAM
EDGE CLAMPING PLATE
0.335 IN EDGE
(8.5 MM)
STIFFENER REAR
RADIUS NO. 5 NO. 6 NO. 7 NO. 8 NO. 9 RADIAL
EDGE
HINGE BEAM STIFFENERS
ZONE A
EXISTING FASTENER LOCATIONS
C1S-5B-041-00
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
GOUGE
FIRST
A FASTENER
LINE
SECOND
HINGE BEAM FASTENER
LINE
BEFORE REWORK AFTER REWORK
EDGE RADIUS
0.16 (4)
EXISTING HOLE EXISTING HOLES

View A
C1S-5AB-007-01
Removal of Damage Area

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B
SEAL
SUPPORT
STIFFENER
GOUGE
CLAMPING
PLATE
HINGE
BEAM REAR RADIAL
C1S-5AB-009-01

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REAR RADIAL
SEAL SUPPORT
TRIMMED
RADIUS STIFFENER AND FOOT
0.125 IN TRIMMED
(3,18 mm)
RADIUS
0.16 IN
(4,1 mm)
TYPICAL
DAMAGED REMOVED
HINGE BEAM
CLAMPING PLATE
VIEW B
C1S-5B-037-00

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CORNER RADIAL
REPAIR
FITTING CLAMPING
PLATE
HINGE
BEAM PANEL
EDGE RADIUS
0.16 IN (4,0 MM)
TYPICAL
SECTION B-B
A
B
0.18 - 0.20 IN
(4,6 - 5,1 MM)
CUTOUT
FILL WITH
RTV 106
C1S-5AB-012-01
Locally Manufactured Repair Fitting

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR FITTING
WITH CORNER RADIAL
REAR RADIAL
TRIMMED
SEAL SUPPORT
TRIMMED
1.34 IN
(34,0 MM)
2.52 IN
(64,0 MM)
MAXIMUM GAP
0.030 IN (0,76 MM)
TYPICAL
DAMAGED REMOVED
LGPL4SP-DT08-XX (PIN)
3SLC-C08 (COLLAR)
CLAMPING PLATE HL19PB-8-XX (PIN)

HL70-8 (COLLAR)
HINGE BEAM
NAS1154-XX (SCREW)
NAS1726-4 (NUT)
NAS1919M04S01U (RIVET)
2D EDGE DISTANCE MINIMUM
5D SPACING MINIMUM
VIEW A
C1S-5B-036-01
Locally Manufactured Repair Fitting
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
Rohr, Inc., other
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 33
THRUST REVERSER - 12 O’CLOCK CLAMPING PLATE - DOUBLER WITH FILLER REPAIR
1. General

a gouge less than 1.00 in. (25,4 mm) long on the 12 o’clock Clamping
Plate at the location shown in Figure 201.
B. This repair is for damage to the Clamping Plate greater than or equal
to 0.059 in (1,5 mm) deep and less than 0.728 in (18,5 mm) deep and the
edge of the damage must be a minimum of 0.355 in. (8,5 mm) from the beam
stiffener.
C. If the Hinge Beam is also damaged it must meet the requirements of

Repair 031, if it is beyond those requirements contact Goodrich.
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-61-31 CHROMIC ACID ANODIZING
CFMI SPM 70-65-14 APPLICATION OF TWO PART EPOXY
ADHESIVE
CFMI SPM 70-66-00 APPLICATION OF ELASTOMERE SEALANT
A. Prepare the repair area. Refer to Figure 201 and 202.
Note: The following items shall be removed prior to perform below

instructions:
The Upper Heat Shield (item 305 Fig 11, CMM 78-32-36).
(1) Remove all unwanted material with a nonmetallic spatula and/or

vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION: TAKE ALL THE NECESSARY PRECAUTIONS WHEN GRINDING THE DAMAGED
AREA TO CAUSE NO DAMAGE TO THE SURROUNDING PARTS
(2) Cut out the damage on the Clamping Plate. Refer to Figure 202.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(3) Smooth the angles to obtain a 0.16 in (4,1 mm) radius.
(4) Trim off Seal Support Stiffener and Seal Support Foot to clear
enough space for the Repair Fitting. Refer to Figure 202.
(5) Trim the Rear Radial so that the Repair Fitting will sit flush
against the Clamping Plate. Refer to Figure 202.
(6) Perform FPI on the Clamping Plate cutout, Seal Support and Rear
Radial trims to make sure there are no cracks. Refer to CFMI SPM
70-32-00. No cracks allowed.
Note: If cracks are found, contact Goodrich.
(7) Clean the repair area with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674)
70-21-11.

reworked surfaces of the Clamping Plate. Refer to CFMI SPM, 70-62-
14.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(9) Apply primer PAC 33 and top-coat PU66 to all reworked surfaces of
the Clamping Plate. Primer must be applied within 2 hours after
Alodine application. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for
primer and top-coat preparation and drying time. The paint layer
thickness must be between 0.001 and 0.002 in. (0,025 and 0,050 mm).
NOTE: Alternative S15/76 Primer and Aviox Finish Top Coat or

10P4-2 Primer and Aerodur C21/100UVR Top-Coat can also be
used.
B. Locally fabricate the Repair Fitting and Filler. Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Cut out a Repair Fitting in a 0.18 to 0.20 in. (4,6 to 5,1 mm)
thick aluminum clad sheet metal (2024-T351). Make the Repair
Fitting to fit the Rear Radial cutout and match the existing
contour.
(2) Smooth the Repair Fitting edges to obtain a 0.16 in. (4,1 mm)
radius.
(3) Cut out the Filler in a 0.19 in. (4,8 mm) thick aluminum clad sheet
metal (2024-T351). Make the Filler to fit the flange cutout and
match the existing contour.
(4) Smooth the Filler edges.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(5) Clean the Repair Fitting and Filler with a clean lint-free cloth
(CP2674) moistened with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE
with a clean lint-free cloth before the DIESTONE becomes dry. Refer
to CFMI SPM 70-21-11.
C. Locally fabricate the Corner Radial. Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Cut out the Corner Radial in a 0.03 in. (0,8 mm) thick stainless
steel Z10CNT18 sheet.
(2) Form the Corner Radial onto the Seal Support Stiffener, 15.5°.
(3) Clean the Corner Radial with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674)
70-21-11.
D. Drill the Repair Fitting, Filler, Corner Radial and Seal Support
Stiffener. Refer to Figure 203.
(1) Place and clamp the Repair Fitting and Corner Radial onto the
Clamping Plate and Seal Support Stiffener.
(2) Counter drill six holes from the Clamping Plate existing holes.
(3) Mark location of the holes to be drilled through the Seal Support
Stiffener and Corner Radial.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Drill holes from the Corner Radial through the Seal Support
Stiffener.
(5) Install the Filler and mark location of the hole.
(6) Remove the Repair Fitting, Corner Radial and Filler and deburr the
holes.
(7) Drill the Filler and deburr the hole.
(8) Clean the Repair Fitting, Filler and Corner Radial with a clean
lint-free cloth (CP2674) moistened with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove
the DIESTONE with a clean lint-free cloth before the DIESTONE
becomes dry. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-21-11.
(9) Apply chemical conversion coating Alodine 1200S (CP2640) to the

Repair Fitting and Filler including the holes. Refer to CFMI SPM,
70-62-14.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(10) Apply PAC 33 and top-coat PU66 to all surfaces of Repair Fitting
and Filler excluding the holes. Primer must be applied within 2
hours after Alodine application. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for primer and top-coat preparation and drying time.
The paint layer thickness must be between 0.001 and 0.002 in.
(0,025 and 0,051 mm).
Note: Alternate S15/76 Primer and Aviox Finish Top Coat or 10P4-2
Primer and Aerodur C21/100UVR Top-Coat can also be used.
E. Attach the Repair Fitting, Filler and Corner Radial. Refer to Figure
203.
(1) Clean the Hinge Beam, Clamping Plate and Seal Support Fitting
Stiffener with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674) moistened with
DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE with a clean lint-free
cloth before the DIESTONE becomes dry. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-21-11.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(2) Mix and apply Hysol EA934NA (CP2288) liquid shim to contact
surfaces of the Repair Fitting and Filler. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-65-
24.
(3) Install the Repair Fitting, Filler and Corner Radial in position on
the Clamping Plate and Seal Support Stiffener using clecos.
Maximum gaps around repair parts shall not exceed 0.030 in. (0,0762
mm).
(4) Attach the Repair Fitting, Filler and Corner Radial to the flange
area using the fastener. Make sure you install the fasteners wet
with PR1436 G B2/B4 (CP2664) interposition paste. Refer to Figure
203.
(a) Install the pin HL19PB-8-XX and Collar HL70-8 (1 position).
(b) Install the pin LGPL4SP-DT08-XX and collar 3SLC-C08 (2

positions).
(c) Install the screw NAS1154-XX and nut NAS1726-4 (3 position).
(d) Install the blind rivet NAS1919M04S01U (6 positions).
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(5) Wipe off all excess liquid shim residue in area before it dries
with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE with a clean lint-free
cloth (CP2674) before the DIESTONE becomes dry. Refer to CFMI SPM
70-21-11.
(6) Apply a bead of silicone ribber sealant RTV106 (CP2267) around the
repair fitting.
F. Verify correct position of Overpressure Attachment Clamps Screws.
TASK 36-11-53-400-001.
G. Close-Up
(1) Reinstall the Upper Heat Shield (item 305 Fig 11, CMM 78-32-36).
Note: The Upper Heat Shield may be need to be cut and reformed to
fit in the area of the Repair Fitting.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

Adhesive, Epoxy Paste EA934NA V33564
(CP2288) Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (925) 458-8000
www.aeropace.henkel.com
Alternate EA9394 V33564
Adhesive, Epoxy Paste Henkel Corporation
(CP2526)
Blind Rivet NAS1919M04S01U Commercially Available
East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
(CP2674)
Collar 3SLC-C08 Commercially Available
Corner Radial Z10CNT18 0.03 in Commercially Available
(0,8 mm) thick
stainless steel
sheet
Filler 2024-T351 0.19 in Commercially Available
(4,8 mm) thick
Aluminum Sheet
Hi-Lok HL19PB-8-XX Commercially Available
Hi-Lok COllar HL70-8 Commercially Available
Nut NAS1726-4 Commercially Available
Nonmetallic Spatula Commercially Available
PIN LGPL4SP-DT08-XX Commercially Available
Table 203 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

use with PAC33
use with S15/76
use with 10-P4-2
use with PU66
Polyamide, use with
Aviox Finish
Primer, Epoxy
Polyamide, use with
Aerodur
Repair Fitting 2024-T351 0.18 to Commercially Available
0.20 in. (4,6 to 5,0
mm) thick Aluminum
Sheet
Screw NAS1154-22 Commercially Available
Sealant, Elastomer PR1436 G B2/B4 V83574
ASC-Los Angles
Alternate MC780B Commercially Available
Rubber (CP2267) Momentive Performance Materials
Inc.
Waterford, NY 12188
Phone: 877-943-7325
www.gesilicones.com
Table 203 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
DAMAGE
LOCTION
HINGE BEAM
CLAMPING PLATE
HOLE NO. 5
ZONE A
DAMAGE LOCATION
C1S-5AB-005-01
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
HINGE BEAM
EDGE CLAMPING PLATE
0.335 IN EDGE
(8.5 MM)
STIFFENER REAR
RADIUS NO. 5 NO. 6 NO. 7 NO. 8 NO. 9 RADIAL
EDGE
HINGE BEAM STIFFENERS
ZONE A
EXISTING FASTENER LOCATIONS
C1S-5B-041-00
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
A
SEAL
SUPPORT
STIFFENER
GOUGE
CLAMPING
PLATE
HINGE
BEAM REAR RADIAL
C1S-5B-015-01

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REAR RADIAL
SEAL SUPPORT
TRIMMED
RADIUS STIFFENER AND FOOT
0.125 IN TRIMMED
(3,18 mm)
RADIUS
0.16 IN
(4,1 mm)
TYPICAL
DAMAGED REMOVED
HINGE BEAM
CLAMPING PLATE
VIEW A
C1S-5B-038-00
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CORNER RADIAL
REPAIR
FITTING CLAMPING
PLATE
EA934NA
MAXIMUM GAP
0.030 IN. (0,76 MM) HINGE
BEAM PANEL
EDGE RADIUS FILLER
0.16 IN (4,0 MM)
TYPICAL A SECTION B-B
0.18 - 0.20 IN
(4,6 - 5,1 MM)
C1S-5B-019-01
Locally Manufactured Repair Fitting and Filler

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
REPAIR FITTING
WITH CORNER RADIAL
REAR RADIAL
TRIMMED
SEAL SUPPORT
TRIMMED
1.34 IN
(34,0 MM)
2.52 IN
(64,0 MM)
MAXIMUM GAP
0.030 IN (0,76 MM)
TYPICAL
FILLER
LGPL4SP-DT08-XX (PIN)
3SLC-C08 (COLLAR)
CLAMPING PLATE HLPB-8-XX (PIN)

HL70-8 (COLLAR)
HINGE BEAM
NAS1154-XX (SCREW)
NAS1726-4 (NUT)
NAS1919M04S01U (RIVET)
2D EDGE DISTANCE MINIMUM
5D SPACING MINIMUM
VIEW A C1S-5B-039-00
Locally Manufactured Repair Fitting and Filler

CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 34
THRUST REVERSER IFS - AFT EDGE - BLEND AND DOUBLER REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair instruction describes the procedure to perform a temporary

and a permanent repair on core cowl aft trailing edge at the location
shown in Figures 201 and 202.
B. This repair is for maximum individual damage of 3.00 in. (76,2 mm) long
(circumferential) by 1.00 in. (25,4 mm) wide (fore and aft), the damage
may be through both the inner and outer skins. Refer to Figure 204.
There may be up to 3 damages per Thrust Reverser Half separated as
shown in Figure 202. Multiple damages may be combined into one damage
provided they meet the above criteria.
C. For the Temporary repair see SRM 51-73-00 section 5. This has a life
limit of 750 FC and the permanent repair must be completed by that
time.
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-43-31 Blind Rivet Assemblies
CFMI SPM 70-43-32 Huck Blind Rivet Assemblies
Table 201
CAUTION: Do not remove the Heat Shield Carrier. Make sure the Heat
Shield Carrier is intact.
(1) Remove the Heat Shield Carrier to IFS core cowl attachment solid
rivets surrounding the damage (Refer to Figure 202, Section B-B).
(2) Make tapered pack.
(3) Push aside slowly the Heat Shield Carrier.
NOTE: Maintain the Heat Shield Carrier half-opened.
(4) Put the two tapered packs on each side of the damaged area.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B. Cut out of the thrust reverser cowl.
(1) Cut out of the thrust reverser cowl. Refer to Figure 204.
C. Protection of the reworked surface of the thrust reverser cowl.
(1) Apply Alodine 1200S on the repair area.
preparation and drying time. The paint layer thickness must be
between 0.001and 0.002 in. (0,025 and 0,050 mm).
NOTE: Alternate S15/76 Primer and Avoix Top Coat or 10P-2 Primer
and Aerodur C21/100UVR Top Coat can also be used.
D. Prepare the filler and doubler.
(1) Make the filler from a 0.078in (2mm) thick aluminium sheet, and
matching the cut out contour. (Refer to Figure 205).
(2) Make the doubler from a 0.078in (2mm) thick aluminium sheet. (Refer
to Figure 205).
CAUTION: DO NOT DAMAGE THE HEAT SHIELD
(3) Put the doubler, the filler in position and hold it using clamps.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(4) Mark the fastener positions on the doubler. (Refer to Figure 205).
(5) Remove the doubler, the filler.
(6) Drill the holes through the doubler. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-43-31.
(7) Disassemble doubler and filler.
(8) Countersink to 100° +/-1° the holes on the outer side of the
doubler.
(9) Deburr the holes.
(10) Clean the filler and the doubler with vacuum cleaner.
E. Protection of the surfaces of the filler and doubler.
(1) Clean the reworked area (doubler and filler) with a clean lint-free
cloth moistened with DIESTONE. Remove the DIESTONE with a clean
70-21-11.
(2) Apply Alodine 1200S on the bare surfaces of the filler and on the
doubler.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
preparation and drying time. The paint layer thickness must be
between 0.001and 0.002 in. (0,025 and 0,050 mm).
NOTE: Alternate S15/76 Primer and Avoix Top Coat or 10P-2 Primer
and Aerodur C21/100UVR Top Coat can also be used.
F. Installation of the filler and the doubler.
(1) Apply sealant RTV106 to the contour of cut out.
(2) Apply sealant RTV106 between contact surfaces of filler, doubler.
(3) Put the filler in position on the core cowl.
(4) Put the doubler in position on to the filler.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(5) Make sure that holes are aligned.
(6) Install solid rivets or blind rivets wet with sealant RTV106. Refer
to CFMI SPM 70-43-31 or 70-43-32.
(7) Clean the repaired area with a clean dry lint-free cloth.
(8) Apply and cure the primer PAC 33 on rivets heads. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions to prepare and cure the primer.
NOTE: Alternate Primer S15/76 or 10P4-2 can also be used.
(9) Clean the reworked area (doubler and filler) with a clean lint-free
cloth moistened with DIESTONE. Remove the DIESTONE with a clean
70-21-11.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
CAUTION: USE TOP COAT BASED ON WHICH PRIMER IS USED.
(10) Apply and cure the finishing paint PU66 on rivets heads. Refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions to prepare and cure the paint.
Alternative Top Coat Aviox Finish or Aerodur can also be used.
(11) Make a bead of sealant RTV106 around the doubler.
CAUTION: THE HEAT SHIELD CARRIER IS THIN 0.012 IN (0,30 MM) STAINLESS
STEEL AND CAN BEND EASILY. DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO DO
THIS PROCEDURE. DAMAGE CAN OCCUR TO THE HEAT SHIELD CARRIER
IF TOO MUCH FORCE IS USED.
(12) Remove the two tapered packs from each side of the repaired area.
(Refer to Figure 202).
(13) Return the Heat Shield Carrier in position and hold it using
clamps. (Refer to Figure 202, Section A-A).
(14) Re-Install the solid rivets TLPD424BS or TLPD419BS on the Heat

Shield Carrier.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.

East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
(CP2674)
Doubler 2024-T42/T3 0.078 Commercially Available
in. (2 mm) thick
Aluminum sheet
Filler 2024-T42/T3 0.078 Commercially Available
in. (2 mm) thick
Aluminum sheet
use with PAC33
use with S15/76
use with 10-P4-2
use with PU66
Polyamide, use with
Aviox Finish
Primer, Epoxy
Polyamide, use with
Aerodur
Rivet NAS1200M4-xxP Commercially Available
Table 202 (Sheet 1)
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

Rivet TLPD42BS Commercially Available
Rivet, Alternate TLEP424BS Commercially Available
Rivet TLPD419BS Commercially Available
Rivet, Alternate TLEP419BS Commercially Available
Tapered Pack Commercially Available
Table 202 (Sheet 2)
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
Section A-A
ZONE A (monolithic area)
EXCLUDED ZONE
C1S-5AB-024-00
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
12 O'clock
Bifurcation
Wall Trailing
Core Cowl
1.26 (32)
EXISTING FASTENER
VIEW B
EXCLUDED ZONE
C1S-5AB-025-00
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
0.79448 (20.18)
0.669 (17)
3 or 9 O'CLOCK
View C
EXISTING PLUG RESIN ø 0,25(6,35)
C1S-5AB-026-00
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
X = 4 x D1
S1
S1
D1 D2
CAUTION: CRITERION NOT APPLICABLE ON THE WIDTH DISTANCE

NOTE:
X = MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO DAMAGED AREAS = 4 x D1
S1 AND S2 ARE DAMAGED AREAS
D1 = D2
C1S-5AB-027-00
Minimum Damage Separation
Figure 202
CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
B REMOVE THE
Tapered packed EXISTING RIVETS
Core Cowl
B A A
Heat Shield Carrier
EXTERNAL SKIN INTERNAL SKIN
12 OC 6 OC
EXTERNAL SKIN
INTERNAL SKIN
EXISTING RIVETS
WEAR
SECTION A-A FULL DEPTH
ACCEPTABLE
EXTERNAL SKIN
INTERNAL SKIN
REMOVE THE EXISTING RIVETS

NOTE:
IN THE 3-9 O'CLOCK AREA, THERE IS A HOLE IN THE IFS. SECTION B-B
THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE NEAREST FASTENER TO
THE CENTER OF THE HOLE SHOULD BE AT LEAST 4
TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE 0.25IN (6,4MM) HOLE.
NOTE:
IF DAMAGE ON THE SKIN IS NOT FULL DEPTH A
TEMPORARY BLEND REPAIR TO BE PERFORMED
BEFORE THIS PERMANENT REPAIR, SEE 51-73-00 SECTION 5
C1S-5AB-028-00
Location of Damage
Figure 203
CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
LENGTH
WIDTH
CAUTION: CUT OUT RADIUS = 0.25in (6,4mm)
CAUTION: OVAL CUTOUT IS NOT ALLOWED

Note: MINIMUM CUT OUT
RECTANGULAR SHAPED DAMAGE:
• LENGTH Min = 1.26in (32mm)
• WIDTH Min = 0.63in (16mm)
MAXIMUM CUT OUT

RECTANGULAR SHAPED DAMAGE:
• LENGTH Max = 3.00in (76,2mm)
• WIDTH Max = 1.00in (25,4mm)
C1S-5AB-029-00
Removal of Damage
Figure 204
CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
NAS1200M4-XXP
1,5D
0.00-0.03in
(0.00-0,762mm)
clearance between
the filler and the skin
A A
1.26in to 3.0in
(32mm) to (76,2mm)
REGULAR
Pitch = 4D
0.00-0.03in
(0.00-0,762mm)
clearance between
the filler and the skin
2D
0.63in to 25in
(16mm) to )25mm)
Skin Outer Rear

2D 2D Min
Doubler
0.078in (2mm)
thickness
2D Filler
0.078in (2mm)
Doubler Rear Closure thickness
TLPD424BS Heat Shield
Rivets A-A
D: DIAMETER OF FASTENER C1S-5AB-030-00
Repair of Wear on Core Cowl
CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
FLIGHT
DIRECTION
0.031 IN.
(0,80 MM)
2 D MIN.
30°
D: DIAMETER OF FASTENER
Doubler = 0.078 in (2 mm) thickness
C1S-5AB-031-00
Chamfer Detail
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 35
THRUST REVERSER – 6 O’CLOCK LATCH FITTING AFT EDGE – BLEND REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair gives instructions to repair a nick, scratch, gouge, or

lightning strike on the aft edge of the Latch Fitting with a damage
removal by blending at the locations shown in Figure 1.
B. This repair is for damage less than or equal to 5.5 inches (140 mm) in
length (circumferentially), less or equal to 0.236 inches (6,00 mm) in
width (forward of the aft edge), and greater than or equal to 0.039
inches (1,00 mm) remaining thickness.
C. For Damage that does not meet the above requirements contact Goodrich.
2. Reference Documents
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-41-00 Blending
CFMI SPM 70-32-00 Fluorescent penetrant inspection
CFMI SPM 70-21-11 Solvent degreasing of all materials
CFMI SPM 70-62-14 Spot touch-up of oxide film coating
on aluminum alloys for protection
Table 201
(1) Remove all unwanted material, using non-metallic spatula and/or

vacuum cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not deepen the damage.
(2) Blend the damage. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-41-00.
(a) Refer to Figure 1 for damage full length of Latch Fitting.
(b) Refer to Figures 1 and 2 for damage less than full length of
Latch Fitting.
(3) Smooth all reworked areas to 125 RMS surface finish or better with
abrasive paper 400 grit.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
(4) Perform FPI to make sure there are no cracks on the edges of the
fitting. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-32-00. No cracks allowed. If cracks
are found, contact Goodrich.
70-21-11.

reworked surfaces of the beam. Refer to CFMI SPM 70-62-14.
preparation and drying time.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.

East Water St.
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
(CP2640)
use with PAC33
use with S15/76
use with 10-P4-2
use with PU66
Primer, Epoxy
Polyamide, use with
Aviox Finish
Polyamide, use with
Aerodur

Table 202
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
C1S-281-01
A
Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
BIFURCATION
C DUCT
(172° RADIAL)
LATCH
FITTING
TYPICAL
AFT RING 5.2 IN (132 MM) LIGHTNING
COMPOSITE STRIKE
PANEL 5.5 IN (140 MM) DAMAGE
AFT RING
TITANIUM
STRIP
B C1S-351-00_Rep35

Location of Damage
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
(172° RADIAL) EXISTING LATCH

FITTING FASTENER (TYP)
LATCH
FITTING
0.236 IN
AFT RING
(6,00 MM)
MAXIMUM
D D
5.5 IN (140 MM)

AFT EDGE MAXIMUM
2.5D STAY OUT
ZONE (TYP) C
LATCH
FITTING
VIEW D-D AFT RING

COMPOSITE
0.039 IN PANEL
(1,00 MM) AFT RING
C1S-352-00_Rep35
MINIMUM TITANIUM
STRIP
REPAIRABLE ZONE
Repairable Area
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19


ROHR, INC.
20 x t t
C1S-5AB-004-00
Blend
Damage Not Full Length of Latch Fitting
Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19

ROHR, INC.
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 36
THRUST REVERSER – 6 O’CLOCK AFT RING AFT EDGE – LIGHTNING STRIKE REPAIR
1. General
A. This repair gives instructions to repair lightning strike causing

burning mark and/or edge damage on LH/RH Aft ring. This repair applies
only to the Titanium Strip and the Composite Panel of the Aft Ring at
B. This repair is for damage less than or equal to 5.2 inches (132 mm) in
length (circumferentially), 0.236 inches (6,00 mm) in width (forward of
the aft edge), and for the full depth of Titanium Strip and Composite
Panel carbon plies of the Aft Ring. Refer to Figure 1.
C. This repair cuts out the damaged area, pots the area, reworks surfaces,
applies primer, and top coat.
D. For Damage that does not meet the above requirements contact Goodrich
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-21-11-110-002 Solvent degreasing of all materials
SRM 51-27-11 Cutting and Machining of Metallic
Structures
SRM 51-27-21 Cutting and Machining of Composite
Structures
Table 201
A. Cut out the Titanium Strip and the Composite Panel carbon plies of the
Aft Ring.
CAUTION: TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE SURROUNDING STRUCTURE.
(1) Cut-out the damaged area of the Titanium Strip. Refer to the
Structural Repair Manual (SRM), chapter 51-27-11 and Figure 2.
(2) Cut-out the damaged carbon plies of the Composite Panel. Ensure a
minimum radius of 0.393 in (10 mm). Refer to the Structural Repair
Manual (SRM), chapter 51-27-21 and Figure 2.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(a) In the damaged area remove the all carbon plies of the
Composite Panel up to the depth of the Latch Fitting.
(b) Make the edges of the cut-out area smooth with abrasive paper.
(3) Vacuum clean rework area in order to remove dust and residues of
cut-out.
moistened with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE (CP2687)
to CFMI SPM 70-21-11-110-002.
(5) Perform a visual inspection around the cut-out area looking for
delamination evidence in accordance with A320 Non-Destructive
Testing Manual NTM 51-90-00. In case of doubt, do an ultrasonic
inspection. Refer to A320 (NTM) ultrasonic testing chapter 51-40-
00 or resonance frequency chapter 51-50-00.
B. Application of plugging resin
(1) Protect surrounding area with Teflon tape or equivalent.
(2) Install one caul plate on one side of reworked area. Refer to
Figure 3.
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
(3) Prepare by mixing sufficient adhesive resin EA9394 (CP2526). Refer

to the manufacturer’s instructions.
(4) Fill the reworked area of the trailing edge with adhesive resin
EA9394 (CP2526) until adhesive resin set flush with titanium
strip.
NOTE: Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for adhesive cure

information.
(5) Use Teflon tape and the second caul plate or non-metallic spatula
as necessary to retain the adhesive resin EA9394 (CP2526) until it
begins to harden. Refer to Figure 3.
(6) Cure the adhesive resin EA9394 (CP2526), start to measure the time
when the 25°C (77°F) and 90°C (194°F) temperatures are reached.
(7) Cure the adhesive resin EA9394 (CP2526) for 7 hours minimum at 25°C
(77°F) the 1 hour at between 90°C and 100°C (194°F and 212°F).
NOTE: Use a heat lamp or blanket means for curing Adhesive resin.
(8) Set flush resin EA9394 (CP2526) with initial contour of the outer
skin panel surface using sandpaper.
(9) Remove the unwanted material with clean compressed air.
(10) Remove protection Teflon tape or equivalent.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
70-21-11.
C. Application of Protection
(1) Mix and apply polyurethane primer PAC 33 (Material N° 04EAC2) on

the rework area in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(2) Apply Polyurethane top-coat PU66 (Material N° 04JAA3) on the

rework area in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
(3) Cure the paint with a heat lamp at 60°C for 45 minutes or at the
room temperature for 8 hours.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

Paste(CP2526) Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Alternate V33564
Adhesive, Epoxy Paste EA934NA Henkel Corporation
(CP2288)
Lint-free cloth Commercially Available
(CP2674)
Polyurethane primer PAC33 Akzo Nobel Aerospace

(Airbus CML 04EAC2) Coatings, East Water St.
Waukegan,IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Polyurethane top-coat PU66 Akzo Nobel Aerospace
(Airbus CML 04BAB5)
Tape, Teflon or 2.0 inch (50,8 mm) Commercially Available
equivalent Wide

Table 202
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
C1S-281-01
Damage Location
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
ROHR, INC.
BIFURCATION
C DUCT
(172° RADIAL)
LATCH
FITTING
TYPICAL
COMPOSITE STRIKE
AFT RING
TITANIUM
STRIP
B
C1S-363-00_Rep36_3

Damage Location
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING 0.236 IN

(6,00 MM)
MAXIMUM
D D
5.2 IN (132 MM)

AFT EDGE MAXIMUM
2.5D STAY OUT DAMAGE
ZONE (TYP) C AREA
LATCH
FITTING
VIEW D-D AFT RING

COMPOSITE
PANEL
0.068 IN AFT RING
C1S-364-00_Rep36
(1,72 MM) TITANIUM

STRIP
REPAIRABLE ZONE
Typical Damage and Repairable Area

CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
A A
0.236 IN
AFT EDGE (6,00 MM)
RADIUS MAXIMUM
2.5D STAY OUT
CUT-OUT 0.4 IN (10 MM)
ZONE (TYP)
MINIMUM
0.068 IN LATCH
(1,72 MM) (172° RADIAL) FITTING
SECTION A-A AFT RING

COMPOSITE
PANEL
AFT RING
C1S-365-00_Rep36
TITANIUM
STRIP
Typical Damage Removal

Figure 2
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.

LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
A A
CAUL PLUGGING
AFT EDGE PLATE RESIN
LATCH
(172° RADIAL) FITTING
AFT RING CAUL AFT RING

B
TITANIUM PLATE COMPOSITE
STRIP PANEL
SECTION A-A
C1S-366-00_Rep36
CAUL PLUGGING
PLATE RESIN
VIEW B
Installation Plugging Resin

Figure 3
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control

ROHR, INC.
REPAIR NO. 37
THRUST REVERSER – 6 O’CLOCK AFT RING AFT EDGE – LIGHTNING STRIKE REPAIR
INCLUDING FASTENERS
1. General
A. This repair gives instructions to repair lightning strike damage

causing burning mark and/or edge damage on LH/RH Aft ring and rear
latch fitting including two fasteners maximum. This repair applies only
to the Titanium Strip and the Composite Panel of the Aft Ring at
B. This repair is for damage less than or equal to 1.81 inches (46,0 mm)
in length (circumferentially), 1.06 inches (27,0 mm) in width (forward
of the aft edge), and for the full depth of Titanium Strip and
Composite Panel carbon plies of the Aft Ring. Refer to Figure 1.
C. This is repair is limited to either one 1-fastener or one 2-fastener

repair per Thrust Reverser half.
D. This repair cuts out the damaged area, installs Titanium Repair Filler
with liquid shim and double flush rivets and install two additional
rivets through the Latch Fitting, reworks surfaces, applies primer and
top coat.
E. For Damage that does not meet the above requirements contact UTAS.
DOCUMENT TITLE
CFMI SPM 70-21-11-110-002 Solvent degreasing of all materials
CFMI SPM 70-32-00-230-001 Florescent Penetrant Inspection
SRM 51-27-11 Cutting and Machining of Metallic
Structures
SRM 51-27-21 Cutting and Machining of Composite
Structures
Table 201
A. Cut-out the Titanium Strip and the Composite Panel carbon plies of the
Aft Ring.
(1) Cut-out the damaged area of the Titanium Strip. Refer to the
Structural Repair Manual (SRM), chapter 51-27-11 and Figure 2.
CFM56-5B
Page 201
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(2) Cut-out the damaged carbon plies of the Composite Panel, the width
of the Composite Panel removed shall not exceed the width of the
Titanium Strip. Ensure a minimum radius of 0.393 in (10 mm). Refer
to the Structural Repair Manual (SRM), chapter 51-27-21 and Figure
2.
NOTE: The width of composite material removed shall not exceed the
width of the Titanium Strip.
(a) In the damaged area remove the all carbon plies of the
Composite Panel up to the depth of the Latch Fitting.
(b) Make the edges of the cut-out area smooth with abrasive paper.
(3) Vacuum clean rework area in order to remove dust and residues of
cut-out.
to CFMI SPM 70-21-11-110-002.
(5) Perform a visual inspection around the cut-out area looking for
delamination evidence in accordance with A320 Non-Destructive
Testing Manual NTM 51-90-00. In case of doubt, do an ultrasonic
inspection. Refer to A320 (NTM) ultrasonic testing chapter 51-40-
00 or resonance frequency chapter 51-50-00.
B. Fabrication the Titanium Repair Filler
CFM56-5B
Page 202
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(1) Locally fabricate the Titanium Repair Filler made from TA6V
AMS4911 (or alternative T60 AMS4901) 0.063 in (1,6 mm) thick. Refer
to Figure 3.
NOTE: The shape of the Titanium Repair Filler must be the same as
the cut-out, with a 0.030 inch (0,76 mm.) maximum gap to
the edge of the cut-out.
(2) Temporarily clamp the Titanium Repair Filler to the aft ring
(3) Mark the existing fastener location on the Titanium Repair Filler.
(4) Remove the clamp and the Titanium Repair Filler.
(5) Using a centering bushing drill hole(s) to 0.059 inch (1,50 mm)
diameter in the Titanium Repair Filler. Refer to Figure 3.
(7) Drill hole(s) to the final diameter to 0.127-0.131 in (3,25-3,35

mm). Refer to Figure 3.
(9) Countersink the hole(s), refer to Figure 3 Section A-A. or Section

B-B.
(a) In the Titanium Repair Filler make an 82° ± 30’ countersink.
(b) In the Latch Fitting make a 100° ± 30’ countersink.
(11) Clean the hole(s) with a clean lint-free cloth (CP2674) moistened
with DIESTONE (CP2687). Remove the DIESTONE (CP2687) with a clean
70-21-11-110-002.
CFM56-5B
Page 203
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(12) Do a Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection on the Titanium Repair

Filler. Refer to CFMI SPM, 70-32-00-230-001.
NOTE: If the Titanium Repair Filler is cracked, reject and repeat

the operation 3.(B).
to CFMI SPM 70-21-11-110-002.
(14) Mix and apply polyurethane primer PAC 33 (Material N° 04EAC2) on

the contact surfaces of the Titanium Repair Filler in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Installation of the Titanium Repair Filler
(1) Shimming the Titanium Repair Filler
EMPLOYER ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP AND DISCARD
CHEMICALS.
(a) Apply release agent (FREKOTE 700-NC) on the mating surface of

the latch fitting and edges of the outer skin panel cavity.
CFM56-5B
Page 204
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
EMPLOYER ON HOW YOU MUST SAFELY USE, KEEP AND DISCARD
CHEMICALS.
(b) Mix a sufficient quantity of adhesive Hysol EA9394 (CP2526).

Refer to Standard Practice Manual 70-65-14.
(c) Apply Hysol EA9394 (CP2526) liquid shim on contact surfaces of

the Titanium Repair Filler and to the repair area with a small
brush or with a syringe until equal with the adjacent area.
Refer to Figure 3.
(d) Install the Titanium Repair Filler into the Aft Ring cavity
using cleco(s). Refer to Figure 3.
(e) Remove all the unwanted adhesive Hysol EA9394 (CP2526) before
it cures.
(2) Install the electrical bonding rivet 21217TB32 (or alternate).
(a) Protect the electrical bonding rivet with Vaseline (CP5070) or

Aromatized Petroleum (CP5074).
(b) It is required to shave the solid rivet bulb in order to set

flush to Titanium Strip surface.
(c) Paint the head with the Varnish Electrical Bonding Structure,
Light Blue (4125/6407).
D. Installation of new fasteners in the Latch Fitting
(1) Mark location of holes to be drilled through the Aft Ring and the
Latch Fitting. Refer to Figure 4.
(2) Verify the edge distance in Titanium Strip and pitch with nearest
fastener. Refer to Figure 4.
(3) Drill holes to 0.059 inch (1,50 mm) diameter through the Aft Ring
and Latch Fitting. Refer to Figure 4
(4) Deburr the holes.
CFM56-5B
Page 205
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(5) Drill holes to the final diameter to 0.127-0.131 in (3,25-3,35 mm).
(6) Countersink the holes, refer to Figure 4, Section A-A.
(a) On the Aft Ring side make an 82° ± 30’ countersink.
(b) On the Latch Fitting side make a 100° ± 30’ countersink.
(7) Deburr the holes
70-21-11-110-002.
(9) Do a Fluorescent Penetrant Inspection on the Titanium Repair

Filler. Refer to CFMI SPM, 70-32-00-230-001.
NOTE: If the fasteners holes on the rear latch fitting are

cracked, contact UTAS.
70-21-11-110-002.
(11) Install new electrical bonding rivet 21217TB32 (or alternate) in

the Latch Fitting. Refer to Figure 4.
CFM56-5B
Page 206
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
(a) Protect the electrical bonding rivet with Vaseline (CP5070) or

Aromatized Petroleum (CP5074).
(b) It is required to shave the solid rivet bulb in order to set

flush to Titanium Strip surface.
(c) Paint the head with the Varnish Electrical Bonding Structure,
Light Blue (4125/6407).
E. Completing repair
(1) Apply Polyurethane top-coat PU66 (Material N° 04JAA3) on the

Titanium Repair Filler in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
(2) Cure the paint with a heat lamp at 60°C for 45 minutes or at the
room temperature for 8 hours.
CFM56-5B
Page 207
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
4. Equipment and MaterialRepair Materials and Equipment. Refer to Table 202.

Paste(CP2526) Henkel Corporation
P.O. Box 312
Phone: (800) 257-7522
Alternate V33564
Adhesive, Epoxy Paste EA934NA Henkel Corporation
(CP2288)
Filler, Titanium TA6V AMS4911 or T60 Commercially Available
AMS4901 0.063 inch
(1,60 mm) thick
Lint-free cloth Commercially Available
(CP2674)
Mineral Oil Based Vaseline Commercially Available
Grease (CP5070)
Alternate Mineral Oil Aromatized Petroleum Commercially Available
Based Grease (CP5074)
Mold Release FREKOTE 700-NC Commercially Available
Polyurethane primer PAC33 Akzo Nobel Aerospace

(Airbus CML 04EAC2) Coatings, East Water St.
Waukegan,IL 60085-5563
Phone: (847) 625-4200
Fax: (847) 625-3200
www.anac.com
Polyurethane top-coat PU66 Akzo Nobel Aerospace
(Airbus CML 04BAB5)
Rivet, electical 21217TB32 Commerically Available
bonding
Alternate Rivet MS20427M-4 Commecially Available
Solvent (CP2687) DIESTONE Commercially Available
Varnish Electical 4125/6407 Commercially Available
Bonding Structural
(Light Blue)
Table 202
CFM56-5B
Page 208
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
C1S-281-01
A
Damage Location
CFM56-5B
Page 209
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
BIFURCATION
C DUCT
(172° RADIAL)
LATCH
FITTING
TYPICAL
COMPOSITE STRIKE
AFT RING
TITANIUM
STRIP
B C1S-373-00_Rep37_3

Damage Location
CFM56-5B
Page 210
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
AFT RING EXISTING LATCH

TITANIUM (172° RADIAL)
STRIP
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
D 1 2 3 4 5 D
5.2 IN (132 MM)

AFT EDGE MAXIMUM 1.06 IN
3.15 IN (27,0 MM)
(80,0 MM) MAXIMUM
TYPICAL C
DAMAGE TYPICAL
DAMAGE
LATCH
FITTING
0.068 IN AFT RING AFT RING

COMPOSITE
C1S-377-00Rep37_3
(1,72 MM) TITANIUM

STRIP PANEL
VIEW D-D
REPAIRABLE ZONE
Typical Damage and Repairable Area
CFM56-5B
Page 211
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

STRIP
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
A 1 2 3 4 5 A
AFT EDGE RADIUS

1.06 IN
0.4 IN (10 MM)
(27,0 MM)
MINIMUM
LATCH MAXIMUM
FITTING
1.14 IN
(29,0 MM) AFT RING AFT RING
TITANIUM COMPOSITE
STRIP PANEL
VIEW A-A
C1S-378-00Rep37_3
NOTE: REPAIR SHOWN IS FOR HOLE Nº 2 SAME

METHOD MAYBE USED FOR HOLES 3, 4, OR 5
Typical Damage Removal - 1-Fastener

CFM56-5B
Page 212
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

STRIP
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
B 1 2 3 4 5 B
1.06 IN
AFT EDGE RADIUS (27,0 MM)
0.4 IN (10 MM) MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING 1.81 IN

COMPOSITE (46,0 MM)
PANEL AFT RING
TITANIUM
STRIP
VIEW B-B
C1S-379-00Rep37_3
NOTE: REPAIR SHOWN IS FOR HOLES Nº 4 & Nº 5 SAME

METHOD MAYBE USED FOR HOLES 2 & 3, OR 3 & 4
Typical Damage Removal - 2-Fastener

CFM56-5B
Page 213
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

STRIP
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING
A A
1 2 3 4 5
AFT EDGE RADIUS

1.06 IN
0.4 IN (10 MM)
(27,0 MM)
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
SHIMMING
WITH EA9394 100º ±30' LATCH
0.004 - 0.039 IN FITTING
(0,12 - 1,00 MM) A
AFT RING
COMPOSITE
PANEL
0.0 - 0.030 IN AFT RING

(0.0 - 0,76 MM) B TITANIUM
GAP TYP STRIP
82º ±30' TITANIUM
C1S-3710-00Rep37_3
0.215 +0.006/-0.000 IN FILLER

A:
(5,45 +0,15/-0,00 MM) SECTION A-A
0.183 +0.010/-0.000 IN
B:
(4,65 +0,25/-0,00 MM)
Titanium Repair Installation - 1-Fastener

CFM56-5B
Page 214
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.

STRIP
LATCH
FITTING
AFT RING B B
1 2 3 4 5
1.06 IN
AFT EDGE RADIUS (27,0 MM)
0.4 IN (10 MM) MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
LATCH 100º ±30'
FITTING
AFT RING
COMPOSITE A
PANEL
AFT RING
TITANIUM
STRIP B
SHIMMING
82º ±30' WITH EA9394
TITANIUM 0.004 - 0.039 IN
C1S-3711-00Rep37_3
FILLER (0,12 - 1,00 MM)

0.215 +0.006/-0.000 IN
A:
(5,45 +0,15/-0,00 MM) SECTION B-B
0.183 +0.010/-0.000 IN
B:
(4,65 +0,25/-0,00 MM)
Titanium Repair Installation - 2-Fastener

CFM56-5B
Page 215
Mar 15/19
supersedes
of Goodrich control
Corporation,

ROHR, INC.
AFT RING A A
TITANIUM (172° RADIAL) 0.87 IN
STRIP (22,0 MM)
5D*
LATCH
FITTING
5D* 5D*
5D*
AFT RING 1 2 3 4 5
1.5 IN
(38 MM) * MINIMUM
AFT EDGE
EXISTING OR TITANIUM REPAIR FILLER FASTENER
NEW LATCH FITTING FASTENER
100º ±30' LATCH

FITTING
NOTE: THIS REPAIR IS A
LIMITED TO EITHER AFT RING
ONE 1-FASTENER OR COMPOSITE
ONE 2-FASTENER PANEL
REPAIR PER THRUST
REVERSER HALF AFT RING
B TITANIUM
STRIP
C1S-3712-00Rep37_3
82º ±30'
0.215 +0.006/-0.000 IN
A:
(5,45 +0,15/-0,00 MM)
SECTION A-A
0.183 +0.010/-0.000 IN 2 PLACES
B:
(4,65 +0,25/-0,00 MM)
Installation of New Fasteners in Latch Fitting

Figure 4
CFM56-5B
Page 216
Mar 15/19
supersedes any
a subsidiary export
Goodrich control
Corporation,


RDN 307 - Rev. 60 CFM56 5B

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

RDN 307 - Rev. 60 CFM56 5B

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RDN 307 - Rev. 60 CFM56 5B

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Goodrich Aerostructures

850 Lagoon Drive

SUBJECT: CFM56-5B, Nacelle Structural Repair Manual,

The subject manual is a complete reissue.

Questions concerning printing and distribution should be directed to

Questions or comments concerning the publication, register and log on to

This U.S. export control marking Printed in the U.S.A.

CONCERNING: Revision No. 60, Dated Mar 15/19

Chapter/Section/Subject Page Description of Change

marking on this document.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

THE CONTENTS OF THIS STRUCTURAL REPAIR MANUAL HAVE

TRANSMITTAL OF TECHNICAL DATA (EAR)

Caution Regarding Use of Materials:

CFM56-5B INITIAL ISSUE: Feb 1/94

supersedes any other U.S. export control

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CFM56-5B INITIAL ISSUE: Feb 1/94

This U.S. export control marking

marking on this document.

REV. DATE DATE

Approved under EASA Design Organization Approval No. EASA.21J.031

supersedes any other of U.S. export control

marking on this document.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

marking on this document.

RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS

TEMPORARY DATE DATE REV. DATE DATE

supersedes anya subsidiary

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

supersedes any other of U.S. export control

marking on this document.

SERVICE BULLETIN LIST

supersedes any other of U.S. export control

marking on this document.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

marking on this document.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

marking on this document.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

54-10-00 Repair No. 6 201 Mar 15/19

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

marking on this document.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control

marking on this document.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

supersedes any other ofU.S. export control